ISBN: 0-8194-3701-8

Text
                    ELECTRO-OPTICAL

IMAGING SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE

Gerald C. Holst

U U -' w>4 ELECTRO-OPTICAL IMAGING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE Second edition Gerald C. Holst ч’л U iax£-cui Си tV'AXj 4 V.AAoX’ fyf^t37 ,' •JUn Vc^VJj? ^7 С ^ЛАЭ Л xZZjulJ \\i Лл/Xn-^U/ I 'j Copublished by JCD Publishing Winter Park, Florida USA and SPIE OPTICAL ENGINEERING PRESS A Publication of SPIE - The International Society for Optical Engineering Bellingham, Washington USA
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Holst, Gerald C. Electro-optical imaging system performance / Gerald C. Holst. — 2nd ed. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 0-8194-3701-8 (hard cover) - ISBN 0-9640000-6-7 (hard cover) 1. Electrooptical devices. 2. Imaging systems. 3. Infrared imaging. 4. Infrared detectors. 5. Quantum well. 1. Title TA1750.H64 2000 621.36'72-dc21 00-024271 Copublished by JCD Publishing 2932 Cove Trail Winter Park, FL 32789 Phone: 407-629-5370 Fax: 407-629-5370 ISBN: 0-9640000-6-7 (hard cover) email: jcdgch@aol.com SPIE - The International Society for Optical Engineering P.O. Box 10 Bellingham, WA 98227-0010 Phone: 360-676-3290 Fax: 360-647-1445 WWW: http://www.spie.org SPIE Volume PM-84 ISBN: 0-8194-3701-8 Notice: Reasonable efforts have been made to publish reliable data and information, but the Author and Publishers cannot assume responsibility for the validity of all materials or the consequences of their use. Copyright © 2000 Gerald C. Holst All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced in any form by any means without written permission from the copyright owner.
Often we do not fully appreciate those who have significantly affected our lives This book is dedicated to Cathy
PREFACE to the SECOND EDITION The first edition was published in 1995. Since then, infrared imagery applications have exploded. From a modeling point-of-view, the subject of this book, only a few significant changes have occurred. Uncooled technology is based upon microbolometer and pyroelectric detectors. Systems with novel semiconductors such as quantum well detectors are routinely produced. These detectors, along with their characteristics, are described in this edition. Although the material in most chapters is the same, the material in all chapters has been rearranged for conciseness. Where appropriate, it has been rewritten for clarification. Up-to-date references (1995 to 1999) have been added. The Preface to the First Edition immediately follows this preface. Significant changes are listed below. Chapter 2 lists general detector types (classical semiconductors, novel semiconductors, and thermal), provides applications, and describes their operation. NVTherm, a new model that includes sampling effects, has a new eye model. This comprehensive eye model (Chapter 6) considers the pupil diameter, retinal response, and eye tremor. Neither the detector nor the optics can be studied in isolation. The resolution of each is combined in Shade’s equivalent resolution to create a system-level resolution metric (Chapter 12). This metric illustrates a gradual change from detector-limited to optics-limited operation as the f-number changes. Sampling effects were known since the early days of television (circa 1930). How sampling affected target recognition and identification was not quantified until 1999. The experimental results prior to 1995 suggested that there was an optimum sampling rate. As a result, Chapter 14 was originally entitled, Optimum Sampling. This chapter is now entitled Sampled-data Systems. An image will appear at least one sample width wider than the sampled object. Thus sampling can thought of as a blurring function. An increased width in the space domain appears as a decreased width in the frequency domain. A larger blur appears as if it the circuitry had a narrower modulation transfer function (MTF). This apparent decrease (or contraction) in the frequency domain is called a ’’squeeze." The "squeeze" is used in NVTherm. This edition contains more comparisons between mid-wave infrared (MWIR) and long-wave infrared (LWIR) systems. Sun glints (Chapter 15) may alter your selection. Chapter 18 has been completely rewritten. It includes the specific detectivity (D*) for all the detector types. The noise equivalent
differential temperature (NEDT) is provided for each detector type. System operation may either be background limited (BLIP) or Johnson noise limited (JOLI). FLIR92 only calculates the MTF and the minimum resolvable temperature (MRT) up to the Nyquist frequency. This limit originally appeared reasonable. Any spatial frequency above Nyquist frequency is aliased to a lower frequency. However, the Nyquist frequency limit artificially limited range performance. Two new models have emerged, NVTherm and TRM3, which no longer have the Nyquist frequency limit (Chapter 19). Sampling effects are incorporated through semi-empirical equations. In 1995, Kennedy described a method for component tolerancing. By tolerancing each input separately, it is possible to determine which subsystem has the greatest influence on the MTF, NEDT, and MRT. The specifications of that subsystem are reviewed. If cost effective, then the specifications are tightened. Similarly, if the tolerancing on a subsystem shows little effect on the MRT, then its specifications can be loosened and this implies reduced cost. Kennedy created a shell around FLIR92. Each input is described by it mean and standard deviation. The program then performed a Monte Carlo simulation by selecting random values of the data set. The methods proposed by Kennedy were commercialized into STADIUM FLIR (Chapter 19). Target identification is a high-order target discrimination level that is at the end of a complex process. The first task is searching the field-of-view to find the target. Search (Chapter 21) may be random or systematic and it varies with observer training and background. After the target is located, then a static performance model (1975 NVL model, FLIR92, NVTherm, or TRM3) is used to predict detection, recognition, and identification ranges. The author extends his deepest gratitude to all his coworkers and students who have contributed to the ideas in this book. They are too many to mention by name. The author especially thanks Harold Orlando, Northrop Grumman, who read a draft copy of this edition. Although he provided valuable comments, the accuracy of the text is the sole responsibility of the author. Doug Marks assisted with the graphics.
PREFACE to the FIRST EDITION Typical examples of electro-optical systems include electronic still cameras, image intensifiers, infrared imaging systems, low light level TVs (LLLTV), machine vision systems, night vision goggles, solid state cameras, and TVs. These systems have applications in aerospace, airborne reconnaissance, astronomy, medical imaging, remote sensing, robotics, and spectroscopy. In the 1950s, Shade predicted the resolution of photographic film and TV sensors as a function of light level. His approach is the framework of all models used today. In the 1970s, Rosell and Willson applied Shade’s results to thermal imaging systems and low light level TVs. Since then, most modeling efforts have concentrated on infrared imaging systems. Electro-optical system analysis is based upon the hypothesis that systems are amenable to spatial and temporal frequency domain analyses. It further assumes that noise interferes with perception in such as manner that the signal-to- noise ratio is pertinent. Critical to the analysis is that vision can be modeled sufficiently accurately so that useful performance predictions can be made. The advances made in infrared system modeling can now be applied to all imaging systems with only minor modification. An infrared imaging system is just a subclass of all electro-optical imaging systems. Different forms exist to accommodate the terminology associated with different technologies (scanning versus staring, visible versus thermal imaging systems, etc.). Unless told, the observer generally will not know the source characteristics nor the sensor's spectral band pass. Since his primary experience is visual (i.e., 0.4 to 0.7 im), he can only state if the image on the monitor resembles a visual scene. Effective modeling requires an orderly integration of diverse technologies and languages associated with radiation physics, optics, solid state sensors, electronic circuitry, human interpretation of displayed imagery, and computer modeling. Each field is complex and is a separate discipline. The system analyst must be conversant in all these fields. This book provides the methodology to analyze and optimize systems. It also includes some practical limits that exist in real hardware. Therefore, this book is also a practical guide to electro-optical system design. Many aspects of hardware design can be found in the eight-volume The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan and SPIE Press (1993).
After system optimization, subsystem design goals are established. Each subsystem is then optimized to meet its goals. However, subsystem optimization has led to popular rules-of-the-thumb and back-of-the envelope approximations. These "rules” are not universally valid and must be considered in context with the system design and application. For example, it is commonly stated that two samples per detector-angular-subtense are required to maintain image fidelity. This "rule” applies to those systems whose spatial response is limited by the detector’s modulation transfer function (MTF). If the system is limited by the optical MTF, this ’’rule” is inappropriate. But if used, it will increase hardware complexity and cost. Range performance is approached from a viewpoint of military tactical thermal imaging systems. Two standard models are discussed in detail: the US Army’s Static Performance Model (1975 model) and FLIR92. The results are applied to visible systems where the minimum resolvable contrast (MRC) is important. These models are the main analytic tools for deriving system requirements and predicting performance for military systems. This book shows the limitations of the current models and offers some methods to overcome the limitations. It also provides some different MTFs that may be included as an upgrade to the models. The book is divided into five parts. The Introduction (Part 1) consists of five chapters. Although Chapter 2, Principles of Operation, concentrates on the evolution of thermal imaging systems it also applies to all electro-optical imaging systems. Specifically, a staring array operating in the infrared region of the spectrum is functionally the same as one operating in any other spectral band. The radiometric equations apply to all electro-optical imaging systems. While Part 2, System MTF, uses infrared imaging system terminology, it applies to all linear systems. Depending upon the system design (with no specification on spectral response), the analyst selects the appropriate MTFs for his particular system. Part 3, Image Quality, is nonspecific and applies to all electro-optical imaging systems. Optimum sampling draws heavily upon military applications but applies to any system used for target detection and recognition. It does not apply to recognition of alphanumeric characters. In Part 4, The Environment, the methodology to obtain the atmospheric transmittance and MTF are extensions from data obtained in the visible region of the spectrum. There are many references to the literature for other spectral band analysis. Target signatures, as specified by a temperature differential, are unique to
the infrared imaging bands. For systems that are sensitive to radiation below 3 im, signatures depend upon reflectivity differences. Chapter 19 in Part 5, System Analysis, is based upon infrared imaging system analysis. It is here that the Static Performance Model and FLIR92 are presented. The three-dimensional noise model was developed to describe noise processes in infrared imaging systems. This mathematical construct can be extended to all electro-optical imaging systems. Target discrimination metrics (Johnson Criteria) were originally developed for image intensifiers and have been extended to infrared systems. Electro-optical analysts or system analysts write computer codes, run the performance models, and interpret the results. However, for success, the analysts need the support of design engineers, test personnel, managers, and the customer. All these people must understand the purpose and limitations of the models. In a global sense, these individuals are part of the analy st team. This book is for the entire team. There are many other factors affecting design that cannot be easily incorporated into any performance model and therefore are not covered in this book. These include environmental issues, covertness, countermeasures, size, weight, power consumption, cost, technology maturity, customer demand, and the -ilities (maintainability, reliability, etc.). This book does not include automatic target recognizers, target cuers, and machine vision. Unfortunately, this becomes more difficult as nonlinear image processing algorithms are incorporated into the systems. Indeed, today's systems may be called a sensor with a built-in computer. Nonlinear models are beyond the scope of this book. The author extends his deepest gratitude to all his co-workers and students who have contributed to the ideas in this book. They are too many to mention by name. The author especially thanks all those who read draft copies of the manuscript: John D'Agostino, US Army Night Vision and Electronic Sensors Directorate; Herb Huey, Northrop; Howard Kennedy, Texas Instruments; Norman Kopeika, Ben-Gurion University of the Negev; Harold Orlando, Northrop; Steven Park, College of William and Mary; and Wendell Watkins, US Army Atmospheric Sciences Laboratory. Don Davison provided the graphics.
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. INTRODUCTION....................................................1 1.1. Imaging system nomenclature.................................3 1.2. System modeling.............................................5 1.3. Sensitivity and resolution limits...........................8 1.4. Infrared imaging systems...................................10 1.5. Infrared imaging system modeling...........................13 1.6. Model inputs...............................................14 1.7. References.................................................15 Exercises..................................................15 2. INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEM OPERATION..............................16 2.1. Optics.....................................................17 2.2. Scanners...................................................20 2.3. Detectors and coolers......................................24 2.3.1. Detector classification................................24 2.3.2. Specific detectors.....................................26 2.3.3. Detector operation.....................................27 2.4. Specific systems...........................................29 2.4.1. Line scanners..........................................29 2.4.2. Common module systems..................................30 2.4.3. EOMUX systems..........................................33 2.4.4. EMUX systems...........................................33 2.4.5. Second generation scanning systems.....................36 2.4.6. Staring array systems..................................36 2.5. System magnification.......................................37 2.6. References.................................................38 Exercises..................................................38 3. RADIOMETRY.....................................................40 3.1. Radiative transfer.........................................40 3.1.1. Planck's blackbody law.................................42 3.1.2. Extended source........................................44 3.1.3. Point source...........................................49 3.2. AT concept.................................................55 3.3. Photometry.................................................57 3.4. Normalization..............................................57 3.5. References.................................................60 Exercises..................................................61
4. MTF THEORY..........................................................62 4.1. MTF definition..................................................63 4.2. Linear filter theory............................................65 4.2.1. The EO system as a linear system...........................65 4.2.2. Cascading MTFs.............................................67 4.3. Superposition applied to optical systems........................68 4.4. Phase shifts....................................................71 4.5. References......................................................72 Exercises.......................................................72 5. SAMPLING THEORY.....................................................73 5.1. Sampling theory.................................................75 5.2. Aliasing........................................................75 5.3. Samplers........................................................77 5.3.1. The detector as a sampler..................................77 5.3.2. Spatial sampling...........................................80 5.3.3. A/D converter..............................................83 5.4. Microscan.......................................................84 5.5. Anti-aliasing filter............................................85 5.6. References......................................................86 Exercises.......................................................87 6. COMMON MODULE SYSTEMS...............................................88 6.1. Optics OTF......................................................89 6.1.1. Diffraction-limited OTF....................................90 6.1.2. Central obscuration........................................92 6.1.3. Aberrations................................................94 6.1.4. Defocused optics...........................................95 6.2. Detectors.......................................................97 6.3. Motion..........................................................98 6.3.1. Linear motion..............................................99 6.3.2. Sinusoidal motion.........................................102 6.3.3. Random motion (jitter)....................................104 6.3.4. Nonlinear scan mirror movement............................106 6.3.5. Low frequency motion......................................106 6.4. Electronic MTF.................................................106 6.4.1. Conversion: Electrical frequency to spatial frequency.....107 .6.4.2. Detector time constant...................................113 6.4.3. Amplifiers................................................113 6.4.4. Electrical filters........................................113 6.5. LEDs...........................................................116 6.6. Visual optics..................................................116
6.7. Eye response...................................................116 6.7.1. Conversion: Eye spatial frequency to spatial frequency....117 6.7.2. Eye MTF...................................................118 6.7.3. Noisy images..............................................123 6.8. System design example: Random motion effects..................124 6.9. Central limit theorem..........................................126 6.10. References....................................................127 Exercises......................................................128 7. EOMUX SYSTEMS......................................................130 7.1. Vidicon........................................................130 7.1.1. Conversion: Vidicon lines to spatial frequency............131 7.1.2. Vidicon MTF...............................................131 7.2. Video amplifiers and filters...................................132 7.2.1. Conversion: Video frequency to spatial frequency..........133 7.2.2. Boost circuitry...........................................133 7.2.3. Video amplifiers..........................................135 7.3. Monitors.......................................................135 7.4. System design example..........................................137 7.5. References.....................................................139 Exercises......................................................139 8. EMUX SYSTEMS.......................................................140 8.1. Motion.........................................................141 8.2. Detector.......................................................142 8.2.1. TDI.......................................................143 8.2.2. SPRITE detector...........................................145 8.2.3. Uncooled detectors........................................147 8.3. MTFs in the digital domain.....................................148 8.3.1. Conversion: Sampling frequency to spatial frequency.......149 8.3.2. Sample-scene phase........................................149 8.3.3. Digital filters...........................................150 8.3.4. Zoom......................................................156 8.4. Matching video subsystems to a sampled signal.158 8.4.1. Conversion: Video sampling frequency to spatial frequency..159 8.4.2. Sample-and-hold...........................................159 8.5. Post-reconstruction filter.....................................160 8.6. References.....................................................163 Exercises......................................................164
9. STARING ARRAY SYSTEMS...........................................165 9.1. Motion......................................................166 9.2. Detector Array..............................................166 9.3. Microscan...................................................168 9.4. References..................................................172 Exercises...................................................172 10. LINE SCANNERS..................................................173 10.1. Rectangular aperture.......................................177 10.1.1. Diffraction-limited MTF...............................177 10.1.2. Defocus OTF...........................................179 10.1.3. Ground coverage.......................................182 10.2. Scanner....................................................183 10.3. Motion.....................................................183 10.4. Electronic MTF.............................................183 10.5. AN/AAD-5 CRT MTF...........................................184 10.6. AN/AAD-5 film..............................................185 10.6.1. Conversion: Film response to spatial frequency........185 10.6.2. Film MTF..............................................185 10.7. References.................................................186 Exercises...................................................187 11. VERTICAL MTF...................................................188 11.1. Sampling Rate..............................................190 11.2. Interpolation..............................................194 11.3. References.................................................195 Exercises...................................................195 12. RESOLUTION.....................................................197 12.1. Analog metrics.............................................200 12.2. Sampled data systems.......................................203 12.3. System design based upon resolution........................206 12.4. Shade's equivalent resolution..............................209 12.5. References.................................................215 Exercises...................................................216 13. IMAGE QUALITY..................................................217 13.1. MTF........................................................218 13.2. Equivalent pass band.......................................220 13.3. Perceived signal-to-noise ratio............................220 13.4. Subjective quality factor..................................221 13.5. Square-root integral.......................................224 13.6. References.................................................225
14. SAMPLED-DATA SYSTEMS...........................................226 14.1. Samples per dwell..........................................228 14.2. Pixels on target...........................................231 14.3. Asymmetric sampling........................................236 14.4. Spurious response..........................................237 14.5. MTF squeeze................................................243 14.6. Aliased signal as noise....................................246 14.7. References.................................................246 Exercises....................................................247 15. ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE......................................248 15.1. Atmospheric constituenl s..................................251 15.1.1. Water vapor............................................252 15.1.2. Aerosols...............................................255 15.2. Visibility.................................................258 15.2.1. Meteorological range...................................259 15.2.2. Contrast transmittance.................................261 15.3. LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, and HITRAN...............................261 15.4. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance..............263 15.5. Weather conditions.........................................267 15.5.1. Average conditions.....................................267 15.5.2. Probability of occurrence..............................268 15.5.3. Navy model.............................................271 15.6. MWIR versus LWIR...........................................274 15.7. Signal-to-noise optimization...............................280 15.8. Sun glints.................................................283 15.9. Solar scattering...........................................285 15.10. Battlefield obscurants....................................286 15.11. References................................................287 Exercises....................................................288 16. ATMOSPHERIC MTF................................................289 16.1. Cn2........................................................290 16.2. Turbulence MTF.............................................293 16.3. Aerosol MTF................................................299 16.4. References.................................................300 Exercises....................................................302
17. TARGET SIGNATURES...................................................303 17.1. What is AT?....................................................304 17.2. Area-weighted AT...............................................306 17.3. Diurnal variations.............................................308 17.3.1. Solar heating..............................................308 17.3.2. AT cumulative probability..................................310 17.3.3. Environmental modifiers....................................311 17.4. Path radiance..................................................312 17.5. Sky background.................................................314 17.6. Active targets.................................................315 17.6.1. Fuel combustion............................................315 17.6.2. Frictional heat............................................315 17.7. Target signature modeling......................................315 17.8. Thermal structure metrics......................................317 17.9. References.....................................................317 Exercises........................................................319 18. SENSITIVITY and NOISE..............................................320 18.1. Scanning arrays (analog system)................................322 18.1.1. Noise equivalent bandwidth.................................322 18.1.2. Photon noise...............................................324 18.1.3. Johnson noise..............................................325 18.1.4. Amplifier noise............................................325 18.2. Staring arrays.................................................325 18.2.1. Photon noise...............................................326 18.2.2. Dark current...............................................326 18.2.3. Fixed pattern noise........................................327 18.2.4. Multiplexer noise..........................................328 18.3. Detector responsivity..........................................328 18.3.1. Classical semiconductors...................................329 18.3.2. Novel semiconductors.......................................330 18.3.3. Thermal detectors..........................................330 18.4. Specific detectivity...........................................331 18.4.1. BLIP.......................................................331 18.4.2. Johnson noise limited......................................333 18.4.3. D*BB to D*p conversion.....................................333 18.4.4. D*300......................................................3 3 4 18.5. Real systems...................................................335 18.6. System SNR.....................................................337 18.6.1 Scanning systems............................................337 18.6.2 . Staring systems..........................................338
18.7. NEDT.......................................................340 18.7.1. Scanning systems.......................................341 18.7.2. Staring systems........................................342 18.7.3. Background temperature.................................343 18.7.4. Boost..................................................344 18.7.5. Atmospheric transmittance..............................344 18.8. MWIR versus LWIR...........................................345 18.9. NEI........................................................346 18.10. Image reconstruction......................................348 18.10.1. Line-to-line interpolation............................349 18.10.2. Recursive and median filters..........................350 18.11. Sampling and aliasing.....................................351 18.12. References................................................352 Exercises...................................................354 19. SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MODELS......................................355 19.1. Three-dimensional noise model..............................357 19.2. FLIR92.....................................................362 19.2.1. FLIR92 model...........................................364 19.2.2. SNRthandte.............................................368 19.2.3. Head movement..........................................370 19.2.4. 1975 NVL Model.........................................371 19.2.5. Scanning systems (default values)......................371 19.2.6. Staring systems (default values).......................372 19.2.7. Nonuniformity versus ow/uTVH...........................373 19.2.8. Two-dimensional MRT....................................374 19.3. NVTherm....................................................375 19.4. TRM3.......................................................377 19.5. STADIUM FLIR...............................................378 19.6. Minimum resolvable contrast................................380 19.7. General comments...........................................381 19.8. References.................................................383 Exercises...................................................384 20. TARGET DISCRIMINATION..........................................385 20.1. One-dimensional detection..................................386 20.1.1. Johnson criterion......................................386 20.1.2. Extended discrimination................................389 20.1.3. Target transfer probability function...................393 20.1.4. Clutter................................................397 20.1.5. Moderate aspect ratio targets..........................398
20.2. Two-dimensional discrimination...............................400 20.2.1. Pixels on target.........................................400 20.2.2. FLIR92 discrimination requirements.......................403 20.3. Hot spot detection...........................................406 20.4. References...................................................406 Exercises.....................................................408 21. RANGE PREDICTIONS................................................409 21.1. Range prediction methodology.................................411 21.1.1. Atmospheric transmittance................................411 21.1.2. ACQUIRE..................................................412 21.1.3. Range performance probability............................414 21.1.4. Sampling effects.........................................415 21.2. Two fields-of-view...........................................417 21.3. Resolution versus sensitivity................................418 21.4. Line-of-sight stabilization..................................421 21.5. Target size..................................................421 21.6. Electric zoom................................................423 21.7. STADIUM FLIR.................................................423 21.8. MWIR versus LWIR systems.....................................423 21.9. Real Targets.................................................424 21.10. Search.....................................................425 21.11. References.................................................427 Exercises.....................................................428 APPENDIX f-number...........................................................429 Reference.....................................................430 INDEX 431
1 INTRODUCTION Electro-optical imaging system analysis is a mathematical construct that provides an optimum design through appropriate tradeoff analyses. A comprehensive model includes the target, background, the properties of the intervening atmosphere, the optical system, detector, electronics, display, and the human interpretation of the displayed information (Figure 1-1). While any of these components can be studied in detail separately, the electro-optical imaging system cannot. Only complete end-to-end analysis (scene-to-observer interpretation) permits system optimization. Finding the optimum design is an iterative decision process. Every step in the design process that has conflicting needs requires a tradeoff analysis. Many performance parameters can only be increased at the expense of another. For example, decreasing the resolution can increase sensitivity. Figure 1-1. Generic sensor operation that applies to all electro- optical imaging systems. The scanning mechanism will vary according to the overall design and number of detectors. Staring arrays do not have a scanner.
Effective modeling requires an orderly integration of diverse technologies and languages associated with radiation physics, optics, solid state sensors, electronic circuitry, human interpretation of displayed imagery (human factors), computer models, and software that might be embedded in the system Each field is complex and is a separate discipline. The system analyst must be conversant in all these fields. Eludson1 stated, System engineering is the discipline that offers an orderly approach to the design of systems, and, in particular, to systems that are so complex that no one individual can possibly understand all the pertinent details. As the system complexity increases and technology advances, it is increasingly necessary to succinctly define performance requirements for each subsystem to insure that the overall system requirements are met. This is an ever-increasing challenge to the system analyst. System optimization starts with a conceptual design. Then the various subsystems are designed. Each subsystem will behave slightly differently than the original design due to hardware constraints (limited availability of components, space limitations, power consumption constraints, etc.). The analyst must then modify the model parameters to reflect the current design. As the system is built up, real components will perform differently due to manufacturing tolerances. Based upon actual components, the analyst can finalize his model parameters. It is only now that the analyst can be assured that the predicted performance will match measured values. According to Shumaker and Wood,2 a model should answer four basic questions: 1. What characteristics (specifications) must an electro-optical imaging system have to do a given task? 2. What design parameters will enable a system to satisfy given specifications? 3. What laboratory performance values will verify that a design provides desired characteristics? 4. Given an electro-optical imaging system design, how can it best be deployed and what are the expected results? There are many factors affecting design that cannot be easily incorporated into any performance model. These include environmental issues, covertness, countermeasures, size, weight, power consumption, cost, technology maturity, customer demand, the -ilities (maintainability, reliability, etc.), and support issues.
1.1. IMAGING SYSTEM NOMENCLATURE Due to the atmospheric spectral transmittance, electronic imaging system design is partitioned into seven generic spectral regions (Figure 1-2) of which four are associated with thermal imaging systems. The ultraviolet (UV) region ranges in wavelength from 0.2 to 0.4 pm. The visible spectral region ranges in wavelength from 0.4 to 0.7 pm. Televisions, electronic still cameras, and most solid state cameras* operate in this region. The near infrared imaging spectral region (NIR) spans approximately 0.7 to 1.1 pm. Low light level televisions (LLLTV), image intensifiers, star light scopes, and night vision goggles operate in this region. For historical reasons, the UV, visible, and NIR technologies have developed their own terminologies. The first infrared imaging band is the short wavelength infrared imaging band (SWIR) which approximately covers 1.1 to 2.5 pm. The second infrared band is the mid- wavelength infrared (MWIR) spectral region that covers approximately 2.5 to 7.0 pm. (In older literature, the MWIR band was labeled as SWIR). The third infrared band is the long wavelength infrared (LWIR) spectral band. It covers the spectral region from approximately 7 to 15 pm. The fourth infrared band is the far infrared (FIR) or very long wave infrared (VLWIR) region. It applies to all systems whose spectral response extends past 15 pm. The MWIR and LWIR regions are sometimes called the first and second thermal imaging bands. Wavelength (pm) Figure 1-2. Representative atmospheric transmittance over a 1-km path length. The transmittance varies with temperature, relative humidity, and airborne particulates. * Solid state cameras are popularly called CCD cameras because most contain charge-coupled device detector arrays.
The word infrared has a different definition that depends upon the technology. For example, film was invented to produce visible images. If the film is sensitive to longer wavelengths, it is called infrared film. Infrared film is sensitive out to about 0.85 pm. Imaging systems were also created to reproduce visible images. If the spectral response was past 0.7 pm, it was called an infrared device. Most of these systems used photosensitive detectors whose spectral response went to about 1 pm. A variety of labels were attached to these devices. This includes thermal imaging systems, and night vision devices. Table 1-1 lists the wavelengths associated with specific systems. The precise spectral response for any system depends upon the design. To say a system is a LWIR system only means its response is somewhere in the LWIR region. For example, a LWIR system may have a spectral response from 7.7 to 11 pm or 8 to 12 pm. The atmospheric carbon dioxide (CO2) absorption band will completely attenuate all target information at 4.2 pm. As a result, a MWIR system may have a spectral response from 3 to 4.2 or 4.3 to 5.5 pm. Table 1-1 SPECTRAL NOMENCLATURE (Continued next page) Spectral band Wavelength range (pm) Vacuum ultraviolet 0.05 to 0.20 Short ultraviolet (UV-C) 0.20 to 0.29 Mid-wave ultraviolet (UV-B) 0.29 to 0.32 Long-wave ultraviolet (UV-A) 0.32 to 0.40 Visible 0.40 to 0.70 Violet 0.40 to 0.46 Blue 0.46 to 0.49 Green 0.49 to 0.55 Yellow 0.55 to 0.58 Orange 0.58 to 0.60 Red 0.60 to 0.70 Near infrared (NIR) 0.7 to 1.1 Short wavelength infrared (SWIR) 1.1 to 2.5 Mid-wavelength infrared (MWIR) 2.5 to 7.0 (Labeled as SWIR in older literature) First thermal imaging band 3.0 to 5.5 Blue spike plume 4.1 to 4.3 Red spike plume 4.3 to 4.6 Long wavelength infrared (LWIR) 7.0 to 15.0 Second thermal imaging band 8 to 14
Table 1-1 (continued) SPECTRAL NOMENCLATURE Very long wavelength infrared (VLWIR) > 15.0 Extreme infrared 15 to 100 Near millimeter 100 to 1000 Millimeter 1000 to 10,000 1.2. SYSTEM MODELING System modeling drives future design, system requirements and quality assurance specifications (Figure 1-3). Connecting specifications to well understood physical parameters makes the designer, manufacturer, and customer more confident that the design objectives have been achieved. Predictive modeling is a continuous process. The model is used to optimize system design. As the systems are built with real hardware, new values are used to refine range predictions. Simultaneously, modeling is used to help select quality control specifications. Once a model is validated for a particular design, it is used to develop the next design. Figure 1-3. System modeling is a continuous process.
System modeling is the mathematical construct that includes system characteristics, observer experience, scene content, atmospheric transmittance, monitor settings and a variety of miscellaneous factors. These factors affect the perceived image quality (Figure 1-4). Figure 1-4. Image quality contributors. All these factors affect the perceived quality. Referring to a list of variables similar to that shown in Figure 1-4, Howe stated,3 Although the list is by no means complete, it length underscores the complexity of target acquisition. No single model... could possibly account for all the factors listed; because of this, many models are specialized to a particular handful of scenarios and system types. Frequently they incorporate simplifying assumptions, and they are usually validatedfor only a small portion of the possible mission or situations. Using a model to predict performance for scenarios where the model is not validated or specialized can lead to very inaccurate predictions. Models must be able to relate design parameters, laboratory measureables, and operational performance. Three levels2 of models contribute to satisfying these requirements: ч Component/phenomenology models They include the system modulation transfer function (MTFsys), atmospheric transmittance, target signature, and signal-to-noise ratio. These models relate quantifiable design and environmental parameters to higher level summary parameters.
System performance models These models are built upon component-phenomenology models. They characterize the total system performance for controlled tasks such as the detection of a periodic bar pattern. They predict standard measures such as the minimum resolvable temperature, minimum resolvable contrast, and minimum detectable temperature. Operational models These models combine system models with other models to characterize overall operational tasks. When operational models include target signature models, they are used to calculate detection, recognition, and identification ranges. Each of the above models can be separated into three categories: ’’Standard” models These are the models that are used most often by the modeling community and are readily available. Special application models These are models that are unique to a specific application or a specific design. Nonlinear models Nonlinear models cannot be described mathematically in closed-form. They are used on a case-by-case basis. Generic modeling equations apply to all imaging systems. Different forms exist to accommodate the terminology associated with different technologies (scanning versus staring, visible versus thermal imaging systems, etc.). Unless told, the observer generally will not know the source characteristics or the sensor's spectral band pass. Since his primary experience is visual (i.e., 0.4 to 0.7 pm), he can only state if the image on the monitor resembles a visual scene. In the 1950s, Shade4 predicted the resolution of photographic film and television sensors as a function of light level. His approach is the framework of all models used today. In the 1970s, Resell and Willson extended Shade's work to encompass thermal imaging systems and low light level televisions. Since then, most modeling efforts have concentrated on infrared imaging systems. Electro-optical system analysis is based upon the hypothesis that systems are amenable to spatial and temporal frequency domain analyses. It further assumes that noise interferes with perception in such as manner that the signal-to-
noise ratio is pertinent. Critical to the analysis is that vision can be modeled sufficiently accurately so that useful performance predictions can be made. The perceived signal-to-noise ratio is SNRp MTFsys EI x system noise (eye spatial filter) (eye temporal filter) (1-1) where EI is the intensity difference between the target and its immediate background, A is a proportionality constant that depends upon the aperture diameter, focal length, and quantum efficiency, and MTFsysEI/(system noise) is the signal-to-noise ratio at the detector output. The eye's incredible ability to filter spatial and temporal noise increases the apparent SNR. A threshold value is selected for SNRp.. This is where the target is just perceived. Then equation 1-1 is inverted to determine the minimum detectable EI. For systems operating in the visible or NIR, the minimum level is called the minimum resolvable contrast (MRC). For systems operating in the MWIR and LWIR, the minimum value is the minimum resolvable temperature (MRT) or minimum detectable temperature (MDT). 1.3. SENSITIVITY and RESOLUTION LIMITS An overwhelming majority of imaging quality discussions center on spatial resolution or sensitivity. Resolution has been in use so long that it is thought to be something fundamental that uniquely determines system performance. It implies something about the smallest detail that can be perceived. It may be specified by a variety of sometimes unrelated metrics such as the Airy disk angular size, the detector angular subtense (DAS), or the Nyquist frequency (specified by an angular sampling rate). Resolution does not include the effects of system noise. Resolution considerations provide a back-of-the-envelope approximation from which the target range can be estimated » » target size Range = R = —---------- resolution (1-2) Sensitivity deals with the smallest signal that can be detected. It is usually taken as that signal that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of unity at the system output. Sensitivity is dependent upon the light-gathering properties of the optical system, the responsivity of the detector, and the noise of the system. It is independent of resolution. Sensitivity limitations provide another back-of-the- envelope approximation. The signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is
SNR = т M i atm-ave system noise (1-3) For infrared imaging systems, the target-background intensity difference is specified by a differential temperature (AT). The system noise is taken as the noise equivalent differential temperature (NEDT). This approximation only applies to those targets whose angular subtense is large compared to the system's resolution at the calculated range. The variable, Tatni_ave , is an average atmospheric attenuation coefficient. The range predicted by Equation 1-3 can be quite different than that given by Equation 1-2. Overall system response depends on both sensitivity and resolution. As shown in Figure 1-5, the MRT is bounded by sensitivity and resolution considerations. Different systems (Figure 1-6) may have different MRTs. System A has a better sensitivity. It has a lower MRT at low spatial frequencies. At mid- range spatial frequencies, the systems are approximately equivalent and it can be said they provide equivalent performance. System В has better resolution and can display finer detail than System A. Figure 1-6 illustrates that neither sensitivity, resolution nor any other single parameter can be used to compare systems. Figure 1-5. MRT is bounded by the system's resolution and the visual sensitivity limit.
Figure 1-6. Two systems with different MRTs. Whether system A is better than В depends upon the specific application. 1.4. INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEMS Infrared imaging is the remote sensing and display of infrared flux variations. The variations in the displayed image intensity represent apparent temperature variations across the scene. The detected radiation, which appears to emanate from a target and its background, consists of self-emission, reflected radiation, and atmospheric path radiance. To distinguish a target from its background, the detected radiation must be different. In 1969, Hudson6 listed over 100 separate applications for thermal imaging systems. He divided the list into four major categories: military, industrial, medical, and scientific. Each category was then subdivided into (1) search, track, and range, (2) radiometry, (3) spectroradiometry, (4) thermal imaging, (5) reflected flux, and (6) cooperative source. That list is surprisingly complete. In early 1970s, the U.S. Department of Defense suggested a modular approach to thermal imaging system design. This resulted in "common module" components that have influenced military design ever since. In 1976, the United Kingdom and France also initiated the common module approach. All three programs followed the same philosophy: Standardize the basic building blocks.
The parallel scan approach was adopted in the U.S. It used a linear array of 60, 120, or 180 HgCdTe detectors. The U.K. (Thermal Imaging Common Module or TICM) and France (Systeme Modulaire Thermique) adopted a serial/parallel scan system. The U.K. has since changed to SPRITE (signal processing in the element) detectors. Most systems today are derivatives of military systems or at least have components that were designed for military systems. Today, two broad categories are in usage: military and commercial. Table 1-2 highlights a few applications in each category. Military and commercial systems are similar in basic design; but each system is built for a specific purpose. As a result, military and commercial systems tend to be described by different performance parameters. Some generic differences are listed in Table 1-3. Imaging systems have an observer as the image interpreter whereas hardware and/or software assess machine vision imagery. An important subset of machine vision is the infrared search and track type systems (IRST). These systems are designed to detect point sources. The specific system design depends upon the application, the atmospheric transmittance and availability of optics and detectors. This list is brief. Detailed information on all phases of electro-optical systems can be found7 in the eight-volume The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook. Table 1-2 THERMAL IMAGING APPLICATIONS COMMUNITY APPLICATIONS MILITARY Reconnaissance Target acquisition Fire control Navigation COMMERCIAL CIVIL Law enforcement Fire fighting Border patrol ENVIRONMENTAL Earth resources Pollution control Energy conservation INDUSTRIAL Maintenance Manufacturing Non-destructive testing MEDICAL Mammography Soft tissue injury Arterial constriction
Table 1-3 TYPICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS DESIGN AREAS MILITARY COMMERCIAL Vibration stabilized Required for very narrow fields-of-view Usually not required Image processing algorithms Application specific (e.g., target detection or automatic target recognition) Menu-driven multiple options Resolution High resolution (resolve targets at long distances) Typically not an issue since the image can magnified by moving closer Image processing time Real time Real time not usually required Target signature (sensitivity requirements) Usually just perceptible (low NEDT) Usually high contrast target (NEDT not necessarily a dominant design factor) Key to the design of an electro-optical imaging system, is the overall application. The design depends upon the mission and how the mission is to be accomplished. Compare the requirements for pinpointing a target with that of high-speed aircraft navigation. The military wants low noise with maximum reliability. In the commercial world, low cost and ease of maintenance are important: they are often willing to accept less performance. However, these distinctions are getting blurred in today's environment. There is a desire for a single imaging system to perform all functions. This may be possible as new image processing algorithms are developed.
1.5. INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEM MODELING The 1975 NVL model* was developed to predict8 the performance of U.S. Army thermal imaging systems. It satisfied the Army’s need and it adequately predicts the minimum resolvable temperature, MRT, at mid-range spatial frequencies which corresponds to detecting modest sized targets at modest ranges. The model was essentially one-dimensional and did not incorporate noise sources other than random noise. To overcome these deficiencies, NVESD created FLIR90 that was subsequently updated9 to FLIR92. FLIR92 predicts the performance of staring arrays up to the Nyquist frequency. The Nyquist frequency limit created a ’’brick wall" in range performance. NVTherm4 accounts for sampling effects beyond Nyquist frequency by "squeezing" the system MTF. Models are adequate for comparative analysis but may r£)t predict absolute performance. If a model does not predict the situation, the following questions must be asked. Are the underlying assumptions valid? Were the correct equations used? Were some parameters left out that should have been included? Were the correct values used (actual hardware values versus design values)? Are the test results statistically sound? Was the test procedure appropriately controlled? The biggest problem in modeling and performance predicting is inadequate documentation. A model is composed of many approximations, each of which has a limit. Although many models are said to be "validated," the region of validation may be very restrictive. For example, the 1975 NVL model was validated for modest-sized vehicles at modest ranges. As the result, this model is excellent for range predictions for similar sized targets. It is pure extrapolation to apply the model to the detection or recognition of people, highways, bridges, aircraft, or aircraft hangars. Mathematics and computer models have no bounds. Computers can produce an output for nearly any input. The codes do not flash a message that says "ERRORS MAY EXIST - READ DOCUMENTATION." The analyst must read * Over the years, the U.S. Army's proponent agency for modeling and testing infrared imaging systems has changed its name: Night Vision Laboratory (NVL), Center for Night Vision and Electro Optics (CNVEO), Night Vision and Electro Optical Laboratory (NVEOL), Night Vision and Electro Optical Directorate, (NVEOD), and (as of this writing) Night Vision and Electronic Sensor Directorate (NVESD). As a result, the Static Performance Model8 has been called by a variety of names: the NVL model, Static Performance Model, Ratches (principal author) model, CNVEO model, and NVEOL model. This book uses "1975 NVL model."
all the documentation to understand the limitations of the models so that he does not extend the model past its region of validity. 1.6. MODEL INPUTS Figure 1-7 lists the inputs required for infrared system modeling. The MTFs tend to change as the system design changes and each generic system design is listed in a different chapter. Although many component descriptions and system level figures-of- merit to be discussed are devoted to infrared imaging systems, the modeling methods discussed are general and can be applied to most electro-optical imaging systems with only minor modifications. Figure 1-7. Many components are required for a complete end-to-end analysis. The 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 are the main analytic tools for deriving thermal imaging system requirements and predicting performance. Chapters 1 through 5 provide an introduction to modeling concepts. Chapters 12 through 14 discuss various aspects of image quality. The information flows into the system performance model from which target range can be predicted.
1.7. REFERENCES 1. R. D. Hudson Jr., Infrared System Engineering, pp. 10-11, John Wiley and Sons, New York (1969). 2. D. L. Shumaker and J T. Wood, ''Overview of Current IR Analysis Capabilities and Problem Areas," in Infrared Systems and Components II, H. M. Li aw, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 890, pp. 74- 80 (1988). 3. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 60. This is Volume 4 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Aibor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 4 . О. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion Picture Systems," published in four parts in J SMPTE\ "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer Characteristics," Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II. The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures - An Analysis of Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp. 181-222 (1952); "Part III. The Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part IV: Image Analysis in Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp. 593-617 (1955). 5. F. A. Resell and R. H. Willson, "Performance Synthesis of Electro-Optical Sensors," Air Force Avionics Laboratory Report AFAL-TR-72-229, Wright Patterson AFB, OH (1972). 6. R. D. Fludson Jr., Infrared System Engineering, Chapters 16 to 19, John Wiley and Sons. New York (1969). 7. The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). This eight-volume set contains performance modeling and design methods for many electro-optical systems. 8. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975). 9. FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model, User's Guide, NVESD document UG5008993, Fort Belvoir, VA (1993). 10. R. G Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and T. Edwards, "The Target Identification Performance of Infrared Imager Models as a Function of Blur and Sampling," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 26-34 (1999). EXERCISES 1. Explain why the observer's age, IQ, education, training, motivation, personality and fatigue may affect subjective evaluation of image quality. 2. List three applications for an MWIR system. (Hint: Aircraft engines that are approximately 800 К emit significant radiation in the MWIR region.) 3. List three applications for an LWIR system. (Hint: Most terrestrial objects that are at 300 К emit significant radiation in the LWIR region.) 4. Figure 1-2 illustrates typical terrestrial atmospheric transmittance. On the other hand, deep space has nearly unity transmittance at all wavelengths. A "star wars" satellite has a detector system that has a spectral response of 4.2 to 4.3 pm. Why? (Hint: Draw a picture depicting the earth, atmospheric layer and a missile.)
2 INFRARED IMAGING SYSTEM OPERATION An electro-optical imaging system consists of many subsystems. Each of which processes information differently. They may create artifacts or variations in the processed image that were not present in the original scene. Figure 2-1 illustrates five major subsystems: optics and scanner, detector and detector electronics, digitization, image reconstruction, and post reconstruction. The specific design depends upon the number of detector elements and the required output format. The optics images the radiation onto the detector(s). Scanners optically move the detector’s instantaneous-field-of-view (IFOV) across the field- of-view (FOV) to produce an output voltage proportional to the local scene intensity. In a scanning system, the output of a single detector represents the scene intensity across a line. With a staring array there is no scanner and adjoining detector outputs provide scene variations. Input Electro-Optical Imaging System Output Figure 2-1. Generic electro-optical functional block diagram. All systems have optics, detectors, detector electronics, and an output. Staring arrays do not have a scanning mechanism. The specific electronics design depends upon the detector configuration and desired output. The detector is the heart of every electro-optical system because it converts scene radiation into a measurable electrical signal. Amplification and signal processing creates an electronic image in which voltage differences represent scene intensity differences due to the various objects in the field-of-view. - Each detector will have its own amplifier. The amplifier outputs are multiplexed together and then digitized. The number of channels multiplexed together depends upon the specific design. Systems may have several multiplexers and several A/D converters operating in parallel.
Figure 2-2. The optical system can be considered a single lens. Pj and P2 are the principal planes. The effective focal length is measured from the second principal plane. Although shown as planes, the principal surfaces are typically spheres (see Appendix). CosineN0 shading is a geometrical phenomenon that reduces the intensity reaching off-axis detectors. It depends upon the optical design and the physical location of apertures and the detectors. With a single detector in a scanning system (Figure 2-3 a), the detector is always on-axis and there is no cosineN0 shading. It is the scanner that allows the detector to sense off-axis radiation. With a linear array of detectors (Figure 2-3b), the cosineN0 variation is in the direction of linear array (cross scan direction). Staring arrays exhibit radially symmetrical cosineN0 roll-off as measured from the center of the field-of-view (Figure 2-3 c). Figure 2-4a illustrates the signals from three different lines for the linear scanning array depicted in Figure 2-3b. Figure 2-4b illustrates the signals for the staring array shown in Figure 2-3c. Gain/level normalization minimizes this effect. Figure 2-4c depicts the normalized signal as a function of line number for a system suffering from extreme cosineN0 effects. No CosineN0 (a) (b) Figure 2-3. CosineN0 Effect, (a) Single detector, (b) scanning linear array consisting of 480><l, and (c) staring array consisting of 480 x 480 detectors. (c)
Signals are digitized because of the relative ease to manipulate digital data. Current systems rely heavily upon software for gain/level normalization, image enhancement, and line-to-line interpolation. To produce a linear input-to- output system, a gamma correction algorithm removes the CRT-based nonlinear response. The monitor may or may not be an integral part of the electro-optical imaging system. For convenience, targets are labeled as either hot or cold with respect to the immediate background. For MWIR and LWIR systems, the term thermal is misleading. Infrared imaging systems with photoconductive or photovoltaic detectors do not sense warmth or cold (they are not thermometers) but sense the radiation emitted by an object. All objects emit radiation in the thermal regions. Hot refers to targets that appear warmer than its immediate background and cold means the target appears cooler than its immediate background. The choice of hot objects appearing white and cold objects appearing black is arbitrary. With electronic polarity reversal available, either ’’white hot’’ or ’’black hot" targets can be created. With "black hot," hot objects appear black or dark gray against a neutral background. As the object becomes hotter, its representation on a monitor becomes blacker. The reverse is true for "white hot." With "white hot," the target becomes "whiter" as its apparent temperature increases relative to the background. The output also can be mapped into pseudo-colors. Keeping with human feelings, cold objects are often represented as blue and hot objects as red. This chapter highlights the operation of the five major subsystems with specific attention given to those subsystems that either add noise or modify image fidelity. Image fidelity is specified by the modulation transfer function (MTF). For thermal imaging systems, noise is incorporated in the noise equivalent differential temperature (NEDT) and the three-dimensional noise model. Most systems operating in the visible region of the spectrum have functional designs similar to those operating in the infrared. 2.1. OPTICS Most optical systems are composed of many individual lenses or mirrors. Each element may have a different refractive index and shape to minimize the aberrations. For analytic purposes, the optical subsystem is treated as a single element with an effective focal length (Figure 2-2). The clear aperture is not necessarily the diameter of an optical element. The clear aperture limits the amount of scene radiation reaching the detector and is determined by optical design.
Figure 2-4. CosineN0 effect. Line traces as a function of line number for (a) a linear scanning array and (b) a staring array, (c) The normalized output as a function of line number for a linear scanning array. Gain/level normalization minimizes cosineN0 and produces a cosmetically pleasing image. It is well known that an off-axis image will have reduced incidance compared to an on-axis image. In classical textbooks, the reduction is given as cosine40. Real systems tend to have a less dramatic roll-off and the reduction is cosineb0 where 2 <N <4. Whether an image is off-axis depends upon the optical design. For a single detector system, the detector is always on-axis. It is the scanner that moves the detector instantaneous-field-of-view around the system field-of-view. For multi-element arrays, the optical design determines which detectors are off-axis. Therefore, the cosineN0 factor can only be added on a case- by-case basis. Appropriately applied electronic amplification can compensate for the cosineN0 shading. Here, high contrast images will appear cosmetically appropriate. However, any amplification also will increase the noise so that the signal-to-noise ratio remains constant. The NEDT is not affected by this electronic amplification.
2.2. SCANNERS The function of the scanner is to dissect the image sequentially and completely. That is, the scanner moves the detector IFOV around the system FOV in a way that is consistent with the monitor requirements. A large variety of scanning schemes is available. There is nothing inherently good or bad with any particular scanning scheme: each has its own advantages and disadvantages. The most common scanners are rotating drums, polygons, refractive prisms, and oscillating mirrors. For this text, it will always be assumed that scanning is in the horizontal direction. With scanning systems, the detector output creates the image during the active scan time and the detector output is ignored during the inactive scan time. The inactive time provides the time necessary for the scanner to come into the appropriate position for the next frame or scan line. Detector characteristics may dictate the scan direction. Figure 2-5 illustrates a system with a single detector with unidirectional (raster) scan. SPRITE (Signal processing m the element) detectors require an unidirectional scan. Figure 2-6 illustrates a linear array that uses bidirectional scanning (parallel scan). U.S. common module systems employ bidirectional scanners. Figure 2-5. Single detector scan pattern (serial scan) employing unidirectional (raster) scanning.
Forward Scan Direction ► Figure 2-6. Linear array employing bidirectional scan (parallel scan) and 2:1 interlace. Figure 2-7a illustrates a series of detectors whose outputs are summed together to provide time-delay and integration (TDI). Systems with TDI usually require unidirectional scan. Here, the scan velocity must be matched to the time delay in the integrating element (Figure 2-7b). Scan linearity is important when using TDI to avoid geometric distortion and MTF degradation. SPRITE detectors have an inherent TDI and do not require the multiple delay circuits shown in Figure 2-7b. The NEDT is inversely proportional to the detector dwell time. The dwell time is the time it takes for a target edge to be swept across a detector element. Single element systems will have the highest NEDT for a fixed frame rate. As more detectors are added (Figure 2-6), the scan speed is reduced, the detector dwell increases and the NEDT is lowered. Since each detector has a slightly different responsivity, multiple element systems suffer from fixed pattern noise that requires electronic correction. The inability to fully compensate produces streaks in scanning arrays and residual fixed pattern noise in staring arrays. With TDI, the noise is reduced by the square root of the number of TDI detectors. A TDI arrangement has the additional advantage that if one detector element fails, the remaining will still produce an output. With a parallel-scan system (Figure 2-6), a defective element will produce a line with no information. This leaves a space in the dissected scene.
-----Scan Direction Signal (b) Figure 2-7. Multiple detectors operating in pure serial scan mode, (a) Detector configuration and (b) TDI delay elements. The noise is reduced by the square root of the number of TDI elements. Staring arrays, in principle, have the lowest NEDT since the dwell time may be equal to a frame time. Staring arrays may not reach this theoretical limit due to residual fixed pattern noise and multiplexer noise. The scanning mechanism can be either inside or outside the optical subsystem. When outside (Figure 2-8a), the mirror must be larger than the clear aperture and provide a scan angle of ± 0scan/2. The mirror can be much smaller when.inside the optical subsystem but then it must scan a larger angle of ± Moptics0scan/2. Here, Moptics is the magnification of the afocal telescope (also called the afocal power). The relationship between the scan angle and FOV depends upon the optical design. If the scanner is outside the optical system, the FOV. is 0scan + IFOV.
If the scanner is within the optical subsystem, the FOV may be 9scan + IFOV or tan (9scan + IFOV). These designs are called f 9 (pronounced f theta) and f tan (9) (pronounced f tan theta) respectively. For small angles they are equivalent: tan (9scan +IFOV) »9scan +IFOV. A full staring array (Figure 2-3 c) does not have a scanner. The field-of- view depends upon the optical design. If the overall array size is darTay, the FOV may be 2 tan-1(dan.ay/2 fl) or danay/tl. Again, for small angles, these are equivalent. Figure 2-8. Location of the scanning mechanism, (a) Outside the optical subsystem and (b) inside the optical subsystem. Although shown as an astronomical telescope, it could be any telescope (Cassegrainian, Galilean, etc.). The scanning mechanism could be a rotating polygon, refractive prisms, or (as shown here) an oscillating mirror.
2.3. DETECTORS and COOLERS Current detector terminology lists detectors as cooled or uncooled. These are only generic categories. Within each category, there are many different types of detectors. COOLED DETECTORS LWIR photon detectors have to be cooled below 100K with 77K considered a typical temperature. These temperatures can only be reached with a mechanical cooler or with liquid nitrogen. Many MWIR detectors can operate at 200 К and this temperature can be easily achieved with a thermoelectric cooler (TEC). TECs appear to have an infinite lifetime whereas mechanical coolers degrade over time. Coolers add cost, bulk, and consume power. UNCOOLED DETECTORS Thermal detectors can operate at room temperature and therefore are called uncooled devices. Although called uncooled, these devices require a cooler to stabilize the detector temperature. Usually a thermoelectric cooler is used. Uncooled devices are lightweight, small in size, and easy to use. Because they use very low power, they lend themselves to hand-held, battery-operated, devices. 2.3.1. DETECTOR CLASSIFICATION Detectors are classified as classical semiconductors, novel semiconductors, and thermal detectors. Detector performance parameters and therefore system performance parameters were developed for the classical semiconductor and thermal detectors. More recently, novel semi-conductors such as the Schottky barrier photodiode and quantum well have been introduced. Classical theory is no longer appropriate and new measures of performance have been developed. There are many different types of infrared detectors. The following lists the most popular types and some of their features. CLASSICAL SEMICONDUCTORS Photoconductive The photoconductive detector requires a constant bias voltage. An absorbed photon changes the bulk resistivity, which, in turn, changes the current. The
current change is monitored in an external circuit. Since current is constantly flowing, the detector dissipates heat. As a result, very large arrays are difficult to cool. Photovoltaic The photovoltaic detector is actually a p-n junction in a semiconductor. An absorbed photon produces a voltage change that is sensed in an external circuit. It does not dissipate heat and therefore can be built into very large arrays. Since minimal current flows, it is relatively easy to couple the detector to a low noise amplifier. NOVEL SEMICONDUCTORS Schottky barrier photodiode (SBD) The SBD is a photoemissive device that produces a voltage. These detectors are compatible with silicon fabrication technology. Therefore, it is relatively easy to fabricate monolithic devices where the detector and readout are fabricated at the same time. SBDs can be built into very large (5000 х 5000) arrays. Bandgap engineered photodetectors (quantum well) The spectral response of quantum well detectors can be engineered (tuned) to any wavelength. Unfortunately, it has a very narrow spectral response. Its current limitation is that it requires significant cooling (below 60K). THERMAL DETECTORS Bolometer As a bolometer absorbs heat, its resistance changes. It requires an external bias. The change in current (due to the change in resistance) is monitored in the external circuit. It somewhat difficult to dissipate the heat in large arrays. Bolometers are usually optically chopped to improve sensitivity and uniformity. Pyroelectric The pyroelectric detector can only sense a changing temperature. The thermal changes alter the electrical polarization that appears as a voltage difference. These AC devices create halos around high AT targets. These systems typically have a chopper (to produce a changing scene) between the lens system and detector. The chopper is synchronized with the frame rate of the camera so that the displayed image appears uniform.
2.3.2. SPECIFIC DETECTORS PHOTON DETECTORS Silicide Schottky-barrier devices The most popular is Pt: Si (platinum silicide) which is sensitive in the 1.0 to 5.5 pm region. It requires a filter to limit the spectral response (e.g., to create a 3 to 5.5 pm system). Because of the low quantum efficiency, Pt:Si has poor performance when the background temperature is less than 0°C. Silicon technology is mature and very large arrays can be fabricated very cheaply. The device is often cooled to 70K to reduce the dark current. InSb (Indium antimonide) InSb is a high quantum efficiency MWIR detector. It has generally replaced Pt:Si in those systems using modest sized arrays (e.g., standard video format with approximately 640x480 elements). It peak response is near 5 pm. A filter is used to limit the spectral response to the MWIR region. HgCdTe (Mercury cadmium telluride) Mercury cadmium telluride is also called merc-cad or MCT. Although generally labeled as HgCdTe, it is a mixture (Hg^CdyTe). By varying the ratio, the spectral response can be tailored to the MWIR or LWIR region. The most popular is the LWIR detector with a peak response near 12 pm. A filter is used to limit the response to the LWIR region. HgCdTe detectors are used in all common module systems. SPRITE (Signal processing in the element) The SPRITE detector is a stretched HgCdTe filament that provides inherent time-delay-and-integration (TDI). It was developed in United Kingdom and has become the U.K. common module detector. QWIP (Quantum well infrared photodetector) The QWIP is based upon mature GaAs growth technology. The wells are created by layers of GaAs/AlGaAs and the response can be tailored from 3 to 19 pm. The LWIR version typically has a spectral from 8.3 to 10 pm. The responsivity and noise are temperature sensitive so that QWIP devices are cooled to less than 60K. THERMAL DETECTORS As temperature sensors, thermal detectors can sense all wavelengths. Filters are used to limit the spectral response. Thermal detectors generally have much lower sensitivity (higher NEDT) than photon detectors. As a result, they probably will not replace photon detectors in critical, low signal-to-
noise applications. A large variety of materials can be used as bolometer and pyroelectric detectors. 2.3.3. DETECTOR OPERATION The detector's electrical output is a temporal representation of target spatial information. The detector electronics is matched to the detector characteristics. For mathematical convenience, all noise sources are referred to the detector output. Noise sources include photon noise, fixed pattern noise, 1/f noise, detector internal noise, and amplifier or mux noise. The electronics may add additional noise to the signal. For many detectors, the specific detectivity, D* (pronounced dee-star), is a figure-of-merit that combines the responsivity, R, with detector noise current, in\ R jAd kfe D* = - —— hi (2-1) where A/e is the noise equivalent bandwidth, R is the responsivity, and Ad is the detector area. Since D is a measure of detector noise, it is incorporated in the classical NEDT equation. As D* increases, the NEDT decreases. When the dominant noise is due to the random arrival of photons, the system is said to be background limited or operating in BLIP (background limited performance) mode. Real detectors do not achieve this theoretical maximum but have a Z>* that is a function of operating temperature (Figure 2-9) and detector bias. The detector temperature depends upon the cooling capacity of the cooler, the ambient temperature, and the heat load induced by the electronics near the detector. DETECTOR TEMPERATURE (K) Figure 2-9. Typical U.S. common module HgCdTe detector temperature characteristics. Most detectors sensitive to LWIR radiation are optimized to operate at liquid nitrogen temperature (77 K).
If the optical FOV is less than the detector FOV (equivalently, the optical f-number is greater than the cold shield f-number), the detector can sense radiation from the housing. Since most systems amplify the difference between the target and background, the veiling glare is not seen on the monitor. However, the glare introduces photon noise and this increases the NEDT. For staring arrays, the veiling glare partially fills the charge wells and this limits the available scene dynamic range. Each detector/amplifier combination will have a different gain and level offset (Figure 2-10) and these variations produce fixed pattern noise (FPN). For a linear array of elements (Figure 2-3b), each line may have a different gain and offset. This produces FPN in the vertical direction only and will appear as horizontal streaks. For staring arrays (Figure 2-3c), each detector will have a different response resulting in a two-dimensional FPN. Electronic gain/level normalization removes FPN. Incomplete removal results in residual FPN noise. Single element systems (Figure 2-5) and pure serial systems (Figure 2-7) do not have FPN. Figure 2-10. Responsivity for three differences detectors (Db D2, and D3). (a) Exaggerated nonlinear responsivities and (b) detector outputs for three different input intensities. Responsivity variation cause fixed pattern noise. Figure 2-1 la illustrates a full focal plane array (no scanner) where the detectors are contiguous. In many arrays, the detectors do not completely fill the cell area (Figure 2-1 lb). The ratio of active detector element area to the cell area is the fill factor. If a small object is imaged onto one of these dead areas between the detectors, there will be no output. As the small object moves, its image will move on and off the active detector element resulting in a twinkling of the object. As the detector area decreases, the amount of radiation decreases so that the NEDT increases. Thus, as the fill factor decreases the NEDT increases. High fill factors increase the ability to detect point sources.
Full Focal Plane Array (a) Fill Factor = —-— ACell Low Fill Factor Focal Plane Array (b) Figure 2-11. Fill Factor definition, (a) 100% fill factor and (b) finite fill factor. 2.4. SPECIFIC SYSTEMS For many years, civilian systems were derivatives of the militarized systems. However, military systems are usually designed for maximum sensitivity (very low noise). For many civilian applications, usually there is a strong signal (large temperature difference) so that low noise is not a major design concern. Cost, weight, ease of use, and power consumption now drive civilian system design. Militarized systems evolved in the following chronological order: 2.4.1. LINE SCANNERS A line scanner requires platform motion to create a two-dimensional image. Typically used for reconnaissance, it relies on aircraft or spacecraft motion to provide the cross-scan dimension. Airborne reconnaissance systems typically provide wide-angle imagery. The imagery can be obtained either with pushbroom systems or line-scanners. Since large linear arrays are easily fabricated from silicon, visible imagery is often obtained with a pushbroom design. Infrared technology limits the number of detectors that can be placed in an array and therefore infrared imagery is usually obtained from line-scanners (Figure 2-12). The very early infrared systems were downward looking line scanners. When designed to look out the front of an aircraft, they were called forward- looking infrared (FLIR) systems. The acronym FLIR is used generically to denote an infrared imaging system.
Electronics Figure 2-12. Representative line-scanner functional block diagram. 2.4.2. COMMON MODULE SYSTEMS Figure 2-13 illustrates a diagram of the early common module system. The detector converts the infrared spatial information into time-varying voltages. The voltages drive light emitting diodes (LEDs) to create a visible image. By using the back face of the scanning mirror for the visible image, the visible image is always synchronized with the infrared image. They were called common modules because the scanner, detector, pre-amplifiers, post-amplifiers, and light emitting diodes (LEDs) were manufactured to common specifications. The term now loosely refers to any LWIR system with bi-directional scan. These systems are still in existence and lend themselves to small, lightweight man-portable applications. Based upon blackbody curves, terrestrial objects emit more radiation in the LWIR region compared to the MWIR region. Further, for a fixed target- background temperature difference, the radiance difference (as specified by the thermal derivative) is about 10 times larger in the LWIR region than the MWIR
region. These facts prompted the design of LWIR common modules rather than MWIR systems. The designer's only options were changing the optics to achieve the desired field-of-view, adding electronic filtering to maximize the signal-to-noise, and modifying the visual optics to present an appropriate image to the observer. The pre-amplifier is a low-noise fixed-gain amplifier whereas the post-amplifier had a variable gain. Each post-amplifier was individually adjusted to compensate for different detector responsivities and pre-amplifiers gains. Nearly all U.S. systems today evolved from the common module design. server Figure 2-13. Representative common module block diagram. Example 2-1 EQUIVALENT OPTICAL DESIGN Design the smallest practical astronomical telescope for a "0.1 mil" thermal imaging system using U.S. common module elements. A "0.1 mil" FLIR has a detector-angular-subtense (DAS) of 0.1 mrad. The common module reimager focal length is 2.67 inches with a f-number of 1.7. The original common module detector size was 0.002" x 0.002" and is sensitive in the 8 to 12 pm spectral region. Figure 2-14a provides a stylized optical layout. As a design starting point, the Airy disk diameter is matched to the detector size. Equivalently, the Airy disk angular subtense is matched to the DAS: 0 = DAS = 2A4—. (2-2) D
Using an average wavelength of 10 gm the required clear aperture is Z> = 244 mm = 9.6 inches. Assuming a f9 design, the detector subtends 0reimager = d/flreimaser = 0.002/2.67 = 0.75 mrad. Since the required system resolution is 0.1 mrad, the afocal power must be Muptics = 0.75/0.1 =7.5. With an afocal telescope, ^=^ = ^^ = 7.5. (2-3) For maximum throughput, the afocal telescope and reimager should have the same f-number. The f-number is F~fl/D. Then and flo = F D = 1.7 x 9.6 = 16.32 inches (2-4) fl„ = ——— = 16’32 = 2.18 inches . (2-5) Moptics 7.5 The afocal length is flo+fle= 18.5 inches. The equivalent focal length is flreitnagelM= 20 inches. Figure 2-14b illustrates the equivalent design and the detector subtends d 0.002 _ t DAS =----------------------------=--------= 0.1 mrad . (2-6) equivalent focal length 20 (b) Equivalent Design Figure 2-14. Optical layout, (a) A afocal telescope and (b) the equivalent single-lens design. Although only three lenses are shown, the system consists of many elements.
2.4.3. EOMUX SYSTEMS The common module system permitted only one observer to view the imagery. To provide multiple observers access, the LED output is scanned by a vidicon. The vidicon converted parallel scanned infrared information into a serial data stream consistent with the monitor requirements. As such, the vidicon provided scan conversion. To offset any degradation in MTF, a boost amplifier can be added in the video chain. The electro-optically multiplexed (EOMUX) system added the vidicon, boost, and monitor (Figure 2-15). Figure 2-15. Representative EOMUX functional block diagram. 2.4.4. EMUX SYSTEMS The EOMUX system employed LEDs and a vidicon to produce a data stream consistent with the monitor requirements. This function can be performed by a digital scan converter (DSC) to create an electronically multiplexed (EMUX) system (Figure 2-16). Most scanning systems today are EMUX systems. Gain/level normalization, image processing, and line-to-line interpolation are typically performed digitally. The conversion from an analog signal to digital data ‘ introduces unique nonlinear effects. Quantization introduces an additional noise factor whose value depends upon the relative magnitude of the least significant bit (LSB).
Figure 2-16. Representative EMUX functional block diagram. For scanning array systems with more than one detector in the vertical direction, the output of every detector is collected nearly simultaneously at discrete locations. That is, the scene is digitally sampled in columns as the detectors move horizontally, In memory, the vertical data is read out horizontally in a format consistent with monitor requirements. This conversion from a vertical input to horizontal output is called digital scan conversion and the hardware is called the scan converter. In a digitally scan converted system, two different timings exist. The detector electronics is matched to the scanning parameters in time and active scan time. The digital data is placed in a digital memory and read out at a rate that is consistent with monitor line rates. Image processing algorithms can be used to enhance images, suppress noise and provide boost. Boost increases the signal amplitude at specific spatial frequencies but it does not necessarily affect the signal-to-noise ratio. For systems that are not noise limited, boost may improve image quality. However, for noisy images, the advantages of boost are less obvious. Systems with detector arrays or scanning patterns that are not consistent with analog video formats require image formatting. Monochrome video formats may either be the U.S. standard1 RS 170 that displays 485 TV lines or may be the European CCIR standard that displays 577 lines. Generally, infrared imaging systems manufactured in the U.S. provide 480 active lines with five blank lines to be consistent with RS 170. An LWIR common module system, which creates infrared 360 lines, requires vertical interpolation. The interpolator increases the
line rate and may change the video sample rate to provide the number of TV lines required by the monitor. Interpolation can be achieved by the duplication of lines or may be a more complex algorithm. The interpolator can dramatically affect vertical resolution and therefore can greatly affect the ability to resolve vertical detail. It is desirable to have a linear system such that if the signal intensity doubles, then the monitor luminance doubles. However, CRT-based monitors tend to be nonlinear in terms of output luminance versus input voltage. The slope of this relationship on a logarithmic scale is the monitor gamma (Figure 2-17). To provide a linear relationship, the inverse gamma is inserted as an image processing algorithm (gamma correction). Here, there is no longer a linear relationship between the analog output video voltage and the input signal intensity. This nonlinear relationship affects all data collected from the analog video signal and becomes a measurement problem.2 If a gamma correction algorithm is present, linearity is only assured when viewing a CRT-based monitor. Flat panel displays are linear (equivalently, gamma is unity) and therefore no gamma correction is required. The D/А converter provides an output that typically has a stair step appearance. Each step occurs at each digital sample. The post-reconstruction filter smoothes the data and removes the stair step. Its output is the analog video. Figure 2-17. Definition of CRT-based monitor gamma.
2.4.5. SECOND GENERATION SCANNING SYSTEMS The common module system was called a first generation system. In the late 1980s, it appeared that LWIR scanning systems could be replaced with staring arrays. At that time staring arrays were called second generation systems. However, detector technology did not advance as quickly as anticipated so that a serial/parallel scan mechanism was used - so called second generation scanning systems. These systems contain arrays that consist of 480*4 TDI detector elements. These systems tend to use staggered arrays (Figure 2-18). The 480 elements are consistent with U.S. monitor requirements. Other detectors available include 288*4 TDI. With interlace, these detectors provide 576 IR lines to be consistent with European formats. Figure 2-18. Staggered array 480*4 TDI elements. The staggered configuration increases the sampling frequency in the vertical direction. 480 2.4.6. STARING ARRAY SYSTEMS Figure 2-19 illustrates a typical staring array. It does not have a scanner. Each detector output is digitized by the detector mux. While amplifiers and filters exist in the mux, they do not process the signal in the same manner as a scanning system. Figure 2-19. Representative staring array functional block diagram.
Every detector/amplifier combination will have a different gain (responsivity) and offset. These variations result in fixed pattern noise or spatial noise. If large deviations in responsivity exist, the image may be unrecognizable. As a result, systems employing more than one detector may require gain/level normalization or nonuniformity correction (NUC) to produce an acceptable image. Although most literature discusses NUC for staring systems, it applies to scanning systems that have more than one detector in the cross scan direction (Figure 2-3b). For good imagery, the individual detector outputs are normalized (made equal) for several discrete input intensities. These normalization intensities are also called calibration points, temperature references, or simply points. Figure 2-10a illustrated the responsivity of three different detectors before gain/level normalization. The outputs for input intensities Ib I2, and I3 were shown in Figure 2-10b. Figure 2-20 illustrates the normalized output after correction at two points. If all the detectors had linear responsivities, then all the curves would coincide. As individual detectors deviate from linearity, the responsivity differences become more noticeable.3 It is this variation in responsivity that creates the residual fixed pattern noise after gain/level correction. Figure 2-20. Responsivity curves after 2-point correction. Responsivity deviations from linearity produce residual fixed pattern noise. 2.5. SYSTEM MAGNIFICATION There are two different magnifications present. One is the optical telescope magnification that determines how large the image will be on the detector plane. The other relates to the magnification seen by the observer. System
magnification is simply the ratio of the horizontal FOV subtended by the observer and the system horizontal FOV. M sys FO Vobserver FOVsys (2-7) The observer's field-of-view changes with the distance from the monitor. Since the observer can move arbitrarily close to the display, FO Fobserver = 2 tan 1 2R, (2-8) where R is the distance to the display and W is the width of the display. 2.6. REFERENCES 1. "Electrical Performance Standards - Monochrome TV," EIA Standard RS-170, Electronic Industry Association, NY, NY. 2. G. C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, pp. 57-60, JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL (1998). 3. N. Bluzer, "Sensitivity Limitations of IRFPAs Imposed by Detector Nonuniformities," in Infrared Detectors and Arrays, E. L. Dereniak, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 930, pp. 64-75 (1988). EXERCISES 1. Referring to Figure 2-9, what D value would you use for the NEDT calculation? When would you use another value? (Hint: consider ambient temperature of an air-conditioned laboratory and operation in the desert). 2. An electro-optical imaging system has an FOV of 5ox5o. The user sits 36 inches from a 14-inch (measured diagonally) display. If the observer moves 2 inches toward the display, what is the system magnification change? Is system magnification a useful parameter? 3. What is the smallest astronomical telescope needed for a 0.2 mil thermal imaging system? A common module reimager is available (/7= 2.67" and F= 1.7). The detector width is 0.0016 and the system is sensitive in the 8 to 12 pm region. 4. Using the values in Exercise 3, design a telescope for a system operating in the 3 to 5 pm region. Compare the answer to that obtained in Exercise 3. How would the design change if the system operated in the visible region of the spectrum? 5. Plot the output MTF versus input MTF for a monitor with у = 0.7, у = 1, у = 1.4, and у = 2. The MTF is (Vntax-Vnйп)/(Vnuif-Vnjif). Let the minimum and maximum voltages be modified by Voui= VinY.
6. Contrast is C = (Z/ZB)-1 where LT is the target luminance and LB is the background luminance. Assume that the video output, V, is proportional to the input luminance and that the monitor has a gamma such that the monitor luminance is Z = К F7. Derive the relation between the input contrast and output contrast. 7. Figure 2-20 illustrated residual FPN as a function of input intensity with 2-point correction. Sketch the output for 1-point, 3-point and 5-point correction. 8. Figure 2-4b illustrated how the signal level decreases according to cosineN0 for a staring array. The responsivity can be made equal for all the detectors by increasing the gain of each detector the appropriate amount. What effect would this have on noise measurements? 9. Describe a scenario in which cosineNG correction is appropriate (Hint: during low gain operation, the noise is below perceptibility).
3 RADIOMETRY Radiometry describes the energy or power transfer from a source to a detector. When the source size is much larger than the projected area of the detector, the source is said to be resolved or the system is viewing an extended source. Equivalently, the detector is flood-illuminated. The noise equivalent temperature differential and minimum resolvable temperature apply to a system viewing an extended source. As the source size becomes smaller, diffraction limits the image size. The ratio of the actual response to the ideal response is the target size function (TSF). As the source size approaches a point, the target size function approaches a constant value called the point visibility factor, ensquared power value, or optical shape factor. The flux emanating from the source is attenuated by the intervening atmosphere, focussed on to the detector by the optical system and then converted into a measurable electrical signal by the detector. Planck's blackbody radiation law describes the source's spectral radiant exitance. For scanning systems, the power is usually specified in watts whereas for staring systems it is convenient to use photons per second. The sun, moon, or starlight illuminates scenes in the visible. Targets are detected when reflectivity differences exist. The spectral radiant exitances are typically integrated over the eye's spectral responsivity and photometric units are used (e.g., lumens). Although most thermal imaging systems respond to radiant flux differences, it is convenient to specify the radiant flux difference between a target and its immediate background by an equivalent temperature difference, AT. Using average values of the various transmittances simplifies analyses. However with broad spectral response systems, the average transmittance depends on the source's spectral radiant exitance, the atmospheric and optical spectral transmittance, and the detector spectral response. 3.1. RADIATIVE TRANSFER Radiant sterance, Le, is the basic quantity from which all other radiometric quantities can be derived (e.g., radiant exitance, radiant flux, or radiant
Radiometry 41 intensity). It contains both the areal and solid angle concept1 that is necessary to calculate the radiant flux incident onto a system. It is the amount of radiant flux, дФ, radiated into a cone of incremental solid angle dil from a source whose incremental area is dAs (Figure 3-1): Э2Ф w dAsdCl m2 -sr (3-1) Similarly, Lq is the photon sterance in units of photons/(s-m2-sr). The quantities Le and Lq are invariant for an optical system that has no absorption or reflections. That is, Le and Lq remains constant as the radiation transverses through the optical system. For Lambertian sources, the spectral radiant exitance is related to the spectral sterance by: Ме (Л, Т) = лЬе{А, T) —-- (3-2) m -pm and the spectral photon exitance is r photons Mqi^T) - • (3“3) s-m -pm Figure 3-1. Radiant sterance.
42 Electro-optical imaging system performance 3.1.1. PLANCK’S BLACKBODY LAW The spectral radiant exitance of an ideal blackbody source whose absolute temperature is T, can be described by Planck's blackbody radiation law: меа,г>=^- 1 (с2МЛ (3-4) where the first radiation constant is q = 3.74 1 8x108 watt-pm4/m2 and the second radiation constant is c2 = 14388 pm-K. Figure 3-2 illustrates Planck's spectral radiant exitance in logarithmic coordinates. Since a photo detector responds linearly to the available power, linear coordinates may provide an easier representation to interpret (Figure 3-3). 1E+08 т 4000 К z Q S s О 111 CL U) 1E+07 1E+06 1E+05 1E+04 1E+03 1E+02 1E+01 1E+00 0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0 WAVELENGTH (pm) Figure 3-2. Planck's spectral radiant exitance plotted in logarithmic coordinates for T = 300, 400, ... , 4000 K. The units are w/(m2-pm). WAVELENGTH (pm) Figure 3-3. Planck's spectral radiant exitance plotted in linear coordinates. The units are w/(m2-pm).
The spectral photon exitance is simply the spectral radiant exitance divided by the energy of one photon (hdXy. <3'5> where the third radiation constant is c3 = 1.88365xlO27 photons-pm3/s-m2, Planck's constant is h = 6.626х IO’34 J-s, and the speed of light is c=3x108 m/s. Figures 3-4 and 3-5 provide the spectral photon exitance in logarithmic and linear coordinates respectively. WAVELENGTH (pm) Figure 3-4. Planck's spectral photon exitance for T =300, 400, ... ,4000 K. The units are photons/(s-m2-pm). WAVELENGTH (pm) Figure 3-5. Planck's spectral photon plotted in linear coordinates. The units are photons/(s-m -pm).
When radiation is incident on an object, some of it is transmitted, some absorbed, and some is reflected. Energy conservation requires that ^transmitted ^absorbed ^reflected Ф incident • (3-6) Expressed as a ratio, т(Л) + а(Л) + р(Л) = 1, (3-7) where т(Л), а(Л), and р(Л) are the transmittance, absorptance, and reflectance respectively. The emissivity, reflectivity, and absorptZvzTy can be calculated from Maxwell's equations and represent the values for an ideal material. Real materials deviate from the ideal properties and have emittance, reflectance, and absorptance. Real blackbodies do not emit all the radiation described by Equation 3-4 but only emit a fraction of it. The ratio of actual radiant sterance to the theoretical maximum, МВВ(Л,Т) is the emittance ,n_ MacluralO,O £{Л 1 — , мвво,т) (3-8) By Kirchkoff s law, when an object is in thermal equilibrium with its environment, absorptance is equal to emittance: а(Л) = £ (Л). (3-9) This leads to the popular saying "Good absorbers are good emitters." For ideal blackbodies, e(2) = 1. 3.1.2. EXTENDED SOURCE If an imaging system is at a distance Rr from a source (Figure 3-6), the radiant flux incident onto the optical system of area Ao is д Ф — т £_ д т lens -у s*sL atm * Ri (3-10) where the small angle approximation was used and Tntm is the intervening atmospheric transmittance. The on-axis radiant flux reaching the image plane is:
Radiometry 45 An ф. - J ____9- л T . т image e 2 5 optics * atm "> ^2 (3-11) where xop6cs is the system's optical transmittance. By definition, the image of an extended source is larger than the detector area (At-» Af/). That is, the detector is flood illuminated. Infrared Imaging System Entrance Aperture Area, д Image of Source Area Aj \ Detector Figure 3-6. An imaging system directly viewing a source. The radiant flux incident onto the detector is simply the ratio of the areas detector = ф . image (3-12) Using the small angle approximation for paraxial rays ^s _ (3-13) The radiant flux becomes Ф detector ____________^e^o^d________________________________ ,/Z2(l+4/npfa)2 optics ? atm (3-14) The optical magnification is Mop,ics=R2IRr Here, Rt and R2 are related to the focal length,/?, by
1 1 1 + R2 ~ fl ' (3-15) Assuming a circular aperture and defining the f-number as F=fl/D (see Appendix) detector Л LeAd 4 F2(l + M„ptics)1 r . T optics л atm "> (3-16) The voltage produced by a detector is proportional to the detector's responsivity, Rd by ^d ^d detector (3-17) The system output, Vsys is simply Vd multiplied by the system gain, G. Since all of the variables are a function of wavelength and the source spectral radiant sterance depends on temperature ^2 Л ГЯ 1 Vsys = G |\, (Я) - g( ’ - ?optics (Я)^ (Я)<U. (3-18) 2 0 * Moptics) Off-axis responses may be reduced by cosineN0 What is of interest is the signal difference produced by a source (target) at temperature Tr and its immediate background at temperature TB \Vsys = G (Я)E(Л’T WTatm(Я)</Я.(3-19) 2 4F1(1 + Mpptics)1 If the source and background are ideal blackbodies with unity emittance, then л2 A^=G рг„(Я) Л)Д („0) 4F2 (1 + M optics)2 When 7?!» R2 or equivalently when M—> 0, = G рг,(Я) 1Д/еО>Гг) .(3-21)
When the wavelength is less than 3 im, targets are differentiated by reflectance differences. Here, both the target and the background are assumed to be illuminated by the same source (sun, moon, nightglow, or starlight) Л г/ _ r f n / ; x [pr(^) PbW]Le(A,Tul)Ad ^^sys G I vO 2 ✓-« яж \2 opUcs^y^atm (3-22) J 4Г2(1 + М0/,и„)2 The source radiant sterance is used since the illuminating source may not be an ideal blackbody.2 The variables p7(2)and PbW are the spectral reflectances of the target and background, respectively. If Planck’s blackbody law cannot describe the source's spectral exitance, then the actual spectral radiance sterance must be used in the appropriate radiometric equations. This is especially true for starlight and nightglow conditions.2 The T-number is sometimes useful for evaluating different optical designs. It is the f-number divided by the square root of the optical transmittance: (3-23) Then the extended source radiometric equation (Equation 3-21) becomes ЛГ -r fff (n[^eO,Tr)-MeO,rB)l4d △ *sys I d 1 atm (Л)аЛ . (3 -24) I System output does not infer anything about the source other than that of an equivalent blackbody of a certain temperature would provide the same output. This is true no matter what output units are used (volts, amps or any other arbitrary unit). These units, by themselves, are not very meaningful for system-to-system comparison. For example, can be increased by increasing the system gain G. As such, it is dangerous to compare system response based upon only a few numbers.
Example 3-1 \Vsys for a LWIR IMAGING SYSTEM What is the expected output voltage difference for a US common module system? The system is viewing an extended 3I0-K target against a 300-K background in a collimator. The collimator optically places the target at infinity so that Equation 3-21 is appropriate. Assume the HgCdTe detector has a peak responsivity of 20,000 v/w, = 1, Toptics(f) = 0.70 (all independent of wavelength), F= 3 and G= 10,000. Common module detectors are band limited from 8 to 12 pm. Outside this region the response is zero. The detector element is square with each side equal to 0.002 inches (5.08 x I0'3 cm) so that the detector area is Ad = 2.58 x 10'9 m2. For convenience, the target and its background are considered ideal blackbodies. Assume that the system focal length is 18 inches. The responsivity of most photoconductors follows W ~ ~ Rpeak • peak (3-25) Then the output voltage difference for an on-axis detector is: т AH 2 A Vsvs = G [-----\me (2,310) - Me (2,300)]</2. (3-26) 4F2 J 2 k О This can be approximated by 12 Л LVsys = O.Ol^------Л/Д2,Д7’)Д2, (3-27) 8 Apeak where - Mff,300). Using Simpson's rule, the integral is evaluated numerically at the center of each increment. For example, when АЛ = 1, the interval [8 pm, 9 pm], is evaluated at 8.5 pm (Table 3-1).
Table 3-1 AV CALCULATION ________________ Wavelength Qum) Z/ Xp Mc(X,310) Mc(X,300) X/kp-Mc(X, AT) 8.5 0.708 36.0 30.0 4.25 9.5 0.792 36.8 31.2 4.44 10.5 0.875 35.7 30.8 4.29 11.5 0.958 33.5 29.2 4.12 sum =17.1 Then &Vsys = (0.01)(17.1) = 171 mv. The wavelength interval, Az = 1 gm, was selected for illustrative purposes only. For numerical integration, at least 20 intervals should be chosen. Historical note: The early common module detectors were 0.002 inches by 0.002 inches. The size has changed to 0.0016 x 0.0024 inches. Since the array is still linear and contains 180 elements, it is still called a common module detector. 3.1.3. POINT SOURCE As the source area approaches zero, the source becomes an ideal point source. Geometric optics predicts that the image size also will approach zero. However, diffraction and aberrations will limit the minimum image size. The differential system output, AVsys, depends on the relative size of the blur diameter to the detector size. If the source solid angular subtense (A JR2) is much less than the detector solid angular subtense (AJR22), the source is considered a point source. If the blur diameter is much less than the detector size, ф . . t = ф . detector image (3-28) The detector will sense radiant flux from the point source and the radiant flux from the immediate background within the DAS. In Figure 3-7, Adas is the projected area of the detector angular subtense m object space. The radiant flux is proportional to Ф detector = V, 77 )AS + Le(Л, TB ){Adas - As )] . (3-29)
Figure 3-7. Small target inside the projected area of a DAS. The detector senses radiation from the target and the back- ground. The radiant flux difference between this detector and an adjoining detector location is ДФ = к {\be (Л, TT )As + Le (Л, TB )(Adas - As )] - Le (Л, TB )Adas } (3-30) or △Ф = к \Le a,TT)~Le (Л, Tb)]as . By definition, Adas R\ Aq Ri (3-32) and assuming a circular aperture and ideal blackbodies with unity emittance /^2 =G (ДДЯ) ЦА f торас!!(Л)Та,т(Л)(1Л , (3-33) i bF\l + Moptiay Adas where LJf, AT) = -LffTfy Figure 3-8 illustrates the ideal (geometric) image area as a function of source area and where Equations 3-19 and 3-33 are applicable. The slope of the line is the ratio AJAdas. When As = Adas the two equations are identical.
Source Area A s Figure 3-8. Geometric relationship between source and image areas. When As - Adas, Equations 3-19 and 3-33 are identical. Diffraction and aberrations will limit the smallest image size that can be achieved. Figure 3-9 illustrates three cases: (a) the geometric approach where there is no diffraction, (b) when the blur diameter is less than the diameter of a detector, and (c) when the blur is larger than a detector. Figure 3-10 illustrates the relationships depicted in Figure 3-9. Curve A is the ideal case and is identical with Figure 3-8. Curve В illustrates a system where the diffraction blur area is smaller than the detector area. This case is equivalent to Figure 3-9b and Equations 3-19 and 3-33 are applicable as shown in Figure 3-8. For curve C, diffraction produces a blur diameter that is larger than the detector. Here, Equation 3-19 is only valid when curve C asymptotes to the geometric curve. When diffraction is important, Equation 3-33 must be modified by the aperiodic transfer function, ATF: A Vsys =G $RdW A TF Wdx (3_34) 2 (1 + Moptics ) Equation 3-34 combines Equation 3-19 and 3-33. When the source is resolved, ATF~ 1 and Equation 3-19 is obtained. When Ai<A(b Equation 3-33 is obtained. Figure 3-11 illustrates the ideal and system ATFs and the applicable regions for the equations. The ATF is the input-to-output transformation versus As normalized to unity. Calculation of the system ATF is beyond the scope of this book. However, the limiting case, where the image size becomes independent of As, is of interest for this is the case when the system is viewing a point source.
Figure 3-9. Various image sizes, (a) No diffraction, (b) blur diameter less than detector size, and (c) blur diameter greater than detector size. Source Area As Figure 3-10. Relationship between image size and source size for cases (a), (b) and (c) given in Figure 3-9.
Figure 3-11. Aperiodic transfer function. Equation 3-34 asymptotes to Equation 3-19 for extended sources and to Equation 3-33 for point sources. The aperiodic transfer function depends on target size. For most range predictions, the source is either considered a point source (IRST applications) or resolved (general imagery). For point sources, the ATF is the point visibility factor and for resolved sources, the ATF is one. The change from a point source to a resolved source is gradual and depends upon range. Poropat3 predicted range performance over these intermediate values. The target size function (TSF) is ATFSVS TSF =-------= A TFtm A TF y ‘ ideal lDAS when As < Adas (3-35) and TSF = A TF^ when As> ADAS . (3-36) Substitution yields /1*2 A Vsys= G U TSF roptics{X)Talm (Я)dA. (3-37) J 4F\1 + Moplicsy Adas As As becomes smaller, the TSF approaches a constant (the point visibility factor or PVF). The PVF is also called the blur efficiency, ensquared power,4 and optical shape factor.5 As As approaches zero, it is appropriate to represent Le(A,AT)As by
the source radiant intensity /е(2,Л7) = /е(2,Тг) -IffTf). Point sources are assumed to exist at a long distance from the imaging system so that M—> 0. Then Л г/ — f J? < I PFV fQAT AJ/yys ~ Fr I Rtf (/I) .2 a optics atm ' (3-38) r 4F Adas Substituting Equation 3-32 into Equation 3-38 provides the more familiar form of the point source equation: Д Vvs = G Гядл) PFV Topacs WTaan (Л)ал. (3.39) , Ry The maximum value of the PVF occurs when the image is centered on a detector. As the image moves off-center, the PVF decreases and reaches a minimum when the image center is exactly between detectors. While this phasing effect is present in all systems, it is most noticeable in staring arrays. The PVF refers only to the relationship between the detector size and the blur diameter. The measured signal may be further modified in width and amplitude by electronic MTFs. The point visibility factor is omitted in some point source derivations. This is appropriate if the detector size is small compared to the image size (PVF = 1). Phasing effects can significantly affect the PVF. However, the PVF can only be calculated on a case-by-case basis since it depends upon the optical blur diameter, detector size and the detector-to-detector spacing. Example 3-2 POINT SOURCE The system described in Example 3-1 is viewing a small target (As = 2x 10 9 m2) in a collimator with flcol=60 inches. The point visibility factor is 0.65. What is the expected output? The projected detector area in a collimator focal plane is flioi DAS ~ fl ^d (3-40)
Using Equation 3-38 and A/e(2,A7>4s=Ze(2,A7), дк (—ме(л,лт) ал (3-41) 4^ Adas £ Ap which is approximated by ЛИ sys G ^icJ^Rp^k у (A, дПдя 4F Л5РРГ ^DAS (3-42) From Example 3-1, the first bracket is 171 mv and the second bracket is 0.045. Then AUSJS = 171 x (0.05) =8.6 mv. The output is significantly smaller than that obtained for an extended source of the same temperature. 3.2. AT CONCEPT It is convenient to express the small radiant exitance difference between a target and its background by the temperature difference between the target and its background. That is, it is desirable to express Af y,5 as a function ofJT and call the proportionality constant the signal transfer function (SiTF). The SiTF is a laboratory measure that does not include the atmospheric transmittance \Tatm(X) = 1]. For extended sources, AK5J5 = SiTF AT. (3-43) This approach assumes that the target and background are ideal blackbodies with unity emittance. The difference between two values can be expressed as a Taylor series expansion Ме(Л,Тв+ЛГ)-Ме(Л,Тв) = (3-44) аме(я,рв) dT ЛТ + а2ме(я,тв) дТ2 ДГ2 2
For small values of AT, the first term is used and then the radiant exitance difference is proportional to the partial derivative of Planck's law with respect to temperature ("thermal derivative") where дМе(Л,Тв) дТ дМе(Л,Тв) дТ = Ме(Л,Тв) ЛТ\еС11хт -V) (3-45) (3-46) The SiTF is SiTF — G optics • J dT 4Fl Z1 (3-47) The thermal derivative is a function of wavelength and the background temperature (Figure 3-12). As a result, all performance predictions that use AT as an input will be affected by the background temperature and system spectral response. The AT concept is a matter of convenience. Infrared imaging systems that have photo detectors do not measure temperature but respond to radiance differences. While the AT concept may be useful for thermometers, it does not uniquely specify system performance unless both the system spectral response and the background temperatures are specified. Figure 3-12. Thermal derivative of Planck's blackbody radiation law for three different background temperatures. The units are w/(m2-pm-K)
The 3 to 5 pm region is more sensitive to background changes than the 8 to 12 gm region. Since the MRT and NEDT are inversely proportional to the SiTF, the MRT6'8 and NEDT increase as the ambient temperature decreases. The linear approximation given by Equation 3-43 is only valid for small excursions about the background temperature. Departures from linearity are apparent when AT> 10°C in the LWIR and AT> 5° C in the MWIR. The nonlinearity can be avoided if all calculations and measurements used watts or photons rather than AT. Since the AT concept depends upon the system’s spectral response, different LWIR systems (e.g., 7.5 to 11.5 pm and 8 to 12 pm) will produce different responsivity curves when plotted as a function of AT. Nevertheless, AT has become an industry-wide standard and the nonlinearity exists in all input-to-output transformations (e.g., SiTF, NEDT, MRT, and MDT). 3.3. PHOTOMETRY Photometry describes the radiative transfer from a source to a detector where the units of radiation have been normalized to the spectral sensitivity of the eye. It applies to all systems that are sensitive to visible radiation (0.4 to 0.7 pm). The luminous flux emitted by a source is 0.72 F = 683 eO,T)As dX lumens, (3-48) 0.38 where F(2) is the eye’s photopic responsivity9 normalized to unity at 0.555 pm. Numerous photometric units exist (cgs, mks, and English).10 Photometric calculations may be carried out exactly as radiometric calculations using the appropriate equations provided in this chapter. 3.4. NORMALIZATION "Normalization .... is the process of reducing measurement results as nearly as possible to a common scale.’’11 Normalization is essential to insure that appropriate comparisons are made. Figure 3-13 illustrates the relationship between the spectral response of a system to two different sources. The output of a system depends upon the spectral features of the input and the spectral response of the imaging system.
WAVELENGTH Figure 3-13. Sources with different spectral outputs can produce different system outputs. T2 provides more radiant flux than The system output will be higher when viewing T2. Variations in output can also occur if ’’identical” systems have different spectral responses (Figure 3-14). Spectral mismatch is a major contributor to fixed pattern noise in focal plane arrays when each detector has a different spectral response.12 Equation 3-21 is integrated over the interval [2 b 2 2] for System 1 and over the interval [23, 24] for System 2. Because of the spectral mismatch, Ф bVsy*.* For example, an infrared imaging system whose spectral response is 8 to 12 pm may have a different responsivity than a system that operates 7.5 to 11.5 pm although both systems are labeled as LWIR systems. Systems can be made to appear as equivalent or one can be made to provide better performance by simply selecting an appropriate source or atmospheric condition. Figure 3-14. Different spectral response systems can produce different outputs when viewing the same source.
It is sometimes useful to discuss average responsivity or average transmittance. The term average represents the mean value of a function. If/(x) is weighted by another function g(x), the average of/(x) over interval [a,b] is ave b a (3-49) b a Using this methodology, the average optical transmittance becomes ^2 (3-50) A Similar equations exist for the average atmospheric transmittance. Equation 3-50 indicates that the average response depends on the source's spectral characteristics (e.g., the source temperature) and its relationship to the detector spectral responsivity. The extended source radiometric equation becomes Д1/ =Gt r sys w L optics-ave JRd (Я) Me (Л’ АГ)А-а ТаОя (Л) dA. (3-51) J 4F2(1 + Mopdcs)2 In general, it not permissible to "pull out” each variable as an average value. This back-of-the-envelope approximation is only valid if the parameters are independent of wavelength over the spectral region of interest. As AX becomes smaller, the approximation becomes more accurate and is correct for very narrow band systems such as laser systems: лг ~ г в Ме(Л,ЛТ)Аа т ^'sys optics-ave ^d-ave .r2z1 м \2 1 atm-ave ' (1 AZ Optics )
Example 3-3 AVERAGE OPTICAL TRANSMITTANCE What is the average optical transmittance of a lens system for the LWIR system described in Example 3-1? The optical spectral transmittance, Toptics(X), is given in Table 3-2. The average optical transmittance, Toptical.ave, is approximated by ^2 L Toptics (Л)Ме АЛ t . = .h______________________________ { optics-ave ' ^«rf(A)Me(2,AT)AA Я1 In Table 3-2, Simpson's rule is used to numerically evaluate the integral at the center of each interval (Ai =1). The values for Me(f ЛТ) are given in Table 3-1. Table 3-2 Toptical_ave OBTAINED by NUMERICAL INTEGRATION X AMC ^optics O'") R„0.) МАЛТ) t011UcA) 8.5 0.708 60 0.8 33.98 42.48 9.5 0.792 56 0.8 35.48 44.35 10.5 0.875 49 0.7 30.01 42.87 11.5 0.958 43 0.6 24.71 41.19 sum = 124.2 sum = 170.9 The average transmittance is 124.2/170.9 = 0.727. The average transmittance could be substantially different if the blackbody source had a different absolute temperature. As with the previous examples, zfi= 1 im was chosen for illustrative purposes. Smaller increments should be selected when performing the calculation. 3.5. REFERENCES 1. C. L. Wyatt, Radiometric System Design, Chapter 3, Macmillan Publishing Co. New York, NY (1987). 2. D. Kiyskowski and G. H. Suits, "Natural Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed., pp. 151-209. This is Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
3. G. V. Poropat, "Effect of System Point Spread Function, Apparent Size, and Detector Instantaneous Field of View on Infrared Image Contrast of Small Objects," Optical Engineering, Vol. 32(10), pp. 2598-2607 (1993). 4. L. M. Beyer, S. H. Cobb, and L. C. Clune, "Ensquared Power for Circular Pupils with Off-center Imaging," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(25), pp. 3569-3574 (1991). 5. J. M. Lloyd, "Fundamentals of Electro-Optical Imaging System Analysis," in Electro-Optical Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 18 This is Volume 4 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-conditioning Engineers, "Applications of Infrared Sensing Devices to the Assessment of Building Fleat Loss Characteristics," ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 101-1981, ASHRAE, Atlanta, GA (1983). 7. Y. M. Chang and R. A. Grot, "Performances Measurements of Infrared Imaging Systems used to Assess Thermal Anomalies," in Thermal Imaging, I. R. Abel, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 636, pp. 17- 30 (1986). 8. G. В McIntosh and A. F. Filippone, "Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference (MRTD) Testing: Equipment Specifications for Building Performance Diagnostics," in Thermosense IV, R. A. Grot and J. Wood, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 313, pp. 102-111 (1981). 9. The photopic response curve can be found in many textbooks. See, for example, W. J. Smith, Modern Optical Engineering, second edition, pp. 222-227, McGraw-Hill, New York (1990) 10. G. C. Holst, CCD Arrays, Cameras, and Displays, second edition, pp. 23-27, JCD Publishing, Winter Park FL (1998). 11. F. E. Nicodemus, "Normalization in Radiometry," Applied Optics, Vol. 12(12), pp. 2960-2973 (1973). 12. N. Bluzer, "Sensitivity Limitations of IRFPAs Imposed by Detector Nonuniformities," in Infrared Detectors and Arrays, E. L. Dereniak, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 930, pp. 64-75 (1988). EXERCISES 1. Using the approach in Example 3-1, calculate AE,lv for a source temperature of 100°C above an ambient background of 27° C. The SiTF is AF^/AT. Discuss the difference in this calculated SiTF compared to the values given in Example 3-1. 2. For the system described in Example 3-1, calculate the SiTF for a target temperature of 280 К on a 270-K background. 3. Using the approach in Example 3-1, calculate AEVJ4. for an MWIR system whose spectral response is from 3 to 5 pm for a 320-K target against a 300-K background. Assume 1^^ = 30,000 v/w, ro/,ftcv = 0.8, F=4, 6’ = 20,000, Ad=4 x 10 s cm2, and fl= 10 inches. What is the SiTF? 4. Calculate Toptics_ave using the data given in Example 3-2 but assume the target temperature is 800 K. Compare the answer with that obtained in Example 3-3. 5. The system described in Example 3-1 will be used as a spectroradiometer. It will have band pass filters that are 1 pm wide centered at 8.5, 9.5, 10.5 and 11.5 pm. Assume the noise voltage is 100 pv. What is the SNR for each band if the target is at 310 K? What is the SNR for a target that is 800 К against a 300-K background? Assume that each filter has a transmittance of 75%. 6. Depending upon the definition (see Appendix) either 1/(4F2+ 1) or 1/4F2 may be used in the radiometric equations. Plot both factors as a function of the f-number.
4 MTF THEORY The optical transfer function (OTF) plays a key role in the theoretical evaluation and optimization of an optical system. The modulation transfer function (MTF) is the magnitude and the phase transfer function (PTF) is the phase of the complex-valued OTF. When an ideal system is viewing incoherent illumination, the OTF is real-valued and positive so that the OTF and MTF are equal. When focus errors or aberrations are present, the OTF may become complex valued. Electronic circuitry also can be described by an MTF and PTF. The combination of the optical MTF and the electronic MTF creates the electro-optical imaging system MTF. The MTF is the primary parameter used for system design, analysis and specifications. When coupled with the three-dimensional noise parameters, the MTF and PTF uniquely define system performance. The MTF and PTF are measures of how the system responds to spatial frequencies. They do not contain any signal intensity information. The system MTF and PTF alter the image as it passes through the circuitry. For linear-phase-shift systems, the PTF is of no special interest since it only indicates a spatial or temporal shift with respect to an arbitrarily selected origin. An image where the MTF is drastically altered is still recognizable whereas large nonlinearities in the PTF can destroy recognizability. Modest PTF nonlinearity may not be noticed visually except those applications where target geometric properties must be preserved (i.e., mapping or photogrammetry). Generally, PTF nonlinearity increases as the spatial frequency increases. Since the MTF is small at high spatial frequencies, the nonlinear-phase-shift effect is diminished. Four conditions must be met to use MTF theory: (1) the radiation is incoherent, (2) the signal processing is linear, (3) the image is spatially invariant, and (4) the system mapping is single-valued (non-noisy and not digitized). These last three conditions are violated by most electro-optical imaging systems. The optical system will be spatially variant if its impulse response varies from the center to the edge of the field-of-view due to aberrations. Each detector is noisy and this violates the one-to-one mapping requirement. The analog electronics may be noisy and nonlinear image processing may also be present.
MTF analysis is not strictly applicable to electro-optical imaging systems. Electronic shaping may cause MTFs greater than unity and this causes normalization (defmition) problems. Scanning systems typically have a low frequency cutoff to reduce 1/f noise. With these systems, the MTF at zero spatial frequency is zero. This also causes normalization problems. Finally the system has frames of data and the image is not continuous in time. But this can be neglected. MTF does not include dynamic (time-variant) phenomena. A linear system merely modifies the amplitude and phase of the target. No new frequencies are generated in the process. Sampling can create new frequencies. The detector array samples the scene in the vertical direction. Depending upon the design, scanning devices may sample in the horizontal direction. Staring devices sample the scene in both directions. These effects are discussed in Chapter 5, Sampling Theory. In spite of these disclaimers, electro-optical systems are treated as quasi- linear over a restricted operating region to take advantage of the wealth of mathematical tools available to analyze linear systems. For modeling purposes, electro-optical systems are characterized as linear spatial-temporal systems that are shift-invariant with respect to both time and two spatial dimensions. Although space is three-dimensional, an imaging system displays only two dimensions. 4.1. MTF DEFINITION Modulation is the variation of a sinusoidal signal about its average value (Figure 4-1). It can be considered as the AC amplitude divided by the DC level. The modulation is MODULATION = M = = — 5max + Bmin DC (4-D where Bmax and Binin are the maximum and minimum signal levels respectively. The modulation transfer function is the output modulation produced by the system divided by the input modulation at that frequency: MTF ~ OUTPUT MODULATION INPUT MODULATION (4-2) The concept is presented in Figure 4-2. Three input and output signals are plotted in Figures 4-2a and 4-2b and the resultant MTF is shown in Figure 4-2c. As a ratio, the MTF is a relative measure whose values range from zero to one.
Intensity Figure 4-1. Definition of Target Modulation. The variable d is the extent of one cycle. For optical systems, d is measured in angular space and the spatial frequency is fx = Md. For electronic circuitry, d is measured in time and the electrical frequency isfHz = Md. Input (Object) Output (Image) Figure 4-2. Modulation transfer function, (a) Input signal for three different spatial frequencies, (b) output for the three frequencies, and (c) MTF is the ratio of output-to-input modulation.
4.2. LINEAR FILTER THEORY Linear filter theory was developed for electronic circuitry and has been extended to optical, electro-optical, and mechanical systems. Linear filter theory forms an indispensable part of system analysis. Let 5{ } be a linear operator that maps one function, f(x), into another function, g(x): s{f(x)}=g(x). (4-3) Let the response to two inputs,/^) and f2(x), be gr(x) and g2(x): s{fi(x)} = gi(x) and s{f2(x)}=g2(x). (4-4) For a linear system, the response to a sum of inputs is equal to the sum of responses for each input acting separately. For any arbitrary scale factors, the superposition principle states S{alfl(x) + a2f2(x)} = aigl(x') + a2g2(x). (4-5) 4.2.1. THE EO SYSTEM as a LINEAR SYSTEM An object can be thought of as the sum of an infinite array of impulses (Dirac delta functions) located inside the target boundaries. Thus, the object can be decomposed into a series of weighted Dirac delta functions, д(х-хо), д(у-уоУ co co Tj Т1О(Х°,У°№Х~Х°^У~У°^°&У°' <4’6) *<,-«> Л-°° As Axy and byo decrease in magnitude, Equation 4-6 becomes an integral. Figure 4-3 illustrates one-dimensional decomposition. Similarly, an electronic waveform in time can be decomposed into a series of weighted Dirac delta functions. Using the superposition principle, A{ } operates on each individual input. The individual outputs are added to produce the image (Figure 4-4). Mathematically, co co
Figure 4-3. An electronic waveform or object can be decomposed into a series of closely spaced impulses whose amplitude is equal to the waveform at that value. Figure 4-4. The linear operator, 5{ }, transforms each input Dirac delta into an output point spread function. The sum of all the point spread functions creates the image. The object O(xo,yo) can be considered the weightings, afo in Equation 4-5. That is, the input has been separated into a series of functions affx) + af2(x) +... For small increments, this becomes the convolution integral co co /h>>’)= \ jo(x0,y0)S{3(x-x0)3(y-y0)}dx0dy0 (4-8) — CO—CO and is symbolically represented by
where * indicates the convolution operator. 5{ } is the system's response to an input impulse. The impulse creates the point spread function for the optical systems and impulse response for the electronic circuitry. If the image is passed through another linear system, the superposition principle is applied again: (4-10) or Z(x, у} = O(x, y) * (x, y) * S2 (x, y). (4-11) 4.2.2. CASCADING MTFs Time and spatial coordinates are treated separately. For example, optical elements do not generally change with time and therefore are characterized only by spatial coordinates. Similarly, electronic circuitry exhibits only temporal responses. The detector provides the interface between the spatial and temporal components and its response depends on both temporal and spatial quantities. The conversion of two-dimensional optical information to a one-dimensional electrical response assumes a linear photo-detection process. Implicit in the detector MTF is the conversion from input flux to output voltage. Time filters are different from spatial filters in two ways. Time filters are single-sided in time and must satisfy the causality requirement that no change in the output may occur before the application of an input. Optical filters are double- sided in space. Electrical signals may be either positive or negative whereas optical intensities are always positive. As a result, optical designers and circuit designers use different terminology. Symbolically, the optics and detector spatial responses are given by OTFspatial(fx,fy)=MTFspatial(fx,fy) eJPTF^’O. (4-12) Analog electronic circuitry operates on a serial stream of data (assumed to be in the horizontal direction: H elee (fxe) = MTFdec (fxe)e jPTF^>. (4-13) With imaging processing algorithms (including line-to-line interpolation), the circuitry can affect the vertical MTF:
H elec (.fye ) = MTFetec (fye ) e iPTF^ . (4-14) If multiple components exist in either the spatial or electronic domains, the individual MTFs can be multiplied together. Equivalently, multiple convolutions in space or time is equivalent to multiplications (or cascading) in the frequency domain. Note that while individual lens elements have a unique MTF, the MTF of the lens system is not usually the product of the individual lens-element MTFs. This occurs because one lens may minimize the aberrations created by another (i.e., the lenses are not decoupled). With appropriate scaling, the electrical frequency can be converted into spatial frequency. This is symbolically represented by fxe -+fx and fye fy. The combination of spatial and electronic responses is some-times called the system OTF. For independent (decoupled) subsystems, the system MTF is MTF Sys (Jx * f у ) MTFsfaaal (fx, fy ) MTFelec (Jxe -> fx )MTFelec (fye -> fy ) (4-15) and the system PTF is PTFsys(.fx^fy) = e ^IPTF(f‘+PTF(S~-'F>+PTF(f„-yf11)]_ (4-16) 4.3. SUPERPOSITION APPLIED to OPTICAL SYSTEMS If the MTF of a system is known, one can compute the image for any arbitrary object. First, the object is dissected into its constituent spatial frequencies (i.e., the Fourier transform of the object is obtained). Next, each of these frequencies is multiplied by the system MTF at that frequency. Then the inverse Fourier transform provides the image. To illustrate the superposition principle and MTF approach, we will show how an ideal optical system modifies an image. An ideal optical system is, by definition, a linear-phase-shift system. The most popular test target consists of a series of bars - typically three or four bars although more may be used. For illustrative purposes, the periodic bars are assumed to be of infinite extent. A one- dimensional square wave, when expanded into a Fourier series about the origin, contains only odd harmonics: 1 . —sin n 2ЯПХ where n = 1, 3, 5..., (4-17) о
and Xo is the period of the square wave. The fundamental frequency fo is \!XO. Taking the Fourier transform of the square wave provides discrete spatial frequencies 1/XO, 3/Xo, 5/Xo, ... whose amplitudes are 4/л, 4/3tt, 4/5tt, ... , respectively. Let a circular optical system image the square wave. The OTF for a circular, clear aperture, diffraction-limited lens is OTF<liffOx> = — cos , (4-18) when/^. < foco and foco, is the optical cutoff Since this optical OTF is always positive, it is popularly called the MTF. By superposition, the optical MTF and square wave amplitudes are multiplied together at each spatial frequency ЛЛ ) = MTFdiff (fx ) O(fx ). (4-19) Taking the inverse Fourier transform provides the resultant image. Equivalently, I(x) = MTFdiff(fo) —sin(2^x f0) 71 (4-20) MTFlUff(3f0) —sin(6^x/„) Зя If fo is greater than f„J3, only the fundamental of the square wave will be faithfully imaged by the optical system. Here, the square wave will appear as a sine wave. As fo decreases, the image will look more like a square wave (Figure 4- 5). Since the optics does not pass any frequencies above foco, the resultant waveform is a truncation of the original series modified by the optical MTF. This results in some slight ringing. This ringing is a residual effect of the Gibbs phenomenon.
RELATIVE OUTPUT RELATIVE OUTPUT RELATIVE OUTPUT (a) Figure 4-5. Square waves imaged by a circular aperture. As the square wave fundamental frequency increases, the edges become rounded. Eventually, the square wave will appear as a sinusoid when/0>/„„/3. (a)/«=/«</40, (b) fo=fKJ 10, and (c) fo '
4.4. PHASE SHIFTS A phase shift represents a displacement from an arbitrarily selected origin. A phase shift moves the image in the optical plane and provides a time delay in the electronic world. To use the superposition theorem, each input waveform is decomposed into a Fourier series (4-21) For a linear-phase-shift system, 0n = n0o where 0o is the distance from the origin. For optical systems, the shift can be in two directions representing translation and rotation. For electronic circuitry, a phase shift is simply a time delay from an arbitrarily selected origin. With a linear-phase-shift system, by redefining the origin location, f)o becomes zero in the new coordmate system. An optical system is isoplanatic if the translation or rotation of an object produces a proportional translation or rotation of the image. An isoplanatic region is that region within the field-of-view where the optical transfer function may be considered shift-invariant within measurement accuracy for all spatial frequencies of interest. Since aberrations do not generally change radically, it is reasonable to treat a small area as isoplanatic or to call this area an isoplanatic patch. Most optical systems are rotationally symmetrical, have minimal aberrations, and may be considered isoplanatic. Tsoplanatism applies only to the optical subsystem. Electronic circuitry is simply labeled as shift-invariant. The ideal common module system is a linear-phase-shift system. However, the mechanical scanning method emphasizes the electronic time delay. Common modules use a bidirectional scan technique. The scene signal is "reversed" in time (Figure 4-6). Since electronic circuitry has a phase shift, the output will be delayed in time. This delay is constant in time. But since the scene is "reversed" a vertical bar will be serrated.' In common module systems, this is compensated for by physically moving a lens (phase shift lens) for the forward and interlace scans. For EMUX systems, the timing is altered for each field so that the detector outputs are summed together properly. Here, phasing effects that were emphasized by hardware are compensated for in hardware.
Figure 4-6. Electronic delay in bidirectional scanning. The time delay is "reversed" for the interlace scan. This serrates vertical bars. 4.5. REFERENCES 1. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 103-108, Plenum Press, New York (1975) EXERCISES 1. The MTF of a rectangular diffraction-limited aperture is MTF(f) = 1 -fjfoco. Plot the image of a square wave where/, = /co/40, fo and fo =fJ3. Compare these plots to Figure 4-5. 2. Assuming a phase shift of ^ = 7i/4, use Equation 4-19 to plot the image of the three cases shown in Figure 4-5. 3. Instead of a linear phase shift of n0o, assume a nonlinear phase shift of nOJ2. Plot the image of the three cases shown in Figure 4-5 where 0o=ti /4. 4. An electronic single-pole, low pass filter has an MTF of MTF = Plot the output when the input is a square wave with fo = f3dBlME ft = fW10, and ft=A//ft3. 5. Assume that an ideal electronic low pass filter has an MTF of unity when f < f3dB and zero elsewhere. Plot the output the input is a square wave with fo = f3dB!^, fo = and/, = W3- 6. Discuss the differences between the plots obtained in Exercise 4 with the plots obtained in Exercise 5. Which is better - the ideal lowpass filter or the single-pole, low pass filter? Why?
5 SAMPLING THEORY Sampling (digitization) is an inherent feature of all imaging systems. Staring systems, because of detector location symmetry, tend to have equal sampling rates in both the horizontal and vertical directions. With scanning systems, the detector output in the scan direction can be electronically digitized at any rate whereas in the cross scan direction, the detector locations define the sampling rate. Therefore, in a scanning system, the sampling rate may be different in the horizontal and vertical directions. In most scanning systems, the detector output is a continuous analog signal that is then digitized (sampled and quantized) by the system's internal A/D converter. If the sampling rate is sufficiently high and the analog signal is band- limited, the reconstructed signal will replicate the analog signal in frequency, amplitude and pulse width. However, to conserve on memory requirements and minimize data rates, scanning systems tend to operate at marginal sampling (clock) rates. Consequently, the output signal amplitude and pulse shape will be modified. Signals can be undersampled or oversampled. The highest frequency that can be faithfully reconstructed is one-half the sampling rate. Any input signal above the Nyquist frequency, fn, (which is defined as one half the sampling frequency,^) will be aliased down to a lower frequency. That is, an undersampled signal will appear as a lower frequency after reconstruction (Figure 5-1). Undersampling is a term used to denote that the input frequency is greater than the Nyquist frequency. It does not imply that the sampling rate is inadequate for any specific application. Similarly, oversampling does not imply that there is excessive sampling. It simply means that there are more samples available than that required by the Nyquist criterion. After aliasing, the original signal can never be recovered. Undersampling creates moire patterns (Figure 5-2). Diagonal lines appear to have jagged edges or "jaggies." Aliasing is not always obvious when viewing complex scenery and, as such, is rarely reported during actual system usage although it is always present. However, it may become apparent when viewing periodic targets such as fences, plowed fields, and railroad tracks. Whether this is bothersome depends upon the task. Photo interpreters rely on aliasing to emphasize railroad tracks!
Figure 5-1. An undersampled sinusoid will appear as a lower frequency after reconstruction. T is the sample-to-sample time. The sampling frequency is/ = MT. Figure 5-2. Moire pattern. A raster scan system creates moire patterns when displaying wedges or star bursts. According to the sampling theorem, any frequency,/, sampled at fs > 2f, can be uniquely recovered. However, the square wave is the most popular test target. When expanded into a Fourier series, the square wave consists of an infinite number of frequencies. Although the square wave fundamental may be oversampled, the higher harmonics will not. Aliasing can distort periodic test patterns such as the four-bar MRT target. Aliasing can increase the MRT at selected frequencies.1 The appearance of the square wave after reconstruction depends upon the relative values of the optical, detector, and electronic MTFs. This is a system test problem.
5.1. SAMPLING THEORY In a sampled-data system, the sampling frequency interacts with the signal to create sum and difference frequencies. Any input f will appear as nfs ± f after sampling (л = -co to +oo). Figure 5-3 illustrates a band-limited system with frequency components replicated by the sampling process. The baseband (~fh to fh) is replicated at nfs. To avoid distortion, the lowest possible sampling frequency is that value where the baseband adjoins the first side band (Figure 5-3c). This leads to the sampling theorem that a band-limited system must be sampled at twice the highest frequency (fs > 2fh) to avoid distortion in the reconstructed image. The sampling theorem applies to any periodic input frequency. The units can be either spatial frequency or electrical frequency. After digitization, the data resides in data arrays with nonspecific units. The user assigns units to the arrays during image reconstruction. That is, the data is read out of the memory in a manner consistent with monitor requirements so that an image can be displayed. If the post-reconstruction filter limits frequencies to fn and if/,, > fh, then the reconstructed image can be identical to the original image. 5.2. ALIASING As the sampling frequency decreases, the first side band starts to overlap the baseband and the power spectrums add (Figure 5-4). The overlaid region creates distortion in the reconstructed image. This is aliasing. Once aliasing has occurred, it cannot be removed. Within an overlapping band, there is an ambiguity in frequency. It is impossible to tell whether the reconstructed frequency resulted from an input frequency of/or nfs ± / All frequency components above fn are folded back into the baseband so that the baseband contains co О baseband ~~ ± f) where nfs±f< f„. п=-<л (5-1) To avoid aliasing, the signal may be passed though a low pass filter (anti- aliasing filter) to insure thatfh<fn.
RELATIVE FREQUENCY (c) Figure 5-3. Sampling replicated frequencies at nfs ± f. (a) Original band-limited signal, (b) frequency spectrum after sampling, and (c) when fs = 2fh, the bands just adjoin.
Figure 5-4. Aliasing alters both the signal and noise baseband spectra. In a real system, signals and noise are not necessarily band-limited and some aliasing may occur. 5.3. SAMPLERS Three samplers may exist in an electro-optical imaging system: (1) For scanning systems, the detector acts as a sampling aperture, (2) the discrete location of the detectors spatially samples the scene, and (3) if the detector output is digitized (as in most scanning systems), the A/D converter is the third sampler. Any one of these samplers may limit performance. 5.3.1. THE DETECTOR as a SAMPLER The detector OTF cannot exist by itself. Rather, the detector OTF must also have the optical OTF to make a complete system. In one-dimension, the OTF of a rectangular detector is OTFdetector(fx) = sin (тга fx) ла fx (5-2) where a the detector angular subtense (DAS). Figure 5-5 illustrates the OTF in one dimension. The OTF is equal to zero when fx = к/a. The first zero (k = 1) is considered the detector cutoff, fko , because any higher frequency will not be faithfully reproduced. Any input spatial frequency above detector cutoff will be aliased down to a lower frequency. When A 1, there is precisely one cycle across
the detector. It is customary to plot the OTF only up to the first zero (Figure 5-6). Since the OTF is positive in this region, it is also called the MTF. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 5-5. Detector OTF as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx /fdco. Detector cutoff is fdco = l/«. The negative OTF values represent contrast reversal: periodic dark bars will appear as light bars. Figure 5-6. Typical detector OTF representation as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx !fdco. The OTF is usually plotted only up to the first zero and is identical to the MTF in this region. О The detector MTF representation from fx = 0 to fx = l/« has become so wide spread that it often forgotten that the detector can respond to higher spatial frequencies. It has become common practice to imply there is no response above fdco . For a band-limited system, the sampling rate should be twice the highest frequency present. This leads to the common parlance that there should be two samples per DAS to avoid aliasing. This is only true if the optical signal is limited to l/<z. That is, fdco > foco.
The detector's Nyquist frequency is fn = l/« and its effective sampling rate is fs = 2/«. Any signal above fn will be aliased to a lower frequency according to О baseband n=-<x> ship а (я/, +Л)] ^«(«Л ±Л) where nfs ± fx <fn . (5-3) Figure 5-7 illustrates the replicated spectrum for the first side bands (n = ±1). This aliasing occurs at the detector and can only be eliminated by assuring that the detector cutoff is greater than the optical cutoff (flc0 > foco). That is, if no signal exists above foco, there is no signal to be aliased. Since f. = 2f(lco, when fdco > foco, the optical system is sampled at twice the highest frequency present and the Nyquist criterion is met for the optical system. All the frequencies imaged by the optical system will be faithfully detectediffdeo^foeo- Figure 4-5 illustrated how an optical system modified an infinite square wave. The image contains all the spatial frequencies up to optical cutoff. The detector then converts the spatial frequencies into electrical frequencies. Whether the detector aliases these frequencies depend upon the relationship between the optical cutoff and the detector cutoff. Aliasing occurs as fdco is reduced. However, the aliased signal will be reduced in amplitude because the optical MTF reduces the amplitude. n=-1 n=0 n=1 LL O NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 5-7. The detector acts as a sampling aperture where the sampling frequency is fs = 2fdco. The baseband and first side bands are illustrated. The optical MTF reduces the aliased signal amplitude.
5.3.2. SPATIAL SAMPLING Although not stated, the detector output shown in the previous figures can only be obtained with a scanning device operating in an analog mode. Staring arrays and the cross scan direction in a scanning array place the detectors at discrete locations. These discrete locations sample the image at an effective spatial sampling rate equal to the inverse of the effective detector center-to-center spacing. If the detector center-to-center spacing is dcc, then the angular sampling rate \sScc = dJfl. Staring arrays can reproduce signals up to fn = l/25cc . Although the individual detectors can reproduce higher spatial frequencies, the spectrum is sampled &fs= \!SCC (Figure 5-8). Staring arrays are inherently undersampled when compared to the detector spatial frequency cutoff (Figure 5-9). The highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced is the system cutoff frequency. For oversampled systems, it is where the MTF approaches zero. For undersampled systems, it is the Nyquist frequency. Systems can detect signals whose spatial frequencies are above cutoff but cannot faithfully reproduce them. For example, a high frequency (above system cutoff) 4-bar pattern may appear as one low contrast blob in an oversampled system. For an undersampled system, patterns above the Nyquist frequency are aliased to a frequency below Nyquist and a 4-bar pattern may appear as a distorted 3-bar pattern. From a design point of view, the MTF should be "high" over the spatial frequencies of interest; this range of frequencies is application specific. Example 5-1 SYSTEM CUTOFF A staring array consists of detectors that are 40x40 pm in size. The detector pitch is 60 pm. The effective focal length is 30 cm. The aperture diameter is 15 cm and the average wavelength is 10 pm. What is the system cutoff? System cutoff is defined as the smaller of the optical cutoff, detector cutoff, or Nyquist frequency. The optical cutoff is foco=DIX = 15 cycles/mrad. The DAS is 40x10'6/0.3 = 0.133 mrad and the detector cutoff is 1/DAS = 7.5 cycles/mrad. The detector pitch provides sampling every 60x10"6/0.3 = 0.2 mrad for an effective sampling rate at 5 cycles/mrad. Since the Nyquist frequency is one-half the sampling frequency, the system cutoff is 2.5 cycles/mrad. For staring arrays, the Nyquist frequency is always smaller than the detector cutoff and is typically also the system cutoff
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY (a) (b) Figure 5-8. Two arrays with different center-to-center spacing. The DASs are the same for both. The spatial frequency axis is normalized to fxlfdco. (a) Scc = «. This represents a 100% fill factor staring array and a scanning array with one sample/DAS. (b) A finite fill factor (fill factor of 50%) staring array and the cross scan direction in a scanning array where the overscan ratio is 0.5.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 5-9. The sampling frequency is inversely proportional to the detector center-to-center spacing. For 100% fill factor arrays, fs = l/2«. The base band and first side bands are illustrated. See Figure 5-7 for comparison. Example 5-2 STAGGERED ARRAY CUTOFF The staggered elements, as illustrated in Figure 5-10, increase the vertical spatial sampling rate. If the effective focal length is 40 cm, what is the system cutoff? The vertical DAS is 40><10‘6/0.4 = 0.1 mrad representing a 10-cycles/mrad capability. The sampling is every 25*10’6/0.4 = 0.0625 mrad or at a rate of 16 cycles/mrad. The highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced is 8 cycles/mrad. This represents 16/10 = 1.6 samples per DAS. This system is considered (erroneously) undersampled since common parlance states that the Nyquist criterion requires two samples per DAS. The system is undersampled only if the optical system passes spatial frequencies above 8 cycles/mrad.
Figure 5-10. The vertical Nyquist frequency can be increased with a staggered array. Staggered arrays are only used in scanning systems. 5.3.3. A/D CONVERTER In principle, the clock rate of an A/D converter can be set at any rate. However, with real hardware, weight, power consumption, and size may limit the clock rate to just satisfy Nyquist frequency. Example 5-3 SYSTEM NYQUIST FREQUENCY What are the horizontal and vertical Nyquist frequencies for an LWIR common module system? The DAS is 0.2 mrad horizontally by 0.2 mrad
vertically. The field-of-view is a square format with 72 mrad on a side. Each horizontal line (scan direction) is electronically digitized at two samples per DAS. The optical cutoff is 15 cycles/mrad. An LWIR common module system consists of 180 detectors that are interlaced to produce 360 infrared scene lines. In the horizontal direction, there are 72/0.2 = 360 independent DASs. With two digital samples per DAS there are 720 digital samples in the horizontal direction. The Nyquist frequency is one-half the sample frequency. Equivalently there are 360 cycles in the horizontal direction and the Nyquist frequency is 720/(2x72) = 5 cycles/mrad. This is identical with 1/DAS. In the vertical direction, there are only 360 independent samples (the number of detectors) representing 180 cycles. Thus the vertical Nyquist frequency is 360/(2x72) = 2.5 cycles/mrad. Line interpolation may further degrade this value. Example 5-4 SAMPLING CUTOFF The LWIR system described in Example 5-3 is electronically digitized at four samples per DAS. What is the horizontal system cutoff7 With four digital samples per DAS, there are 1440 digital samples in the horizontal direction and the A/D converter Nyquist frequency is 10 cycles/mrad. However, the highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced by the detector is 5 cycles/mrad Oversampling minimizes phasing effects. The required sampling rate depends upon the optical MTF, detector MTF, and the amount of aliasing tolerated. Only a detailed study will determine if the aliasing is unacceptable. 5.4. MICROSCAN Staggered arrays increase the vertical sampling frequency in scanning systems (Figure 5-10). Microscan2"5 effectively increases the sampling frequency for staring arrays. With microscan, the detector line-of-sight is moved a fraction of a DAS. This increases the sampling rate by reducing the effective center-to-center spacing. While this improves image fidelity (Figure 5-11), it does have some disadvantages. The detector integration time decreases for each microscan location and this increases the NEDT. It also increases hardware complexity. The monitor
may limit the maximum amount of microscan. If the monitor can only display 480 lines, then the microscan should only create 480 lines. An array that consists of 640x480 detector elements should only be microscanned if the monitor can display 1280x960 pixels. worst phase best phase 3x3 microscan random phase 3x3 microscan Figure 5-11. Microscan improves image fidelity. In-phase and out-of-phase are also called best-phase and worst-phase respectively. The array consists of 64x64 elements. The 3x3 microscan produces 192x192 pixels that must be converted into a monitor format. (From reference 5). 5.5. ANTI-ALIASING FILTER An anti-aliasing filter is a low pass filter that band-limits the system before sampling to avoid aliasing. Optical band-limiting can be achieved by using small diameter optics or by defocusing. Unfortunately, these two approaches also degrade the MTF in the baseband and typically are considered undesirable. In electro-optical imaging systems, the signal is band-limited by the optics and detector. Subsequent electronics is designed to maintain signal fidelity. On the other hand, noise is assumed to be generated in the detector. The noise is assumed to be white (all frequencies are present). By selecting electronic filters that minimize noise and maximize the signal, the signal-to-noise ratio is maximized.
If the filter is just before the A/D converter, and its purpose is to minimize aliasing, then the filter is called an anti-aliasing filter. These filters cannot remove the aliasing that has taken place at the detector. They can only prevent further aliasing that might occur in the A/D converter. Figure 5-12 illustrates the desired cutoff features of an ideal filter. The ideal filter is, of course, unrealizable. Figure 5-12. An ideal anti-aliasing filter passes all the signals below fn and no signal above fn . For an appropriately sampled scanning system, fn =foco. 5.6. REFERENCES 1. G. C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, pp. 347-351, JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL (1998). 2. D. J. Bradley and P N. J. Dennis, "Sampling Effects in CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays," in Infrared Technology and Applications, A. Baker and P, Masson, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 590, pp. 53-60 (1985). 3. R. J. Dann, S. R. Carpenter, C. Seamer, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J Bradley, "Sampling Effects in CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays - Practical Results," in Infrared Technology XII, I. J. Spiro and J. Mollicone, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 685, pp. 123-128 (1986). 4. E. A. Watson, R. A. Muse, and F. P. Blommel, "Aliasing and Blurring in Microscanned Imagery," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 242-250 (1992). 5. F. P. Blommel, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J. Bradley, "The Effects of Microscan Operation on Staring Infrared Sensor Imagery," in Infrared Technology XVII, B. F. Andresen, M. S. Scholl, and J. Spiro, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1540, pp. 653-664 (1991).
EXERCISES 1. List five different objects seen on television that appear jagged. 2. Describe the appearance of the objects listed in Exercise 1 as they move slowly, at a moderate rate, and moving quickly. 3. A staring array consists of 512x512 detector elements. If the effective focal length is 40 cm and the detectors are 50 x50 pm on 75 pm centers, what is (a) the detector DAS, (b) the system FOV, and (c) the system Nyquist frequency? 4. For the system described in Example 5-3, calculate the optical resolution, detector resolution, and system resolution both horizontally and vertically. Assume that resolution is the inverse of the cutoff frequency. 5. Using the results from Exercise 4, calculate the "detection” range for a 2x2 m target both vertically and horizontally. Discuss the differences in the "detection" ranges. Let „ target size Range = —-----------. resolution 6. Using the results from Exercise 4, calculate the horizontal and vertical "detection" ranges for a U5 m and 5X1 m target both vertically and horizontally. Discuss the differences in the ranges. 7. FLIR92 uses a two-dimensional approach where the effective system cutoff is feff= Calculate the system "detection” ranges for a 1 x5 m and 5x 1 m target. Discuss the advantages of the two-dimensional approach. 8. A staring array consists of 64x64 detector elements. The detectors are 40x40 pm on 80 x 80 pm centers. The focal length is 50 cm. What is the system cutoff frequency? What is the cutoff with (a) 2x2 microscan, (b) 3x3 microscan, (c) 4x 4 microscan, (d) 5x5 microscan, (e) 6x6 microscan, (f) 7x7 microscan, (g) 8x8 microscan, (h) 9 x9 microscan, and (i) 10x10 microscan? What limits the highest practical microscan?
6 COMMON MODULE SYSTEMS Figure 6-1 illustrates a functional electro-optical block diagram of an early common module system. The components were called common modules because the scanner, detector, pre-amplifiers, post-amplifiers, and light emitting diodes (LEDs) were manufactured to common specifications. The pre-amplifier is a low-noise fixed-gain amplifier. The post-amplifier had a variable gain and was adjusted for the desired displayed contrast. The common module concept was initiated in the 1970s to reduce cost through the economy of scale and competition. These systems are still in existence and lend themselves to small, lightweight man-portable applications. The designer’s only options were changing the optics to achieve the desired field-of- view, adding electronic filtering to maximize the signal-to-noise ratio, and modifying the visual optics to present an appropriate image to the observer. Nearly all systems today evolved from the common module. Although a misnomer, the derivatives are also called common module systems. For example, both EOMUX and EMUX systems are sometimes called common modules to indicate that they contain a scanning scheme similar to the original common design. Common modules systems operate in the LWIR regions and employ HgCdTe detectors. Figure 6-1. Common module components considered for analysis. For analysis purposes, the common module system consists of optics, a stabilization element, detector, amplifiers, electronic filters, LEDs, visual optics, and the eye. The detector response consists of both the spatial and temporal responses that are characterized by OTFdetector, and MTFtconstant respectively. The OTF is applied to spatial coordinates and the MTF is applied to time coordinates.
Using linear system theory, the OTFs and MTFs of the individual subsystem are multiplied together to create the system OTF. The subscripts are self-explanatory. OTFsys = OTFo^sOTF^nOTF^^MTFK<m^t x MTFampMTFfilterMTFLEDMTFvoptiaMTFeye . Since the spatial OTF is positive for most applications, the usual representation is MTFsys = MTFopticsMTFmotlon MTFdetector MTFtconstant x MTFampMTFр^МТР^рМТР^р^МТРеуе . ( '2) All OTFs and MTFs are a function of frequency (which is omitted for equation compactness). The optical OTF, OTFoptics is for the overall lens system. It is not the product of the individual lenses since these OTFs may be correlated. While not truly separable, for mathematical convenience the optical OTF is separated into three components (diffraction, aberrations, and defocus) OTFoptics * OTFdiffOTFaberratlonOTFdefocus . (6-3) Motion consists of three different forms: linear, sinusoidal and random OTFmotion -OTFlinearOTFsinusoidalOTFrandom . (6-4) For modeling purposes, the system response is usually limited to those spatial frequencies where the OTF is positive. For this limited region, the OTF and MTF are identical. All the MTFs apply to similarly designed imaging systems operating in all spectral bands ranging from the UV to infrared. The components do not "know" what created the signal. 6.1. OPTICS OTF Lens systems consist of several elements with varying focal lengths and varying indices of refraction. Different elements are used to minimize aberrations and to control beam wander during scanning. Since one lens offsets the aberrations of another, linear system theory cannot be applied to the individual elements. While individual element OTFs are appropriate for specifying each lens, the lens system must be considered in its entirety. For modeling purposes, the optical
system will be treated as a single lens that has the same effective focal length and aberrations as the lens system. While OTFdiff is exact, OTFabcnation and OTFdefocus are mathematical approximations. The actual lens OTF can be computed from standard optical design codes. Most performance models (limited to positive OTFs or, equivalently, the MTFs) including FLIR92, allow the user to directly enter optical MTF values and thereby bypass the approximations. The sagittal MTF is used as a horizontal MTF and the tangential MTF is a vertical MTF component. If the system analyst is creating his own performance model, he may wish to use a curve fit to the actual MTF values. Optical spatial frequency is two-dimensional with the frequency ranging from -co to +co. By convention, the optical and detector OTFs are shown in one- dimension with the spatial frequency ranging from zero to the cutoff frequency. The highest spatial frequency that can be reproduced is limited by the optical cutoff. 6.1.1. DIFFRACTION-LIMITED OTF The diffraction-limited OTF (FLIR921 ARG-1) for a circular aperture is OTF<njf=z: cos when f When f x> foco, OTIdlff = 0. Since the OTF is positive, it is identical to the MTF. The optical cutoff, foco, is foco Do _ aperture diameter 2 wavelength (6-6) Figure 6-2 illustrates MTFdiff as a function o£fx/foco. If Do has units of millimeters and 2 has units of micrometers, then foco will have the usual units of cycles/mrad. This equation is only valid for monochromatic light and the cutoff frequency is dependent upon the wavelength. The extension to polychromatic light is lens specific. Most lens systems are color corrected (achromatized) and therefore there is no way to predict the MTF. As an approximation to the polychromatic MTF, the average wavelength, 2Я1,е, is used in Equation 6-5. This average wavelength is determined by the spectral content of the incident radiation and by what the detector senses.
Figure 6-2. MTFdiff for a circular aperture normalized to fjfoco. Since most systems are designed to measure the radiation difference between a target and its background, the spectrally weighted average wavelength is z2 p Optics UK (л)ме (л, at) ал _ A______________________________ ave ~ р<,рЛж(я)я(г(я)л/г(я,дт)<м A (6-7) If ToPtics(^), ^/2), and Me(l,AT) are constant over the interval [21? 22], the average wavelength may be approximated by Q ~ + ^ave ~ - (6-8) The slope of MTFdifr is 4/я at zero spatial frequency. A straight line fit to Equation 6-4 provides the back-of-the-envelope approximation MTF a# (J0*1 - ~ 4^- 71 foco (6-9) An ideal lens creates a diffraction pattern that consists of a series of concentric rings with a bright center (resembles a bull's eye target). The central portion is called an Airy disk. This radially symmetric pattern is described
mathematically by a Bessel function. Sometimes, the Airy disc intensity is approximated with a Gaussian function for mathematical convenience. While this approach maybe useful for intensity mapping, it is not prudent to use a Gaussian MTF for MTFdiff. 6.1.2. CENTRAL OBSCURATION A Cassegrainian telescope has a central obscuration (Figure 6-3). For an optical system with a central obscuration, the diffraction-limited OTF is a + в + c where OTFdiff ~ obs Do (6-10) (6-П) where Do is the overall diameter and is the obscuration diameter. Let Л ... -V -i|1 + R2 - 4X2 | ,o. X =-------, Y =—, and 6z = cos 1 ------------------- . (6-12) foco К L 27? J The variables A, B, and C are A = r* I cos'1(X)-xVl-A'2 A = 0 elsewhere when 0 < 5 X< cl B = со8-1(У)-у71-У2 71 when 0 cl В = 0 elsewhere , (6-14) С = -2Я2 when 0<A'< —— 2 „ 2R . 1 + й2 2(1-Я2) C =---sin a +-----a-----------tan when 1 + 1? 1-1?J -2Я2 \-R v 1 + 7? 2 2 (6-15) C = 0 when X > -- - 2 When JoZ)V-0, Equation 6-10 is identical to Equation 6-5. Figure 6-4 illustrates the diffraction limited MTF for various obscuration diameters.
Do Figure 6-3. Cassegrainian telescope. The aperture diameter is Do and the obscuring diameter is dobs. The primary mirror is usually a parabaloid and the secondary mirror is usually a hyperboloid. MTF 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 6-4. MTFdiff as a function of the obscuration ratio. The obscuration ratio is R = dobsJDo. The spatial frequency is normalized tofx /foco.
6.1.3. ABERRATIONS It is mathematically convenient to represent an aberrated optical system by two OTFs OTFoptics^OTFd{ffOTFaberration . (6-16) Shannon2 developed an empirical relationship that encompasses most aberrations of real lens systems OTFaberration ~ I 1 - 4 when f oco (6-17) where Wrms is the rms wave-front error expressed as a fraction of waves and A = 0.18. Marechal suggested3 that rms wave-front error is related to the peak-to-peak wave-front error by Wrnts = WPP/3.5. Although ^^=0 could be used for diffraction limited optics, apractical choice would be WPP= 0.25 or, equivalently, Wrms = 1/14. This simulates the wave-front error that typically occurs during manufacturing. Figure 6-5 illustrates the aberrated MTF for two different wave-front errors for a clear aperture optical system. This approximation is valid for small wave-front errors (ИрГ<0.5) which is a reasonable limit for well-designed optics. Figure 6-5. MTFODtics for WPP = 1/2 and = 1/4 wave front- errors. Shannon’s approximation was used for MTFaberration. Aberrations can be approximated (FLIR92 ARG-2) by a Gaussian OTF r aberration @ (ifactorf ) (6-18)
Since a Gaussian response is always positive, the OTF is usually given as a MTF. Although vdfactor has the dimensions of a blur diameter, it is not a measurable quantity. It accounts for the degradation associated with the manufacturing quality (material, design, fabrication and mounting). Here, OTFaberTation simply provides a convenient mathematical representation that relates OTFoptlcs to the actual (measured) data OTFaberraUm = OTF^red = MTF„KasuKd _ OTFdiff MTFdiff The approximation for aberrations is only valid for modest values. Any computer program that includes the approximation must specify the region of applicability. 6.1.4. DEFOCUSED OPTICS Fixed focus systems can be grossly out of focus if the target is outside the depth of field. The OTF for a circular, defocused, diffraction-limited lens4 is OTF 'z' optics cos (6-20) where (6-21) The focus shift, Af, in units of wavelength. When A; = 0, Equation 6-20 is identical with Equation 6-5. Figure 6-6 illustrates the defocused MTF for a variety of errors. There is a typographical error in Levi and Austing's original paper that has propagated throughout the literature. The correct equation (shown above) has 4/я in front of the integral rather than the erroneous 4/n a. This error was noted in their errata.4 The OTF can be approximated by OTFoptics « OTF^OTF^ . (6-22)
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 6-6. Theoretical OTFs for a diffraction-limited circular aperture as a function of focus error, A-. The spatial frequency is normalized to fx lfoco. Negative OTFs represent a phase reversal. Here, targets appear reversed in contrast: periodic white bars appear black and black bars appear white. Shannon5 reported an approximation that is good up to 2.2 waves MTFdefocus(fx) UWpp (6-23) where Jf ) is the first-order Bessel function. For wave-front errors less than 0.75 waves, Jfx) can be approximated by the first five terms of the infinite series 3 5 7 9 X X X X X 2 ~ 1? + 384 ~ 18432 + 1474560 ' (6-24) If the defocus errors are less than 0.5 waves peak, then the first four terms provide a good approximation. The approximation for defocus is valid for modest values. Any computer program that includes this approximation must specify the region of applicability. See also Section 10.1.2., Defocus MTF. Rather than use the approximations, the complete Bessel functions can be used for defocus.6
6.2. DETECTORS The detector OTF cannot exist by itself. Rather, the detector MTF must also have the optical OTF to make a complete system. In one-dimension, the spatial response of a rectangular detector (FLIR92 ARG-3) is ZZ A • Z Z A Sin(^/x) OTFdetector (fx ) SinC (ОС f x ) (6-25) This assumes that the active area is rectangular and that the response is uniform across the active area. Using the small angle approximation, a, the detector angular subtense (DAS), is ~ „ 1 d detector size a = DAS =-------- — =----------------------. fdco fl effective focal length (6-26) The instantaneous-field-of-view (IFOV) is the angular cone over which the detector senses radiation. It includes both the optical blur diameter and the DAS. When the blur diameter is small compared to the DAS, the IFOV and DAS are approximately equal. Using the DAS in Equation 6-25 does not neglect the blur diameter. It is already included in MTFdiff. Figure 6-7 illustrates the OTF in one dimension. The OTF is equal to zero when fx = kla. The first zero (A'=l) is considered the detector cutoff, fdco, because any higher frequency will not be faithfully reproduced. Any input spatial frequency above detector cutoff will be aliased down to a lower frequency. When k= 1, there is precisely one cycle across the detector. It is customary to plot only the OTF up to the first zero (Figure 6-8). Unfortunately, this representation may lead the analyst to believe that there no is response above fdco. The absolute highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced is limited by the optical system cutoff. The detector cutoff may be either higher (optically limited system) or lower (detector limited system). The detector temporal response is considered separable from the spatial response. The detector's temporal MTF is presented in Section 6.4.2.
Figure 6-7. Detector OTF from 0 to +oo as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx lflco. The negative OTF values represent contrast reversal where periodic dark bars will appear as light bars. Figure 6-8. Typical detector OTF representation as a function of normalized spatial frequency fjfdco. Since the OTF is positive up to the first zero, it called the MTF. 6.3. MOTION Motion produces a blurred image. Motion blurs detail and therefore the net effect is to decrease the range at which target detail can be resolved. The effects of motion during the entire integration and interpretation process must be considered.7 If the motion is slow compared to the integration time or processing time, the target appears to move.
Linear motion includes both target movement (relative to the imaging system) and motion of the image across the detectors. Unbalanced scanning mirrors may introduce a sinusoidal motion. Motors or turbines on aircraft and vehicles also can induce sinusoidal motion through mechanical vibrations. Mountmg structures may have resonant frequencies that induce sinusoidal motion. High frequency random motion is simply called jitter. Typically, an imaging system is subjected to linear, sinusoidal, and random motion simultaneously OTFmolil,„ = OTFUnear OTFslnusoidal OTFrmdom . (6-27) The spectrum of these frequencies extends from very low frequency to high frequencies. The magnitude of each motion must be quantified so that the appropriate equations are used. In a laboratory, the system may be mounted on a vibration-isolated stabilized table. Here, no motion is expected so that OTFmotion = 1. Systems may contain a stabilized mirror that reduces OTFmotion. The values used for the various motional OTFs should be the values expected after stabilization is in operation and not the movement of the platform. Motion affects the ability to resolve detail. It does not necessarily affect the ability to detect a target. The eye can follow a slow moving blob. However, with all motion, the edges become fuzzy. As the speed increases, the edge becomes less distinct. 6.3.1. LINEAR MOTION The OTF degradation due to linear motion (FLIR92 ARG-7) is OTFlinear (fx ) = sine (a{fx ) , (6-28) where a, is the angular distance moved and is equal to vrtint. The variable, vr is the relative angular velocity between the sensor and the target in the horizontal direction. The integration time is tint . The precise value to be used for the integration time depends upon the system application. When an observer views the image, the eye blends many frames of data. For common module systems, the eye integration time should be used. Although the exact eye integration time is debatable, FLIR92 documentation recommends 0.1 s. The eye integration time is further discussed in Section 19.2.2., SNRfa and te. For other applications, different integration times may be appropriate. See Sections 8.1, 9.1, and 10.3, all entitled Motion.
Figure 6-9 illustrates the OTF due to linear motion as a fraction of a DAS Linear motion only affects the OTF in the direction of the motion. As the motion increases, the OTF becomes negative. A negative OTF indicates that phase reversal has occurred: periodic black bars appear white and periodic white bars appear black. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 6-9. OTFlinear as a function of normalized spatial frequency fxlf(ko. The linear motion is normalized to «//DAS. In the laboratory a, is usually zero. Multiplying the detector OTF and linear motion OTF provides the composite OTF shown in Figure 6-10. As a rule-of-the-thumb, when the linear motion is less than about 20% of the DAS, it has minimal effect on system performance. When linear motion becomes large, phase reversal can occur (Figure 6-11). Figure 6-12 illustrates a test pattern smeared by linear motion. At cutoff (where the system OTF approaches the first zero), the bar pattern cannot be resolved. Above cutoff, phase reversal is seen. The ability to see imagery above cutoff is called false resolution or spurious resolution. Blurring due to linear motion well known in photography. Movement of the camera or the scene blurs the image. The shutter speed determines the integration time. Staring arrays acts in a manner similar to still cameras. Scanning systems do not. With interlace scanning, continuously moving (linear motion) targets will be at different locations from one field to another. That is, scanning takes time and the target is constantly moving during this period. Here straight lines will appear disjointed. For pure serial scan systems, a vertical line will appear as a diagonal line. The offset from the vertical depends upon the relationship between the linear
motion and the frame time. For common module systems with bidirectional scanning, time is "reversed” during the interlace field. Here, a vertical line may appear serrated from line-to-line. These effects are not present with random or sinusoidal motion since the target’s average location never changes. Figure 6-10. OTFdetectorOTF,inear as a function of normalized spatial frequency/^ /flco. When linear motion is 20% of a DAS, OTFlinear is 0.935 at/x//Zc0=l. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 6-11. OTFdetectorOTFlinear as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx /fdco for large movements. The movement is expressed as a percentage of a DAS. The negative OTF represents phase reversal.
< ц ж ж ж ORIGINAL IMAGE LINEAR MOTION Figure 6-12. A test pattern image when linear motion is present. Since the motion is horizontal, the vertical resolution is maintained. When the bar target frequency is equal to the first zero of the OTFlinear, the bars blend into a blob. Higher spatial frequency bars illustrate phase reversal: There appears to be two black bars on a gray background. (From reference 8, by courtesy of G. L. Conrad). 6.3.2. SINUSOIDAL MOTION When sinusoidal motion is described by в = as sin (cot}. (6-29) The image blur is twice the amplitude of the oscillatory motion as. If the total viewing time is large such that many cycles are viewed, (6-30) Then the OTF degradation (FLIR92 ARG-9) is
OTFsinusoidal (fx ) = Jo (iHsrfx ) > (6-31) where Jo( ) is the zero-order Bessel function. Sinusoidal motion only affects the OTF in the direction of the motion. Figure 6-13 illustrates sinusoidal peak-to-peak motion as a fraction of the DAS. For x < 3, Jo( ) can be approximated by the first five terms of the infinite series 4 + 64 2048 + 147456 ' (6-32) If the OTF is plotted only up to fdco then the approximation can be used when 2as < DAS. The approximation for sinusoidal motion is valid for modest values. Any computer program that includes this approximation must specify the region of applicability. Rather than use the approximations, the complete Bessel function can be used for sinusoidal motion.6 Figure 6-14 illustrates OTFsinusoidalOTFdetector as a function of the normalized spatial frequency fjfdco. As with linear motion, large movements can produce negative OTFs. As a rule-of-the-thumb, when the peak-to-peak motion is less than about 20% of a DAS, system performance is not significantly affected. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 6-13. OTFsinusoidal as a function of 2a/DAS. In the laboratory as is usually zero.
NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 6-14. OTFsjnusoidalOTFdetector as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx !flco. Movement is expressed as a percentage of2«v/DAS. 6.3.3. RANDOM MOTION (JITTER) High frequency random motion can be described (FLIR92 ARG-8) by a Gaussian OTF OTF н (f } = е~2(тУг/х} random \ J x ' c (6-33) where or is the rms random displacement in mrad. It is assumed that the image has moved often during the integration time, tint, so that the central limit theorem is valid. The central limit theorem says that a Gaussian distribution can describe many random movements. Figure 6-15 illustrates the random motion OTF. Since this OTF is always positive, it is given as an MTF. Multiplying the detector OTF and random motion OTF provides Figure 6-16. As a rule-of-the-thumb, when the rms value of the random motion is less than about 10% of a DAS, system performance is not significantly affected.
MTF MTF Figure 6-15. MTF degradation due to high frequency random (Gaussian) movement as a function of or fx. In the laboratory, or is usually zero. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 6-16. OTFrandomOTFdetector as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx lflco. The rms movement is expressed as a percentage of <rr./DAS. MTFrandom is always positive so that phase reversal is not seen.
6.3.4. NONLINEAR SCAN MIRROR MOVEMENT Since all calculations are performed in object space, any nonlinear scan mirror motion must be referred to object space. Let the scanner be between the afocal telescope and re-imager (see Figure 6-1). If the afocal telescope has magnification Pafocai then the high frequency mirror movements in object space are „ _ ^Imirror al-m~ p rafocal „ — as-mirror _ аг-mirror o/i\ as-m-—----------, and crr-m=—---------• (6-34) *afocal ^afocal The linear and sinusoidal components of nonlinear movements are additive and the random movements add in quadrature. The total motional values are V2 2 <7r + a rm . (6-35) The variables at_tot , as_tot, and vr_tot are used in Equations 6-28, 6-31, and 6-33, respectively. 6.3.5. LOW FREQUENCY MOTION Image blurring due to low frequency vibrations is a random process. Quantification9'14 depends upon the initial phase of the motion and the exposure time. Low frequency MTFs can only be handled statistically since no closed-form solution is possible. Even though edges may be blurred, the eye can easily follow low frequency movement. 6.4. ELECTRONIC MTF While the optical OTF is two-dimensional, electrical circuits are causal and one-dimensional in time. The Fourier transform is appropriate for optical systems but the Laplace transform is more convenient for analyzing electrical circuits.
Common module systems 107 6.4.1. CONVERSION: ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY TO SPATIAL FREQUENCY The electrical frequency,/,, is related15 to the spatial frequency by the scan velocity, fe~v (6-36) where r must have units of mrad/s to convert cycles/mrad (£) to Hertz (/). The scan velocity is the ratio of the DAS to the detector dwell time a dwell (6-37) where Tdwel) is the time it takes a target edge to scan across the detector element. Using the small angle approximation and assuming constant scan velocity, it is ~ dwell Na/3risc (6-38) where N is the number of detectors operating in parallel (vertical direction), a is the DAS in the horizontal direction, p is the DAS in the vertical direction, A is the HFOV, В is the VFOV, Fr is the frame rate, i]os is the overscan ratio, and t]sc is the scan efficiency. The overscan ratio is given by „ _PNscene /3 NR os В В ' (6-39) where Nscene is the number of scene lines per frame and R is the interlace ratio. When t]os = 1, the entire scene is perfectly dissected by the detector array. When t]os < 1, areas of the scene are missed and when tjos> 1, overlapping occurs (Figure 6- 17). The relationship between the overscan ratio and sampling rates is discussed in Chapter 11, Vertical MTF. Substituting Equations 6-38 and 6-38 into 6-37 yields A F N г7 scene (6-40) Note that Nscene may not be the same as number of lines seen on the monitor. EMUX, EOMUX, and staring array systems may employ line-to-line interpolation
to achieve monitor compatibility. Line-to-line interpolation can affect the vertical MTF (discussed in Chapter 11, Vertical MTF). Figure 6-17. Definition of overscan ratio. When *]os= 1, the entire scene is perfectly dissected by the detector array. When t]os < 1, areas of the scene are missed and when tjos > 1, overlapping occurs. The vertical field-of-view is specified by the effective vertical extent of the array, dyarr(ly, and the effective focal length FFOK = B = 2taii 1 у-array (6-41) where dy-array = dcc (TV - 1) + dy + (/? - 1)^ , (6-42) and dcc is the center-to-center spacing of the detector elements and dy is the detector dimension in the vertical direction. The horizontal field-of-view is determined by the optical design and the scan mirror angular movement. The scan efficiency is the ratio of the amount of time that the detectors actively sample the field-of-view in one frame, tactive, to the total time taken for one frame, tfnme t frame
Example 6-1 SCAN EFFICIENCY What is the scan efficiency for an LWIR common module system? The U.S. common module system contains 180 detectors that are interlaced by an oscillating mirror to create 360 infrared scene lines (Figure 2-6). As illustrated in Figure 6-18 the detector senses radiation from the FOV when the scanner is between -5° and +5°. This is the active scan time. The scan mirror requires time to decelerate, stop, reverse direction and accelerate to a linear velocity as shown in Figure 6-19. The common module system operates at a frame rate of 30 Hz. Each frame lasts 1/30 sec and each field lasts 1/60 sec. If the active scan time is 12.5 ms for each field, then the scan efficiency is 12.5/16.7 = 75%. During the inactive time (0 < -5° and 0 > +5°), the detector senses radiation from parts of the scene and the housing. For background limited systems, this radiation introduces scan noise if it reaches the detector during the active scan time. Bidirectional oscillating mirrors typically have a scan efficiency over 75%. An observer viewed the output of the original common module systems (Figure 6-1). The frame rate must be sufficiently high such that the eye does not perceive flicker. U.S. commercial televisions employ a frame rate of 30 Hz and this value has become standard for nearly all imaging systems used in the U.S. The scan frequency must be 30 Hz if the output is displayed on a standard monitor (EOMUX, EMUX, and staring systems) but need not be used for common module systems when viewing LEDs. Figure 6-18. Beam location as a function of scan angle when employing an oscillating mirror, (a) Scan angle = +5°, (b) scan angle = -5°, and (c) mirror looking outside the field-of-view.
Figure 6-19. Scan angle as a function of time for an oscillating mirror. The ratio of active scan time to one field time is the scan efficiency. Example 6-2 SCAN VELOCITY A common module system employs 180 parallel detectors with 2:1 interlace and operates at 30 Hz. The scan efficiency is 0.80 and HFOV = 2.75°. The 2:1 interlace provides 360 independent IR lines (t]os= 1). If the DAS is 0.1 mrad, what is the scan velocity and detector dwell time? 2.75° v =------ 1745™™f deg ) (30 HzX360 lines) (180 detectors^.^^) ^^mrad д = 3600—-, (6-44) s and a 0.1 __ _o I dwell ~ — — ’ v 3600 (6-45)
Example 6-3 ROTATING POLYGONS Figure 6-20a depicts a system that has a four sided rotating polygon for horizontal scanning and a moving reflective mirror for vertical scanning. The detector array is illustrated in Figure 6-20b. With a 1-m effective focal length, the FOV is 8x8 mrad. The DAS in both the vertical and horizontal directions is 25 prad. What is the required polygon rotational speed and detector dwell time? The monitor operates at 30 Hz. Vertical Scanner 40 (a) (b) Figure 6-20. Polygon scanner, (a) Scanning concept and (b) the detector array contains 40 elements. The monitor requirements determine the overall timing requirements. The scanners must trace out the entire field-of-view within 1/30 sec. Precisely how that is done depends upon the scanner and the scan efficiency. The scan speed and scan efficiency drive the electronic filter design. With no overscan (t]os = 1), the number of individual IR lines required to fill the VFOV is 8/0.025 = 320. With 40 elements in the array, there must be 320/40 = 8 sweeps to cover the VFOV or that there must be 8:1 interlace. The rotating polygon and vertical mirror must be synchronized to achieve the 8:1 interlace. Two options are available: (a) the polygon can have all four faces parallel and the vertical scanning mirror provides the interlace or (b) the polygon faces are cut at slight angles so that each face moves the line-of-sight down one DAS (4:1 interlace). Then the vertical mirror moves to provide another 2:1 interlace. The polygon must provide one full rotation for each location of the vertical scanning mirror. Figure 6-21 illustrates the scan pattern for the latter case.
The required rotation rate is _ revs rotation rate = 2------ frame Jy 3Q frames s - 60 rps - 3600 rpm . (6-46) Rotating polygons typically have a scan efficiency of 50%. The active scan time is 1 1 I active 6O/7W facets j (o.s)= 2.08 ms. (6-47) The scan velocity is 12/2.08 = 5760 mrad/s and r(hven = 0.1/5760 = 17.4 ps. The frame time affects the scan velocity and detector dwell time. Usually the scan efficiency is not compatible with monitor requirements. The data stream must be reformatted in either a digital scan converter (EMUX system) or by a vidicon (EOMUX system) to achieve monitor compatibility. Detector 1 Polygon Effect Detector 40 Detector 1 Detector 40 Figure 6-21. Scan pattern.
6.4.2. DETECTOR TIME CONSTANT The detector temporal response is assumed to follow a simple RC network response where Td is the detector electrical time constant (FLIR92 ARG- H) MTFfconstant (fe ) “ _____1 71 + (2^/J2 The 3 dB frequency is f(i3dB=^^Td • The total detector MTF is the combination of its spatial response and its electrical response. 6.4.3. AMPLIFIERS The common module pre-amplifier and post-amplifier responses can each be described by a single-pole, low pass filter whose fe3dB frequency is between 100 kHz and 500 kHz. The 3-dB frequency is often called the amplifier bandwidth. ^TFamp(fe) = (6-49) Since common modules have both pre-amplifiers and post-amplifiers, the total response is MTF - MTF MTF amps л pre- amp post-amp • (6-50) 6.4.4. ELECTRICAL FILTERS The common module amplifier bandwidth is usually much broader than that required by the signal. The signal is assumed to be band-limited by the detector spatial frequency cutoff. Low pass filters are added to limit the noise bandwidth and, ideally, match it to the signal bandwidth. These filters can be in many forms. A system may have just one or may have several in series. The common module design typically has a filter on the pre-amplifier and one on the post-amplifier. The exact location of the filters in the circuit is at the discretion of the designer.
With the desire to amplify all signals and minimize noise, a rule-of-the- thumb suggests that the "ideal" low pass filter should be matched to the detector cutoff. Here it is assumed that the signal is limited by the detector cutoff, fdco (Figure 6-22). The "ideal" filter is filter when fe< — a (6-51) MTFfll{er = 0 elsewhere . While the ideal filter is useful for illustrative purposes, it is not physically realizable. The MTF for a N-pole, low pass filter (also called a N-pole Butterworth filter) (FLIR92 ARG-13) is MTFfilter{fe) = (6-52) When N—>co, it becomes an ideal filter. The precise filter selected depends upon the application. Since the eye tends to ignore high frequency noise, a higher cutoff may be used. On the other hand, electronic detection is very sensitive to noise and a lower cutoff may be appropriate. Figure 6-22. Ideal low pass filter as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx !fdco . The electrical response has been referred to object spatial frequency. The ideal filter does not attenuate any signal passed by the detector. Common module systems are AC coupled to remove the large uninformative background. The difference between the target and its background
is amplified and displayed. AC coupling is achieved with a high-pass filter, The AC cut on frequency should be as low as possible to minimize AC coupling artifacts (e.g., droop and overshoot). For a N-pole, high-pass filter used for AC coupled systems (FLIR92 ARG-12) MTFfiUer{fe) = (6-53) Example 6-4 FILTER BAND WIDTHS The purpose of the low pass filter is to limit the noise bandwidth without significantly affecting the signal. The ideal filter, shown in Figure 6-22, will pass the entire signal. Physically realizable circuits do not have the ideal shape and therefore there is a tradeoff between signal fidelity and noise bandwidth. Many texts suggest that a bandwidth equal to one-half of the reciprocal of the detector dwell time will pass most of the signal energy. However, to faithfully reproduce the signal temporal characteristics, a wider bandwidth is required. When using a single-pole, low pass filter, a range of bandwidths may be bounded by (6-54) Usmg the system described in Example 6-2, r(hvell = 27.78 ps,/eC/ = 18 kHz and/eC2 = 72 kHz. Figure 6-23 illustrates the response, MTFdetectorMTFfllter, for these single- pole filters. An electrical filter response is usually plotted in log-log coordinates. Since linear coordinates are used, the shape of the MTF curve looks different than that shown in electrical engineering texts (where log-log plots are used). While a single-pole filter with feC2 = 72 kHz does not significantly affect the signal, it does produce an excessive noise bandwidth because the noise bandwidth is proportional to MTFfllter Vortman and Bar-Lev16 provided a formal approach to filter optimization. High order Butterworth filters can approximate the ideal filter characteristics. But these filters increase circuit complexity and cost.
Figure 6-23. MTFdetectorMTFfllter for two single-pole, low pass filters. When fe3(lB = 72 kHz, the signal is only slightly degraded but the noise bandwidth may be excessive. 6.5. LEDS In a common module system, the LEDs are modeled (FLIR92 ARG-16) as rectangular shaped emitters OTFLED (Л ) = sine (aLED fx), (6-55) where ar Fn is the LED angular subtense that is determined by the LED size and the effective focal length of the visual optics lens system. 6.6. VISUAL OPTICS The visual optics couples the output of the LEDs to the eye. It effectively places the LEDs at infinity for comfortable viewing. The appropriate functional form of OTFoptics is used for the visual optics. Here, Xave is the average wavelength of the LED radiation. 6.7. EYE RESPONSE The sine wave response (SWR) is used as an approximation to the eye- brain MTF. The SWR depends on diffraction by the pupil, aberrations of the lens, finite size of the photoreceptors, ocular tremor, and neural interconnections within the retina and brain. Diffraction and aberrations vary with overall luminance,
monitor brightness, and chromatic composition of the light. Since the retina is composed of rods and cones of varying densities, the location and size of the object significantly affect the SWR. The usual measurement is to determine the minimum contrast required to just perceive a target. The sine wave response is the inverse of the contrast demand curve normalized to unity. It is sometimes called the human visual system MTF or HVS-MTF. The SWR ignores spatial noise, background luminance, angular orientation, and exposure time. Each of these parameters significantly affects the interpretation of image visibility. The MTF in the purest sense is noise independent but the eye's response is very sensitive to spatial and temporal noise. Therefore, the SWR is only an approximation to the true response. Furthermore, the overall population exhibits large variations in response. Any MTF approximation used for the eye therefore is only a crude approximation and probably represents the largest uncertainty in the overall MTF analysis approach. Factors that affect observer performance include angular subtense of the monitor (usually selected to reduce raster effects), minimum subtense of the target, target- background contrast, brightness of the background immediately around the target, overall illumination, gamma of the monitor, observation time, and dynamic range of the monitor. Visual psychophysical data can be found in texts by Farrell and Booth17 and Biberman.18 6.7.1. CONVERSION: EYE SPATIAL FREQUENCY to SPATIAL FREQUENCY The spatial frequency presented to the eye depends upon the monitor size, W, and the distance the observer is from the monitor, R, and the electronic zoom, Z (if present). In the visual psychophysical literature, feye has units of cycles/deg A x 2 tan-1 ------------- I 2x17.45хЯ^Их Л \ Л- (6-56) The factor, 17.45, converts degrees to mrad. The small angle approximation may nofbe valid since the observer can get arbitrarily close to the monitor. However, it is appropriate when the eye is centered on the monitor center and the target is small. Here,
eye 17 AS* HFOV I R) (6-57) where W/R is the visual angle subtended by monitor. The system magnification is M 1 sys FOV subtended by observer W Z HFOV ” R HFOV * (6-58) Then, for small angles feye M 1 sys (6-59) Although early common module systems did not have electronic zoom, it is included here for completeness. Electronic zoom may be used in any system that digitally processes the video signal. These conversions assume that there is no distortion in either the imaging system field-of-view or the monitor. 6.7.2. EYE MTF The eye's detection capability depends upon the visual angle subtended by the target size and the distance from the monitor to the observer. As shown in Figure 6-24, in the absence of noise, the eye's contrast threshold is characteristi- cally J-shaped. The eye is most sensitive to periodic targets whose spatial frequencies19 range between 3 and 8 cycles/deg. The decrease in sensitivity at low frequencies is due to the eye's inhibitory signal processing component. Spatial Frequency (Cycles/Deg) Figure 6-24. Representative observer contrast threshold curve. LT and Ln are the target and background luminances respectively.
Various researchers modeled the inverse of the contrast threshold curve and labeled this the MTF (Figure 6-25). MTF values for spatial frequencies less than 0.5 cycles/deg are simple extrapolations and should not be considered as accurate. Nill20 recommended 0.19 + 0.81 (6-60) Schulze21 recommended -0.1138Д,е _ е-0.325Д,в (6-61) the Campbell-Robson data22 can be approximated by -1-4 logj„ MTFeye(feye)^10 L J eye fpeak (6-62) and deJong and Bakker21 used -.2 M7^(AjJ~sin2 (6-63) Since there is significant interest is in detecting small targets, or equivalently, seeing detail, only the high frequency (feye > fpeak) has been modeled by several researchers. That is, they neglected the low frequency inhibitory response. Komfeld and Lawson24 (FLIR92 ARG-25) suggested that when ocular tremors are included, the MTF can be represented by y-, feye MTFeye(feye)*e~ ™ , (6-64) where Г is a light-level dependent eye response factor that was presented in tabular form25 by Ratches et. al. Figure 6-26 shows the data and a 3rd order polynomial fit given by г = 1.444 - 0.344log(s) + 0.039log2 («)+ 0.00197 log3 (s), (6-65) and В is the monitor brightness in foot-lamberts.
Figure 6-25. Various mathematical approximations to the eye's MTF. Figure 6-26. Gamma variation. The squares are the data25 given in Ratches et. al. and the smooth curve is the 3rd order approximation. LLoyd26 suggested the eye's line spread function can be modeled as a Gaussian function whose MTF is MTF^ 2 (6-66)
where 0.0115 < < 0.0172. Figure 6-27 illustrates these representations. Considering the large variation in observer responses, these curves have a similar shape when f^e > fpeak. The original NVL 1975 model25 and FLIR92 use the Kornfeld-Lawson eye model. This model was validated by the U.S. Army when detecting tank-sized targets at modest ranges. This translates into modest spatial frequencies. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/deg) Figure 6-27 Gaussian, Kornfeld-Lawson, and Mill's eye model. The Gaussian curves illustrate veye = 0.0115 and veye = 0.0172. For mid to high spatial frequencies (6 to 16 cycles/mrad) the curves are similar to within a multiplicative factor. With the introduction of NVTherm29 (which accounts for sampling effects), NVL suggested an eye model introduced by Overington’ and used by Barten.31 The overall eye response depends upon several elements: pupil, retina, and tremor: MTF = MTF , MTF MTF ivi 11 eye ivi 11 retinaivii l tremor • (6-67) The pupil MTF is where MTFpupil{feye) = enp - 2.504/eje pupil f pupil = exP (3.663- 0.026lD2upil logpupil) ’ (6-68) (6-69) and
N = pupil 0.7155 + 0.277 ’D pupil (6-70) The pupil diameter depends upon the display brightness В (units of foot-lamberts). For monocular viewing logg Dpupil = -9.011 +13.25 e 21-082 . (6-71) For binocular viewing, the pupil diameter is reduced by 0.5 mm DpupU = -9.511 + 13.25/2' »82 . (6-72) The retina and tremor MTFs are MTF • (f )-e °-01179-f^1,21 11 retina eye ) e (6-73) and 2 MTF ( f ) - e °'001458Л^ 1 J tremor \J eye' (6-74) Figure 6-28 compares the NVTherm model to the other models. Figure 6-28. NVTherm eye model (binocular viewing with В = 50 Ft-L) compared to Nill, Kornfeld-Lawson, and Gaussian (aeye= 0.0172) models.
The MRT should follow, in part, the shape of the eye's threshold curve. Measured MRT data exhibits departures from the predicted MRT when using the NVL 1975 model and FLIR92 for low and high spatial frequencies. As a result deJong23 and others27,28 suggested that better MRT predictions are possible when using an MTF similar to that shown in Figure 6-25. The Komfeld-Lawson and the NVTherm eye model appear to follow the other eye models (to within a multiplicative factor) for mid-range spatial frequencies. This multiplicative factor becomes a normalization issue for the MRT. Insufficient data exists to say with certainty which eye model is best. Because of this uncertainty, range predictions cannot be placed on an absolute scale. All analyses, no matter which eye model is used, must only be used for comparative performance purposes. Two operational scenarios are possible: the observer is allowed to move his head or the head is fixed in space. Since the eye's detection capability depends upon the angular subtense of the target, head movement may provide different results than if the head is fixed in space. In the laboratory, the distance to the monitor is not usually specified or limited in any way. To maximize detection capability (stay on the minimum of the contrast threshold curve), an observer subconsciously moves toward the monitor to perceive small targets and further away to see larger targets. By allowing the observer to adjust his viewing distance to the monitor, he apparently optimizes several interrelated detection criteria that include striving for apparent edge sharpness and maximizing his perceived signal- to-noise ratio. This apparently results in an equal detection capability for all spatial frequencies such that eye's contrast sensitivity approaches a constant. This results in a nearly constant MTF that is called the "non-limiting eye MTF" (FLIR92 ARG-24) MTFeye (feye ) = 1 when movement is allowed . (6-75) 6.7.3. NOISY IMAGES Although the contrast threshold is reported as J-shaped, the actual shape depends upon the noise power spectral density.32'34 If the noise is restricted to certain spatial frequencies, then the detection of targets of comparable spatial frequencies becomes more difficult. The observer’s ability to see a specific spatial frequency target depends upon the noise content in the neighborhood of that spatial frequency (Figure 6-29). Low spatial noise frequency components will interfere with detecting low frequency targets (large objects). Mid-spatial frequency noise increases the contrast threshold curve at mid-frequencies and so on. These noise factors are included in the FLIR92 model via the three-dimensi- onal noise model. As such, they are not included in the eye MTF.
Frequency Noise Noise Only High Frequency Noise Only No Noise о о Mid Frequency Noise Only 100 Spatial Frequency (cycles/deg) Figure 6-29. Effects of spectral noise on the contrast threshold. The MRT should approximately follow the shape of the contrast threshold curve. 6.8. SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLE: RANDOM MOTION EFFECTS A common module FLIR (0.1 mrad) has the following characteristics: an effective focal length = 20 inches, input aperture = 10 inches, or = 50 grad rms, scanner efficiency = 80%, frame rate = 30 Hz, interlace ratio = 2:1, detectors array = 180x1 elements, detector element size of 0.002x0.002" on 0.004" centers, low pass filter with a 3 dB point of 21.6 kHz, and horizontal field-of-view = 48 mrad. What is the system’s horizontal MTF at the output of the pre-amplifier? What component limits the system MTF? SinceXco=Z>o/2 = (25.4 mm/10 pm) = 25.4 cycles/mrad, The detector DAS is a = 0.002/20 = 0.1 mrad and MTFdetector (fx ) = sinc (0-1 fx ) • (6-77) The 2:1 interlace ratio provides 360 IR lines. The scan velocity is
AF N rJ scene ^sc 48 x 30 x 360 _ mrad = 3600 180x0.8------------5 (6-78) Then ffco =fe3dBN=21600/3 600 = 6 cycles/mrad and MTFamp(fx) = (6-79) The system MTF is plotted in Figure 6-30. Random motion is the limiting MTF. As shown in Figure 6-16, when the rms value of the random motion is greater than 10% of the DAS, the system MTF is affected. It is essential to reduce jitter for system improvement. If the random motion is reduced to 10 grad though appropriate hardware design, the system MTF increases (Figure 6-31). While further reduction in random motion will improve the MTF, it may not be cost-effective to do it. It is usually cost-effective to make all subsystem MTFs equal over the spatial frequencies of interest. Here the random motion need only be 20 grad (Figure 6-32). Since each component provides roughly the same MTF, it is now prudent to increase the MTF by making the change that is least costly. Figure 6-30. Component and system MTFs. cr = 50 grad. Stabilization (high frequency jitter) is the limiting MTF. The detector cutoff at 10 cycles/mrad is assumed to be the system cutoff.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 6-31. Component and system MTFs. vr = 10 prad. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 6-32. Component and system MTFs. o; = 20 grad. The subsystem MTFs are approximately equal over the region of interest: zero to fdc0. 6.9. CENTRAL LIMIT THEOREM The central limit theorem suggests that the product of a series of monotonically decreasing subsystem MTFs will tend toward a Gaussian shape. Specifically, the MTFs need to be roughly equivalent with approximately the same cutoff values. This applies to MTFs such as MTTontic„ MTFtconstant, and MTTfi|ter. It jl jl uptivs" iCAjiibidiii? niter does not apply to MTFdetector. When the system is not detector-limited the Gaussian representation may be adequate for back-of-the-envelope calculations where asys is simply a system constant and has no physical meaning.
6.10. REFERENCES 1 FLIR92 uses many of the equations given here. ARG-1 refers to Equation 1 in FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model, Analyst's Reference Guide, Document RG5008993, Ft. Belvoir, VA, January 1993. 2. R. R. Shannon, "Aberrations and their Effect on Images," in Geometric Optics, Critical Review of Technology, R. Fischer, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 531, pp. 27-37, (1985). 3. M Bom and E. Wolf, Principles of Optics, 3rd edition, pp. 468-469, Pergamon Press, New York (1965). 4. L. Levi and R. Austing, "Tables of the MTF of a Defocussed Perfect Lens," Applied Optics, Vol. 7(5), pp. 967-974 (1968) and Errata, Applied Optics, Vol. 7(11), pg. 2258 (1968). 5. In "A Useful Optical Engineering Approximation," Optics & Photonics News, pp. 34-37, (April 1994), R. R. Shannon references W. H. Steel, "The Defocused Image of Sinusoidal Gratings," Optica Acta, Vol. 3(2), pp. 65-74 (1956). 6. W. H. Press, В. P. Flannery, S. A. Teukolsky, and W. T. Vettling, Numerical Recipes, pp. 172-173, Cambridge University Press, New York, (1989). 7. J. M. Hilkert, M. Bowen and J. Wang, "Specifications for Image Stabilization Systems" in Tactical Infrared Systems, J. W. Tuttle, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1498, pp. 24-38 (1991). 8. G. Conrad, "Reconnaissance System Performance Predictions Through Image Processing," in Airborne Reconnaissance XIV, P A. Henkel, F. R. LaGesse, and W. W. Schurter, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1342, pp. 138-145 (1990). 9. D. Wulich and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting From Mechanical Vibrations," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(6), pp. 529-533 (1987). 10. M. Fisher, O. Hadar, and N. S. Kopeika, "Numerical Calculation of Modulation Transfer Functions for Low Frequency Mechanical Vibrations," in Airborne ReconnaissanceXIV, P A. Henkel, F. R. LaGesse, and W. W. Schurter, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1342, pp. 72-83 (1990). ILS. Rudoler, O. Hadar, M. Fisher, and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting from Mechanical Vibrations, Part II: Experiment," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(5), pp. 577-589 (1991). 12. O. Hadar, F. Fisher, and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting from Mechanical Vibrations, Part III: Numerical Calculation of Modulation Transfer Function," Optical Engineering, Vol. 31(3), pp. 581-589 (1992). 13. O. Hadar, I. Dror, and N. S. Kopeika, "Image Resolution Limits Resulting from Mechanical Vibrations, Part IV: Real-time Numerical Calculation of Optical Transfer Functions and Experimental Verification," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(2), pp. 566-578 (1994). 14. A System Engineering Approach to Imaging, N. S. Kopeika, pp. 411-440, SPIE Optical Engineering Press, Bellingham, WA (1998). 15. W. N. Peters and D. Schribner, "Transformation for the Unified Linear Analysis of Optics and Electronics," Applied Optics, Vol. 24(9), pp. 1247-1248 (1985). 16 J. Vortman and A. Bar-Lev, "Optimal Electronic Response for Parallel Thermal Viewing Systems," Optical Engineering, Vol. 23(4), pp. 431-435 (1984). 17. R. J. Farrell and J. M. Booth, Design Handbook for Imagery Interpretation Equipment, Reprinted with corrections, Report DI80-19063-1, Boeing Aerospace Company, Seattle Wash, February 1984. 18. L. M. Biberman, ed., Perception of Displayed Information, Plenum Press, New York (1973). 19. В. O. Hultgren, "Subjective Quality Factor Revisited," in Human Vision and Electronic Imaging: Models, Methods and Applications, В E. Rogowitz and J. P. Allebach, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol 1249, pp. 12-22 (1990). 20. N. Nill, "A Visual Model Weighted Cosine Transform for Image Compression and Quality Measurements," IEEE Trans Comm, Vol. 33(6), pp. 551-557 (1985). 21. T. J. Schulze, "A Procedure for Calculating the Resolution of Electro-Optical Systems," in Airborne Reconnaissance XIV, P A. Henkel, F. R. LaGesse, and W. W. Schurter, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1342, pp. 317-327, (1990).
22. F. W. Campbell and J. G. Robson, "Application of Fourier Analysis to the Visibility of Gratings," J. Physiol. Vol. 197, pp. 551-566 (1968). 23. A. N. deJong and S. J. M. Bakker, "Fast and Objective MRTD Measurements," in Infrared Systems - Design and Testing, P. R. Hall and J. S. Seeley, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 916, pp. 127-143 (1988) 24. G. H. Komfeld and W. R. Lawson, "Visual Perception Model," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 61(6), pp. 811-820 (1971). 25. J. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," US Army Electronics Command Report ECOM Report 7043, pg. 11, Ft. Monmouth, NJ (1975). 26. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging, pg. 125, Plenum Press, New York (1975). 27. M. A. Karim, M. L. Gao, and S. H. Zheng, "Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference Model: a Critical Evaluation," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11), pp. 1788-1796 (1991). 28. J. G. Vortman and A. Bar-Lev, "Improved Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference Model for Infrared Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(6), pp. 492-498 (1987). 29 R. G. Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and B. O'Kane, "Sampled Imaging Sensor Design using the MTF Squeeze Model to Characterize Spurious Response," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and TestingX, G. C. Holst ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 61-73 (1999). 30.1 . Overington, Vision and Acquisition, Pentech Press, London (1976). 31. P. Barten, "The SQRI as a Measure for VDU Image Quality," Society of Information Display 92 Digest, pp. 867-870 (1992). 32. S. Daly, "Application of a Noise Adaptive Contrast Sensitivity Function in Image Data Compression," Optical Engineering, Vol. 29(8), pp. 977-987 (1990). 33. H. Pollehn and H. Roehrig, "Effect of Noise on the Modulation Transfer Function of the Visual Channel," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 60, pp. 842-848 (1970). 34. A. Van Meeteren and J. M. Valeton, "Effects of Pictorial Noise Interfering With Visual Detection," Journal of the Optical Society of America A, Vol. 5(3), pp. 438-444 (1988). EXERCISES 1. Plot the back-of-the envelope approximation OTFdifr (Equation 6-9) and the theoretical OTFdiff (Equation 6-5) on the same graph. For what spatial frequencies is the approximation valid? 2. Plot Equation 6-22 using the approximation given in Equation 6-23. Assume a peak-to-peak wave-front error of 0.75 waves. Compare the plot with Figure 6-6. 3. Plot MTFopticsMTFdetector for when//cy/,co equals 0.2, 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, and 2.0. Is there an optimum ratio? Is there an advantage to using an infinitely small detector or is there a reasonable limit on detector size? 4. Why would you design a system where fiJfoco = 0.5? (Hint: review Section 3.1.2., Extended Source). 5. List three causes for (a) linear motion, (b) sinusoidal motion, and (c) random motion.
6. A common module system operating in the LWIR spectral region has an 8-inch aperture and a DAS of 0.1 mrad. Calculate MTFdiffMTFdetectorMTFrandom at 4, 6, and 8 cycles/mrad. Let ur vary from 0 to 50% of the DAS in increments of 5%. Plot the MTF for each spatial frequency as a function of ur in both linear and logarithmic coordinates. Is there an optimum value (maximum acceptable value) for <7r? 7. Repeat Exercise 6 but assume the optical diameter is 4 inches. Comment on the differences between the results. 8. What is the required scan velocity for an array consisting of 480x4 elements. The frame rate is 30 Hz and the scan efficiency is 0.80. The HFOV is 48 mrad. The DAS is 0.1 mrad. What is the detector dwell time? 9. Plot the MTF for a N-pole Butterworth filter (Equation 6-52 for N = 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10. Also plot the ideal filter (Equation 6-51). How many poles (what value of N) are required to approximate the ideal filter? Assume both have the same cutoff fe3dB' 10 The high pass filter (Equation 6-53) is often used to reduce detector 1/f noise. The 1/f noise knee may vary from a few hertz to 1 kHz. Plot MTFopticsMTFdetectorMTFfllter for the system described in Example 6-2. The optical aperture is 10 inches. Let fe3dB be 10, 100, 300, 600, and 1000 Hz. What effect does fe3dB have on the system MTF?
7 EOMUX SYSTEMS The common module system described in Chapter 6 permitted only one observer to view the imagery. To provide multiple observers access, a vidicon scanned the LED output. The vidicon converted parallel scanned infrared information into a serial data stream consistent with the monitor requirements. As such, the vidicon provided scan conversion. To offset any degradation in MTF, a boost amplifier can be added in the video chain. MTFoptics, MTFmotion, MTFdetector, MTFtconstant, MTFamp, MTFflIter, MTFled , MTFvoptics , and MTFeye are identical to those described in Chapter 6. The electro-optically multiplexed (EOMUX) system added the vidicon, boost and monitor (Figure 7-1). The pre-amplifier, post- amplifier, filters, and LEDs are matched to the detector and scan velocity whereas the vidicon and boost amplifier responses are matched to the monitor requirements. Careful electronic design insures that the circuitry has linear phase over the frequencies of interest. By using an MTF approach to model each subsystem, it is assumed that each subsystem has linear phase. The equations provided in this chapter are found in many text books. Real circuit responses may deviate from these theoretical responses. The system analyst must consult with the electronic designers to insure that the circuits are modeled correctly. Telescope Detector Optics Figure 7-1. Electro-optically multiplexed (EOMUX) system. 7.1. VIDICON The vidicon scans the LED outputs in a manner consistent with monitor timing requirements. The vidicon converts the number of IR lines, Nscene, into the numbers of lines displayed on the monitor, Nmonitor. Implicit in the MTF is the conversion from input brightness on the vidicon to output voltage.
7.1.1. CONVERSION: VIDICON LINES TO SPATIAL FREQUENCY Vidicon tube response is typically given in units of lines referenced to the picture height (lines/РН). There are 2 TV lines per cycle. The conversion from lines, f^, to spatial frequency is: fM=2VFOVfx . (7-1) If the resolution is given simply as lines, it is assumed that the units are lines/PH. 7.1.2. VIDICON MTF Many imaging tubes can be modeled1 as MTFvidicon (7-2) where Fra is the value where MTF = e-1. The MTF is experimentally obtained for a variety of frequencies. A plot of -log(MTF) versus frequency becomes a straight line in logarithmic coordinates. Both Nv and Fres depend upon the particular device selected. Nv typically ranges from 1.1 to 2.1. When Nv = 2, the MTF is Gaussian distributed. Figure 7-2 illustrates three vidicon MTFs. Figure 7-3 provides the same MTF curves in linear coordinates. Vidicons typically have a gamma of about 0.6 and therefore are nonlinear. As a result, the MTF is only valid for small signals. Vidicons sometimes have a nonsymmetric MTF about Fres. Here, two exponents are used: Nvl and Nv2: / f — I J tvl I MTFvidicon = e when f^d <Frea, (7-3) and / f \^v2 I J tvl MTFvidicon = еГ'е' whenftvl > Frea • C7”4) When fh>[=Fres, MTF = e1 and the MTF is independent of Nv.
Figure 7-2. -Log(MTFvidicon) versus frequency (lines/РН) for three different tubes and a Gaussian distribution (Nv = 2). The values in parentheses are (Nv, Fres}. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (lines/PH) Figure 7-3. MTFvidicon versus frequency (lines/PH) for three different tubes and a Gaussian distribution. The values in parentheses are (Nv, Fres). 7.2. VIDEO AMPLIFIERS and FILTERS Both active circuits and tuned circuits can provide boost. Boost simply refers to any circuit whose MTF is greater than unity. It can compensate for almost any MTF degradation caused by other subsystems. In the early literature, each subsystem was called an aperture. Therefore, any circuit that improved a subsystem MTF provided "aperture correction." Each electronic filter must be carefully designed to provide a linear phase over the range of frequencies of interest. Nonlinearities will cause signal distortion.
7.2.1. CONVERSION: VIDEO FREQUENCY TO SPATIAL FREQUENCY Boost amplifiers and video filters operate on the video signal. The bandwidth of these filters must be consistent with monitor requirements. The video frequency,/,, is related to spatial frequency by HFOV t J' * line (7-5) where tline is the active line time of the monitor. Table 7-1 gives some nominal values. The actual values may vary by 10% from the nominal value. Table 7-1 STANDARD VIDEO TIMING Standard Number of active lines, N monitor Active line time, tlme 525 lines (RS 170) 485 52.25 ps 875 lines 809 31.1 ps 625 lines (European standard) 577 53 ps 7.2.2. BOOST CIRCUITRY The boost amplifier can be an active analog circuit whose peaking compensates for any specified MTF roll-off. Originally, boost was achieved with a time-delay feedback circuit because it had a linear phase. Today, a variety of circuits are available. Its MTF (FLIR92 ARG-14) is: MTFboost 1 - COS Л (7-6) K \ 1N > where К is the boost amplitude, N is the boost order (usually 7V=1) and/oorf is the boost frequency. When K= 1, no boost occurs.
Figure 7-4 illustrates the boost MTF for several values of К with 7V= 1. When used with the all the other subsystem MTFs, the resultant MTFsystem is typically less than one for all spatial frequencies. If the boost amplitude is too large, ringing may occur. Since the boost circuitry modifies a serial data stream, ringing will only occur in the horizontal direction. Tuned filters can also provide boost: (7-7) where Q is the quality factor and equal to boost amplitude when/, = fboost. A net lead circuit can also provide boost. The boost frequency is determined by the relationship between the flead and the other subsystem MTFs. (7-8) NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 7-4. MTFboost for several different boost amplitudes as a function of fjfboost with N = 1. Excessive boost will cause ringing on edges in the horizontal direction.
7.2.3. VIDEO AMPLIFIERS The video may have other filters to limit the bandwidth. Section 6 4.4. Electrical Filters listed several different types. For example, in the video domain, the N-pole Butterworth is MTFvid = (7-9) The 3-dB electrical frequency is often called the video bandwidth. 7.3. MONITORS The monitor MTF is a composite MTF that includes both the internal amplifier response and the CRT phosphor response. Implicit in the MTF is the conversion from input voltage to output monitor brightness. The same functional form can describe vidicon and monitor MTFs: ftvl TV MTF = e л monitor res (7-Ю) Although not explicitly stated, Equation 7-2 and Equation 7-8 imply radial symmetry: The MTF is the same in both the vertical and horizontal directions. If Fres is measured in the vertical direction, then it should be multiplied by the monitor aspect ratio to obtain the resolution in the horizontal direction. If the monitor is spot size limited and spot size is Gaussian then 2 MTF = e * monitor c 2-.^. raster I mnm nlf/rn r-p ( Zoom (7-И) When the electronic zoom is unity, the equation reduces to FLIR92 ARG-21. Manufacturers of monitors use different methods to characterize monitor resolution. They include (1) TV limiting response where the MTF is equal to 0.025, (2) the value where the MIT is 10%, (3) when the luminance is down 3 dB, (4) shrinking raster, (5) when the output drops to 50% of the amplitude, (6) the value where the MTF is 50%, and (7) where the amplitude is e'1. Table 7-2 provides the approximate relationships between these measures. For example, if the resolution is expressed as the TV limiting resolution, 7Vft,, then апюп = 1/(2.31
With televisions, each line is created by an electron beam and the phosphor brightness is assumed to be Gaussian. If the individual lines are separated, there are dark bands between the lines that create a modulation whose frequency is fraster (raster frequency). Using the Nyquist criterion, fraster requires two times more lines than the number available on the monitor. This fictitious number is often used for monitor calculations. The literature relates monitor resolution to this fictitious number ("half-cycles"). Therefore, there is a factor of two difference between the values shown in Table 7-2 and the literature.2 Table 7-2 MONITOR CONVERSION FACTORS LINES to a GAUSSIAN DISTRIBUTION Resolution metric (lines) Conversion TV limiting 2.-? 1 ^ШОП MTF1TO 2.9 j crmon TV3dB 3. j3 ctmon Shrinking raster Amplitude = 50% mtf50% □ .3 J crпюп Amplitude = e-1 5.66 ctmon If the TV limiting resolution is not known, it is assumed to be equal to the number of monitor lines /V = N 1 1 tv 11 monitor (7-12) and/„„„= VFOVfx. Table 7-1 provides some typical Nmonitor values. For EOMUX, EMUX, and staring systems, the user typically supplies the monitor. Thus, at least two calculations are necessary. One for laboratory measurements and one for the monitor used during actual operation. If other monitors are used for field testing, then those monitor characteristics must be used for performance predictions. The system should not be monitor-limited. High resolution monitors do not offer any "extra" resolution for the entire system. Rather, high resolution monitors just insure that all the information available is displayed.
A side issue here is whether the raster is visually obvious. It may be better to accept poorer vertical MTF to suppress the raster pattern. An obvious pattern is disturbing to the observer and he will claim the image quality is poor. 7.4. SYSTEM DESIGN EXAMPLE The system described in Section 6-8 has been EO multiplexed. The LEDs, relay lens, vidicon, boost filter, and monitor MTFs are unity over the spatial frequencies of interest. A stabilized mirror reduces the high frequency jitter to is 20 prad. The 14-inch square monitor has a brightness of 10 fL. The observer is initially at a distance of 29 inches but then moves to 13.45 inches to see more detail. What is the effect of observer viewing distance on the horizontal MTF? , . FOV subtended by observer / \ z Magnification =-------------------------[electronic zoom) (7-13) System FOV Zoom. u sys (7-14) At the 29 inch viewing distance, 0eye - 2 tan ' D 2R 480 шгш/ and 0sys=48mrad . (7-15) With no electronic zoom, Msys= 10. Using Equation 6-65, when В = 10, Г = 1.07. Using the Komfeld-Lawson eye model (Equation 6-64) (7-16) Figure 7-5 illustrates all the subsystem components considered. Here, the observer is too far from the monitor and his eye limits his ability to see detail (high spatial frequencies). Three choices are available to improve system performance: (a) move closer, (b) use a larger monitor, or (c) use electronic zoom. Electronic zoom is equivalent to moving closer to the monitor. However, excessive zoom may create an unacceptable blocky image
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 7-5. Observer 29 inches from monitor. MTFoptics, MTFt,ctccl0„ MTFoptics, MTFmotion, and MTFfilKr are identical with the MTFs given in Figure 6-33. The observer's eye MTF limits the system MTF. At 13.45 inches, eye = 2 tan 1 = 960 mrad (7-17) and Msys = 20. As shown in Figure 7-6, the MTFs of all the subsystems are approximately equal. Therefore to improve performance further, modify the subsystem that is the least costly to change. Figures 7-5 and 7-6 assume that the observer is at a fixed distance from the monitor. With head movement MTFeye = 1 and the overall system MTF is shown in Figure 6-32. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 7-6. Observer 13.45 inches from monitor.
7.5. REFERENCES 1. C. B. Johnson, "A Method for Characterizing Electro-Optical Device Modulation Transfer Functions," Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 14(6), pp. 413-415 (1970). 2. L. M. Biberman, "Image Quality," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. M. Biberman, ed., pp. 16-19, Plenum Press, New York (1973). EXERCISES 1. A vidicon manufacturer reported that the MTF is 0.8, 0.5, and 0.2 at 200, 500, and 1000 lines respectively. What are Nv and Freft 2. A vidicon response is Gaussian. What is a if the MTF equals e'1 when the input is 800 lines? 3. An imaging system contams an array of 480x480 detector elements. The output is RS 170. Table 7-1 indicates that RS 170 displays 485 lines. What value should be used in Equation 7-10? 4. A common module system produces 360 independent IR lines. Its output is interpolated to produce 480 TV lines. What value should be used in Equation 7- 10? 5. A boost circuit has been added to the system described in Figure 7-5. The boost amplitude, K, is 4. Plot the resultant MTFsys when fboost is 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz, 5.51 MHz, 7.35 MHz, and 9.19 MHz. The HFOV is 48 mrad and the output is in an RS 170 format. Is there an optimum boost frequency? 6. An observer is free to move his head when viewing the imagery. Here, the non- limiting eye MTF is used. Repeat Exercise 6 but assume that the eye MTF is unity. Is there an optimum boost frequency? 7. Discuss the differences and similarities between the plots obtained from Exercise 6 and Exercise 7. 8. Using the system described in Figure 7-5, add a net lead circuit (Equation 7-6). Let fead be 0.92 MHz, 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz, 5.51 MHz and 7.35 MHz. Is there an optimum value for feaf> 9. Does boost alter the signal-to-noise ratio? If so why? If not, why not? What is the advantage of boost? 10. A technician has three monitors available with resolutions (TV limiting) of 300, 500, and 1000 lines. Which monitor would you recommend for the system described in Figure 7-5? The monitors cost $20, $500, and $5,000 respectively. Would you change your recommendation?
7.5. REFERENCES 1. C. B. Johnson, "A Method for Characterizing Electro-Optical Device Modulation Transfer Functions," Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 14(6), pp. 413-415 (1970). 2. L. M. Biberman, "Image Quality," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. M. Biberman, ed., pp. 16-19, Plenum Press, New York (1973). EXERCISES 1. A vidicon manufacturer reported that the MTF is 0.8, 0.5, and 0.2 at 200, 500, and 1000 lines respectively. What are Nv and Freft 2. A vidicon response is Gaussian. What is a if the MTF equals e'1 when the input is 800 lines? 3. An imaging system contams an array of 480x480 detector elements. The output is RS 170. Table 7-1 indicates that RS 170 displays 485 lines. What value should be used in Equation 7-10? 4. A common module system produces 360 independent IR lines. Its output is interpolated to produce 480 TV lines. What value should be used in Equation 7- 10? 5. A boost circuit has been added to the system described in Figure 7-5. The boost amplitude, K, is 4. Plot the resultant MTFsys when fboost is 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz, 5.51 MHz, 7.35 MHz, and 9.19 MHz. The HFOV is 48 mrad and the output is in an RS 170 format. Is there an optimum boost frequency? 6. An observer is free to move his head when viewing the imagery. Here, the non- limiting eye MTF is used. Repeat Exercise 6 but assume that the eye MTF is unity. Is there an optimum boost frequency? 7. Discuss the differences and similarities between the plots obtained from Exercise 6 and Exercise 7. 8. Using the system described in Figure 7-5, add a net lead circuit (Equation 7-6). Let fead be 0.92 MHz, 1.84 MHz, 3.67 MHz, 5.51 MHz and 7.35 MHz. Is there an optimum value for feaf> 9. Does boost alter the signal-to-noise ratio? If so why? If not, why not? What is the advantage of boost? 10. A technician has three monitors available with resolutions (TV limiting) of 300, 500, and 1000 lines. Which monitor would you recommend for the system described in Figure 7-5? The monitors cost $20, $500, and $5,000 respectively. Would you change your recommendation?
The "front-end" includes all the subsystems up to the DSC. Timing for these systems is matched to the signal requirements as determined by the optics, scanner and detector. The "back-end" includes all the subsystems after the DSC. Monitor requirements dictate the timing requirements for back-end subsystems. As technology evolved, it became common usage to separate the system into two major groups: pre-filter and post-filter. While these terms are appropriate for sampled-data systems, the terminology is used loosely for analog systems. Pre- filter MTFs are those that occur before sampling. The optics, detector spatial MTF, and image motion MTFs belong in this class. The post-filter MTFs are those that occur after the sampler. Noise filters, as the name implies, are those subsystems that modify the noise spectrum. Precisely which MTFs belong in which group depends upon the design and is also author dependent. After sampling, the data is simply an array of numbers residing in a memory. The data array is manipulated into a format that is consistent to the monitor requirements. For example, the common module system collects 360 independent infrared lines and most monitors require 480 lines. Expansion into 480 lines can be by achieved simply by replicating some lines or by a more complicated scheme such as bilinear interpolation. Similar processes may be employed for formatting the horizontal data. This process of data reformatting is called image reconstruction. The reconstructed data array is then clocked-out into a data stream that is consistent with the monitor timing requirements. Then the digital data passes through a digital-to-analog converter. Post-reconstruction filtering removes the blockiness associated with the D/А process. The post- reconstruction filter is sometimes simply called a reconstruction filter. 8.1. MOTION The effects of relative motion during the entire integration and interpretation process must be considered. Blur (MTF degradation) depends upon the amount of movement during the viewing (integration) time (See Section 6-3., Motion). There are two different integration times to be considered. For EMUX systems, the first integration time is the time to convert the analog data into digital data. Most systems used flash converters which means that the conversion takes place in less than 1 psec. Motion is usually negligible during this process and MTF « 1. Historically, EMUX systems employed a bi-directional scanner. Here, motion distorts the image: vertical lines may be serrated, mis-registration may occur field-to-field, and image size may vary depending upon the type of motion.
Machine vision systems, which typically operate on a single field of data, are not necessarily affected by the image motion seen by an observer. These systems are affected by the image distortion. Many test procedures analyze a single field of data. If this is done, MTFmotion will be approximately unity and this is precisely how the system operates without the observer. Single field analysis cannot include the eye integration factor. Image blur data is dependent upon the measurement technique selected.1 If using frame averaging, tint is proportional to the number of frames averaged. For the observer, each frame is overlaid on the monitor. Since each image is at a different location, the combined images will appear smeared on the monitor. It is the integration of the monitor (persistence of the phosphor) and the integration within the eye that creates the blur. For EMUX systems, the integration time is assumed to be equal to the eye integration time. Here tint = te^ 0.1 sec (See Section 19.2.2., SNRth and te). Thus, two separate system performance calculations are required for classical EMUX systems: one to predict laboratory values and one to predict field performance. For laboratory measurements, the system is typically placed on a vibration-isolated table so the motion may be considered negligible. Although machine vision analysis is not included in this text, the analyst must be aware of image motion effects on automatic target recognizers, target cuers, and any software embedded in the sensor that operates on a field or frame of data. For scanning integrating detectors, an additional MTF degradation may be present. It is due to charge accumulation during the finite integration time while scanning. For a perfectly motionless scene, scanning integrating detectors will still smear an edge. The linear smear MTF (FLIR92 ARG-5) is OTFlinear = sine (v /int fx ), (8-1) where tint is the detector integration time and v is the scan velocity. The function has the usual meaning: sinc(x)=sin(7ix)/(7ix). 8.2. DETECTOR Equation 6-25 provides the MTF for rectangular detectors. A TDI arrangement requires a highly linear scanning system so that the outputs of the TDI detectors are appropriately added. An error in the scan velocity degrades the MTF.
SPRITE detectors are more difficult to model due to diffusion broadening and the dependence upon bias voltage. Uncooled detectors (pyroelectrics) have the same spatial response as a rectangular detector but have a different electrical response. 8.2.1. TDI For common module systems and EOMUX systems, the LED outputs were scanned by the back face of the scanner. Therefore, any variation in scene dissection was exactly mimicked in the visible image. As such, those systems were relatively insensitive to scan velocity errors. TDI offers noise reduction by having the same area sampled by several detectors. If N detectors are in series, the SNR increases by Vn. For this concept to work, the electronic time delay must correspond precisely with the spatial distance between the elements. If there is a discrepancy in either sync pulse timing or the scan velocity, the output is smeared and this adversely affects the MTF. TDI misalignment degrades the detector2 MTF by MTFtdi - s\n(7iNTDIaerror NTDI Sin(7T«error f x) (8-2) where NTDI is the number of TDI elements and aerror is the effective angular error in aligning the samples. MTFtdi is simply the MTF of an averaging filter for Ntdi samples displaced aerror one relative to the next (see Section 8.3., MTFs in the Digital Domain). The effective sampling rate for sample summation is error (8-3) When aerror approaches zero, MTFtd1 approaches unity. Ns is the delay between the TDI samples expressed as the number of intervening samples, Av/v is the scan velocity error, and f. is the angular sampling frequency (Figure 8-2). For systems providing one sample per DAS,/s= \!as. Figure 8-3 portrays the MTF for four detectors for several different angular errors expressed as a function of error'
Figure 8-2 Definition of aerror and7Vv. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 8-3. MTF degradation due to mismatch between the scan velocity and the TDI sample rate expressed as a function of terror • ^TDI=^- Figure 8-4 illustrates the effect on scan velocity mismatch for four detectors with the detector MTF added. As the number of detectors increases, aerror must decrease significantly to avoid MTF degradation. Equivalently, scan linearity is a driving design consideration for TDI systems. For staggered arrays (Figure 8-5), two separate design considerations exist. The first is where only the detectors on a single line are considered as TDI elements. The second is with the registration between lines. Improper registration will cause serrations in vertical lines. While this is not a true MTF degradation, if the individual lines are below what the eye can resolve, the lines appear to blend so that improper registration may be considered an MTF degradation. Similarly, if line-to-line interpolation is used, serrations appear as a MTF degradation. Figure 8-5 illustrates the number of effective number of TDI elements that should be used
in Equation 8-2. Here, the effective number of TDI elements is the total horizontal extent of the array divided by Ns. This effective number is used only to assess the MTF degradation caused by scan velocity mismatch. For signal-to- noise ratio considerations, only the actual number of detectors on one line is used is used. Staggering effectively increases A7W and scan linearity becomes a dominant design consideration in these arrays. Fabrication constraints may ultimately limit the advantages of TDI. Figure 8-4. MTFdetectorMTFTDI as a function of aenw/DAS The spatial frequency is normalized to fyfdco. А'Пя^4. r*-Ns-> nsntdi (Effective) Figure 8-5. Effective number TDI elements in a staggered array. 8.2.2. SPRITE DETECTOR For SPRITES, the bias voltage is set so that the carrier drift velocity equals the image scan velocity. Most standard video systems employ four to 12 SPRITE elements. If more elements are used, the scan velocity decreases and the bias voltage must be similarly reduced. With SPRITES, the responsivity depends
on the bias voltage and low voltage reduces the responsivity. Although more detectors reduce noise in common module systems, the opposite is true in SPRITE based systems. The SPRITE detector MTF is affected by diffusion broadening of the minority carrier charge as it drifts down the element length. The SPRITE MTF is dependent upon the bias voltage3 and the detector geometry.4 If these detectors are long and have a tapered readout, the MTF can be approximated by MTFdetector ~ MTFeiement MTFdiffusion , (8-4) where MTFelement is a sine function due to the readout length. As a spatial detector, it would be appropriate to define the response by an OTF. When diffusion is added, the detector response tends to remain positive and therefore is labeled as an MTF. Then (FLIR92 ARG-4) MTFdetector ~ Sine (Lrd fx) p ’ (&-5) i+(2^e/x)2 where Lrd is the readout length in mrad. As of this writing, for most SPRITES, the readout length is 50 pm and then Lrd = (50 pm)/fl. The variable Q is the angular subtense of the ambipolar diffusion length. Since the ambipolar diffusion length is typically 25 pm, then Q = (25 pm)/fl. Other applications (such as line scanners) will require different scan velocities and therefore different bias voltage. These systems may have a detector MTF that is substantially different. Figure 8-6 illustrates the SPRITE MTF for a system with a 0.5-m focal length. Because of the MTF reduction caused by diffusion, electronic boost is used to compensate for the MTF loss.5 Diffusion broadening also makes it difficult to assign a DAS to a SPRITE detector. Anamorphic optics (focal length is different in the scan and cross scan directions) is also used to optimize SPRITE performance. Fredin6 presented a method to optimize the boost filter parameters along with the anamorphic ratio. Equation 8-5 provides the scan direction MTF. In the cross scan direction, the MTF is simply a sine function whose DAS is the detector's physical width divided by the effective focal length in the cross scan direction.
SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 8-6. SPRITE MTF. £„,= 50 pm, 2 = 25 pm, and/7=0.5 m. Diffusion broadening degrades the MTF. 8.2.3. UNCOOLED DETECTORS A pyroelectric detector has the same spatial frequency response as other rectangular detectors OTFdetector sillC (df f x ) . (8-6) The temporal response7 is composed of a thermal component and electrical component or MTFpyro ^TFfHermal MTFeieCtrical ’ MTFpyro bCTtfe________1 Vi+(2^,/j2 (8-7) (8-8) For scanning systems,vfx. For staring systems that have an internal chopper, fe is inversely related to the chopping frequency. The detector's thermal time constant, Tt, is equal to C _ heat capacity G thermal conductance
Pyroelectric detectors are inherently AC coupled. The response at zero frequency is zero and increases until /c~l/(27iTz) (Figure 8-7). The thermal time constant is dependent upon the thermal properties of the material and the detector size and thickness. The electrical time constant те depends upon the relationship between the detector's capacitance and resistance compared to the pre-amplifier capacitance and resistance. Figure 8-7. Electrical MTF for a typical pyroelectric detector. The time constants are tt = 0.1 s and te = 0.001 s. 8.3. MTFs in the DIGITAL DOMAIN Although MTFs are associated with sampling and digital processing, their effects are not seen until after the conversion into the analog domain. Sampling is nonlinear and, as a result, has no unique MTF. We shall ignore this distinction and use approximations for the MTFs. For system modeling purposes, we assigned average MTFs for some more common image processing algorithms. Because average MTFs are used, only an average system performance can be predicted. Performance can vary dramatically depending upon the target phase with respect to the sampling lattice. Sampling alters the MTF and affects image fidelity. Phasing effects between the sampling lattice and the location of the target introduce problems at nearly all spatial frequencies. This has been called8 sample-scene phase.
8.3.1. CONVERSION: SAMPLING FREQUENCY to SPATIAL FREQUENCY The sampling frequency, fse, in the electrical time domain is related to the time between samples, T, by se (8-10) Conversion to object space provides f N J se _ sample Js~ v ~ HFOV - DAS ’ (8-11) where Nsample is the number of samples across the horizontal field-of-view. The Nyquist frequency is one-half of the sample frequency: fn=fJ2 or fne=fse/2. Since the HFOV is much greater than the DAS, N J sample HFOV (8-12) 8.3.2. SAMPLE-SCENE PHASE Sampled data systems are not shift invariant and do not have a unique MTF.8'13 In general, the "MTF" is14 (8-13) £ T ’ where 0X is the phase angle between the target and the sampling lattice. For example, when/, =fn , the MTF is a maximum when 0X = 0 (in-phase) and a minimum when 0X = л/2 (out-of-phase). To approximate a median value for phasing, 0X is set to л/4. Here, approximately one-half of the time the MTF will be higher and one-half of the time the MTF will be lower. The median sampling MTF (FLIR92 ARG-6) is 4 MTFphase =cos у A =cos 5 A Jse ) I2 Js J
At Nyquist frequency (fx=fn =fJT), MTFphase is 0.707. This is the Kell factor so often reported when specifying the resolution of monitors. An average sampling MTF is sometimes represented by MTFphase (8-15) Figure 8-8 illustrates the difference between the two equations. Since these are average type MTFs, they may be considered approximately equal over the range of interest (zero to the Nyquist frequency). For laboratory measurements where the target phase is adjusted to obtain the maximum output, MTFphase= 1. Figure 8-8. Average and median scene-sample phase MTFs normalized to fe lfse. The MTF is defined only up to the Nyquist frequency. 8.3.3. DIGITAL FILTERS There are many image reconstruction algorithms. Only a few of these can be described mathematically in closed-form and only these can be included in an end-to-end system performance model. The performance of the remaining algorithms can be inferred only by viewing the system output for a few representative inputs. Since the system is not spatially invariant, predicting system performance when viewing any other target is pure conjecture. Digital filters provide any variety of pass bands to modify the frequency features of a digital stream of data. There exists many software design programs
that are easy to use. Rather than discuss the theoretical procedure to design the filter, we will discuss the relationship between spatial frequency requirements and the inputs to the digital filter programs. These are one-dimensional filters that operate on a serial stream of data. Two-dimensional filters are more difficult to analyze. If the two-dimensional filter function is separable [i.e., the vertical and horizontal operations are independent: MTF(£ , fy) = MTF(/v)MTF(/p], then the horizontal filter affects only the system horizontal MTF and the vertical filter only affects the system vertical MTF. Vertical digital filters are discussed in Chapter 11, Vertical MTF. To use most programs, you must first specify the allowable tolerance on the output waveform. Figure 8-9 illustrates a tolerance scheme that may be employed for a low pass filter. A transition band that allows a smooth transition from the pass band to the stop band must be defined. As the width of the pass band becomes narrower, filter complexity generally increases. Like wise, in the pass band and stop band, there must be an allowable tolerance in which the filter exhibits some ripple. As the tolerance becomes smaller, again, filter complexity increases. In the pass band the tolerance total width is 2<5P In the stop band, the total tolerance is <52. The stop band may either be always positive or the filter response may fluctuate about zero with an excursion of ±<52 /2. After designing a filter, a plot of the frequency response will verify that the correct filter has been designed. Frequency Figure 8-9. Tolerance limits for an approximation to an ideal low pass filter.
Digital filters have a symmetric response in which they repeat themselves at harmonics of the sampling frequency (fs, 2fs, 3f, ...). The highest frequency of interest is the Nyquist frequency (Figure 8-10). 2 T -0.5 NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 8-10. Digital filter frequency response. The filter response is symmetrical about the Nyquist frequency and repeats at multiples of the sampling frequency. MTFs greater than unity are possible. NOTE: Electrical filter response is a complex-valued function. The ’’negative MTF" in Figure 8-10 represents a phase change of л radians. It is convenient to plot the "negative MTF" rather than provide two graphs: the MTF that is always positive and the PTF. There are two classes15 of digital filters: infinite impulse response (HR) and finite impulse response (FIR). Both have advantages and disadvantages. The FIR has a linear phase shift and the HR does not. IIR filters tend to have excellent amplitude response whereas FIR filters tend to have more ripple. FIR filters are typically symmetrical in that the weightings are symmetrical about the center sample. They are also the easiest to implement in hardware and/or software. Figure 8-11 illustrates two FIR filters. The digital filter design software provides the coefficients, Д . The central data point is replaced by the digital filter coefficients as they operate on the neighboring data points. The filter is then moved one data point and the process is repeated until the entire data set has been operated upon. There exist edge effects with any digital filter. The filter illustrated in Figure 8-1 la requires seven inputs before a valid output can be achieved. At the very beginning of the data set, there are insufficient data points to have a valid output at data point 1, 2, or 3. The user must be aware of edge effects at both the beginning and the end of his data record. In effect, this states that edges cannot be filtered. The following MTF equations are only valid where there are no edge effects. For FIR
filters where the multiplicative factors (weightings) are symmetrical about the center, the filter is mathematically represented by a cosine series (sometimes called a cosine filter). Pixel Values A3 A2 Ai Aq _Aj a3 Multiplexer Pixel Values (b) Even Number Multiplexer Figure 8-11. Symmetrical digital filters, (a) 7-tap (odd number) filter and (b) 4-tap (even number) filter. For an odd number of samples (also called taps) summed (FLIR92 ARG-17), TV-1 MTFtfUfer For an even number of samples (FLIR92 ARG-18),
N ТЯ l Л. > (8-17) The sum of the coefficients should equal unity so the MTF is one at//0 E^=i. (8-18) By appropriate selection of digital filter coefficients, peaking can be created (Figure 8-12). Excessive peaking can cause ringing at sharp edges. Since these are horizontal filters, the ringing appears in the horizontal direction only. With an averaging filter, all the multipliers shown in Figure 8-11 are equal. For example, if two samples are averaged together, NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 8-12. A symmetric (cosine) 7-tap digital peaking filter normalized to fJfse.AQ = 0.7609, Л = 0.9115, Л2 =-0.2100, and A3 = -0.4624. The MTF is illustrated only up to fn. See - NOTE after Figure 8-10.
EMUX systems 155 If three samples are averaged together, MTFdfilter - 1 2 — + — cos 3 3 (8-20) An averaging2 filter can be represented by, MTF^iter - sin Xave e (8-21) where Xave is the number of samples averaged together. The averaging filter has its first zero at fe =fsJNave . Figure 8-13 illustrates filters that average two and three samples. Kennedy2 provided MTFs for unequal weightings. Converting into object space, MTFdetectorMTFdfllter becomes MTFdetec,or MTFdflUer = sine (a fx ) Л) sine(SCCH fx) (8-22) where SCCH is the angular subtense of the detector pitch (SCCH = dCCH/fTy NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 8-13. MTF of averaging filters, (a) average of two samples and (b) average of three samples normalized to fjfse. Image fidelity is maintained when f, <fJNave. See NOTE after Figure 8-10.
For a 100% fill factor array, SCCH = a and then MTFdetector MTFdfilter sillC (NaveOL f x ) . (8-23) Equivalently, the averaged response is equal to the MTF of a detector whose angular subtense is Navea. The MTFs used for the digital filters are approximations to the actual system response. Image reconstruction may include data removal (decimation) or data expansion (interpolation). The effective sampling frequency and aliasing change with these processes.15’19 Complex interpolation schemes can be used for image reconstruction. For example, if bilinear interpolation is used, then MTFdfilter (8-24) The bilinear filter introduces a sinc2(x) MTF in both the vertical and horizontal directions. Careful digital design insures that the circuitry has linear phase over the frequencies of interest. By using an MTF approach to model each subsystem, it is assumed that each subsystem has linear phase. Actual digital circuit responses may deviate from the theoretical responses due to digital truncation problems. The system analyst must consult with the digital circuit designers to insure that the circuits are modeled correctly. 8.3.4. ZOOM Detection and recognition range capability is sometimes limited by the visual angle subtended by the size of the image on the monitor. This can occur if the monitor is too small and the viewing distance is fixed or if the viewing distance is too large. If the detail is too small, typically the observer moves toward the monitor. If the observer cannot move (e.g., a pilot strapped into a seat), zoom can be employed to enlarge the image. Three types of zooms are possible: optical, electronic and electro-optical. Moving toward the monitor is a continuous process in which the observer can select an appropriate viewing distance whereas electronic zoom is usually discrete (e.g., 2x, 3 x,4x, etc.). Optical zoom increases the resolution by changing the focal length of the system. Because continuous-zoom optical systems tend to be expensive, many systems have two or three discrete fields-of-view. The system focal length is
modified by adding or removing optical elements. The elements may either be on a slide or may be rotated into the optical path. If the f-number is maintained as the field-of-view is changed, the overall system MTF maintains its shape with the only change in spatial frequency axis values. This assumes that the optical MTF has not changed significantly. For example if the field-of-view is magnified by a factor or two (focal length is doubled), the DAS cut in is half and the detector cutoff doubles. With fixed f-number, the aperture diameter doubles and the optical cutoff doubles. Since the scan velocity is reduced by two, the conversion from electrical frequency to spatial frequency is halved and the overall MTF shape remains constant. If the f- number is not maintained, the system MTF will change and in extreme cases, the system may move from being optically limited to detector limited. Here, it is difficult to optimize the system for the various fields-of-view. The simplest form of electronic zoom, replicates pixels equally in both the horizontal and vertical directions. That is a 1><1 image will appear as a 2x2 image when 2x zoom is employed. With electronic zoom, only part of the image can be seen on the monitor. With 2x electronic zoom, only 25% of the image will be presented on the monitor. Electronic zoom does not increase resolution. It provides some performance improvement if the monitor is small (MTF limited by the eye). It is equivalent to physically moving toward the monitor. However, with excessive zoom, the image becomes blocky and maybe considered unacceptable. The blockiness may be diminished by filtering.1619 Linear models do not include any adverse visual effects from sampling effects such as blockiness. When pixels are smaller than about 0.58 mrad (1/30 deg), the eye blends the pixels to form a continuous image. This phenomenon is used in halftone printing to create an apparent gray level. When the pixels are larger than 0.58 mrad, the eye can resolve the individual pixels and we say that the image appears blocky. Indeed, if an image appears blocky, we tend to move away from it to achieve an aesthetically pleasing picture (view Figure 8-14 from 10 feet to appreciate this phenomenon). Similarly, raster-based monitors are usually designed such that individual raster lines are not discernible. Generally, the viewer will adjust his viewing distance such that the raster is not visible. For commercial televisions (525 line system), this viewing distance is approximately four to eight times the picture height. Electro-optical zoom is used to oversample the image. The same number of pixels is collected on each frame but the angular spacing is less. This effectively increases the sampling frequency. Electro-optical zoom increases resolution only if the system was originally Nyquist frequency limited. It diminishes the effect of sample-scene phasing and the image is not as blocky as electronic zoom.
Figure 8-14. An enlarged halftone image used in printing. When viewed at a distance of 10 feet, the individual pixels are below the eye's resolution and the tones appear continuous. 8.4. MATCHING VIDEO SUBSYSTEMS to a SAMPLED SIGNAL After image reconstruction, the digital data is clocked-out at a rate that is consistent with monitor requirements. To preserve image fidelity, the video electronics is matched to the signal cutoff frequency (as measured in object space).
8.4.1. CONVERSION: VIDEO SAMPLING FREQUENCY TO SPATIAL FREQUENCY Since HFOV t * line N J sample HFOV (8-25) the video sampling frequency, f,s, is fvs N J sample Vine (8-26) Standard values for tline are provided in Table 7-1. 8.4.2. SAMPLE-AND-HOLD After the D/А converter, the analog signal exists only at discrete times. The sample-and-hold circuitry extends the data into a continuous analog signal. The MTF of a zero-order sample-and-hold (FLIR92 ARG-23) is MTFS&H (8-27) and is shown in Figure 8-15 for normalized spatial frequency. Higher order filters have different MTFs.20 Figure 8-15. Zero-order sample-and-hold MTF normalized to The sample-and-hold acts as a low pass filter.
8.5. POST-RECONSTRUCTION FILTER After the D/А conversion, the image is still blocky due to the discrete nature of the digital signals. The ideal post-reconstruction filter removes all the higher order frequencies (Figure 8-16) such that only the original smooth signal remains. The output is delayed by 1/2Г (See Section 4.4., Phase Shifts) Figure 8-16. The post-reconstruction filter removes the blocky (stair step) effect created by the sample-and-hold circuitry. An ideal post-reconstruction filter will just pass the signal information contained in the originally sampled bandwidth. If the monitor is an integral part of the imaging system, then the monitor electronics can be used for post- reconstruction filtering. The monitor MTF includes this filter. In all other systems, it is prudent to include an appropriate post-reconstruction filter. For an ideal system, the post-reconstruction filter MTF is unity up to the cutoff frequency HFOV D , vco =---------if optics limited , fine HFOV 1 , vco =---------if detector limited fine & and vco = —~ If Nyquist frequency limited . 2 (8-28) (8-29) (8-30) The Fourier transform of a rectangular pulse is sinc(x). Therefore an ideal rectangular filter in the frequency domain interpolates the data points in the time domain with a sinc(x) function.
Referring to Figure 8-9 real filters will have some roll off and fvco should be sufficiently large so that it does not affect the in-band MTF. Filters can be in many functional forms. The most common are the Nth-order Butterworth and bfh- order Chebychev filters. The Nth-order Butterworth low pass filter MTF is MTF post-recon (8-31) and the Nth-order Chebychev MTF is MTF л post-recon _______1______ 71 + (Л2-1)С„2 (8-32) The recursive formulas are G G G G Jv 'J vco =W-1 = 2(/;,/f„JG-;-G-2 The ripple in dB is RippledB = 20 log(S4) or Ripple Л = 10 20 (8-33) An alternate representation is MTF post-recon (8-34) where e2 = A2 -1. The 3 dB points are hdB = cosh cosh ^l/^) TV (8-35)
Figure 8-17 illustrates two different Chebychev filters that may be used for post- reconstruction. Figure 8-18 illustrates the effect of two Chebychev filters when combined with a detector MTF. Filters with ripples of 1 dB do not provide adequate MTF over the regions of interest. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 8-17. 4th and 5th order Chebychev filters normalized to Figure 8-18. 4tb order and 5th order Chebychev filters with the detector MTF. The spatial frequency is normalized to fx/fdco.
Example 8-1 POST-RECONSTRUCTION FILTER What is the object spatial frequency cutoff for an ideal post- reconstruction filter if the desired output is RS 170 and the digital format provides 1440 samples per line? The HFOV is 28°. For RS 170, tline is 52.25 ps. and vco 1 1440____ 2 52.25 xlO’6 = 13.8 MHz, 1 1440 cycles vco ~ 2 28x17.45 ~ * mrad (8-36) (8-37) 8.6. REFERENCES 1. G C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, pg. 274, JCD Publishing, Winter Park, Fl (1998). 2. H. V. Kennedy, "Miscellaneous Modulation Transfer Function (MTF) Effects Relating to Sampling Summing," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1488, pp. 165-176(1991). 3. G. V. Poropat, "The Effect of Bias Voltage on SPRITE Detector Modulation Transfer Function (MTF)," Infrared Physics, Vol. 26(1), pp. 9-15 (1986). 4. G. D. Boreman and A. E. Plogstedt, "Spatial Frequency Performance of SPRITE Detectors," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1309, pp 158-166 (1990). 5. A. Campbell, С. T. Elliot, and A. M. White, "Optimization of SPRITE Detectors in Anamorphic Imaging Systems," Infrared Physics, Vol. 27(2), pp. 125-133 (1987). 6. P. Fredin, ' Optimum Choice of Anamorphic Ratio and Boost Filter Parameters for A SPRITE Based Infrared Sensor," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol 1969, pp. 139-149 (1993). 7. D. G. Crowe, P. R. Norton, T. Limperis, and J. Mudar, "Detectors," in Electro-Optical Components, W. D. Rogatto, ed., pp. 200-201. This is Volume 3 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, S. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 8. S. K. Park and R. A. Schowengerdt, "Image Sampling, Reconstruction and the Effect of Sample- scene Phasing," Applied Optics, Vol. 21(17), pp. 3142-3151 (1982). 9. S4 E. Reichenbach, S. K. Park, and R. Narayanswamy, "Characterizing Digital Image Acquisition Devices," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(2), pp. 170-177 (1991). 10. W. Wittenstein, J. C. Fontanella, A. R. Newberry, and J. Baars, "The Definition of the OTF and the Measurement of Aliasing for Sampled Imaging Systems," Optica Acta, Vol. 29(1), pp. 41-50 (1982). 11. J. C. Felz, "Development of the Modulation Transfer Function and Contrast Transfer Function for Discrete Systems, Particularly Charge Coupled Devices," Optical Engineering, Vol. 29(8), pp. 893-904 (1990).
12. S. K. Park, R. A. Schowengerdt, and M. Kaczynski, "Modulation Transfer Function Analysis for Sampled Image Systems," Applied Optics, Vol. 23(15), pp. 2572-2582 (1984). 13. L. deLuca and G. Cardone, "Modulation Transfer Function Cascade Model for a Sampled IR Imaging System," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(13), pp. 1659-1664 (1991). 14. F. A. Resell, "Effects of Image Sampling," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F. Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., pg. 217, NRL Report 8311, Naval Research Laboratory, Wash D.C. (1979). 15. There exist a variety of texts on digital filter design. See, for example, Digital Signal Processing, A. V. Oppenheim and R. W. Schafer, Prentice-Hall, New Jersey (1975). 16.1 . Ajewole, "A Comparative Analysis of Digital Filters for Image Decimation and Interpolation," in Applications of Digital Image Processing VIII, A. G. Tescher, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 575, pp. 2- 12(1985). 17. W. F. Schrieber and D. E. Troxel, "Transformation Between Continuous and Discrete Representations of Images: A Perceptual Approach," IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol. PAMA-7(2), pp. 178-186 (1985). 18. R. W. Schafer and L. R. Rabiner, "A Digital Signal Processing Approach to Interpolation," Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 61(8), pp. 692-702 (1973). 19. A. H. Lettington and Q. H. Hong, "Interpolator for Infrared Images," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(3), pp. 725-729 (1994). 20. Sampling, Aliasing, and Data Fidelity, G. C. Holst, pp. 147-154, JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL 32789 (1998). EXERCISES 1. What is the scan velocity error sensitivity for a TDI system employing four detectors? Let Ns = 2DAS and/s = l/DAS. Plot the MTF normalized to fjfdco for various values ofzfv/v. 2. For a staggered TDI array (Figure 8-5), the effective number of TDI elements is 20. What is the scan velocity error sensitivity? Let 7Vv = 2DAS and fs = l/DAS. Plot the MTF normalized to fjfdco for various values of Av/v. Compare these plots with those obtained in Exercise 1. 3. What boost amplitude and boost frequency (Equation 7-6) would you use so that a SPRITE detector had an MTF that approximated a rectangular detector. Let /7=50 cm, £n/=50|im, and 2=25 pm. 4. When would you use a sample-scene phase MTF? Are there conditions when you would not? 5. Can a digital filter (Figure 8-12) approximate a boost filter (Figure 7-6)? 6. When would an averaging filter be appropriate? 7. An observer is viewing a 14-inch square monitor that provides RS 170. At what viewing distance will the raster lines just be visible? 8. What is the allowable maximum ripple for a 5th order Chebychev filter so that the detector MTF is not degraded (Figure 8-18). 9. The system described in Section 6.8 has been modified to include a digital scan converter (converted to an EMUX system). Assume <rr = 20 grad (Figure 6-31). What is the allowable maximum ripple for a 5th order Chebychev filter so that the system MTF is not degraded. Compare the answer to the results of Exercise 8.
9 STARING ARRAY SYSTEMS Figure 9-1 illustrates a typical staring array. It does not have a scanner. Each detector output is digitized by the detector mux and therefore the system does not have a pre-amplifier, post-amplifier, or the filters associated with those amplifiers. The detector time constant does not affect spatial information and therefore is not included in staring array assessment. Staring arrays do introduce new MTFs: the dominant one is that due to charge transfer. The other subsystems, MTFoptics , MTFdetector , MTFmotion , MTFphase , MTFS&H , MTFdfllter , MTFpost_recon , MTFmonitor, and MTFeye are essentially the same as described in previous chapters. Telescope Detector Digita| Array Ffter Reimager Reconstruction Observer (Sample & Hold) Monitor Figure 9-1. Typical staring array functional electro-optical block diagram. Many infrared staring arrays are modest in size (i.e., 128x128 or 256x256). Systems with these arrays require image interpolation1'4 to expand the number of infrared lines up to the number of monitor lines. Microscan can be employed to increase the effective sampling rate and simultaneously match the monitor requirements. Inefficient microscanning may degrade the MTF. For ideal conditions, with a 4:1 step-stare, the integration is one-fourth of its value without microscan. Practically, the integration time may be further reduced to assure that no movement takes place during the stare time. Reducing the integration time increases the noise (increases the NEDT). For scanning systems, the HFOV depends upon the scanning mechanism. For staring arrays, ЯГОИ = 2 tan1 ~l)dCCH + dH 2/7 (9-1)
and l'FOP' = 2tan 1 (7V^ - l)dccl/ + dy (9-2) where the horizontal and vertical number of detectors is NH and Nv, respectively. The detector pitch in the horizontal and vertical directions is dCCH and dccv , respectively. The rectangular detector has dimensions dH^dv . The small angle approximation is often used for large arrays to provide Hfov = Nrr^CH (9.3) and VFO V = Nri^ . (9-4) 9.1. MOTION The effects of motion during the entire integration and interpretation process must be considered The motional MTFs described in Section 6.3, Motion are the functionally appropriate forms to use for staring arrays. For systems operating at 30 Hz, tint is approximately 1/30 sec. However, the integration time varies according to the application. If too many photons are available (i.e., sufficient to cause saturation), the integration time may be decreased and thereby act as an AGC circuit. In some systems, the integration may be purposely reduced if significant motion is present. If an observer views a monitor, then tint is the larger value of the detector integration time or the eye integration time. Although the precise value for the eye integration time is debatable, FLIR92 documentation recommends 0.1 s. 9.2. DETECTOR ARRAY Charge-coupled device (CCD) performance is characterized by the transfer efficiency and number of transfers. With incomplete charge transfer, a few carriers are left behind which combine with the next charge packet. This, in effect, "smears" the charge and acts as if the charge came from several detector elements. An MTF that accounts for incomplete transfer of electrons, or smearing of charge, (FLIR92 ARG-22) is MTF\ransfer ^Xp /V trans 1 - COS (9-5) ts
where fts is the clocking spatial frequency, is the total number of charge transfers from a detector to the output amplifier, and £ is the charge transfer efficiency. The clocking frequency is /V 1 trans-H ,s HFOV - DAS (9-6) where ^ап5_н is the number of transfers in the horizontal direction. Since the HFOV is much greater than the DAS , ~ N trans-H Jts~ HFOV (9-7) This MTF depends upon the number of transfers. If the target image is located right next to the readout, the number of transfers is small. On the other hand, if the image is at the extreme end of the array so that the charge must be transferred across the entire array, Ntrans is equal to the number of elements in the array. For an average response, Ntrans should be one-half the maximum number of transfers. This is mathematically equivalent to (MTFtransfer)'/2 where Ntrans is the maximum number of transfers. As the number of transfers increases, the efficiency must increase to insure that the MTF is not adversely affected. For arrays that employ interline transfer, the maximum value of is the number of detectors. Transfers may be either in the vertical direction (column readout) or horizontally (row readout). MTF^fe,. only applies to the transfer readout direction: Horizontal readout affects MTF(£) and vertical readout affects MTF(/p. Figure 9-2 illustrates МТР^^ for several values of transfer efficiency. Figure 9-2. MTFtransfer as a function of normalized spatial frequency, fx/fts, for several values of transfer efficiency. Ntrans = 240. The Nyquist frequency is
9.3. MICROSCAN For staring arrays, the sampling frequency is created by the detector center-to-center spacing, dcc. The angular sampling frequency is Scc ~ fl/dcc. and the array Nyquist frequency is n-array Scc fl ^dcc (9-8) 2 With 100% fill factor arrays, fn.array is one-half of the detector cutoff, fdco. The effective sampling frequency can be increased5 9 with a microscan or dither technique. Here, the line-of-sight moves a fraction of flldcc . At each location, the detector stares at the scene but for a reduced integration time. If the step-stare configuration allows four independent stares, then the integration time at each location must one-fourth of that used without microscan. Microscan can be either in one direction or in two directions. The number of detector elements and monitor requirements determines whether microscan in the vertical direction is appropriate. Microscan increases the sampling frequency and thereby permits faithful reproduction of higher spatial frequencies (Figure 5-11). The reduced integration time increases the system noise for background limited systems. With an ideal microscan configuration, the line-of-sight moves a fixed amount and then the detector stares. While it is moving, the detector is off (i.e., it is not integrating). In some situations, the detector may be integrating while the line-of-sight is moving. Here, the image is smeared and the MTF may be adversely affected. Figure 9-3 illustrates a step-stare movement in which the rise time follows a simple exponential function. This simulates the time response of a simple servo-driven microscan interlace mechanism. If the rise and fall times are short compared to the total time 7, then it approximates the ideal step-stare. Here, the MTFm- гяп is one. On the other hand, if the rise and fall times are long, the motion will appear linear and MTFmicroscan approximates a linear smear (a sine function). In this figure, a 2><2 microscan is assumed and it takes four successive fields to create one frame. For display, the four fields are combined by an image reconstruction algorithm.
Figure 9-3. Step-stare interlace with an exponential rise and fall for a 2x2 microscan. The step is one-half of the detector center-to-center spacing. It may be different in the vertical and horizontal directions. Figure 9-4 illustrates a continuous nutation scan that follows a sinusoidal motion. Here the amplitudes in both the horizontal and vertical directions may be different such that the scan pattern is elliptical. The "average" location should be SCJ2. This requires a sinusoidal motion whose peak-to-peak amplitude is SCCN2. If s(t) is the relative time-displacement between the optical image and a detector element and the total integration time is T, then7 MTF 1 * microscan Jcos(2tt/x $(/))<# + Jsin (2л* fxs(t))dt 0 (9-9)
Figure 9-4. Nutation interlace scan with a sinusoidal movement. The peak-to-peak amplitude is SC(J^2 for 4:1 interlace. For the exponential scan, s(Z) = Scc (9-Ю) Substituting into Equation 9-5 and numerically integrating provides the curves illustrated in Figure 9-5. Here, MTFmicm<;can is plotted as a function of т/T. The J UllVlOoUcUi 1 spatial frequency has been normalized to/.cc = 1/5Cc. For the ideal case, t=0 and MTF x x microscan is one. For the nutation scan, s(Z) = sin (2 7Г jnutation 0, (9-И) where f„uMU is the scan rotational speed (Figure 9-6).
MTF MTF Figure 9-5. MTFmicroscan for a step-stare interlace with an exponential rise and fall as a function of normalized spatial frequency fx/fscc. and = For short time constants, т/T« 1, the MTF is one. For long time constants, т/T » 1, the MTF approaches the familiar linear smear sine function (Equation Figure 9-6. MTFmicrmran for a nutation interlace scan with a iiiiuiuscaii sinusoidal movement as a function of normalized spatial frequency. fnutateT= 1/4 for 4:1 interlace scan.
9.4. REFERENCES 1.1. Ajewole, "A Comparative Analysis of Digital Filters for Image Decimation and Interpolation," in Applications of Digital Image Processing VIII, A. G. Tescher, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 575, pp. 2- 12(1985). 2. W. F. Schrieber and D. E. Troxel, "Transformation Between Continuous and Discrete Representations of Images: A Perceptual Approach," IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol. PAMA-7(2), pp. 178-186 (1985). 3. R. W. Schafer and L. R. Rabiner, "A Digital Signal Processing Approach to Interpolation," Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 61(8), pp. 692-702 (1973). 4. A. H. Lettington and Q. H. Hong, "Interpolator for Infrared Images," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(3), pp. 725-729 (1994). 5. D. J. Bradley and P. N. J. Dennis, "Sampling Effects in CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays," in Infrared Technology and Applications, A. Baker and P. Masson, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 590, pp. 53-60 (1985). 6. R. J. Dann, S. R. Carpenter, C. Seamer, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J. Bradley, "Sampling Effects in CdHgTe Focal Plane Arrays - Practical Results," in Infrared Technology XII, I. J. Spiro and J. Mollicone, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 685, pp. 123-128 (1986). 7. E. A. Watson, R. A. Muse, and F. P. Blommel, "Aliasing and Blurring in Microscanned Imagery," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 242-250 (1992). 8. F. P. Blommel, P. N. J. Dennis, and D. J. Bradley, "The Effects of Microscan Operation on Staring Infrared Sensor Imagery," in Infrared Technology XVII, B. F. Andresen, M. S. Scholl, and J. Spiro, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1540, pp. 653-664 (1991). 9. R. A. Honzik, "MTF Loss Due to Microscan Interlace Smear," Martin Marietta Report CPD 70802000-000-IR7, Orlando, FL (1984). EXERCISES 1. Plot MTFdetectorMTFtransfer as a function normalized spatial frequency. Let = 240. Assume that the array contains 480x480 elements. Let the charge transfer efficiency be 0.9999, 0.999, and 0.99. 2. A push broom sensor consists of 1024 elements. Two outputs are used such that each output transfers a maximum of 512 charge packets. What is MTFtransfer for charge transfer efficiencies of 0.9999, 0.999, and 0.99. 3. Based upon the results of Exercises 1 and 2, what is the desired charge transfer efficiency? 4. Plot MTFdetector for a staring array with 64% fill factor. What is the array Nyquist frequency with no microscan, 2x2 and 3x3 microscan? 5. Plot MTFmicroscanMTFdetector for a nutating microscan system (Figure 9-6). Estimate MTFmirrn4ran values from the graph. Discuss the tradeoff between increasing the Nyquist frequency with the reduced MTF.
10 LINE SCANNERS Airborne reconnaissance applications typically require wide-angle imagery. The imagery can be obtained either with pushbroom systems or line scanners. Since large linear arrays are easily fabricated from silicon, visible imagery is often obtained with a pushbroom design. Infrared technology limits the number of detectors that can be placed in an array and line scanners are typically used for infrared imagery. Although this chapter discusses infrared line scanners (IRLS), the equations apply to pushbroom systems with the notable distinction that the scanner rotational speed is replaced with the detector integration time. An IRLS is an imaging system that contains a few detectors. For each rotation of the mirror, the detector array senses a narrow swath on the ground.. The forward motion of the aircraft provides the vertical extent (multiple swathes). The data obtained is continuously displayed in a waterfall manner. That is, the imagery constantly moves down the monitor screen as the platform moves forward. Figure 10-1 illustrates a system that provides a linear swath. Figure 10-1. Swath width produced by a line scanner. ACT is the across-track direction (produced by the scanner) and ALT is the along-track dimension (produced by the forward motion of the aircraft).
The time to scan one swath must be matched to the aircraft velocity, V, and the altitude to avoid swath overlap or missed areas V VFOV^wath ---=--------(10 H t Although it is customary to use H in the equations, it is the slant path to the ground that determines the correct VFOV^Jt requirement. The ratio, V/H, appears in nearly every line scanner equation. As such, V/H is typically a system specification. For a first approximation, the earth is considered nominally flat. As the V/H ratio changes, both the spin-mirror rotation rate and the number of detectors used can be varied to accommodate a wide range of V/H ratios. Usually the spin- mirror rotation rate is changed in fixed increments. The AN/AAD-5 remote reconnaissance system uses 2:1 speed change for higher V/H ratios and automatically selects one to 12 parallel detectors to provide full ground coverage with minimal overlap.1 For wide angle imagery, the slant path increases dramatically as the scan angle increases. This produces a bow tie shaped swath on the ground. Bow-tie compensation is achieved by changing detectors (a concept used both in the AAD-5 and ATARS airborne reconnaissance systems) or through digital image processing With a variable V/H ratio requirement, it is nearly impossible to design a system that does not contain some underscan, overscan, or both. The imagery may not be usable at wide scan-angles for several reasons. First, the ground resolution increases dramatically with scan-angle. Objects that can be resolved at nadir may not be resolved at large scan angles. The path length increases with scan-angle so that the atmospheric transmittance may reduce the target signature below the system noise level. Finally, the objects are viewed obliquely. At large scan angles, the sides of objects are viewed. For example, roads and railroad tracks may not be discernible at oblique angles. Because of the forward motion of the aircraft, the imagery is produced in a waterfall mode. The film transport speed is synchronized to the aircraft V/H ratio so that complete imagery is captured (Figure 10-2). The CRT may be replaced with a high-speed digital data recorder. Then data can then either be RF linked to the ground or may be replayed later (a concept proposed for ATARS1).
Figure 10-2. An IRLS functional electro-optical block diagram where the imagery is captured on film. Scanners2 may be axe-head, split aperture, or conical. Figure 10-3 illustrates a split aperture system. As the spin mirror turns off-nadir, the projected aperture of one facet (A) narrows while the other widens (B). For a square mirror, the total aperture area3 as a function of scan-angle from nadir is total A + В C COS 0scan 4 ) + sin 0scan (Ю-2) where C is the area of one facet. At nadir, the aperture area is ^2 C. Thus there is a maximum of ^2 difference in energy collected over the scan-angles. The MTF also varies with scan-angle. Line scanners are typically fixed focussed at infinity. At low altitudes, the system is out of focus. To achieve different resolutions, separate detector arrays may be used (Figure 10-4). The smaller detectors are typically used for high altitude flight whereas the large detectors are used for low altitude flight. Because the VII ratio drops for the higher altitude, the mirror rotation speed is reduced when the smaller detectors are used.
Figure 10-3. Kennedy split aperture line scanner. As the mirror rotates, the apertures A and В change in size. Array Centerline 12 10 8 6 NFOV 11 9 7 5 3 Figure 10-4. With a fixed focus optical system, different DASs are achieved by using different detector arrays. These arrays are within the same dewar. The WFOV array is used for low altitude mapping. By using detectors that are separated, full ground coverage is possible. In this figure, the aircraft moves from left to right and the scan direction is top to bottom
This chapter discusses only the MTFs that are unique to line scanners. The subsystem MTFs given for the common module, EOMUX, and EMUX systems also apply to line scanners. This chapter does not cover the geometric distortions such as the bow-tie effect and panoramic distortion. Description of these effects and image rectification can be found in McCracken3, Estes4 et. al., and Bernstein.5 As with any wide-angle camera, the imagery contains geometric distortions such as the bow-tie effect and panoramic distortion. Methods to remove the distortions are called image rectification. In general, image rectification cannot be performed in real-time. 10.1. RECTANGULAR APERTURE While most systems use circular apertures, the split aperture, by its very design, is rectangular. Line scanners are typically designed with a fixed focus. As a result, at low altitudes, the image will be out of focus. The amount of defocus will vary with scan-angle since the slant path increases with scan-angle. The blur is a maximum at nadir. It decreases as the altitude and the scan-angle increase. Simply said, the blur is a maximum at the shortest distance and that occurs at nadir. 10.1.1. DIFFRACTION-LIMITED OTF For a linear (rectangular) aperture, the diffraction limited OTF is OTFdiff = 1 - -y- ^hen f < foco J oco OTFdljj = 0 elsewhere , where the optical cut off,/w„, is given by D aperture width °CO ^ave average wavelength ' (W-3) (10-4) and2eve is determined by Equation 6-7 or 6-8. For split apertures (Figure 10-3), the OTF is weighted by the areas A and В A В °TFM = OTFdi/rA + OTFdiff_B , (10-5) where OTFdiff.A is the OTF due to A and OTFdiff.B is due to B. Figure 10-5 illustrates the OTF when fOC(^A =10 cycles/mrad and/,ca.B = 20 cycles/mrad. Since
the ALT length is fixed, A can be replaced with ACTa and В can be replaced with ACTBAf r ACT a j r ACT в zip. z-x /x<--------- and fx<-------------, (10-6) &ave Aave then OTFdi/f (Ю-7) Jave where ACT^ + ACiy ACT^ J ave z» и л • (10 o) For the Kennedy type scanner, as one aperture increases, the other decreases so that the optical cutoff frequencies change with scan-angle. Therefore, the system MTF depends upon the scan-angle. System performance must then be separately assessed at each scan-angle. The along-track aperture size is fixed and invariant with scan-angle SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 10-5. OTFdiff for a split aperture system. foco.A =10 cycles/mrad and foco.B = 20 cycles/mrad. Sine the OTF is positive, it is labeled as an MTF.
Line scanners 179 10.1.2. DEFOCUS OTF The defocused OTF for rectangular apertures is OTF = optics 1- sine SWPP (Ю-9) or OTFoptics - OTFdijf OTFdejocus , (10-10) where WPP is the peak-to-peak wave-front error that can be estimated from the defocus shift. While an approximation was used for a defocused circular apertures (Equation 6-23), Equation 10-9 is exact. Using Newton's relationship for paraxial rays, the distance from the focal point is (10-11) where Xt is the focal shift or the distance from the focal point to the image plane and X2 is distance from the focal point to the object. The variable X2 is the error in the focus location for a system focussed at infinity when the object is at X2 + fl. Since X2 is usually very large, the equation can be approximated by (10-12) The peak-to-peak wave-front error, WPP, can be estimated from the defocus shift where NA is the numerical aperture: Xi(№4)2 2Я NA = IF (10-13) (10-14) (see Appendix, f-number for an alternate definition). Then w - W PP 8 H Aave F2
Figures 10-6 and 10-7 illustrate MTFoptics for various wave-front errors. The first zero remains constant at fave until WPP reaches 0.5 waves. Then the first zero abruptly jumps to fave /2. For greater defocusing, the spatial frequency at which the MTF is equal to zero slowly decreases as the defocus increases. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 10-6. OTFoptics normalized tofx/foco for various amounts of peak-to-peak wave-front error. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 10-7. OTFoptics normalized tofxlfoco for various amounts of peak-to-peak wave-front error.
Table 10-1 lists the aperture sizes for the AN/AAD-5. At 2 = 10 pm, for the along-track dimension, fOC() = 19.6 cycles/mrad and in the across-track dimension, foco = 5.64 cycles/mrad for a focal length of 11 inches. Table 10-2 lists the wave-front error as a function of altitude. While the wave-front error appears significantly different, the difference in foco provides nearly the same OTF for both the across-track and along-track directions (Figure 10-8) at low altitudes. Although the calculated wave-front error approaches zero as the slant path increases, a practical limit that includes manufacturing tolerances is ИрР=0.25 waves. This is indicated in Table 10-2 by listing WPP as less than 0.25 waves for 5650 feet in the across-track direction. In the laboratory, the target is usually placed in a collimator so that it appears at infinity. Therefore, special efforts are required to measure the amount of defocus in the laboratory. As a result, there are two performances analyses required: one for the field and one for the lab. Table 10-1 AN/AAD-5 APERTURE SIZE at NADIR ALT 7.75" ACTa 2.075" ACTB 2.365" ACT 1 ave 2.22" Table 10-2 AN/AAD-5 WPP WAVE-FRONT ERROR (Waves) ALTITUDE ALT ACT 50 feet 28.3 10.0 200 feet 7.07 2.5 500 feet 2.83 1.00 2000 feet 0.71 0.25 5650 feet 0.25 <0.25
OTF SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 10-8. AN/AAD-5 OTFoptics for the ALT and ACT directions for different altitudes. The OTFs are approximately equal at low altitudes. 10.1.3. GROUND COVERAGE Line scanners are often designed for constant ground coverage. As the altitude decreases the image defocuses and the area from which the detectors sense radiation depend upon the aperture size. For low spatial frequencies (/X«Z?C„) OTFdejocus sine 8 WPP (10-16) Using Equation 10-15, OTFdefocus can be approximated by OTFdefoCuS ~ SinC 71 f x (10-17) This function will go to zero at fx = HID or we can say that it has an equivalent angular subtense of DFI. This leads to the approximation that the system has an effective angular subtense of <2 eff ~ DAS + ——, (10-18) H and the projected area is
10.2. SCANNER The AN/AAD-5 scanner is a four-faceted rotating reflective polygon. For a reflecting surface, the reflected beam scan velocity is twice the rotational speed due to angle doubling v -- 2 (speed in RPM} 1 min 60 5 360° rev л rad 180° rad s (10-20) The field-of-view is changed by switching to a different detector array (Figure 10- 4). The same electronics is used for the NFOV and WFOV. To insure that f, scales properly from NFOV to WFOV, the scan mirror velocity changes. Table 10-3 provides the scan mirror velocity and related parameters. Table 10-3 AN/AAD-5 SCAN MIRROR PARAMETERS NFOV WFOV Mirror velocity (RPM) 3000 6000 Scan velocity, v (rad/sec) 628 1256 FOV (Degrees) 60 120 10.3. MOTION Line scanners are not affected by motion in the usual sense. The high mirror spin rate produces a small detector dwell time is so small that image smear is not important. Jitter in the rotating scanner can cause pixel mis-registration from swath-to-swath resulting in serrated vertical lines. Scan nonlinearities appear as rarefaction or condensations of the images. These effects cannot be described by linear system theory and can only be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. 10.4. ELECTRONIC MTF Line scanners produce very high data rates. The detector time constant can dominate the system MTF In spatial frequency space, MTF 1ГЛЛ я (constant ________1_______ ^l + (2^rrfv/x)2
The AN/AAD-5 time constant for the WFOV detector is 450 ns and 250 ns for the NFOV detectors (Figure 10-9). The reduced MTF can be partially compensated for with a boost filter (Section 7.2.2., Boost Circuitry) or a digital filter (Section 8.3.3., Digital Filters). SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) (a) WFOV SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) (b) NFOV Figure 10-9. The AN/AAD-5 detector time constant affects the overall detector MTF. (a) WFOV: DAS = 0.5 mrad and (b) NFOV: DAS = 0.25 mrad. When fx < flco the OTF is always positive and is labeled as an MTF. 10.5. AN/AAD-5 CRT MTF ч The amplified detector output drives a CRT that writes onto the film. Various monitor MTFs were described in Section 7.3., Monitors. For AN/AAD-5, the CRT is modeled as
With a CRT spot of 0.001 inches and film width of 4.55 inches, the system can place 4550 independent "spots" on the film. If the "spot" size is the beam diameter at the 1/e intensity points, then 5.66 x 4550 lines ' (10-23) and 17.45 * HFOV (10-24) Then <jmon is 0.163 in the WFOV and 0.0813 in the NFOV. HFOV is the field-of- view in the across track direction (scan direction) measured in degrees. Table 7-2 describes the relationship between other definitions of spot size and o. 10.6. AN/AAD-5 FILM The AAD-5 provides imagery on film. Film response is often provided in a graphical format. A polynomial fit to the graphical data provides an approximate closed-form mathematical representation. 10.6.1. CONVERSION: FILM RESPONSE to SPATIAL FREQUENCY Film response is usually given m cycles/mm. The conversion to object spatial frequency is HFOV film width (10-25) For AN/AAD-5 film, kt= 18.11 in the WFOV (120°) and k2= 9.05 in the NFOV (60°). 10.6.2. FILM MTF A 3rt-order polynomial has been fitted to the Kodak EK-2494 film response curve (Figure 10-10). The film MTF is the smaller of
2 3 MTFfnm — + a^fm + a-ifm + ^зУ/и or (10-26) MTFfllm -1 (10-27) and is zero when The constants are aQ = 1.0435 «! =-8.4571 x 10'3 a2 =-1.6503 x 1 O'5 «3 = 1.9437xl0’7 This polynomial fits the film MTF for all spatial frequencies up to film cutoff, ffco. Since film data is often only given when where the film MTF departs from unity, it is convenient to list the MTF as unity for low spatial frequencies. This is not strictly true since adjacency effects can produce MTFs greater than unity for low frequencies. Figure 10-10. MTFf(lm for Kodak film EK-2494. 10.7. REFERENCES 1. Jane's Avionics 1992-1993, Eleventh edition, D. Brinkman, ed., pp. 136-137, Jane's Information Group, Surrey, UK (1992). 2. W. L. Wolfe, "Optical-mechanical Scanning Techniques and Devices," in The Infrared Handbook, Revised edition, W. L. Wolfe and G. J. Zissis, eds., pp. 10-17 to 10-20, Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI (1985). 3. W. L. McCracken, "Infrared Line scanning Systems," in Passive Electro-Optical Systems, S. B. Campana, ed., pp. 9-19. Th.s is Volume 5 of the Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993).
4. J. E. Estes, E. J. Hajic, and L. R. Tinney, "Fundamentals of Image Analysis: Analysis of Visible and Thermal Infrared Data," in Manual of Remote Sensing, 2nd edition, R. N. Colwell, ed., pp. 987- 1124, American Society of Photogrammetry, Falls Church, VA (1983). 5. R. Bernstein, "Image Geometry and Rectification," in Manual of Remote Sensing, 2nd edition, R. N. Colwell, ed., pp. 873-922, American Society of Photogrammetry, Falls Church, VA (1983). EXERCISES An airborne reconnaissance line scanner (Figure 10-3) is mounted on an aircraft whose cruising speed varies between 300 and 450 knots. The system will be operated at altitudes ranging from 200 to 3000 feet. The detector array consists of six detectors aligned in the ALT direction. The detector ALT dimension is 0.01 inches and the center-to-center spacing is 0.02 inches. The system focal length is 20 inches and the ALT aperture is 10 inches. 1. What is the range of VIH ratios at nadir? 2. If the system is refocused at every altitude, what is the range of scanner rotational speeds? 3. If the system is fixed focus at infinity, what is the foot print size as a function of altitude. Assume Equation 10-19 is valid. 4. Sketch the array footprint as a function of altitude. Show each detector foot print. 5. At what altitude does the foot print precisely cover the ground (no overlap and no underlap)? 6. How many detectors are required for complete ground coverage at an velocity of 300, 350, 400, and 450 knots. Assume that the scanner rotational speed is fixed at 6000 rpm. 7. Repeat Exercises 1 though 6 when the scan angle is 30°. 8. Repeat Exercises 1 though 6 when the scan angle is 60°.
11 VERTICAL MTF The vertical MTF is similar to the horizontal MTF with the exception that any /electronic circuitry that modifies the serial stream of data does not affect the vertical MTF. For example, the vertical MTF does not contain the MTFs due to the detector time constant, pre-amplifier, post-amplifier, sample and hold, or post- reconstruction filter. For this chapter, all OTFs are considered positive and therefore labeled as MTFs. The functional form of these MTFs was given in Chapters 6 through 9. The appropriate sampling rate must be used for the vertical MTFs. The subsystem components do not "know" what created the signal. These MTFs apply to all imaging systems independent of the system spectral response. Similarities and differences between the horizontal and vertical MTFs are: MTF А Л Opt1Cg For an aberration free optical system, MTFoptics is the same as the horizontal direction. With aberrated systems, the sagittal MTF is applied to the horizontal direction and the tangential MTF is used for the vertical MTF. For rectangular apertures, the vertical aperture extent is used. For systems employing anamorphic optics, the vertical and horizontal focal lengths are different. MTFmotion Jitter is usually considered a polar movement and therefore ar is considered equal in both the vertical and horizontal directions. For linear or sinusoidal motion, MTFmotion is used when the motion is in the vertical direction. -M-'f'f'detector For rectangular detectors, the vertical extent of the detector is used. The diffusion MTF in SPRITE detectors only affects the scan direction so that the vertical MTF is identical to that obtained with a rectangular element. MTFptee Since detectors are in discrete locations, phase always affects the MTF in the vertical direction. MTFphase is the same functional form as the horizontal direction with the vertical sampling rate used.
mtfled The vertical extent of the LED elements is used for the MTF. MTF x * voptics The visual optics lens is assumed to be rotationally symmetrical and therefore The MTF is identical in the vertical and horizontal directions. MTFvldicon Although not necessarily true, for mathematical convenience, the MTF is considered the same in the horizontal and vertical directions. MTFdfllter MTFdfliter is included only if the digital filters operate in the vertical direction. The vertical digital filters can be used to simulate the line-to- line interpolation. MTFinterp This is the line-to-line interpolation MTF (discussed in Section 11.2). It may be simulated by a digital filter. MTF j.7 x л. л monitor Although not necessarily true, for mathematical convenience, the MTF is considered the same in the horizontal and vertical directions. MTFeye MTFeye is considered to be identical for both the vertical and horizontal directions. MTF transfer This is used only if the charge is transferred in the vertical direction. Assuming that all the OTFs are positive, the system vertical MTFs are: Common module systems MTFy=MTFoptJtf^ EOMUX systems MTFy = MTFopticsMTFmotionMTFdetectorMTFphaseMTFLEDMTFvoptics x MTFvidlC0„MTFm0nit„MTFeye
EMUX systems MTFy=MTFopticsMTFmolionMTFdaatoIMTFphilseMTFdflltelMTFintap xMTF^^MTF^ Staring array systems MTFy-MTFopticsMTFmotionMTFdaeaorMTFtransferMTFpl]aseMTFdfilta xMTFintapMTF„„ltorMTFeye Line-scanners Line-scanners may be difficult to quantify for the vertical direction. As the V/H ratio changes, the number of detectors in a line-scanner may change and overlap may occur. Line-scanners can only be evaluated on a case-by-case basis. 11.1. SAMPLING RATE The vertical angular sampling distance is created by the detector-to- detector angular spacing and the interlace ratio: (11-1) where Scc = djfl and R is the interlace ratio. Figure 11-1 illustrates a scanning system. For staring arrays without microscan, R = 1. The angular sampling distance is related to the overscan ratio by f _ R _ 1 _ 1 ITos (j^scene ~ 0 s~ Scc~/3 NR-1],S ~ p Nscene-UoS (11-2) where NR is equal to Nscene. For most systems Nscene» 1 and Nscene» t]os. Then the number of samples per DAS is approximately the overscan ratio and fs~T]oslp.
(b) Figure 11-1. The vertical sampling rate is determined by the detector center-to-center spacing and the interlace ratio, (a) R = 3 and t]os = 1 and (b) R = 2 and tjos = 1. Figure 11-2 illustrates the three different detector arrays in which the center-to-center spacing is fixed and the detector size is changing. Figure 11-3 provides the MTFs and sampling frequencies. (a) (b) (c) Figure 11-2. Three different detector arrays. The center-to- center spacing is constant and the detector size changes, (a) Scc >p and t]os < 1, (b) Scc=p and tjos = 1, and (c) <p and rjos > 1. 100% fill factor staring arrays are represented by (b). Finite fill factor staring arrays are shown in (a). Only scanning arrays can provide a scan pattern shown in (c).
(a) (b) (c) Figure 11-3. MTF for the three different detector arrays shown in Figure 11-2. (a) Grossly undersampled system (b) The best MTF that can be achieved with a staring array, and (c) fn can be greater than the detector cutoff if Scc<p!'2.
Figure 11-4 illustrates three different detector arrays that have the different center-to-center spacing but the same detector size. Figure 11-4b also represents a staring array with 100% fill factor and Figure 1 l-4c also represents an array with a finite fill factor. Figure 11-5 illustrates the MTFs. Figure 11-4. Three different detector arrays. The center-to- center spacing is varied and the detector size is fixed, (a) Scc < p and //,„ > 1, (b) = 0 and 17» = 1, and (c) >/? and //0! < 1. (a) (b) Figure 11-5. MTF for the three different detector arrays shown in Figure 11-4. (a) Aliasing will only be avoided when Scc < pTZ, (b) The best MTF that can be achieved with , a staring array. (Continued next page).
(c) Figure 11-5 (continued), (c) An undersampled array. The effective sampling frequency can be increased with a microscan or dither technique (see Section 9.3. Microscan). Here, the line-of-sight is moved a fraction offlldcc. At each location, the detector stares at the scene but for a reduced integration time. Microscan can be either in one direction or in two direction. The number of detector elements and monitor requirements determine whether microscan in the vertical direction is appropriate. The vertical direction on most systems is undersampled. As a result, there is no unique MTF and an average phase MTF may be added. Actual performance based upon vertical MTFs will vary depending upon the phase between the target and the sampling lattice. For laboratory measurement, it is common practice to "peak-up" the target (in-phase relationship) and then MTFphase= 1. 11.2. INTERPOLATION After sampling, the data is simply an array of numbers residing in a memory. The data array is manipulated into a format that is consistent to the monitor requirements. For example, the common module system collects 360 independent infrared lines and most monitors require 480 lines. Expansion into 480 lines can be by achieved simply by replicating some lines or by a more complex interpolation schemes1'5 such as bilinear interpolation. For bilinear interpolation MTFinterp{fy) = Sint2 (И-3)
The bilinear filter also introduces a sinc2(x) MTF in the horizontal direction. The analyst can treat line-to-line interpolation as a separate MTF (MTFinterp) or use MTFdfilter (Section 8.3.3., Image Reconstruction: Digital Filters). Most line-to-line interpolation algorithms have been developed to improve the image quality of a noiseless image. These algorithms may accentuate noise and may not be appropriate for systems designed for the detection of targets embedded in noise. Noise modification is discussed in Section 18.10.1., Line-to- line Interpolation. There are many image reconstruction algorithms. Only a few of these can be described mathematically in closed-form and be included in an end-to-end system performance model. The performance of the remaining algorithms can be only inferred by viewing the system output for a few representative inputs. This applies to those algorithms whose output depends upon signal amplitude or diagonal gradients. 11.3. REFERENCES 1.1. Ajewole, "A Comparative Analysis of Digital Filters for Image Decimation and Interpolation," in Applications of Digital Image Processing VIII, A. G Tescher, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 575, pp. 2- 12(1985). 2. W. F. Schrieber and D. E. Troxel, "Transformation Between Continuous and Discrete Representations of Images: A Perceptual Approach," IEEE Trans. Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol. PAMA-7(2), pp. 178-186 (1985). 3. R. W. Schafer and L. R. Rabiner, "A Digital Signal Processing Approach to Interpolation," Proceedings of the IEEE, Vol. 61(8), pp. 692-702 (1973). 4. A. H. Lettington and Q. H. Hong, "Interpolator for Infrared Images," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(3), pp. 725-729(1994). 5. A. Friedenberg, "Resolution Loss Caused by Display lines Replication and Interpolation," in Thermosense XXI, D. Andresen and M. Strojnik, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2552, pp. 521-530 (1995). EXERCISES 1. Averaging will improve the signal-to-noise ratio by the square root of the number of pixels averaged. An engineer realizes that a line-to-line interpolation scheme is required to create 480 monitor lines from an array that produces 360 lines. So he averages two lines and then duplicates them. He knows that averaging will improve his signal-to-noise ratio. What effect will this have on the vertical MTF?
2. To create 480 lines from an array that produces 360 lines, the electronic engineer designs a circuit that duplicates every third line. That is, the input is A, B, C, and the output is А, В, С, C. What effect does this interpolation scheme have on the vertical MTF? Is this a linear circuit? 3. For the staggered array illustrated in Figure 1 l-2c, what should be the vertical extent of each detector to achieve two samples per DAS? 4. What is the configuration of a staggered scanning array so that there are 3 samples per DAS? 5. For a staring array with 100% fill factor, plot the detector MTF and then add bilinear interpolation. Is bilinear interpolation better than a simple averaging circuit? 6. A staring array consists of 240x240 elements. Should the pixels be simply replicated to meet RS 170 requirements or should bilinear interpolation be used? How would you modify the design to improve performance?
12 RESOLUTION There are four different aspects of resolution: (1) temporal resolution, which is the ability to separate events in time, (2) gray scale resolution, which is determined by the A/D converter design, noise floor, or the monitor capability, (3) spectral resolution, and (4) spatial resolution. An imaging system operating at 30 Hz frame rate has a temporal resolution of 1/30 sec. Gray scale resolution is a measure of the dynamic range. The spectral resolution is simply the spectral band pass (e.g., visible, NIR, SWIR, MWIR, or LWIR) of the system. This chapter covers spatial resolution. Resolution provides valuable information regarding the finest detail that can be discerned. Each discipline extracts its own type of information from data and each discipline has its own requirements for resolution (Table 12-1). Table 12-1 MEASURES OF RESOLUTION DISCIPLINE RESOLUTION METRIC Optical designers Rayleigh criterion Sparrow criterion Airy Disc diameter Blur diameter Detector vendors Number of detector elements System analyst (geometric approach) DAS System analyst (MTF approach) Limiting resolution EIFOV System calibration (SRF approach) Imaging resolution Measurement resolution Monitor designers TV limiting resolution Number of addressable pixels Photo reconnaissance and remote sensing Ground resolved distance
A large variety of resolution measures exist and the various definitions may not be interchangeable. As imaging systems are incorporated into new disciplines, it must be specified in terms used by those industries. For example, photo interpreters use the ground resolved distance (GRD) when evaluating reconnaissance imagery captured on film. But as infrared imaging systems replace the wet film process, the GRD, by default, becomes an infrared imaging system resolution measure. Resolution does not uniquely define performance for it does not include sensitivity. For example, large, low-contrast targets cannot be detected at the range suggested by the system resolution if the signal is below the sensor's noise level. Complete analysis includes both sensitivity and resolution. For detection by human observers, the MRC or MRT provides the required combination. A large variety of resolution measures exist and the various definitions may not be interchangeable. As imaging systems are incorporated into new disciplines, it must be specified in terms used by those industries. For example, photo interpreters use the ground resolved distance (GRD) when evaluating reconnaissance imagery captured on film. But as infrared imaging systems replace the wet film process, the GRD, by default, becomes an infrared imaging system resolution measure. Resolution does not uniquely define performance for it does not include sensitivity. For example, large, low-contrast targets cannot be detected at the range suggested by the system resolution if the signal is below the sensor's noise level. Complete analysis includes both sensitivity and resolution. For detection by human observers, the MRC or MRT provides the required combination. System resolution depends on diffraction, optical aberrations, detector angular subtense, digitization, electronic bandwidth, and resolution of the monitor. The most common measure of resolution is the detector DAS because it is an easily understood metric. The DAS is appropriate for those systems where the system is detector limited. However, this may not always be the case. The optical frequency cutoff or Nyquist frequency may limit system resolution. A design based solely upon resolution requirements may not meet sensitivity requirements. The attractiveness of resolution is that the maximum range at which a target can be detected is easily estimated „ target size Range & —---------- resolution (12-1) This is the maximum range at which a periodic target can be faithfully reproduced. Unfortunately common parlance calls it a detection range and the range equation is inappropriately interpreted. If a target has sufficient intensity,
it can be detected at an "infinite1’ range. This is equivalent to our ability to see stars in the sky. Equation 12-1 should only be used to estimate the comparative range performance for systems built to similar designs in which the resolution measures are equatable (e.g., compare one EMUX to another EMUX). Equation 12-1 should not be used to infer absolute range performance: the range at which an observer detects a target. Many resolution measures such as the DAS consider only a single subsystem. When this subsystem value is used in Equation 12-1, an optimistic range may be obtained. An end-to-end resolution measure is required. Shade's equivalent resolution can include all the subsystems and, as such represents a better representation of the resolution than a single value such as the DAS. If resolution is defined by the DAS, then a vanishing small detector is desired. Although any detector size, optical aperture, and focal length can be chosen to select the resolution limit, the sensitivity is affected by the same parameters. In general, as the resolution increases, the NEDT increases (Figure 12- 1). Thus, there is a tradeoff between sensitivity and resolution. Figure 12-1. As resolution increases, the NEDT may also increase. The system design is a tradeoff between resolution and sensitivity. Historically, resolution measures were derived from optical system performance. As film was introduced, new measures were created. Sampled data systems created a complexity in the traditional measures. Resolution may be different in the vertical and horizontal directions due to different focal lengths
(anamorphic optics), non-square detectors, or unequal sampling. Following the FLIR92 concept for two-dimensional MRT, the composite resolution is /? _ / d d ^composite у у ’ (12-2) where Rx and Rv are the resolution measures in the horizontal and vertical directions. The composite, Rcon4,osite, is a mathematically convenient estimate of system resolution. It cannot be directly measured. 12.1. ANALOG METRICS Analog measures of resolution may be determined by the width of a point source image, the minimum detectable separation of two point sources, where the MTF drops to a certain level, or the minimum detail resolved by an observer (Table 12-2). These measures assume that the system output is a replica of the object (a linear-shift-invariant system). The TV measures are valid for the scan direction only where the system is operating in the analog domain. Resolution may be defined from optical considerations. Diffraction produces the smallest possible spot size. Diffraction measures include the Rayleigh criterion, Sparrow criterion, and the Airy disk diameter. The Airy disk is the bright center of the diffraction pattern produced by an ideal optical system. The Rayleigh and Sparrow criteria are a measure of the ability to distinguish two closely spaced objects (CSO) where the objects are point sources. Optical aberrations and focus limitations will increase the diffraction diameter to the blur diameter. Optical designers using ray-tracing programs usually calculate the blur diameter. The blur diameter size is dependent upon how it is specified (i.e., the amount of power encircled). The limiting resolution can be defined as that spatial frequency where the MTF drops to 2% or 5% of its maximum value. TV limiting resolution is determined from the finest detail that can be discerned by an observer when viewing star, wedge, or resolution pattern. TV limiting resolution is a subjective measure. The spatial frequency at which the pattern disappears is approximately the same as the limiting resolution. Besides TV limiting resolution, a variety of other measures of resolution exist for monitors1 and a variety of measurement techniques is available.2
Table 12-2 RESOLUTION MEASURES for ANALOG SYSTEMS RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION TEST (usual units) Rayleigh Criterion Ability to distinguish 2 point sources 0 1.222/D (mrad) (Calculated) Spanow Criterion Ability to distinguish 2 point sources 0 = X!D (mrad) (Calculated) Airy Disk Diffraction limited diameter produced by a point source 0 = 2 44 XID (mrad) (Calculated) Blur Diameter Actual minimum diameter produced by point source Calculated from ray tracing (mrad) Limiting Resolution Spatial frequency at which MTF = 0.02 to 0.05 Measured or calculated (cycles/mrad) TV limiting resolution Ability to resolve square waves Measured (TV lines per picture height) Imaging resolution Angular subtense at which SRF = 0.5 Measured (mrad) Measurement resolution Angular subtense at which SRF = 0.99 Measured (mrad) Ground resolved distance The smallest test target (1 cycle) that a photo interpreter Measured or calculated (feet or meters) Ground resolution An estimate of the limiting feature size seen by a photo interpreter Measured (feet or meters) The slit response function (SRF) was developed many years ago when all thermal imaging systems had scanners. The SRF incorporated the response of the optics, detector, and subsequent electronics. The SRF provides both the imaging resolution and measurement resolution. While commercial systems were characterized by these metrics, military systems always used the DAS. The imaging resolution is that target-angular-subtense that produces a 50% response in the slit response function (Figure 12-2). For an ideal system, the DAS is twice the imaging resolution. The measurement resolution is approximately the smallest sized target that will be faithfully reproduced in intensity. Although no industry standard exists, it occurs when 0.90 < SRF < 0.99. It is the absolute minimum size that can be used for accurate temperature measurements.
Target Angular Subtense (mrad) Figure 12-2. Slit response function. 0X is the imaging resolution and 02 is the measurement resolution. For aerial reconnaissance and associated image interpretation, resolution is measured by the ground resolved distance.3,4 Ground resolution is a subjective term that is a numerical estimate of the limiting features of objects to be examined. The system must be capable of resolving these features. For example, a system may require a ground resolution of 4 inches when examining the white centerline of a highway. When examining granite boulders lying on sand beside the same highway the system need only resolve, perhaps, two feet. GRD cannot be measured in the laboratory since it depends upon the distance to the target but may be calculated from an appropriate resolution measure. When viewing aerial imagery that contains a test pattern (such as the U.S. Air Force 1951 standard 3-bar target), an image analyst determines the smallest discernible cycle on the ground. This cycle width (bar plus space) is the GRD. It includes the system MTF and possible degradation by the atmosphere and is a function of altitude. The GRD is related3,4 to the 10-point Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale (IIRS). The National Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale (NURS) has replaced the IIRS.510 Although the GRD-based Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale was developed by the military, it can be modified for environmental remote sensing.11
12.2. SAMPLED DATA SYSTEMS New measures of resolution have been introduced with the advent of sampled data systems (Table 12-3). The detector angular subtense, DAS, is often used to describe the resolution of systems when the detector is the limiting subsystem. If the detector horizontal and vertical dimensions are different, then the DAS in the two directions is different. The IFOV is the angular cone from which the detector senses radiation. It is a summary measure that includes both the optical and detector responses. If the optical blur diameter is small compared to the DAS, then the IFOV is approximately equal to the DAS. The IFOV is typically a measured quantity. Here, a small spot transverses the detector element and the detector output is graphed as a function of angle. The IFOV is defined as the full width one-half maximum amplitude (FWHM) of the resultant signal. If the system output is measured, then the IFOV also depends upon the electronic MTFs. The pixel angular subtense (PAS) is the spatial sampling rate for staring arrays. The Nyquist frequency is one-half of the PAS. Table 12-3 RESOLUTION MEASURES for a SAMPLED DATA SYSTEM RESOLUTION DESCRIPTION TEST (usual units) DAS Angle subtended by one detector element a = d!flsys (mrad) (calculated) IFOV Angular cone over which the detector senses radiation Measured 50% points (mrad) Nyquist frequency One-half of the sampling frequency Calculated (cycles/mrad) PAS Angle subtended by detector center-to-center spacing PAS = dC(JflSYS (mrad) (calculated) EIFOV One-half of the reciprocal of the spatial frequency at which MTF = 0.5 Measured or calculated (mrad) Ensquared power Point visibility factor Single detector output produced by a point source Calculated or measured (%) Pixels Number of detector elements or number of digital data points Numeric
Since the MTF is equal to zero when the spatial frequency is 1/DAS, resolution can be defined as when the MTF = 0. However, for most systems, the MTF does not abruptly reach zero but approaches zero asymptotically. The apparent DAS, aapp can be estimated by fitting a sinc(7i«wfx) curve to the MTF (Figure 12-3). This approach may be useful for systems employing SPRITE detectors where diffusion broadening is minimal. Most resolution measures cannot be used for systems employing SPRITE detectors (See Figure 8-6). Figure 12-3. Fitting a detector MTF to the system MTF to obtain an effective system cutoff. Sampled data systems may be limited optically, by the detector or by the Nyquist frequency. For undersampled systems, the system MTF is defined only up to the Nyquist frequency (Figure 12-4). The effective-instantaneous-field-of-view, EIFOV, offers an alternate measure of resolution. For many systems, the EIFOV and IFOV are approximately equal. If the blur diameter is larger than a single detector, the detector output is less than if the blur diameter were smaller than a detector (See Section З.1.З., Point Source). The ratio of the center detector output to the sum of all the detector outputs is the ensquared power.12 Ensquared power is an important design criterion for systems that are used for point source detection such as IRST systems. It can be measured or may be obtained from the aperiodic transfer function. The ensquared power value also is called the point visibility factor or blur efficiency. For any experimentally derived value, phasing effects dramatically affect the results.
Figure 12-4. Definition of EIFOV for an undersampled system. Example 12-1 ENSQUARED POWER A pinhole whose angular subtense is 1/10 of the DAS simulates a point source. Each detector provides the value given in Figure 12-5b when covered with a black opaque cloth. Centering the pinhole on a detector creates the output shown in Figure 12-5 a. What is the ensquared power? Subtracting the ambient values (Figure 12-5b) from the image (Figure 12-5a) provides the signal produced only by the source (Figure 12-5c). Then — = 57.3% (12-: 384 Ensquared power 5 5 6 5 5 5 20 30 20 5 6 30 225 30 6 5 20 30 20 5 5 5 6 5 5 center pixel output sunt of all pixels 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 0 0 1 0 0 0 15 25 15 0 1 25 220 25 1 0 15 25 15 0 0 0 1 0 0 (a) (b) (c) = (a) - (b) Figure 12-5. Ensquared power, (a) Detector outputs when the point source image is centered on a detector, (b) detector outputs with no target, and (c) difference between (b) and (a).
The peak ensquared power is 57.3%. By moving the pinhole, phasing effects would reduce the ensquared power. The smallest ensquared power will be obtained when the pinhole is centered on a comer where four detectors are joined. 12.3. SYSTEM DESIGN BASED UPON RESOLUTION The variety of resolution measures suggests that a variety of designs are possible: each of which optimizes a particular resolution measure. Each design has its own merits and there is nothing inherently right or wrong about any design. A common starting point is to make the optical blur diameter equal to the detector size. This is only an initial design starting point and the desired relationship between the blur diameter and detector size can deviate depending upon the application. For a diffraction-limited circular aperture, the Airy disk diameter in the detector plane is < 2 44 ; A dairy =6 fl f ' д'" 1^- C12-4) Figure 12-6 illustrates the Airy disk diameter as a function of clear aperture diameter for the visible, MWIR, and LWIR. As the wavelength decreases, the angular disk diameter decreases. If the detector is sufficiently small to fully exploit the optical resolution, the MWIR provides more resolution than the LWIR for a fixed diameter optical system. Figure 12-6. Airy disk diameter as a function of wavelength and aperture diameter. The average wavelengths in the visible, MWIR, and LWIR are 0.55, 4, and 10 pm, respectively.
Similarly, for a fixed resolution requirement, the MWIR aperture only has to be OMWIR/0LWIR times the diameter of the LWIR system. Figure 12-7 portrays the slant range for a variety of resolutions based upon Equation 12-1. When the detector DAS equals the Airy disk diameter, the detector cutoff, flco, is 1/2.44 of the optical cutoff, foco. Figure 12-8 illustrates this relationship. Here, the detector cutoff limits the system response. This limitation can be appreciated by viewing the intensity profile of several point sources separated by 2.44 MD rad (Figure 12-9). resolution RANGE (km) Figure 12-7. Detection range as a function of angular resolution (mrad). These ranges are only achievable for very high contrast targets. Otherwise, sensitivity considerations will NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 12-8. Optical and detector MTFs when the detector size is equal to the Airy disk diameter. The detector cutoff limits the system spatial frequency response.
Figure 12-9. Intensity profile of two point sources separated by 2.441/Z) rad. If the detector size is matched to this separation, it would be impossible to distinguish the two sources. Although the MTF is defined for sinusoidal inputs, optical resolution is often linked to the Rayleigh or Sparrow criterion. These criteria were developed as a measure of an optical system resolution. The blur diameter was viewed by the eye or by film. In both these cases, the detector (the eye or the film) had much higher resolution than the blur diameter. With the Rayleigh criterion, the first zero of one point source is centered on the maximum of the next and the separation is 1.22 XLD rad. Figure 12-10 illustrates a series of point sources separated by the Rayleigh criterion. If the DAS is 1.22 X/D this modulation would not be detected. Figure 12-10. Series of point sources separated by the Rayleigh criterion, 1.22 XID rad. If the detector DAS was equal to this separation, it could only reproduce lower frequencies.
If the detector cutoff equaled the optical cutoff, the full spatial frequency response of the optics is exploited and the system resolution is limited by the optics (Figure 12-11). Here the detector size is only 40.9% of the Airy disc diameter. Even with this relationship, the detector MTF degrades the system MTF. If the detector were even smaller, the system MTF would be nearly equal to the optical MTF. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 12-11. Detector cutoff equal to the optical cutoff. MTFdetector still degrades the signal passed by the optical system. A vanishing small detector is required to fully exploit the optical MTF. 12.4. SHADE’S EQUIVALENT RESOLUTION Shade created a metric for system performance. As reported by Lloyd, Sendall modified Shade’s equivalent resolution14 such that Re“ 2-'4 'r 2j|MTFSIS(/)| df 0 (12-5) where Ne is Shade's equivalent pass band (discussed in Section 13.2., Equivalent Pass Band). Req cannot be measured. It is a mathematical construct used simply to compare overall performance. It has units of 1 /frequency. As the MTF increases, REQ decreases and the resolution “improves” (smaller is better). This provides a better indication of system performance than just the DAS. Req provides a better measure of resolution and probably should be used in Equation 12-1 to obtain a more realistic measure of range performance.
Shade's approach is appropriate for well-behaved MTFs. It probably should not be used (nor should any other image quality metric) when there is any significant aliasing present, nonlinear image processing algorithms, or significant boost. Req may be different for the vertical and horizontal directions and Equation 12-2 can be used for the composite resolution. Using Rcomposite in Equation 12-1 provides an estimate of the detection range. The metric was developed for human observer response. The applicability to machine vision systems has not been established at this time. As an approximation, the system resolution, Req_sys, may be estimated from the subsystem resolutions, Rt, by Req-sys« + ^2 + • • • + • (12-6) Req cannot be evaluated in closed form for all subsystems such as boost, defocused optics or Chebychev filters. For these subsystems, Equation 12-6 must be evaluated numerically. If a subsystem MTF is essentially unity over the spatial frequency region of interest, then that subsystem Req can be ignored (e.g., Req = 0). Following is a list of equivalent resolutions for several subsystems. Optics MTF = — 1 * optics R optics jy mrad. (12-7) Note that Shade’s approach provides a value that is smaller than the Airy disk diameter. Recall that REQ is only a mathematical construct used to analyze system performance. Detector MTFdetector sine (ct f x ) R detector = a mrad‘ (12-8) LEDs and linear motion have an MTF with the same functional dependence as a detector and therefore will have the same equivalent resolution (with appropriate units).
Sinusoidal motion MTFsinusoidal ^o^^s^fx^ К sinusoidal l-37tZ mrad. (12-9) Single-order low-pass filter MTFfllter = 1 5. R filter 1 (12-10) Random motion and display MTF, . = ' Gaussian c D Gaussian (12-11) Eye The units depend upon the frequency used. yJeye MTFeye M Г Reye ~~ deg. л M (12-12) For many systems, the detector MTF and the optics MTF dominate the system MTF. When Roptics dominates Re(] we say the system is optics-limited. When Rdetector dominates Req , we say the system is detector-limited. Using Equation 12-6 to estimate the composite resolution provides eq-sys d I f 1.8452. fV — J ---------- +1 mrad. J4 I d ) (12-13)
It is easier to gain insight into the relationship between the optical and detector resolutions by evaluating it in image space (1.845ЯгУ < d , +1 mm. (12-14) As ).F/d decreases, Req.sys approaches d. For large values of XF/d, the system becomes optics-limited and the equivalent resolution increases (Figure 12-12). Figures 12-13 through 12-15 illustrate wavelength effects. Figure 12-15 suggests that most LWIR systems are not detector limited. Therefore using the DAS in Equation 12-1 will provide an optimistic range (too big). Figure 12-12. Equivalent resolution as a function of AF/d. The vertical line <&).F/d 1/(2.44) = 0.41 separates optics-limited from detector-limited operation. It occurs when the Airy disk size is equal to the detector size. Figure 12-13. Equivalent resolution as a function of f-number for a typical A-inch format CCD camera (d = 10 pm and 2 = 0.5 pm). The vertical line at F = 8.2 separates optics-limited from detector-limited operation.
Figure 12-14. Equivalent resolution as a function of f-number for a typical MWIR sensor (d = 40 pm and 2 = 4 pm). The vertical line at F = 4.1 separates optics-limited from detector- limited operation. <л 20 -|----------1------!----1----------1-----------1-----------1 0 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 12-15. Equivalent resolution as a function of f-number for a typical LWIR sensor (d = 40 pm and 2=10 pm). The vertical line at F = 1.6 separates optics-limited from detector- limited operation. We live in a world where “smaller is better.” Detector sizes are shrinking. This allows the system designer to create physically smaller cameras. Using a one-half sized detector implies a 2x improvement in resolution. However, this is only true if the system is operating in the detector-limited
region. As d decreases, the f-number must also decrease to stay within the detector-limited region. Reducing the f-number can place a burden on the optical designer. Note that, if the f-number is not reduced in the same proportion (Equation 3-18), the output signal decreases. In principle, any loss in signal can be overcome by increasing the system gain. These results would be evident when performing range predictions or evaluating MRC or MRT plots. Changing the focal length or detector size changes the MRT (see Figure 12-1). Example 12-2 RESOLUTION A common module system operating in the LWIR spectral region has an entrance diameter of 10 inches. The DAS is 0.1 mrad. The system contains a low pass filter whose f3dB is 6 cycles/mrad when referred back to object space. What is the resolution when the jitter, Gjitter is 0 (laboratory use), 20 grad and 50 prad? (see Section 6.8., System Design Example, Random Motion Effects) The optics provides „ 1.845Л 1.845 1.845 л RnntirK =---------=-------=-------= 0.0726 mrad . (12-15) ' D foco 25.4 The detector provides /?totof=0.l mrad. The electronics provides R.„ =--------= — = 0.0531 mrad . (12-16) Q xfe3dB When the jitter is zero, Rjitter = 0. For jitter of 20 prad and 50 grad, Rjitter is 0.0709 mrad and 0.177 mrad, respectively. With no jitter, the resultant resolution is Req_sys = V(0.0762)2 + (o.l)2 + (0.0531)2 = 0.136 mrad . (12-17) With 20 prad jitter, the resultant resolution is Req_sys = 7(0.13б)2 + (0.0709)2 =0.153 mrad. (12-18)
With 50 grad jitter, the resultant resolution is Req_sys = 7(0ЛЗб)2 + (0.177)2 = 0.224 mrad . (12-19) Figure 12-16 illustrates the MTFs. The spatial frequency associated with the equivalent resolution is 1/Req.sys. For this example, MTF ~ 0.14 at l/Req_sys. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 12-16. MTFs for three high frequency random motions. The vertical lines indicate \/Req_sys. 12.5. REFERENCES 1. L. M. Biberman, Image Quality," in Perception of Displayed Information, pp. 11-86, L. M. Biberman, ed., Plenum Press, New York (1973). 2. P. A. Keller, "Resolution Measurement Techniques for Data Display Cathode Ray Tubes," Displays Vol. 7(1), pp. 17-29(1986). 3. Air Standardization Agreement: "Minimum Ground Object Sizes for Imaging Interpretation," Air Standardization Co-ordinating Committee report AIR STD 101/11 (31 December 1976). 4. Air Standardization Agreement: "Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale," Air Standardization Co- ordinating Committee report AIR STD 101/11 (10 July 1978). 5. K. Riehl and L. Maver, "A Comparison of Two Common Aerial Reconnaissance Image Quality Measures," in Airborne Reconnaissance XX, W. G. Fishell, A. A. Andraitis, A. C. Crane, Jr., and M. S. Fagan, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2829, pp. 242-254 (1996). 6. J. M. Irvine, "National Imagery Interpretability Rating Scales (NIIRS): Overview and Methodology," in Airborne Reconnaissance XXI, W. C. Fishell, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3128, pp. 93-103 (1997). 7. G. C. Holst, Sampling, Aliasing, and Data Fidelity, pp. 311-319, JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL (1998). 8. J. C. Leachtenauer, W. Malila, J. Irvine, L. Colburn, and N. Salvaggio, General Image-Quality Equation: GIQE," Applied Optics, Vol 36(32), pp. 8322-8328 (1997).
9. R. E. Hanna, "Using the GRD to set EO Sensor Design Budgets," in Airborne Reconnaissance XXI, W. C. Fishell, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3128 (1997). 10. R. G. Driggers, P. Cox, and M. Kelley, "National Imagery Interpretation Rating System and the Probabilities of Detection, Recognition, and Identification," Optical Engineering, Vol. 36(7), pp. 1952- 1959(1997). 11. J. D. Greer and J. Caylor, "Development of an Environmental Image Interpretability' Rating Scale," in Airborne Reconnaissance XVI, T. W. Augustyn and P. A. Henkel, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1763, pp. 151-157 (1992). 12. L. M. Beyer, S, H. Cobb, and L. C. Clune, "Ensquared Power for Obscured Circular Pupils With Off-Center Imaging," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(25), pp. 3569-3574 (1991). 13, J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging, page 109. Plenum Press, New York (1975) 14. О. FI. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion Picture Systems," published in four parts in J. SMPTE-. "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer Characteristics," Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II: The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures - An Analysis of Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp. 181-222 (1952); "Part III: The Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part IV Image Analysis in Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp. 593-617 (1955). EXERCISES 1. Referring to Figure 3-9, estimate the DAS and IFOV for each of the nine diagrams. 2. Estimate the ensquared power if the blur diameter is centered on the corner of four adjoining detectors (Figure 12-5). 3. How would you define a DAS and IFOV for a SPRITE detector? 4. How would you define a DAS and IFOV for the human eye? 5. Three different systems are considered for a specific application: visible, MWIR, and LWIR. In all systems, the detector size is 30 pm square. The aperture size is four inches and the system f-number is 2. What is the DAS and IFOV? Estimate if necessary.
13 IMAGE QUALITY Image quality is a subjective impression ranking the imagery from poor- to-excellent. It is somewhat a learned ability. It is a perceptual one, accomplished by the brain, affected by and incorporating other sensory systems, emotions, learning, and memory. The relationships are many and not well understood. Seeing varies between individuals and temporarily within an individual. There exist large variations in an observer's judgment as to the correct rank ordering from worst-to-best and therefore image quality cannot be placed on an absolute scale. Visual psychophysical investigations have not measured all the properties relevant to imaging systems. Many formulas exist for predicting image quality. Each is appropriate under a particular set of viewing conditions. These expressions are typically obtained from empirical data in which multiple observers view many images with a known amount of degradation. The observers rank-order the imagery from worst-to-best and then an equation is derived which relates the ranking scale to the amount of degradation. If the only metric for image quality were resolution, then we would attempt to maximize resolution in our system design. Many tests have provided some insight into image metrics that are related to image quality. In general, images with higher MTFs and less noise are judged as having better image quality. There is no single ideal MTF shape that provides best image quality. For example, Kusaka1 showed that the MTF that produced the most aesthetically pleasing images depended upon the scene content. The metrics suggested by Shade,2 Granger and Cupery,3 and Barten4'8 offer additional insight on how to optimize an imaging system. Granger and Cupery developed the Subjective Quality Factor (SQF): an empirically derived relationship using individuals' responses when viewing many photographs. Shade used photographs and included high quality TV images. Barten's approach is more comprehensive in that it includes the monitor contrast and luminance. Aliasing was not overpowering in any of these studies. In some respects, the starting point for system design should be the monitor. No image will look sharp unless the overall system is MTFeye limited. But the more this is true, the less information is conveyed. That is, the eye cannot
perceive all the detail provided by the system. On the other hand, scan lines or pixels become obvious if the system is detector- or monitor-limited. Ideally, the sensor resolution should be approximately to the eye’s resolution. There are potentially three different system design requirements: (1) Good image quality, (2) performing a specific task, and (3) specific application. In some cases these are equivalent, in others they are not. While good image quality is always desired, a military system designed to detect a specific target may not provide the "best" image quality. Computer monitors are usually designed to make alphanumeric characters readable (specific application). 13.1. MTF Our perception of good image quality is based upon the real world of seeing all colors, all intensities and textures. With an imaging system, we have a limited field-of-view, limited temporal and spatial resolution, and a two- dimensional view of a three-dimensional world. In the real world our eyes scan the entire scene. This is not possible with imagery. Furthermore, the real world is noiseless and the loss of image quality due to noise can only be estimated. There is no model that accurately describes the interaction of noise and the desired image structure. Most visual psychophysical experiments on image quality were derived from photographs with minimal added noise. The eye is most sensitive to spatial frequencies between three and six cycles/deg and boost should be used to emphasize those spatial frequencies that are important to visual image quality. The absolute rating is different depending upon the scale used, but the relative rating form worst-to-best is similar. Within measurement accuracy, it is probably difficult to select one over another. Therefore the model that is easiest to implement may be used. Figure 13-1 illustrates two different MTFs that may have significantly different resolutions depending upon the definition selected. When systems have different MTFs, specific scenes can be selected that makes one system appear better than the other. This is particularly true if the MTFs are not similar in shape or functional form. Which system selected depends upon the specific application. While they may appear equal in an image quality metric, range performance trades will select that system that has the highest MTF at the spatial frequency of interest. For example for high spatial frequencies, system A is better and for low spatial frequencies, system В is better.
Figure 13-1. Two different systems that may have different resolutions but may provide equivalent image quality when reproducing specific scenes. The results of Shade, Granger and Cupery, and Barten suggest something about the MTF. But this is not necessarily related to the ability to detect certain sized targets. Detection criteria are contained m the Johnson criteria (Chapter 20, Target Discrimination) and the target transfer function. The amount of boost and the boost frequency can be selected to optimize the detection range of a specific sized target. FLIR92 outputs suggest that boost should be at that spatial frequency that represents the target size. This is a result of the model formulation and may not necessarily provide the best overall imagery. With staring arrays, the concepts of resolution and MTF are ill defined. Phasing effects can destroy imagery. Any image quality metric must be used with caution for sampled data systems where significant aliasing may occur (see Chapter 14, Sample-data Systems). System optimization for automatic target recognizers and target cuers is different from optimization for an observer. The eye with its adaptive tuned filter is more tolerant of noise and aliasing than an ATR or cuer. These machine vision systems probably want unity MTF at all spatial frequencies. Boost increases both the signal and the noise equally so that the SNR remains constant at that frequency. It is not obvious how boost enhances the detection of targets embedded in noise for machine vision systems.
13.2. EQUIVALENT PASS BAND Shade2 discovered that the apparent image sharpness of a TV picture can be described by 00 0 (13-1) where 7Ve is Shade's equivalent pass band. Shade's approach using the square of the MTF emphasized those spatial frequencies at which the MTF is relatively high. It appears to be a good measure for classical systems in which the MTF is monotonically decreasing. The two MTFs shown in Figure 13-1 could have the same equivalent pass bands. Thus, a single number such as 7Ve should not be used to compare systems built to different designs. However, Ne is useful for comparing a system built to similar designs. For example, it can be used to compare, on a relative scale, all EMUX systems. It should not be used to compare a common module system to an EMUX system that has boost. The equivalent pass band was related to an equivalent resolution in Section 12.4., Shade's Equivalent Resolution Re„= —— . (13-2) q 2Ne 13.3. PERCEIVED SIGNAL-TO-NOISE RATIO The perceived signal-to-noise ratio is MTF M 1 SNR=k----------22---------------------------------------, (13-3) system noise {eye spatial filter){eye temporal filter) where ЛТ is the intensity difference between the target and its immediate background and Ar is a proportionality constant that depends upon the aperture diameter, focal length, and quantum efficiency. When the perceived SNR is above a threshold value, the target is just perceived (discussed in Section 19.2.2, SNRpi and te). *4 As illustrated in Figure 13-2, as the intensity increases, higher spatial frequencies can be perceived. Here, the resolution appears to increase as scene intensity increases.8 However, most system resolution metrics (see Chapter 12, Resolution) are independent of light level. The image quality metrics introduced in this chapter deal with high contrast targets with minimal noise. With threshold
detection, the targets are embedded in noise and just barely visible. Threshold detection, when plotted as a function of target spatial frequency, is simply the MRT or MRC (see Chapter 19, System Performance Models'). The MRT and MRC are system performance metrics independent of image quality. NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 13-2. Perceived SNR as a function of target spatial frequency and target intensity. When SNRp is above a threshold value, those spatial frequencies can be perceived. The Korn fold-Law son eye model has been used. The eye inhibitory response model would also show a change in low frequency target detection. 13.4. SUBJECTIVE QUALITY FACTOR According to Granger and Cupery,3 the spatial frequency important to image quality is in the region from approximately one-third to three times the peak sensitivity of the eye. This roughly covers the region between the 50% points on the eye MTF curve (Figure 13-3). The eye models of Campbell and Robson, Nill, Schultz, and deJong (Figure 6-25) support Granger and Cupery's approach. The Komfeld-Lawson model (Figure 6-27) does not provide the same insight as the subjective quality factor. Recall that the Komfeld-Lawson model was created only to simulate the mid to high spatial frequency response. The SQF is defined in logarithmic units. Assuming peak sensitivity at 4.5 cycles/deg the SQF is: iog(/2) SQF = J MTFsys (Д ) J(log(/X )) , Mfr) (13-4) where f - 1.5Msyv /17.45, f2 = 13.5/И^. /17.45, and Msys is the overall system magnification as seen by the observer (Equation 6-58). Since the eye response
appears to be log-normally distributed, a quality factor based upon a logarithmic scale appears reasonable. In the SQF approach, only those frequencies that are very important to the eye are included. The spatial frequency presented to the eye depends upon the image size on the display, the distance to the display, and electronic zoom. Table 13-1 provides an interpretation9 of the SQF. These results are based upon many observers viewing noiseless photographs with known MTF degradation. Figure 13-3. SQF region compared to the Komfeld-Lawson eye model and Campbell-Robson eye model. The Komfeld- Lawson eye model does not lend itself to the SQF approach. However, the Komfeld-Lawson model is considered only applicable to mid spatial frequencies. Table 13-1 SUBJECTIVE QUALITY FACTOR SQF SUBJECTIVE IMAGE QUALITY 0.92 Excellent 0.80 Good 0.75 Acceptable 0.50 Unsatisfactory 0.25 Unusable If boost is employed, then it should be used to increase those spatial frequencies that fall within the SQF band pass. Figure 13-4 illustrates an airborne system that is eye-limited in that the pilot is too far away from a small display. The boost is just outside the region of the SQF. Figure 13-5 illustrates the same system when the imagery is viewed on a high quality laboratory monitor. The boost is now within the SQF pass band.
MTF MTF Figure 13-4. SQF region for an MTFeye limited airborne system. The boost is outside the SQF region. foco = 25.4 cycles/mrad, a=0.1 mrad, o;=30 grad, two filters with f3dB = 6 cycles/mrad (when referred to object space), a digital filter that provides boost (illustrated in Figure 8-12), MTFS&H, and MTFphase have been included. The effective sampling frequency is 40 cycles/mrad. The observer is 36 inches from a 6-inch monitor. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 13-5. SQF region for laboratory viewing on a high quality monitor. vr = 0. The observer is 36 inches from a 14-inch monitor. The boost is within the SQF region.
According to this image quality model, the imagery will look good in the laboratory but appears less than optimized in actual usage. That is, the system may be considered good based upon laboratory imagery. If the task is to resolve high frequency targets only, then the boost may be in the correct location. By using a rectangle to illustrate the area of interest, it suggests where the boost frequency should be located. Shade’s equivalent pass band (or equivalent resolution) does not directly indicate how to optimize the boost frequency. 13.5. SQUARE-ROOT INTEGRAL The eye-brain system appears to operate as a tuned spatial-temporal filter and tuning varies according to the task on hand. Since the eye approximates an optimum filter, no system performance improvement is expected by precisely matching the image spectrum to the eye-brain-preferred spectrum. Rather, if the displayed spectrum is within the limits of the eye spectrum, the eye will automatically tune to the image. Clearly the overall system magnification should be set such that the frequency of the maximum interest coincides with the peak frequency of the eye's SWR. Although this implies a specific frequency, the range of optimization is broad as illustrated by the SQF approach. Barten introduced the square-root integral (SQRI) approach4 to image quality. This model includes the effects of various monitor parameters such as resolution, addressability, contrast, luminance, display size, and viewing distance. He later5-7 expanded the model to include noise: co SQRI = J ,lMTFsys(fx) rf(log(/x)), (13-5) 0 where MTFsys includes the eye. Barten's approach is attractive since it includes the eye's response to noise. The equivalent pass band, SQF, and the SQRI provide similar results for systems with well-behaved MTFs. That is, higher values provide better imagery.
13.6. REFERENCES 1. H. Kusaka, "Consideration of Vision and Picture Quality - Psychological Effects Induced by Picture Sharpness," in Human Vision, Visual Processing and Digital Display, В. E. Rogowitz, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1077, pp 50-55(1989). 2. О. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion Picture Systems," published in four parts in J. SMPTE\ "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer Characteristics," Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II: The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures - An Analysis of Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp. 181-222 (1952); "Part III: The Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part IV: Image Analysis in Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp 593-617 (1955). 3. E. M. Granger and K. N. Cupery, "An Optical Merit Function (SQF) Which Correlates With Subjective Image Judgments," Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 16, pp. 221-230 (1972). 4. P. G. Barten, "Evaluation of Subjective Image Quality with the Square-root Integral Method," Journal of the Optical Society of America. A, Vol. 17(10), pp. 2024-2031 (1990). 5. P. G. Barten, "Evaluation of the Effect of Noise on Subjective Image Quality," in Human Vision, Visual Processing and Digital Display II, J. P. Allenbach, M. H. Brill, and В E. Rogowitz, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1453, pp. 2-15 (1991). 6. P. G. Barten, "Physical Model for the Contrast Sensitivity of the Human Eye," in Human Vision, Visual Processing and Digital Display III, В. E. Rogowitz, SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1666, pp 57-72 (1992). 7. P. G. Barten, Contrast Sensitivity of the Human Eye and its Effect on Image Quality," pp. 153-198, SPIE Press, Bellingham WA (1999). 8. P. G. Barten, Contrast Sensitivity of the Human Eye and its Effect on Image Quality," pp. 178-179, SPIE Press, Bellingham WA (1999). 9. F. J. Drago, E. M Granger, and R. C. Hicks, "Procedures for Making Color Fiche Transparencies of Maps, Charts, and Documents," Journal of Imaging Science and Technology, Vol. 11(1) pp. 12-17 (1965).
14 SAMPLED-DATA SYSTEMS Perception of Displayed Information contains many examples of aliasing and a theoretical treatment of aliasing. Biberman1 asks, "What does sampling do to picture quality?" and "What must the sampling frequency and format be to minimize image deterioration?" He further states: In the case of image formation by a matrix of detectors with electrical outputs, the problems associated with fabrication, cost, interconnections of wiring, number of amplifiers, and so forth serve to constrain the number of detectors used. Thus there tend to be many fewer detector elements per picture.... and the limitations associated with sampling the imagery must be considered..... Basically, there are three factors affecting this problem of finite sampling and image quality: (1) The number of samples per image, (2) The signal-to-noise ratio, and (3) The generation of spurious signals by the sampling process. With the desire to design the least-complex system, Biberman’s questions lead to: "How much aliasing can be tolerated?" For periodic images whose spatial frequencies' approach fn , sum and difference frequencies create beat patterns. Thus, undersampling can be very evident when viewing periodic images. For aperiodic images, there is uncertainty in an edge location. This uncertainty appears, at most, as one detector spacing or one clock-time distance from the true location. Unless several edges are close together (a periodic pattern), these effects tend to be overlooked. The naturally occurring real world is typically aperiodic and the moire structure is rarely seen in real imagery. Legault2 looked at 109 airborne images before finding an example of aliasing. He selected a plowed field. Whether aliasing is bothersome (it is always present) is scene dependent and the degree of undesirability cannot be predicted in advance. We have become accustomed to undersampling. Our commercial televisions are undersampled in the vertical direction due to the raster pattern. Digital displays are undersampled in both directions. The undersampling effect produces moire patterns that become evident when the image contains periodic objects - such as a person wearing a striped shirt. For all the remaining objects, the edge uncertainty is ±!4 raster line. We have become accustomed to this "standard TV quality” and an image must be significantly degraded before we object to the image quality. However, this does not mean that aliasing should be neglected. It introduces artifacts in all imagery. Park and Hazra3 recommend that these artifacts be considered as signal-dependent added noise.
To avoid aliasing, the signal must be band-limited, sampled at an adequate rate, and be appropriately reconstructed. These conditions are not fully met with electro-optical imaging systems. As a result, signals are aliased. Sampling frequency deals with sinusoidal patterns and targets in the real world are aperiodic. While aliasing is generally considered undesirable, it does not totally interfere with target detection, recognition, or identification. The ideal anti-alias filter eliminates all frequencies above Nyquist. For target detection, it is better to have aliased frequencies than no frequencies (e.g., potentially no target). The anti-alias filter does more harm than good. This is a direct consequence of who (or what) is interpreting the imagery. Sampling theory was developed for audio communications and the ear is a frequency detector. The eye, on the other hand, is primarily an intensity detector. The eye does not care if the frequency spectrum has been altered somewhat. Aliased signals can be appropriately interpreted by the eye. The sampling rate can be defined in object space (samples/mrad) or in time (samples/s). For scanning systems, the time for an edge to sweep across a detector element is the dwell time. Therefore is common to use samples/dwell for scanning systems (in the scan direction only). While scanning arrays can have any number of samples per dwell in the scan direction, usually one to four is selected to minimize hardware complexity and cost. Driven by Nyquist frequency considerations, many systems have 2 samples/dwell. Implicit in using samples per dwell is that the system is detector MTF limited. That is, the optical cutoff is much greater than the detector cutoff (foco>fdc^. Staring arrays are inherently undersampled. They only provide one sample per pixel-angular-subtense (PAS). For the cross scan direction in scanning systems and all staring systems, the pixel is defined by the effective center-to- center spacing. Microscan changes the effective sampling rate and changes the PAS but not the DAS. Detection, recognition, and identification are related to the number of pixels on the target. Implicit in this approach is that the system is detector MTF limited Shade introduced the concept of spurious response to quantify the amount of tolerated aliasing for general imagery. With his approach, the total amount of aliased signal is compared to the unaliased portion. The aliased amount depends upon the magnitude of the MTF for all spatial frequencies above the Nyquist frequency. NVESD empirically extended Shade's work. They recognized that sampling may be considered as a blurring function since an image usually appears one pixel wider than the target. They recommend contracting or "squeezing" the system MTF to account for this apparent blurring effect.
14.1. SAMPLES PER DWELL The effective number of samples per dwell is SD = DAS HFOV (Number of samples per HFOV}. (14-1) Sampling will always cause an edge (sharp transition) to appear to have a finite width (Figure 14-1). Sampling creates a ghost ±!6 pixel wide in the reconstructed image. The blurriness of an edge depends upon the scene sample phase and the reconstruction process. Park and Schowengerdt4 defined the square of the radiometric error as E =---—— when 1 < SD < 2. 45 SD2 (14-2) At one sample per dwell, the average error is four times higher than at two samples per dwell. They limited their analysis to 1 < SD < 2 since most scanning systems operate in this region. The image blur decreases when SD > 2 but not as fast as implied by Equation 14-2. Park and Schowengerdt’s approach is strictly a mathematical method that describes the effects of sampling. It does not consider visual interpretation of image quality. Figure 14-1. Ambiguity in edge sharpness due to sampling. The shaded area represents the range of possible outputs depending upon the scene sample phase, system MTF, and reconstruction process. The range of values also depends upon the sampling lattice (not shown).
Figure 14-2. Relative image quality as a function of samples per dwell. The variations in the image quality metric are due to phasing effects. The optimum number of samples per dwell appears to be near two (From reference 5). Chow5 reported an experiment where the number of samples per dwell was varied. He compared its image fidelity to that of a continuous scan system (Figure 14-2). He reported ' a great improvement in performance can be achieved by going from 1 to 2 samples per dwell and that at 3 samples per dwell, performance of the sampled data system is almost equal to that of a continuous scan system." Since the work was performed with periodic images (sinusoids), the extension to general imagery is not clear. These results may typify image quality when viewing picket fences, railroad tracks, and plowed fields. D'Agostino et. al. performed6 several perception tests in which trained observers were required to identify the correct vehicle and aspect angle. These vehicles were part of the NVESD computer data set7 of typical military vehicles (tanks, trucks, and jeeps). There was no noise or clutter: The targets were simply presented against a uniform background. The number of pixels across the target ranged from about 5 to 10. The sampling lattice and effective detector size were varied which changed the number of samples. Their "sample per detector dimension" is equivalent to samples per dwell. The results,6 shown in Figure 14-3, are summarized: a. Above a relative sampling of two per detector dimension, there was little additional improvement in performance observed. b. One sample per detector dimension resulted in relatively good performance considering the degree of aliasing assumed present in the imagery. c. Below one sample per detector dimension, performance severely degraded.
staring ш о a: ш ш о $ Ш SAMPLES PER DETECTOR DIMENSION Figure 14-3. Average probability of correctly identifying military vehicles as a function of samples per pixel. A staring array with 100% fill factor provides one sample per pixel. Only scanning arrays can provide more than one sample per dwell. Reducing the number of samples per pixel reduces hardware complexity and cost. (From reference 6) Higher sampling rates (more than four samples per pixel) reduce phasing effects and provide a cosmetically pleasing image. However, these higher sampling rates apparently are not necessary when the observer has to identify military vehicles on a uniform background. The optimum sampling rate based upon their results appear to be about 1.75 when the task is to identify military vehicles. The extension of their results to any other vehicle, ship, or aircraft is purely hypothetical. One sample per dwell is adequate to detect and recognize military vehicles. That is (to no one's surprise), staring arrays provide adequate imagery. The results with scanning systems suggest that there is some improvement in detection capability when the number of samples approaches 1.75 per dwell. The observers were not asked to comment on the image quality; only if they could correctly identify the target. For military application, their results suggest that staring arrays (one sample per pixel) can be used successfully for detecting ground vehicles.
14.2. PIXELS ON TARGET Because of its apparent simplicity, some analysts suggested a system design based upon the required number of pixels on target. This approach is valid for systems that are detector MTF limited. Common parlance uses DASs on target when the pixels on target is meant. These are equal for 100% fill factor arrays. Pixels on target is appropriate for staring arrays. The range at which a target can be perceived is estimated by л target size , , 4 Range»-------------- , (14-3) resolution where the PAS is taken as the system angular resolution. Intuitively, there should be a link between resolution, samples per dwell, and pixels on target. But this link is only valid for square or nearly square targets and systems that have equal resolution in the horizontal and vertical directions. FLIR92 partially overcomes this difficulty by employing a two-dimensional MRT. For nonsquare targets with structure, the precise target size becomes more difficult to define. Figure 14-4a illustrates the silhouette of a Soviet Bear bomber. In Figures 14-4b to 14-4e the number of pixels on the target increases. These images contain only eight gray levels to emphasize sampling effects. The system MTF is unity over the spatial frequencies of interest. This approach emphasizes sampling effects. With a real system, the system MTFs will blur edges. Simple pixel averaging, as shown in these figures, is extremely simple. More sophisticated image reconstruction algorithms will provide more pleasing and less blocky images. Nevertheless, this simplified approach illustrates sampling effects. Although Figure 14-4c (eight pixels on target) does not look like a bomber, that may be inferred from other information. For example, trucks and ships do not fly. It is the auxiliary information that is often used to identify objects - not just the object outline. Any mathematical approach considered cannot include these complex learned parameters. Thus, pixels on target are a simplification of our interpretation process. All figures illustrate sample-scene phase effects. For example, in Figure 14-4e, the fuselage is not of uniform intensity. It appears darker on one side than the other. The engines appear as either one pixel wide or two pixels wide. When two pixels wide, they are of reduced intensity. Optical blur, electronic MTF, and the reconstruction process will smooth out these images. The figures typify the imagery that machine vision systems analyze. Phasing effects are particularly bothersome to image processing algorithms and automatic target recognizers.
Although 16 pixels across the wing span (Figure 14-4d) are sufficient to identify the object as an aircraft, 32 pixels are required to discern the engines (Figure 14- 4e). (c) (d) Figure 14-4. Soviet Bear bomber, (a) Silhouette, (b) Image of bomber with four contiguous pixels across the wing span, (c) Eight contiguous pixels across the wing span, (continued next page)
Figure 14-4 (continued). Soviet Bear bomber, (d) 16 contiguous pixels across the wing span, (e) 32 contiguous pixels across the wing span, (f) 64 contiguous pixels across the wing span. Eight levels of gray are used. Figure 14-5a illustrates the silhouette of a Forest Sherman class destroyer. Figures 14-5b through 14-5e provide the silhouette with 8, 16, 32, and 64 pixels across the length respectively. Eight levels of gray are used. 32 pixels across the length (Figure 14-5d) are probably sufficient to identify the ship as a destroyer. Here it is the vertical number of pixels that supply the required detail, In the vertical direction there are about 16 pixels. Thus it is the number of pixels in the critical dimension that are linked to recognition or identification. When using the critical dimension in Equation 14-3, the calculated range is the distance at which the critical dimension can be discerned - not the range at which the target can first be detected. All figures illustrate phasing effects. For example, Figure 14-6 illustrates phasing effects when there are 32 pixels across the length. As with the bomber, it is the auxiliary information that aids in the identification. Sonar data would provide the range. The ship size can be estimated from the relationship between the image size and the system field-of-view. Knowing the ship size and shape, identification is possible.
(e) Figure 14-5. Sherman class destroyer, (a) Silhouette, (b) Eight contiguous pixels across the length, (c) 16 contiguous pixels across the length (d) 32 contiguous pixels across the length, (e) 64 contiguous pixels across the length. Eight levels of gray are used.
(a) Figure 14-6. Phasing effects with 32 contiguous pixels across the length. Each image is offset by '/2 pixel either horizontally or vertically, (a) is identical to Figure 14-5d. The samples per dwell for scanning systems and pixels on target for staring arrays do not consider the system MTF. There may be adequate samples on the target from a resolution point of view. But if the system is too noisy, the target will not be detected The number of pixels on target required to perform a certain task depends upon the level of detail required to detect the system. Different phases will affect the displayed shape. At long distances, pure detection will answer the question ’’Is something there?" But it does not answer, "How many pixels are enough?"
14.3. ASYMMETRIC SAMPLING Staring arrays provide one sample per PAS. The number of samples per detector dwell for scanning systems depends upon the A/D clock frequency in the scan direction and the location of the detectors in the vertical direction. Scanning arrays tend to have nonsymmetric sampling. The common module design tends to have two samples per dwell in the scan direction and one sample per DAS in the vertical direction. Staring arrays may or may not have symmetrical sampling. It is generally accepted that machine vision system algorithms are easier to implement when MTFs and sampling lattices are equal in the horizontal and vertical directions. The eye is more tolerant of the sampling lattice differences. As the distortion increases, the detection process became more difficult. Park et. al.8 analyzed the Landsat multispectral scanner system (MSS). The MSS system is a line scanner that is undersampled both in the along track and across track directions. There are 1.31 samples per pixel in the across track direction (scan direction) and 0.93 samples per pixel in the along track direction. From a mathematical point of view, this anisotropic undersampling should provide obvious image asymmetry. This 1.42:1 mismatch in sampling is less obvious when the optical blur is added to the imagery (Figure 14-7). The target is in the upper left. The upper right image is blurred due to optical diffraction and the continuous convolution of the square detector DAS. The objects in the lower left and right are more blurred images of this target as they would be formed by convolving with a 1.42:1 rectangle whose size is matched to the MSS average system MTF. Figure 14-7. Simulated Landsat multispectral imagery. The asymmetric sampling of 1.42:1 is not considered visually objectionable. The rectangles represent the sampling lattice size (From reference 8).
Two orthogonal orientations are shown. The images are blurred and do exhibit some asymmetry, but the eye is very tolerant of degraded imagery. Our visual experience allows us to "fill in" the missing parts and still identify the object as a pentagon. Additional subsystem MTFs will further degrade the system MTF and the asymmetry will be even less noticeable. Sample scene effects make this asymmetry difficult to measure. Obert et. al. reported9 several computer simulation results in which the DAS and sampling grid were varied in both the horizontal and vertical directions. When the number of samples per DAS was reduced to less than two, the probability of correct response was reduced. However, the significant finding was that as the vertical resolution was reduced, the probability of correct response was reduced: "This specificity of dimension suggests that vertical resolution and vertical sampling rate may be slightly more important.... than horizontal resolution and horizontal sampling. The results must be interpreted cautiously, however, because the task involved targets that are either square (front view) or elongated in the horizontal direction (right front, side) which would require relatively greater vertical than horizontal resolution." They went on to say, "If the aspect ratio is considered in system design, increasing the vertical rather than the horizontal resolution through detector aspect configuration [e.g., a rectangular detector] may yield a slightly greater degree of performance improvement FOR THE TARGET VEHICLES OF THE TYPE USED IN THIS STUDY." The capitalized words (not in the original paper) are added to emphasize a potential limitation of their results. Vertical resolution may be a driving design consideration if the target critical dimension is vertical, This was obvious in Figures 14-5b through 14-5e when viewing a ship broadside. Whether asymmetric sampling is acceptable for bottom viewing an aircraft (Figures 14-4b through 14-4f) can only be surmised at this time. The results suggest that it is the direction of the target's critical dimension (e.g., the smallest dimension) where the highest resolution is required. Intuitively this is reasonable. This suggests that the system application must be known before the system resolution (detector size) and sampling lattice is selected. 14.4. SPURIOUS RESPONSE Shade introduced the concept of spurious response that considers the magnitude of the MTF for spatial frequencies above Nyquist frequency. These higher spatial frequencies are aliased down or folded back to lower frequencies. The two-sided spectrum exists from -oo to +co. For convenience only the positive
portion will be considered. Mathematically, the reconstructed image (one- dimensional) can be written as 00 ЛЛ ) = MTFpost (fx )£ MTFpre (nfs + fx ) O(nfs ± fx ) /1=0 when fx <fn , (14-4) where Otff is the Fourier transform of the object and Iff is the Fourier transform of the resultant displayed image. MTFpre contains all the MTFs up to the sampler and MTFpost represents all the filters after the sampler. The definition of MTF re and MTFpost here is consistent with FLIR92's prefilter and postfilter MTFs (Tables 14- 1 and 14-2). Table 14-1 SCANNING SYSTEM (SCAN DIRECTION) MTFpre MTFoptics, MTFmotion, MTFdaectoI, MTFmpffitr, MTFfllter Sampler A/D converter MTF^, MTFdfllw, MTFphase, MTFS&H, MTF^,.^, MTF^,, MTFmon-tor, MTF^ Table 14-2 STARING ARRAYS and CROSS SCAN DIRECTION in SCANNING SYSTEMS MTFpre MTF MTF MTF. ivx i ± optics ? 1V± 1 1 motion, 1 detector Sampler Detector MTF^, MTFampIifier, MTFdfllter, MTFphase, MTFS&H, MTFpost.recon, MTFmonitor, MTFeye This equation can be rewritten as I(fx ) = MTFpost (fx )MTFpre (fx ) O(fx ) (14-5) + MTFpost (fx )£ MTFpre (nfs ± fx ) O(nfs ± fx ) . /1=1 The first term is the spectrum of the image when no sampling is present and is the direct response (also called the base band). The remaining terms represent aliasing and are scene dependent. Depending upon the specific scene, aliasing may or may not be bothersome. However, it is always present.
Shade10 defined spurious response for the first fold back frequency (n =1) as a\MTFp„st(DMTFprc(fs - f)O(fs - f)df Spurious response = -----------------------------------(14-6) JMTFpost {f)MTFpre (/) O(f) df о Figure 14-8 illustrates the spurious response for a system that has an ideal post-reconstruction filter and Figure 14-9 illustrates the spurious response when a practical post-reconstruction filter is used. The signal components above Nyquist frequency that remain after reconstruction will cause the image to be blocky (e.g., have a stair-step appearance). An ideal post-reconstruction filter is approximated by a high-order N-pole filter or a low ripple Chebychev filter (see Section 8.5., Post-reconstruction Filter). Bilinear interpolation (Equation 8-24) has a non-zero response above Nyquist. Figure 14-9 could represent a system with bilinear interpolation. The bomber and destroyer (Figures 14-4 through 14-6) are blocky because no post-reconstruction filter was used. Relative Spatial Frequency Figure 14-8. Spurious response when an ideal post- reconstruction filter is used. The ratio of the shaded areas is the spurious response. The system MTF is the product of MTFpre and the aliased portion of MTFp0St up to the Nyquist frequency.
Figure 14-9. Spurious response when a practical post- reconstruction filter is used. The ratio of the shaded areas is the spurious response. If the post-reconstruction filter cutoff frequency is excessively high, the image may appear blocky. Shade wanted to determine what MTF was required to make the raster lines less noticeable on a CRT. He assumed that the beam shape on the CRT was Gaussian distributed. Furthermore, he used the eye as an additional post- reconstruction filter. If the MTF is approximately 40% at fn , then a flat field condition exists in which individual raster lines cannot be seen. This creates an aesthetically pleasing image and this value is used for most commercial televisions. Using 40% also makes best use of the electronic bandwidth. It requires a smaller bandwidth and therefore cost and complexity are reduced. However, for maximum resolving capability, the MTF should be less than 5% at fn . Here, resolution will not be degraded by aliased signal. Shade suggests that a spurious response of 15% may be considered an upper limit for good system design. Kennedy11 recommends that Shade's approach be extended to thermal imaging systems even though these systems do not have a Gaussian-shaped MTF. Any electro-optical system that is detector MTF limited, in general, will not have a Gaussian MTF. To simplify Shade's approach, it is convenient to assume that the object contains all spatial frequencies (white spectrum). Then spurious response for the first fold-back (n = 1) can be defined as
^MTFpost(f)MTFpre(fs - f) df Spurious response = SR = —----------------------- ^MTFpost(f)MTFpre(f) df 0 (14-7) The denominator is the base band signal. Meitzler et. al. calculated12 the detection probability as a function of spurious response. They placed typical military vehicles on a cluttered background. Their results suggest that for larger targets (trucks or tanks), aliasing does not affect target detection. However, for smaller targets (jeeps) aliasing reduces detection probability (Figure 14-10). Shade's recommendation is consistent with their results. Detection is slightly degraded when the spurious response is 15%. SPURIOUS RESPONSE (percent) Figure 14-10. Target detectability as a function of spurious response. Aliasing does not appear to affect detection of large targets. Image quality was not assessed during this study. (From reference 12) A common starting point for system design is to make the detector DAS equal to the Airy disk diameter. Under these conditions, the detector does not reproduce faithfully all the information that the optical system provides. Usually the detector MTF is only illustrated up to the detector cutoff fdco . While this is a convenient representation, the detector does respond to high spatial frequencies. These higher spatial frequencies will be aliased down to lower frequencies. This aliasing is rarely reported since the system cutoff is defined as the detector cutoff,
fdco and the MTF is only plotted up to fdco. This aliasing is created by the detector and cannot be avoided when the optics cutoff is greater than the detector cutoff. Figure 14-11 illustrates the system MTF that consists of MTFoptics and MTFdetector. Adding an ideal lowpass filter provides the MTFs shown in Figure 14-12. The detector acts as a sampling aperture and high spatial frequencies are folded back. Adding an ideal filter to MTFpre and MTFp0St and using Equation 14-7, the spurious response is 8.1% just due to the detector. As the detector is made smaller, the spurious response is reduced. Figure 14-11. MTFoptics and MTFdetector. The detector DAS is matched to the Airy disc diameter, a = 0.1 mrad. Any input spatial frequency above 10 cycles/mrad will be aliased down to a lower spatial frequency. The detector acts a sampling aperture whose sampling frequency is= 2/a. SPATIAL FREQUENCY (cycles/mrad) Figure 14-12. The detector acts as sampling aperture. All frequencies above the detector cutoff are folded back. fn =fdco = 10 cycles/mrad.
14.5. MTF SQUEEZE Sampling introduces ambiguity in the location of a target edge. An image will appear at least one sample width wider than the object. Thus sampling can thought of as a blurring function. An increased width in one domain appears as a decreased width in the other domain. A larger blur appears as if it the circuitry had a narrower MTF. This relationship is described by the similarity theorem (also called the scaling property) of Fourier Transforms. This apparent decrease (or contraction) in the frequency domain is called131' a "squeeze." An empirical fit to numerous psychophysical experiments at NVESD provided squeeze factors for recognition and identification. The squeeze factor is related to both the total spurious response and the out-of-band spurious response. NVESD followed Shade's approach but defined the total spurious response for all aliased signals (n = -co and +co). The two-sided OTF is OTFsys (fx ) = MTFpost (fx }MTFpre (fx ) V-, (14-8) + MTFpost (fx )£ MTFpre{nfs + fx ) . The first term is the base band and the second term (sampling replicas) is the spurious response function. In the region where the sampling replicas overlap, the signals in the base band and sampling replicas are root-sum-squared. NVESD defined the spurious response as ^Spurious response function) df SR = ~ (14-9) or co J MTFp0St(fx)£MTFpre(nfs ±fx)df -OO co J MTFp<lsl(fx)MTFpre(fx)df —CO (14-10) The in-band spurious response is limited to the Nyquist frequency (Figure 14-13)
Figure 14-13. Definition of in-band and out-of band spurious response. The total spurious response (sum of in-band and out-of-band) was indicated Figure 14-9. ^Spurious response functioned/ SR in—band (14-11) band)df and the out-of-band spurious response is simply the remainder: SRout-of -band SR SR in-band ' (14-12) Because there are different MTFs in the horizontal and vertical directions, the spurious responses will be different. If the reconstruction filter passes frequencies above sampling frequency, it is possible to see the raster pattern (raster scan monitors). For digital monitors, the individual pixels appear separated by black areas,. That is, the pixels appear on the monitor as is there is a finite fill factor. This is equivalent to moving very close to your television or computer monitor. You can see the individual red, green, and blue phosphor spots. At this close distance, it becomes more difficult to discern specific objects. In this situation the out-of-band spurious response will be relatively high.
The recognition and identification experiments provided different squeezes. For recognition, MTFrecognition is plotted as a function of frecognition = (1-0.32 ST?)/, (14-13) where f is the original spatial frequency used to calculate the system MTF (Figure 14-14). For identification, MTFidentiflcation is plotted as a function of - (1 2 SR0Ut_of_hand)/ . (14-14) As the spurious response decreases MTFrecognition MTFsys and MTFidentiflcation -> MTFsys. A squeeze factor for detection is formative at this time (Table 14-3). Figure 14-14. MTF squeeze. For recognition,/^ = (1-0.32 SR)/}. Table 14-3 PERFORMANCE DEPENDENCE ON SPURIOUS RESPONSE (From reference 13) TASK IN-BAND SR (Edge shifting, line width variations, and other local artifacts) OUT-OF-BAND SR (Raster and sharply demarcated pixels) MTF SQUEEZE Hot spot detection Moderate to large dependence Small dependence Speculation Recognition Moderate dependence Moderate dependence 1-0.32SR Identification Small dependence Large dependence l-2SRout.of.band
14.6. ALIASED SIGNAL AS NOISE A comprehensive end-to-end analysis should include both aliased signal and aliased noise. Aliased signal3,16’18 can be considered as part of the noise spectrum because it interferes with the ability to perceive targets. MTF boost is used to enhance that spatial region where the MTF is low. This tends to be the same region that contains aliased signal and aliased noise. These aliased components limit17 the extent to which a sampled image can be sharpened. Excessive peaking can cause ringing at sharp edges. Horizontal (vertical) filters are one-dimensional and produce ringing in the horizontal (vertical) direction only. 14.7. REFERENCES 1. L. C. Biberman, "Editor's note," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. C. Biberman, ed., pp. 233-237, Plenum Press, New York (1973). 2. R. Legault, "The Aliasing Problems in Two-dimensional Sampled Imagery," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. C. Biberman, ed., pp. 292-295, Plenum Press, New York (1973). 3. S. K. Park and R. Hazra, "Aliasing as Noise: A Quantitative and Qualitative Assessment," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing IV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 54-65 (1993). 4. S. K. Park and R. A. Schowengerdt, "Image Sampling, Reconstruction and the Effect of Sample- scene Phasing," Applied Optics, 21(17), pp. 3142-3151 (1982). 5. S. Chow and T. Jones, "ARMY'S FLIR/ATR Evolution Path," in Infrared Systems and Components III, R. L. Caswell, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1050, pp. 42-49 (1989). 6. J. D'Agostino, M. Friedman, R. LaFollette, and M. Crenshaw, "An Experimental Study of the Effects of Sampling on FLIR Performance," in Proceedings of the IRIS Specialty Group on Passive Sensors, Infrared Information Analysis Center, Ann Arbor Mich. (1990). 7. J. D. Horger, "Image Generation for Perception Testing Using Computer FLIR Simulation," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1309, pp. 181-189(1990). 8. S. K. Park, R. Schowengerdt, and M. A. Kaczynski, "Modulation-transfer-function Analysis for Sampled Image Systems," Applied Optics, 23(15), pp. 2572-2582, (1984). 9. L. Obert, J. D'Agostino, B. O'Kane, and C. Nguyen, "An Experimental Study of the Effect of Vertical Resolution on FLIR Performance," in Proceedings of the IRIS Specialty Group on Passive Sensors, Vol. 1, pp. 235-251, Infrared Information Analysis Center, Ann Arbor Mich. (1990). 10. О. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Reproduction by a Line Raster Process," in Perception of Displayed Information, L. C. Biberman, ed., pp. 233-278, Plenum Press, New York (1973). ll. H. V. Kennedy, "Modeling Second-generation Thermal Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering Vol. 30(11), pp. 1771-1778 (1991). 12. T. Meitzler, G. Gerhardt, T. Cook, and R. Freeling, "Spatial Aliasing Effects in Ground Vehicle IR Imagery," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 226-241 (1992). 13. R. G. Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and B. O'Kane, "Sampled Imaging Sensor Design using the MTF Squeeze Model to Characterize Spurious Response," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 61-73 (1999).
14. R. G. Driggeis, R. Vollmerhausen, and T. Edwards, "The Target Identification Performance of Infrared Imager Models as a Function of Blur and Sampling," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 26-34 (1999). 15. R. Vollmerhausen, R. G. Driggers, and B. O'Kane, "Influence of Sampling on Target Recognition and Identification," Optical Engineering, Vol. 38(5), pp. 763-772 (1999). 16. S. K. Park, "Image Gathering, Interpolation and Restoration A Fidelity Analysis," in Visual Information Processing, F. O. Huck and R. D. Juday, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1705, pp. 134-144 (1992). 17. S K. Park and R. Hazra, "Image Restoration Versus Aliased Noise Enhancement," in Visual Information Processing III, F. O. Huck and R. D Juday, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2239, pp. 52-62 (1994). 18. S. K. Park and Z. Rahman, "Fidelity Analysis of Sampled Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering, Vol. 38(5), pp. 786-800 (1999). EXERCISES 1. Optimum sampling has been defined as that sampling rate that provides adequate imagery to perform the task on hand. Comment on this definition. Take into account the Nyquist frequency. 2. Discuss the relationship between system sampling frequency and real-world targets. Is sampling only noticeable in the laboratory when using periodic targets? 3. Describe some sampling effects seen on commercial TVs. Do commercial TVs provide "optimum sampling?" 4. How would you change the effective sampling rate of a staring array? 5. In Figure 14-3, the probability of correctly identifying the targets is about 70% when there is one sample/DAS. How would you change the experiment so that the probability increased to 100%? 6. Assume the fuselage subtended 4 mrad and the DAS is 1 mrad in Figure 14-4. Sketch the intensity profile as a function of phase. If the optical system produced an Airy disk that is also 1 mrad, sketch the intensity profile as a function of phase. 7. How many pixels on target (Figure 14-5) are necessary to recognize the ship as a destroyer. List several contextual cues that aid in recognition (e.g., only ships are seen on the ocean). With these contextual cues, how many pixels are necessary for recognition?
15 ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE When electromagnetic radiation is propagated through the atmosphere from a source to a receiver, three major phenomena are observed: (1) The intensity of the radiation reaching the sensor is reduced, (2) non-scene path radiance scattered into the field-of-view reduces target contrast, and (3) image fidelity is reduced by turbulence and aerosol forward small angle scattering. In addition, for background-limited systems, path radiance and radiation scattered into the field- of-view affect the noise level. The nature and magnitude of these effects depend upon the sensor type (eye, imaging system), sensor characteristics (spectral response, sensitivity, spatial resolution), the atmospheric constituents, and environmental conditions. Figure 15-1 illustrates these effects. Scattering Out Scattering Into of Field of View Field of View Figure 15-1. Atmospheric effects. Absorption and scattering of scene radiation out of the field-of-view reduce the target signature. Turbulence and aerosol forward scattering distort the image. Scattering into the field-of-view and path radiance reduces the target contrast. Extinction is the total reduction of radiation along the line of sight. This includes both absorption and scattering. Scattering simply alters the radiation propagation direction and any radiation scattered out of the line-of-sight contributes to extinction. Using the Beer-Lambert law, the spectral transmittance is: ^mW = ^(2)Jl , (15-1)
Atmospheric transmittance 249 where R is the path length and y(z) is the spectral extinction coefficient. Because scattering and absorption are independent /(Я) = сг(Л) + А(Я), (15-2) where a is the scattering component and к is the absorptive component. For infrared imaging systems, an unusual attenuation coefficient has been adopted: = (15-3) and (15-4) Unfortunately, the terminology used to describe the reduction of radiation is author dependent. Both Tatm and у have units of 1/km. Generally, у will have low values (between 0.001 and 0.4) and Tatm will have high values (between 0.65 and 0.95). In a transparent media, у = 0 and Tatm= 1. Extinction depends upon all the atmospheric constituents that include aerosols, pollutants, fogs, rain, and snow. High humidity reduces transmittance by causing aerosol particulate growth, particularly with salt spray in maritime environments. Though the atmosphere may be quite clear visually, thermal imaging system performance may be degraded considerably because of the molecular absorption by the water vapor. Water vapor concentration may range from near zero in the desert to 40 to 50 g/m3 in a tropical jungle or near the sea surface. Extinction is not linearly related to water vapor content. However, for an environment in which only the absolute humidity changes (the aerosol type and concentration remains fixed), the range performance is approximately related to the absolute humidity. For example, if the absolute humidity increases by 25%, then the detection range should decrease - but not necessarily by 25%. Path radiance or atmospheric self-emission is independent of the source and is seen even if the source is not present. The magnitude of this background radiation can vary with direction of observation, altitude, location, time of day, and meteorological conditions. Path radiance reduces the signal-to-noise ratio and, for background-limited systems, introduces noise. Refractive index fluctuations create turbulence. They are caused by density gradients, temperature and humidity gradients, and pressure differences. Aerosol small angle scattering, and particularly multiple scattering, diffuse scene
photons into a multitude of directions and thereby blurs detail. Turbulence also affects image quality. Since image quality is treated mathematically through MTF theory, an MTF is assigned to the atmosphere to account for turbulence and aerosol scattering (discussed in Chapter 16, Atmospheric MTF). A commonly used back-of-the-envelope calculation is tr AI SNR ~ atmave system noise (15-5) where it is assumed that the atmospheric transmittance does not have any spectral features. This equation is only valid for extended sources. That is, the target angular subtense at range R must be greater than the system's angular resolution. Because thermal imaging systems operate at wavelengths that are five to 20 times the visible wavelengths, thermal imagery is bothered less by scattering produced by the small aerosol particles that we associate with haze. As a result, we say that thermal imaging systems can detect targets with minimal loss in range when light haze is present. For moderately sized particles, scattering affects the MWIR region more so than the LWIR region. This leads to the statement that an LWIR system can provide better range performance in moderate haze than an MWIR system. As particles grow in size (corresponding to the change from haze to heavy fog) the visible, MWIR, and LWIR regions are affected equally. Atmospheric transmittance cannot be discussed as a separate topic independent of the target and receiver characteristics. The measured differential signal is: NVsys =k (15-6) A The functions, y(f), or equivalently r(2), can be obtained from computer codes' such as LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, or HITRAN. With the widespread availability2 of these codes, this chapter forgoes extensive figures and tables of infrared transmittance as seen in many texts.3 5 This chapter provides the analyst with the tools to appropriately incorporate the atmospheric transmittance into a system performance model. Finally, the inability to accurately estimate the atmospheric transmittance is a major reason for the differences between range predictions and actual field results. The transmittance can vary wide hourly and locally. Parallel lines-of-sight separated by 500 m can expect different micrometeorological conditions. The
Atmospheric transmittance 251 differences can be large especially for degraded environmental conditions and extremely long path lengths. The value of any model lies in its ability to permit comparative analyses. For a fixed environment condition, an estimate of range performance is determined. If a system design modification increases range performance, then it a valuable modification. 15.1. ATMOSPHERIC CONSTITUENTS The atmosphere is composed of numerous gases and aerosols. In order of concentration (by percent of volume), the gases in a dry atmosphere are: nitrogen, oxygen, argon, neon, helium, krypton, xenon, hydrogen, nitrous oxide, and other trace gases. The gases present in variable amounts are ozone, water vapor, carbon dioxide, and carbon monoxide plus other trace gases. Aerosols, which are suspended particulates, include dust, dirt, carbon, minute organisms, sea salt, water droplets (haze or fog), smokes, and artificial aerosols (pollutants). The relative concentrations of the atmospheric constituents can be different at different locales. For example, dense foliage and vehicular exhaust influence carbon monoxide and carbon dioxide concentrations. Urban areas produce more carbon monoxide. Pollutants vary according to population density and factory locations. Figure 15-2 portrays a typical atmospheric transmittance curve that accounts only for absorption. The dominant absorber in the MWIR region is CO2 and it absorbs at 4.3 pm. This absorption band is obvious after a few meters of path length and therefore,”the transmittance can be considered zero for any appreciable path length. Water vapor determines the upper and lower wavelength limits for both MWIR and LWIR spectral regions. Water vapor is also the dominant absorber in the LWIR region. As the water vapor increases, the LWIR transmittance is reduced faster than the MWIR region. This implies that a MWIR system may be better in a tropical or maritime environment. However, selection of MWIR or LWIR also depends upon the sensor's spectral response and noise level.
carbon carbon dioxide Figure 15-2. Typical atmospheric transmittance over a 1-km path length. 15.1.1. WATER VAPOR Although water vapor or absolute humidity is a major absorber in the thermal bands, transmittance is not linearly related to absolute humidity. The absolute humidity is not normally a measured quantity but is calculated from standard meteorological observables. It is related6 to the relative humidity and absolute temperature by AH = 1322.8 — exp 25.22(7’- 273.16) ------------------5.31 In 273.16 (15-7) where RH is the relative humidity (as a fraction), AH is the absolute humidity (g/m3), and T is the temperature in Kelvin. Figure 15-3 illustrates the relationship given by Equation 15-7.
TEMPERATURE (C) Figure 15-3. Absolute humidity (gm/m3) as a function of temperature and percent relative humidity. Tropical areas (high relative humidity and high temperatures) will have high absolute humidity. Arctic areas (cold with low relative humidity) will not. The extinction depends upon all the atmospheric constituents. Figure 15- 4 illustrates the calculated LWIR attenuation as a function of absolute humidity and meteorological range. The finite extinction (less than unity) when there is no water vapor present is due to aerosol scattering and molecular absorption. Although absolute humidity does not uniquely specify extinction, it can be used as a guide. As the absolute humidity increases, the LWIR transmittance will decrease for a fixed meteorological range. Absolute humidity changes both daily and seasonally (Figure 15-5). Figure 15-6 illustrates the attenuation as a function of absolute humidity for a European environment. During winter, the maximum temperature is about 10°C and the maximum absolute humidity is about 6 g/m3 (See Figure 15-3). During the summer, the temperatures approach 30°C and the absolute humidity reaches 15 g/m3.
ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY ATTENUATION COEF 1.00 ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY (g/m3) Figure 15-4. Representative attenuation as a function of absolute humidity and visibility. The attenuation coefficient has been spectrally averaged over the LWIR range. The aerosol concentration and particle size are embedded in the meteorological range. Both aerosol scattering (as specified by the meteorological range) and water vapor affect attenuation. Calculated from LOWTRAN using a mid-latitude summer aerosol model and a rural haze model. Figure 15-5. Typical absolute humidity variation for central Europe. Coastline areas may exhibit very large changes as the wind direction shifts from land-to-sea to sea-to-land.
ABSOLUTE HUMIDITY Figure 15-6 Representative average attenuation coefficients for a European environment as a function of absolute humidity and season. The attenuation coefficient has been spectrally averaged over the LWIR range. The finite extinction when the absolute humidity is zero is due to aerosol scattering and molecular absorption. Each season had different aerosol distribution. The relative humidity values are 0, 10%, 20%, ..., 100%. 15.1.2. AEROSOLS Mie theory mathematically describes the scattering and absorption of radiation by spherical particles. Figure 15-7 illustrates representative scattering coefficients as a function of particle size. Scattering and absorption by particles depend upon the radius, shape, wavelength of the incident radiation, angle between the radiation and the viewing direction, and the complex indices of refraction. When particle diameters are small compared to the incident wavelength. Rayleigh scattering occurs and the scattering is proportional to Z4. For most naturally occurring low-density aerosols and artificial aerosols, the size distribution is such that there is significant scattering in the visible region with minimal scattering in the infrared (average diameter less than 1 pm). Thus it is often stated that thermal imaging systems can detect targets when hazes, thin fogs, and smokes are present. Figure 15-8 provides experimental verification of the theoretical values given in Figure 15-7. Light hazes have small particles and therefore affect the visible and near infrared. As the particles grow in size, the region of maximum scattering moves out to the infrared. Aerosols, as they grow, always affect the MWIR region before affecting the LWIR region. When the particle size becomes
very large, as with heavy fogs and raindrops, the visible, MWIR, and LWIR regions are affected equally. Figure 15-7. Relative scattering coefficients for different sized spherical particles. As the particles grow in size, the scattering increases and they begin to affect the infrared region. For small particles compared to the wavelength, scattering is proportional to 2'4 (Rayleigh scattering). For large particles (diameter » 2), scattering is independent of wavelength. (From reference 7)
EXTINCTION COEFFICIENT (1/km) Figure 15-8. Measured extinction (scattering plus absorption) coefficients for different aerosols. The departure from the ideal Z4 dependence is due to absorption. (From reference 8).
In LOWTRAN, the scattering coefficient has been empirically related to the rain rate Rrate (mm/hour): arai„ «0.365 (7Jrate )0'63 . (15-8) Table 15-1 provides typical rain rates. The rain droplets act as scatterers and the attenuation coefficient is assumed to be independent of wavelength: 7" — p L atm-ave c (15-9) Table 15-1 REPRESENTATIVE RAIN RATES RAIN INTENSITY RAIN RATE, Rrate (mm/hour) Mist 0.025 Drizzle 0.25 Light 1.0 Moderate 4.0 Heavy 16 Thundershower 40 Cloud-burst 100 15.2. VISIBILITY Visibility is a subjective measurement estimated by a trained observer and as such can have large variability associated with the reported value. Variations are created by observers that have different threshold contrasts when looking at nonideal targets. For example, if an observer sees a building at 5 miles but is unable to see a tower at 7 miles, he may estimate the visibility to be 6 miles. Visibility depends on the aerosol distribution and it is very sensitive to the local meteorological conditions. It is also dependent upon the view angle with respect to the sun. As the sun angle approaches the view angle, forward scattering into the line-of-sight increases and the visibility decreases. Reports from local weather stations may or may not represent the actual conditions at which the experiment is taking place. Aerosol size distribution and concentration are estimated from visibility measurements. As the concentration increases or the particle size increases, the visibility decreases. Visibility is the greatest distance at which it is just possible to
see and identify a target with the unaided eye. In the daytime, the object is dark against the horizon sky (e.g., a high contrast target). For nighttime, the target is a moderately intense light source. Table 15-2 provides the international visibility code. While the large range of values for each category is appropriate for general imagery, it is too broad for scientific purposes. Table 15-2 INTERNATIONAL VISIBILITY CODE DESIGNATION VISIBILITY Dense fog 0-50 meters Thick fog 50-200 m Moderate fog 200-500 m Light fog 500-1 km Thin fog 1-2 km Haze 2-4 km Light haze 4-10 km Clear 10-20 km Very clear 20-50 km Exceptionally clear > 50 km 15.2.1. METEOROLOGICAL RANGE Meteorological range is defined quantitatively, eliminating the subjective nature of the observer and the distinction between day and night. The Koschmieder formula defines the meteorological range9 Rvis = — In a (15-10) where Cth is the threshold contrast at which 50% of the observers would see the target. The use of the scattering cross section m this definition rather than the extinction coefficient implies that absorption of particles at visual wavelengths is small enough to ignore. This view is probably justified except in cases of polluted air. Koschmieder set Cth to 0.02 and evaluated c at 2 = 0.555 pm. Then the transmittance (averaged over the eye's spectral response) is Г —<yR _ . p — p ave u ^R R (15-11)
This applies to the visible region only and has become a "standard." It has been given various names such as meteorological range and visual range to distinguish it from the observer-visibility. Unfortunately, carelessness has resulted in using the term -visibility when meteorological range is meant. To insure that there is no confusion, o&server-visibility will be used to indicate that it is an estimate. If only the observer-visibility, Rvis.ohs, is available, the meteorological range can be estimated6 from Rvis = (1.3 ± 03)Rvis_obs . (15-12) Most computer programs such as LOWTRAN use the meteorological range to estimate particle concentrations. It would be better to have a direct estimate of the concentration rather than that implied by the visibility. Recent efforts10 have predicted the concentration at Beer-Sheva, Israel from simple observables (relative humidity and wind speed). Extension to other geographical locations is hypothetical at this time. Many studies have attempted to infer the infrared transmittance from visible measurements. Figure 15-9 illustrates an average curve through many data points (not shown). This average response is useful for back-of-the-envelope Meteorological Range (km) Figure 15-9. Grafenwohr, FRG winter weather 1976. The attenuation coefficient has been spectrally averaged over the LWIR range. The average is zatm_ave = 0.85/km. Poor weather is defined as when Tatm.ave = 0.70/km (From Reference 11).
15.2.2. CONTRAST TRANSMITTANCE Since the eye is sensitive to contrast changes, contrast transmittance is often used for systems operating in the visible or near infrared. The inherent contrast is (15-13) where LT and LB are the target and background intensities respectively. When the sky-background ratio (discussed in Section 17.4., Path Radiance) is one, = T C л ave o'» (15-14) where Tave = e'ffA The variable cr is conveniently expressed by the meteorological range (Equation 15-10). Note that cr decreases with increasing wavelength (see, for example, Figure 15-7). For wavelengths less than 3 pm, cr can be approximated by 1/3 3.912 Y 0.55Y'585(7?v“) ^vis / (15-15) where 2 is the average wavelength response of the system (in micrometers). The contrast transmittance is dramatically altered by path radiance. Here, scattering into the line-of-sight reduces the contrast transmittance (discussed in Section 17.4., Path Radiance). Path radiance is in Chapter 17, Target Signatures, because it changes the apparent target-background intensity difference. Atmospheric attenuation only reduces the signature. 15.3. LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, and HITRAN In principle we could determine the exact composition of the atmosphere over the path of interest. By employing the physics of molecular and aerosol extinction, we could compute the extinction. Because of the wide variations in weather conditions and sparsity of data on some atmospheric constituents, it is desirable to have an engineering approach to atmospheric modeling. This model should have several weather conditions and should be validated with available laboratory and field data.
To deal with these complex phenomena, the Phillips Laboratory of the Geophysics Directorate* at Hanscom Air Force Base, Massachusetts has developed codes to predict transmittance/radiance effects for varying conditions. They have created LOWTRAN (low spectral resolution transmission), FASCODE (fast atmospheric signature code), MODTRAN (moderate spectral resolution transmission) and HITRAN (high resolution transmission). LOWTRAN's resolution is 20-cnT1 which is sufficient for most wide band imaging systems. It provides spectral information from 0.25 to 28.5 pm. The code was developed in 1971 and is continuously refined. As of this printing, LOWTRAN7 has been released.6 The code provides 32 plane-parallel layers with the boundaries extending from mean sea level to 100 km. 99.99997% of the molecular and particulate atmospheric constituents are found below 100 km. The atmosphere is considered stable with no inversions. Each layer is horizontally homogeneous. Layer thicknesses are 1-km from ground level to 25 km, 5-km from 25 to 50 km (the top of the stratosphere), and the last two layers are 20 and 30 km thick respectively. Because of the limitations of the molecular-band model approximation used in LOWTRAN, its accuracy degrades seriously for upper atmospheric regions (above about 40 km). On the other hand, MODTRAN is valid up to 60 km. LOWTRAN is used primarily as an aid for tactical systems operating in the lower atmosphere or on the earth's surface. The model is an excellent predictor at short and medium ranges (up to 20 km) but may be in error at extremely long ranges such as those encountered in IRST applications (~ 100 km). LOWTRAN should not be used for very narrow spectral bandwidth systems such as laser illuminated imaging systems where local line absorption is important. HITRAN is appropriate for laser line calculations. The user of these models should read all the cautions and limitations in the documentation before using them. The code contains representative (geographical and seasonal) atmospheric models and aerosol models (Table 15-3). The aerosol concentration is specified by a meteorological range input. In addition, the user can input radiosonde data as an environmental model or his own user-defined aerosol model. For any given slant path geometry, it runs in two modes: (1) compute only Over the years, government laboratories have changed names. The Phillips Laboratory of the Geophysics Directorate was called the Air Force Cambridge Laboratory and the Air Force Geophysical Laboratory. The name will probably change again!
Atmospheric transmittance 263 transmittance and (2) compute both transmittance and radiance. The model can provide radiance and transmittance with and without solar or lunar scattering. Table 15-3 LOWTRAN CHOICES ENVIRONMENT MODELS AEROSOL MODELS Tropical Rural Mid-latitude summer Maritime Mid-latitude winter Urban Sub-arctic summer Desert Sub-arctic winter Troposphere 1962 Standard Navy Aerosol Model The rural, urban, and maritime models are boundary layer models that apply to the first two kilometers of atmosphere. The troposphere model applies in the troposphere above the boundary layer but can also be used in the boundary layer under extremely good visibility conditions. LOWTRAN predicts the atmospheric transmittance homogeneous environments. It is difficult to predict system performance where the atmosphere changes dramatically. For example, in the first 3 meters above the sea surface,12 the water vapor content changes significantly leading to a transmittance that is very height dependent. Personal computer versions of MODTRAN, FASCODE, and HITRAN are commercially available from the ONTAR Corporation.2 LOWTRAN is no longer commercially available. It has been replaced by MODTRAN. 15.4. SPECTRALLY AVERAGED ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE Most imaging systems measure the differential radiance produced by a target and its immediately background. The system output depends upon the spectral radiance of the target, the spectral radiance of the background, the spectral transmittance of the atmosphere and the system spectral response. Following the methodology in Section 3.4., Normalization, that the spectrally averaged transmittance is
A jMe (Л,АТ) (A)roptics (Л) Ш) ал = A_____________________________________________ ave j W (Л, AT) Toptics (Л) Rd (А) ал 2j Then (15-16) л2 = Tave к 1ме(Л,АТ)гор,^(Л)Ла(Л)аЛ. (15-17) 2] It has become common place to (erroneously) use ^ave ~ Tatm M) • (15-18) While mathematically convenient, Tave depends on path length and spectral response. Figure 15-10 illustrates a typical spectral transmittance for al-, 5-, and 10-km path length. Figure 15-1 la illustrates the radiation detected by a typical InSb detector and Figure 15-1 lb shows the radiation detected by a typical Schottky barrier PtSi detector. Depending upon the system spectral responsivity, the average transmittance can vary dramatically. Figure 15-10. Typical atmospheric transmittance for and 10-km path lengths. The average transmittance simply . 1-, 5-, is not
RELATIVE OUTPUT RELATIVE OUTPUT (a) (b) Figure 15-11. Two MWIR systems, (a) Radiation detected by an InSb detector and (b) radiation detected by a PtSi detector. Path length is 2 km, AT = 5 К and T= 300 K. The detector responsivities have been normalized to illustrate spectral effects. The system output is proportional to the area under the signal curve. Although the InSb and PtSi systems are labeled as MWIR, the differential output, &Vsys , can be dramatically different depending upon the atmospheric conditions.
For back-of-the-envelope calculations, it is convenient to discuss average transmittance (without regard to the system spectral response). For a sensitivity- limited system, the signal-to-noise is SNR^ т AT atm-ave NEDT (15-19) Equation 15-19 is only as good as the approximation given in Equation 15-18. It is generally true when the range is less than 5 km. It can provide large errors if Equation 15-18 is not valid. Validity is questioned if2; or 2 2 enters an atmospheric absorption band. The MWIR region is more susceptible to errors than the LWIR region due to the spectral absorption variations. The SNR is not strictly linear with respect to AT since the SiTF is not linear with AT (See Section 3.2. AT Concept). To illustrate some trends, let to = 0.85/km, Ro = 5 km, ATO = 10°C, and NEDTO = 0.2° C. This provides SNR = 22. Suppose we can redesign the system such that the NEDT is reduced to NEDT = 0.15. This allows one of three performance improvement choices. Depending upon the system application, one choice is selected. For a fixed SNR: CHOICE 1: For a fixed AT and Tatm_ave, the range increases to rpNEDT NEDT0 log(ro) - 6.77 km, (15-20) CHOICE 2: For a fixed range and тя/И1_яге, we can acquire cooler targets AT = NEDT NEDT0 \T0 = 7.5° (15-21) CHOICE 3: For fixed range and AT, we can detect the same target in poorer weather 7* * atm-ave 1 ' NEDT^* ^EDTB/ = 0.80/ km, (15-22) The spectrally averaged attenuation Tatm_ave should only be used for back- of-the-envelope calculations and to infer trends. For range performance predictions, the atmospheric transmittance should be calculated for each range of interest.
15.5. WEATHER CONDITIONS Atmospheric variability is perhaps the most difficult to quantify when predicting system range performance. Actual performance can have wide variations due to the uncertainty of the atmosphere and the inability to accurately characterize it over the specific path length. While reasonable characterization is possible for ground systems, it is difficult to accurately characterize the atmosphere for systems on an airborne platform. Atmospheric variations are a function of the season, location (continental, maritime or arctic environment and latitude), time of the day, local meteorological conditions, naturally occurring aerosols, artificial aerosols, and pollutants. Local weather conditions measured at a nearby airport are not necessarily indicative of conditions at the test site. 15.5.1. AVERAGE CONDITIONS For back-of-the-envelope calculations, it is convenient to use a spectrally averaged attenuation value. Table 15-4 provides some approximate values. These are spectrally weighted values that can be used for both the MWIR and LWIR regions. The weather is typically either very good or very bad (Figure 15-12). Rarely is there an "average" day as suggested by the values in Table 15-4. Every day exhibits large variations. The "average" value is a mathematical construct to make calculations easy and to allow system performance comparisons for different weather conditions. Actual values may be significantly different at any particular time. Casual observers tend to remember either very good or very bad weather and therefore are not good estimators of average conditions. Averages are based upon data collected over five to 10 years.13 Although the values in Table 15-4 are based upon European weather (e.g. Figure 15-9), they are used as generic worldwide weather conditions.
Table 15-4 AVERAGE ATTENUATION VALUES These approximate values can be used for back-of-the-envelope calculations. WEATHER QUALITY AVERAGE ATTENUATION APPROXIMATE PERCENTAGE OF TIME WITH BETTER WEATHER Poor 0.70/km 80% Fair 0.80/km 65% Average 0.85/km 50% Good 0.90/km 25% Excellent 0.95/km 2% co z s о DU Ш □: Q. CO О 2 < TIME Figure 15-12. Typical atmospheric transmittance. Typically the weather is either very good or very poor. Although it is convenient to discuss average values, it is rare to have an "average" day. 15.5.2. PROBABILITY of OCCURRENCE With the large variation in weather conditions and therefore the large variation in infrared transmittance, it is of interest to calculate the probability of detection based upon yearly averages. The Weather Effects on Tactical Target Acquisition (WETTA) model14 developed by the RAND Corporation provides probability exceedance values for the European environment. Figure 15-13 illustrates a typical curve. The semi-empirical model typifies the cloud-free (but not necessarily fog-free) atmosphere when the altitude is less than 100 m
Figure 15-13. WETTA calculations for a typical European environment. The extinction coefficient has been spectrally averaged over the LWIR region. Smaller values of extinction are desired because they represent better atmospheric conditions (higher transmittance). (From reference 14). The WETTA model can be used in several ways. The first is to provide an indication of the required system NEDT to detect a certain AT target. Assuming a sensitivity-limited system, and that a signal-to-noise ratio of unity is sufficient to detect the target, the required system NEDT is NEDT = M e~r™R . (15-23) For each value of yave, the probability is obtained from Figure 15-13 and NEDT is plotted as a function of the probability (Figure 15-14). Because there may be very dense fogs, (e.g., the extinction coefficient is very large), a very small NEDT is required to detect the target 100% of the time.
(b) Figure 15-14. Probability of detection (SNR = 1) for a sensitivity-limited system for different AT targets, (a) The target is at 500 m and (b), the target is at 5000 m. Dense fogs (y > 1) prevent target detection unless the NEDT is extremely low. The values in Figure 15-13 were used. The WETTA model provides the probability of occurrence for a European environment. For other regions of the world, a back-of-the-envelope approach can be used. Most naturally occurring processes follow a log-normal distribution and many aerosol models assume that the distribution is log-normally distributed. It is reasonable to suggest that the extinction coefficient also follow a log-normal distribution (15-24)
where log(<r) = 0.198. The curve in Figure 15-13 (or equivalently Figure 15-15) appears to have two separate components: A clear-air/light-haze component and a heavy fog component. Equation 15-24 can be applied to each component separately. yave = 0.2 (equivalently Tatm_ave = 0.82) approximates the clear-air/light- haze segment (Figure 15-15). This approach is strictly empirical. It offers a method of plotting detection probability as a function of weather conditions when only the average extinction value is available. Plotting methods can make data appear different (compare Figure 15-13 with Figure 15-15). ATTENUATION COEFFICIENT I Figure 15-15. Attenuation coefficient with тЯГт я =0.82. ' aUIl-avc 15.5.3. NAVY MODEL The U.S. Navy15 used an empirical approach to estimate the average atmospheric transmittance. Based upon a large number of sea-level observations, they assumed that the average transmittance can be approximated by Tave ®ехр(-айд), (15-25) where a and f are average coefficients obtained from the data base. The data (and hence the coefficients) are divided into 3 geographical regions. The databases are labeled by the number of observations (Table 15-5).
Table 15-5 U.S. Navy Databases Data set Number of observations Locations R384 384 Norwegian Sea, Mediterranean Sea, North Atlantic Ocean (near England), Mid-Arabian Sea, and Coral Sea (near Indonsia) R400 400 Gulf of Finland, East China Sea, Yellow Sea, North Atlantic Ocean (near England), Gulf of Oman, and the Caribbean Sea PG720 720 Gulf of Oman Assuming that Equation 15-18 is valid, the coefficients are defined for various percentiles (Tables 15-6 through 15-8). For example, the 70% percentile means that a calculation using these values will yield an atmospheric transmittance worse than or equal to 70% of the data in that data base. These predictions are reasonable for ranges up to 20 km. Since this model was developed for naval operations, it only applies to sea level observations. No values currently exist for slant path, air-to-air, or for land-based observations. The R400 data is plotted in Figure 15-16. Table 15-6 R384 Coefficients Percentile 3.4 to 5 pm 3.4 to 5 pm 8 to 12 pm 8 to 12 pm a p a p 10% 0.48351 0.58219 0.14316 0.85943 25% 0.56137 0.57989 0.21926 0.88006 50% 0.67340 0.57156 0.41487 0.88614 70% 0.72825 0.56431 0.52054 0.88492 80% 0.75743 0.57004 0.57288 0.88366 85% 0.77748 0.57151 0.59310 0.88554 90% 0.81578 0.58742 0.63084 0.88640 95% 0.98757 0.69721 0.72255 0.92409
Table 15-7 R400 Coefficients Percentile 3.4 to 5 pm 3.4 to 5 pm 8 to 12 pm 8 to 12 pm a p a p 10% 0.46450 0.60692 0.13377 0.85766 25% 0.51896 0.60212 0.18370 0.87567 50% 0.64507 0.56790 0.33349 0.88109 70% 0.72821 0.54521 0.50976 0.88056 80% 0.75606 0.54707 0.55940 0.88230 85% 0.77212 0.56045 0.58038 0.88297 90% 0.80774 0.59999 0.60764 0.88794 95% 0.94043 0.68741 0.66784 0.88851 Table 15-8 PG720 Coefficients Percentile 3.4 to 5 pm 3.4 to 5 pm 8 to 12 pm 8 to 12 pm a p a p 10% 0.61407 0.51678 0.25399 0.86634 25% 0.65818 0.51070 0.33741 0.87033 50% 0.71219 0.52933 0.46957 0.87486 70% 0.75095 0.53539 0.54834 0.88054 80% 0.77125 0.54087 0.59656 0.88092 85% 0.78381 0.54936 0.61977 0.88059 90% 0.80013 0.56472 0.66070 0.88422 95% 0.83305 0.58998 0.71566 0.89030 Figure 15-16. R400 LWIR (8 to 12 gm) transmittance for various percentiles.
15.6. MWIR VERSUS LWIR Since the advent of thermal imaging systems, many studies16'19 and arguments have resulted over whether MWIR is a better imaging band than LWIR. The factors involved in range performance analysis include the atmospheric spectral transmittance, background temperature, system spectral response, system NEDT, system MTF, the task on hand (detection, recognition or identification), target size, and target AT. Unfortunately, the merits of systems with different designs (e.g., scanning common module versus staring arrays) are mingled with the relative merits of the atmospheric transmittance values. To this end, a comparison is made between a MWIR system and LWIR system with the only difference being the detector spectral response and D*. This approach identifies atmospheric effects. The first argument for MWIR is that the Rayleigh criterion suggests that the MWIR region has a better resolution over an equivalent sized LWIR system (Figure 12-6). The second is that there is more differential signal available in the LWIR region when viewing terrestrial objects (Figure 3-13). Figure 15-17 illustrates the spectral transmittance, over a 2-km path length for a tropical environment with a rural aerosol and a 12-km meteorological range. A 300-K normalized blackbody curve and its effect on received radiation is shown. Based upon these curves, it is apparent that more radiance is available in the LWIR region than the MWIR region. Figure 15-17. Atmospheric transmittance and 300-K blackbody curve. The LWIR region appears to have more signal than the MWIR region.
The approach shown in Figure 15-17 is appropriate for DC coupled radiometers. Many systems are designed to display the difference between the target and its background. The absolute value of the signal is not important: the small differences are amplified and displayed. Figure 15-18 illustrates (a logarithmic scale) the radiation difference between a 300-K background and a 305-K target or AT= 5 K. The LWIR region still appears to provide more signal. WAVELENGTH (pm) Figure 15-18. Incremental signal available from a AT = 5 К target on a 300-K background. The detector output is proportional to the area under the differential radiance curve. Next, the detector spectral response is added. Two systems are considered: An LWIR common module system and an identical system in which the common module detector (HgCdTe) has been replaced with a MWIR InSb detector. Nothing else has been changed. Table 15-9 provides the spectral response. The minimum wavelength of 3.8 pm was chosen for the MWIR system to minimize sun glints (see Section 15.8., Sun glints'). Theoretically, the detector peak response in the MWIR is about 3.88 times higher than the LWIR system. Figure 15-19 portrays the resultant output for the two spectral bands with the MWIR peak responsivity 3.88 times higher than the LWIR values. The area under the heavy lines is proportional to the detector output AL and the outputs appear similar with no clear winner. The progression from Figure 15-17 to Figure 15-19 illustrates that system spectral response and system application affect the spectrally averaged transmittance. These results are unique to the values selected.
Table 15-9 SYSTEM WAVE LENGTH RESPONSES SYSTEM Normalized peak Minimum wavelength detector peak wavelength, Xp detector cutoff wavelength, Lc MWIR 1 3.8 pm 4.8 pm 5.4 pm LWIR 1/3.88 7.75 pm 10.8 pm 11.5 pm 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 WAVELENGTH (pm) Figure 15-19. Incremental detector output created by a AT =5 К target on a 300-K background for MWIR and LWIR systems. The spectrally averaged transmittance has been calculated for the two sensors listed in Table 15-9. Three different environments were considered with three different meteorological ranges (7 km, 12 km and 25 km) for each environment. An air-to-ground scenario was assumed in that the thermal imaging system is at a 500-foot altitude and the target is on the ground. The distance given in Figures 15-20 to 15-22 is the slant path. The atmospheric transmittance depends upon the amount of water vapor present, the aerosols and the molecular species present. As the aerosol concentration increases, the particle sizes grow and the MWIR region is affected more than the LWIR region (Figure 15-7). Water vapor affects the LWIR region more than the MWIR region. Whether the MWIR transmittance is higher than the LWIR transmittance depends upon the relationship between the visibility and the water vapor concentration. MWIR transmittance is higher only when the water vapor concentration is high and the aerosol concentration is low (long meteorological ranges). Even when this is true, the MWIR transmittance is better for path lengths greater than 10 km for the particular sensors selected. The MWIR system must be designed to exploit the increased transmittance. If the task was to detect targets at 5 km, then the LWIR should be selected.
(a) (b) (c) Figure 15-20. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance for representative MWIR and LWIR sensors. A tropical environment and urban aerosol were assumed.
(b) (c) Figure 15-21. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance for representative MWIR and LWIR sensors. A tropical environment and maritime aerosol were used. Different environmental conditions will produce different curves.
ATMOS TRANS ATMOS TRANS ATMOS TRANS (a) (b) (c) Figure 15-22. Spectrally averaged atmospheric transmittance for representative MWIR and LWIR sensors. A mid-latitude winter environment and rural aerosol were assumed.
Any atmospheric study that does not include the system responsivity may provide a different impression as to the effectiveness of the system. Systems that have a response at absorption band edges are dramatically affected by the path length compared to those systems that do not. It is not possible to simply state that the LWIR band is better than the MWIR band. It is necessary to completely specify the system spectral response before making any conclusions. Range performance depends upon the system design (MTF and NEDT), the target AT, target size, and task on hand (detection, recognition or identification). Atmospheric transmittance is only a major driver for sensitivity- limited systems. Note that MWIR and LWIR are used in a generic sense. To call a system 3 to 5 pm or MWIR only denotes that its spectral response is within the MWIR region. It says nothing about the precise response. For example both PtSi and InSb are labeled as MWIR systems but the spectral responses are very different and therefore their performances are very different. The atmospheric transmittance is only one parameter in range performance equation and as such should not be used exclusively to select MWIR pm or LWIR. Trade studies must include the specific sensor designs to determine which will perform better in the various scenarios and environments. 15.7. SIGNAL-TO-NOISE OPTIMIZATION So far, the selection of the MWIR or LWIR band was based upon the system spectral response and available signal. The system spectral response should be matched to the anticipated signal so that noise is kept to a minimum. For a background-limited system, the noise variance is equal to the average detected signal level (Discussed in Chapter 18, Sensitivity and Noise)’. ^2 noise variance = к JMe (А, T) Rd (A) dA . (15-26) This assumes that any signal attenuated by the atmosphere is replaced by path radiance. For background-limited systems, the noise must also be considered for system optimization. Using Equation 15-6, the signal-to-noise ratio is [Me(A,&T)r*m(A)rop/ics(A) Rd{A) dA SNR = Jk^ Л2 $Me(A,TB) Rd(A) dA (15-27)
Selection of MWIR or LWIR is now modified by noise considerations. The SNR is maximized by carefully selecting the system spectral response. This is dictated by the atmospheric conditions. A different optimization is required for operation near the ground compared to high altitude operation. Optimization also depends upon the anticipated path length. This approach assumes that the atmosphere is homogeneous and does not change much over the limited use (i.e., air-to-ground with the airplane flying between 1 km and 2 km). This is not so near the sea surface where the absolute humidity changes rapidly in the first few meters of altitude. When evaluating the MWIR and LWIR bands, the performance predictions are only as good as the models selected and the assumptions made. System design issues (e.g., LWIR common module scanning system versus MWIR staring systems) are mingled with atmospheric transmittance issues. InSb and PtSi systems are both labeled as MWIR even though the spectral responses are significantly different. Here, MWIR InSb may provide better range performance than LWIR HgCdTe which, in turn, provides better range performance than MWIR PtSi under certain conditions. There is no clear winner in the MWIR versus LWIR controversy. Since the background temperature, AT, system transmission, and system spectral response are embedded in Equation 15- 27, it is nearly impossible to provide general statements about the relative merits of MWIR and LWIR. Sun glints (discussed in next section) can modify the results. To illustrate the relationship between the signal and the noise, 2, is fixed at 2.6 pm, and 22 is increased from 2.6 pm to 5.5 pm. As 22 increases, the total signal increases only when the atmospheric transmittance is greater than zero. No additional signal is gained at the CO2 absorption band at 4.3 pm. Path radiance contributes to noise. Where ever the atmosphere absorbs source energy, it radiates (path radiance) at the same wavelength. The detector senses all radiation within its spectral responsivity band. Figure 15-23 illustrates the relative output of an InSb detector that has a peak responsivity at 4.8 pm and a cutoff wavelength of 5.4 pm. As z2 approaches the CO2 absorption band, the signal no longer increases but the noise does so that the signal-to-noise ratio starts to decrease. After the absorption band, the signal increases again and then starts to decrease near the end of the MWIR band. The relative maximum SNR is 2.71 which occurs when ^=4.16 pm. The SNR actually decreased as the spectral bandwidth increased for this example!
RELATIVE OUTPUT Figure 15-23. Signal-to-ratio for an InSb system with AT = 5 К and a 2-km path length calculated from Equation 15-28. is fixed at 2.6 pm and 22 varies from 2.6 to 5.5 pm. The SNR decreases when no signal is available. The noise will always increase with increasing wavelength. To optimize the SNR, the optical transmittance, Toptics(f), should be unity when the SNR is increasing and zero when the SNR is decreasing. The optical filter should be a cold filter so that no appreciable radiation emanates from it. Figure 15-24 illustrates the SNR with a cold filter that has unity transmittance from 3.16 to 4.16 pm and from 4.58 to 4.78 pm. Now the SNR has increased to a relative maximum of 2.96. Kantrowitz and Watkins20 experimentally verified that a notch filter similar to that shown in Figure 15-24 can improve imagery. The cold filter does not provide any appreciable radiation below 3.16 im, between 4.16 and 4.58 pm and above 4.78 pm (i.e., the definition of a cold filter). The filter radiates at the wavelengths that it attenuates. If the filter temperature is small compared to the scene temperature, then its radiative contribution to noise can be neglected (discussed in Section 18.5., Real Systems). The cold filter spectral transmittance must be matched to the anticipated atmospheric spectral transmittance and detector spectral responsivity. Different path lengths and different environments will modify the cold filter requirements. Thus, the system design must be matched to the specific application. The choice of MWIR or LWIR must be carefully analyzed for the specific application and component availability. There is no quick answer to wave band selection.
RELATIVE OUTPUT Figure 15-24. Optimized SNR using a spectrally selective cold filter. 15.8. SUN GLINTS The sun spectrum may be approximated by a blackbody whose color temperature is 5900 K. The radiation reaching the earth is modified by the atmospheric transmittance, which varies with sun angle. At 90° (sun directly over head), the transmittance is a maximum. As the angle decreases, the transmittance decreases (Figure 15-25). Due to water vapor, the solar intensity is more than an order of magnitude smaller in LWIR region when compared to the MWIR region. Simultaneously, the blackbody emission of a 300-K target is about 6 times higher. Thus solar reflections are considered negligible in the LWIR region. It would initially appear that solar reflections are a problem in the MWIR region. As a result many systems are designed to minimize solar reflections (see Section 15.6., MWIR versus LWIR). This may not be necessary. Whether sun glints are a problem depends upon the system's application. The magnitude of a sun glint depends upon the target's reflectivity (or emissivity). If the target has unit emissivity, then sun glints are, by definition, nonexistence. Figure 15-25 illustrates the full solar spectrum and would be the magnitude of the reflected radiation when the reflectivity is unity As the reflectivity decreases, the magnitude of a sun glint decreases. Table 15-10 provides the emissivity of some common materials. The emissivity depends upon the surface condition (polished, pitted, or oxidized) and surface contaminants (dew, dust, mud, or paint). The emissivity of an ideal blackbody is one and that of an ideal reflector is zero.
WAVELENGTH (цш) Figure 15-25. The solar spectrum at the ground when the sun is overhead (90°), at 30° and at 10°. Calculated from LOWTRAN and using the 1962 standard environment and a rural aerosol. For comparison, the spectral radiant exitance for an ideal blackbody (e = 1) at 300 К is also shown. Table 15-10 TYPICAL EMISSIVITIES Material Reflectivity Emissivity Skin 0.08 0.92 Paint 0.06 0.94 Plaster 0.09 0.91 Iron oxide 0.13 0.87 Common red brick 0.17 0.83 Oxidized copper 0.22 0.78 Lightly oxidized cast iron 0.36 0.64 Copper bus bar 0.60 0.40 Aluminum panel 0.84 0.16 Polished copper 0.97 0.03 For preventive maintenance, predictive maintenance, and nondestructive testing, the target's temperature is inferred from the radiation emanating from the target. The system's calibration allows for emissivities less than unity but this requires knowledge of the reflected ambient radiation. Simple methods exist for estimating the average ambient radiation. One application is to determine whether
electrical components are overheating. Many of these components are bare metal. As indicated in Table 15-10, these components have a low emissivity and therefore can reflect significant ambient radiation. The variability of a sun glint with respect to sun angle, viewing angle, target angle, and target shape makes it extremely difficult to account for solar radiation. As a result, most systems designed for nondestructive testing operate in the LWIR region. Of course, a MWIR system could be used indoors or at nighttime. Most military targets are painted. The emissivity of these targets is very high and therefore solar glints become quite small (Figure 15-26). A sun glint can occur with a flat surface (e.g., glass in vehicles). This glint is actually an aid to detection. The glint would probably similar to hot spot detection. If the background provides solar glints, the glints act as clutter. This is a bothersome effect when trying to detect ships on the ocean. It was shown in Section 15.6., MWIR versus LWIR, that MWIR systems may be useful in high humidity environments. This, of course, includes ship detection. The advantage of using a MWIR system may be lost when sun glints are considered. Figure 15-26. Reflected solar radiation and thermal emission for a painted 300-K target (typical emissivity of 0.94). 15.9. SOLAR SCATTERING Aerosols scatter radiation. The amount of scattering and direction depend upon the relationship among the particle composition, particle size, and wavelength. As the angle between the target and sun decreases, the magnitude of the scattered solar radiation increases. While not considered a problem for most LWIR applications, solar scattering in the MWIR may be an issue. When viewing
objects within 20 degrees of the sun, scattered radiation may introduce significant path radiance that is detected by MWIR systems. This increased path radiance appears as noise within the system 15.10. BATTLEFIELD OBSCURANTS The battlefield creates aerosols that are not normally found elsewhere. The "dirty" battlefield contains dirt and vegetation kicked up by bomb blasts, soot from burning materiel, camouflage smokes, and gaseous effluents from gun muzzles. Many of these sources are very hot and can contribute to path radiance. The soil type, soil moisture, and vegetation determine the amount of dust produced by bomb blasts. The spread of the dust will depend upon the local meteorological conditions. The persistence will be determined, in part, by the particle size. Gravitational settling will limit the duration of dust clouds composed of larger particles. A "dirty" cloud created by a bomb blast develops in three stages: (1) impact, (2) rise, and (3) drift and dissipation. In the impact stage, as the crater is formed, large chunks of debris, moist soil, and water may be lofted. In the rise stage, the particulates rise quickly because of thermal buoyancy. Finally, the dust cloud drifts with the wind and eventually dissipates. These rapidly changing, nonhomogeneous, aerosols are difficult to model. The Electro-Optical Systems Atmospheric Effects Library (EOSAEL) is a comprehensive library of computer codes that includes battlefield aerosols.21 The aerosol extinction coefficient depends on the particle size distribution and concentration. For naturally occurring aerosols (hazes, fogs, etc.), the concentration can be inferred from the meteorological range. For battlefield contaminants and notably screening smokes, the concentration can be controlled by the generation method. Cloud homogeneity depends upon the environmental conditions with wind being a dominant contributor. Since the battlefield obscurant concentration can vary, it is convenient to rewrite the Beer-Lambert law as robs=e~aCL-, (15-28) where a is the mass extinction coefficient with units of m2/g and C is the concentration with units of g/m3. The advantage of this approach is that a is an inherent property of the particle composition, size, and shape. The concentration- path-length product, CLohs, is simply the mass of particles in the line-of-sight. Typical values of CLohs products can be found22 in Department of Defense Handbook 178(ER). The obscurant path length, Lobs , usually is only a small
portion of the total path length R. The total transmittance is the product of the obscurant transmittance and the remaining atmospheric transmittance (as calculated by LOWTRAN). 15.11. REFERENCES 1. LOWTRAN, MODTRAN, and HITRAN are discussed in many texts. See, for example, M. E. Thomas and L. D. Duncan, "Atmospheric Transmission," in Atmospheric Propagation of Radiation, F. G. Smith, ed. This is Volume 2 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 2. The ONTAR Corporation, 129 University Road, Brookline, MA 02146-4532, offers a variety of atmospheric transmittance codes. 3. B. Herman, A. J. LaRocca, and R. E. Turner, "Atmospheric Scattering," in The Infrared Handbook, Revised Edition, W. L. Wolfe and G. J. Zissis, eds., Chapter 4, Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI (1985). 4 A. J. LaRocca, "Atmospheric Absorption," in The Infrared Handbook, Revised Edition, W. L. Wolfe and G. J. Zissis, eds., Chapter 5, Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI (1985). 5. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging, pp. 30-67, Plenum Press, New York (1975). 6. F. X Kneizys, E. P. Shuttle, L. W. Abreau, J. H. Chetwynd, Jr., G P. Anderson, W. О Gallery, J. E. A. Selby, and S. A. Clough, "Users Guide to LOWTRAN 7," Air Force Geophysical Laboratory Report AFGL-TR-88-0177, Hanscom AFB, MA 01731 (1988). 7. N. S. Kopeika and J. Bordegna, "Background Noise in Optical Communication Systems," Proceedings IEEE, Vol. 58(10), pp. 1571-1577 (1970). 8. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing -Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (April 1975). 9. W. E. K. Middleton, Vision Through the Atmosphere, University of Toronto Press (1958). 10.1 . Dror and N. S. Kopeika, "Statistical Model for Aerosol Size Distribution Parameters According to Weather Parameters," in Atmospheric Propagation and Remote Sensing III, W. A. Flood and W. B. Miller, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2222, pp. 375-383 (1994). 11. L. M. Biberman, R. E. Roberts, and L. N. Seekamp, "A Comparison of Electrooptical Technologies for Target Acquisition and Guidance; Part 2: Analysis of the Grafenwohr Atmospheric Transmission Data," Paper P-1218, Institute for Defense Analysis, Arlington Virginia (January 1977). 12. B. W. Rice and G. A. Findlay, "Infrared Propagation Within a Few meters of the Sea Surface," Applied Optics, 29(34), pp. 5046-5048 (1990). 13. See, for example. L. H. Janssen and J. van Schie, "Frequency of Occurrence of Transmittance in Several Wavelength Regions During a 3-year Period," Applied Optics, 21(12), pp. 2215-2223 (1982). or L. M. Biberman, R. E. Roberts, and L. N. Seekamp, "A Comparison of Electrooptical Technologies for Target Acquisition and Guidance; Part 2: Analysis of the Grafenwohr Atmospheric Transmission Data," Paper P-1218, Institute for Defense Analysis, Arlington Virginia (January 1977). 14 "Military Weather Calculations for the NATO Theater. Weather and Warplanes VIII," RAND Corporation Report R-2401-AF (1980). 15. D. E. Austin, К. C. Hepfer, and W. R. Rudzinsky, "Use of NSWCDD Weather Databases for Prediction of Atmospheric Transmission in Common Thermal Imaging Sensor Bands," Naval Surface Warfare Center Report # NS WCDD/TR-94/89, Dahgren, VA (1995). 16. R. Longshore, P. Raimondi, and L. Lumpkin, "Selection of Detector Peak Wavelength for Optimum Infrared System Performance," Infrared Physics, 16, pp. 639-647 (1976).
17. R. B. Johnson, "Relative Merits of the 3 - 5 and 8-12 pm Spectral Bands," in Recent Developments and Applications of Infrared Analytical Instruments, W. A. Willis, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 971, pp. 102-111 (1988). 18. G. A. Findlay and D. R. Cutten, "Comparison of Performance of 3 - 5 and 8 - 12 im Infrared Systems," Applied Optics Vol. 28(23), pp. 5029-5037 (1989). 19. T. Meitzler, G. Gerhart, E. Sohn, and P. Collins, "A Comparison of the Performance of 3 - 5 and 8 - 12 pm Infrared Cameras," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing V, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2224, pp. 22-29 (1994). 20. F. T. Kantrowitz and W. R. Watkins, "Bandpass Optimization for Low-altitude Long-path Infrared Imaging," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(4), pp. 1114-1119 (1994). 21. R. C. Shirkey, "Determination of Atmospheric Effects Through EOSAEL," in Optical, Infrared, Millimeter Wave Propagation Engineering, N. S. Kopeika and W. B. Miller, eds., SPIE Proceedings 926, pp. 205-212(1988). 22. "Quantitative Description of Obscuration Factors for Electro-Optical and Millimeter Wave Systems," Department of Defense handbook DoD-HDBK-178(ER), Washington, D.C. 20301 (25 July 1986). EXERCISES 1. Using Figure 15-4, what is the average attenuation coefficient when the meteorological range is 3 km and the absolute humidity is 10 g/m3? What is the average attenuation coefficient when the meteorological range is 25 km and the absolute humidity is 2 g/m3? Plot the transmittance as a function of range for both values with R^ = 20 km. 2. What is the average attenuation coefficient for December and July (Figure 15- 5)? Assume that in December the air is clear (meteorological range is 25 km) and hazy in July (meteorological range is 8 km). Plot the transmittance as a function of range for both values with Rniax = 20 km. 3. What is the atmospheric transmittance over a 5-km path length for relative humidities of 0, 10,..., 100%? Use the summer values shown in Figure 15-6. 4. Using Figure 15-7 as a guide, estimate the extinction coefficient for the visible (X=0.5 pm), MWIR (X =4 pm), and LWIR (X= 10 pm) for each of the international visibility code designations (Table 15-2). 5. Discuss the similarities and differences between the values determined in Exercise 4 and Table 15-4. 6. Estimate the absolute humidity associated with the average weather conditions shown in Figure 15-9. 7. Plot the atmospheric transmittance as a function of range (Rnwx = 20 km) for the average attenuation coefficients given in Table 15-4 and Table 15-6. Comment about the similarities and differences. 8. For the data shown in Figure 15-20c, calculate the average attenuation as a function of range. Assume Tave = That is, for R = 3, 5, 10, 15, and 20 km, calculate t. Is t a constant? If so, why? If not, why not? Is an Taim_ave a good approximation? 9. Discuss the relative merits of the filters (one versus two) shown in Figure 15-24.
16 ATMOSPHERIC MTF It may be necessary to include atmospheric macroscale variations (turbulence) when modeling a low-noise, high resolution system. The importance of turbulence is evidenced by the fact that it is included in the US Army’s Electro- Optical Systems Atmospheric Effects Library (EOSAEL).1 Turbulence, which is well known in the visible, has been demonstrated in both the MWIR and LWIR spectral regions2,3 (Figure 16-1). It has also been demonstrated4 that aerosol scattering can blur LWIR imagery even when the weather is clear. Turbulence results from random fluctuations in the atmospheric refractive index that is caused by random changes in air pressure and temperature. These changes, ever so slight, cause the light to arrive at different angles at the receiver. This results in image motion, distortion, and blurring. Temporal fluctuations are called scintillation. The turbulence is most dramatic within a few meters of ground level. Turbulence is dramatic over dry soil (e.g., the desert) during midday. For other locations or times, the turbulence may be minimal. Image quality is degraded more when the turbulence is near the system aperture. For example, image quality will appear poorer to a ground-based observer viewing an aircraft compared to an airborne observer viewing the ground. This is called the shower curtain effect. Scene radiation scattered out of the line-of-sight contributes to extinction. Non-scene radiation scattered into the line-to-sight contributes to path radiance. If the radiation scattered into the line-of-sight originated from the target or its immediate background, it will blur the image. This occurs because the scattered angles of incidence relative to the line-of-sight are different from the unscattered scene radiation. Mathematically, this blurring is considered as an MTF. Adding an aerosol MTF and a turbulence MTF is at best a crude approximation for two major reasons. First, turbulence is dynamic so that it will affect a particular image feature differently at each instant of time. The MTF in any one image may deviate significantly from the average. Second, the turbulence effects are not spatially symmetrical and the image changes constantly. MTF theory applies only to stationary processes. Therefore, the MTF assigned to turbulence represents an average value. This chapter will discuss the atmospheric MTF in its simplest form to illustrate the magnitude of the effect.
Figure 16-1. Set of 16 consecutive LWIR images of a target board at 1.6 km. Turbulence distorts each image. The distortion is not apparent to the observer because the eye integrates over several frames. The observer will perceive some MTF degradation. (From reference 2). 16.1. CN2 The atmospheric turbulence transfer function originated with Fried.5,6 The literature7 contains many articles on turbulence theory and on the application of Fried's theory. For many engineering applications, the refractive index structure parameter, Cn2, is sufficient for predicting optical turbulence.
Turbulence exhibits a strong diurnal cycle and is even present on calm days. A variety of factors affect C2. Temperature gradients are generally the greatest at midday and midnight when the ground is warmer than the overlying air. Daytime cloud cover limits surface heating and can reduce C2 by a factor of ten. Nighttime cloud cover limits ground cooling and thereby increases the temperature gradient and Cn2. Wind promotes air mixing and decreases temperature gradients. Surface roughness inhibits air mixing, increases temperature gradients, and increases C2. When the air and surface temperatures are equal, no heat exchange takes place. These transitions cause minima that occur after sunrise and just before sunset. The morning dip does not occur at sunrise because there is a thermal lag while the surface temperature rises to meet the air temperature. The evening minimum occurs before sunset when radiation cooling exceeds the insolation and the surface temperature drops to that of the air. Table 16-1 summarizes these effects and Table 16-2 provides some typical values. Figure 16-2 illustrates the seasonal and diurnal nature8 of C2. It would appear that sunrise and sunset are ideal times to perform atmospheric imaging tests. However, experiments often last at least one-half hour. During this period C2 is changing so rapidly that the results may not be reproducible from test-to-test. Midday may be a better test time since C2 is nearly constant even though turbulence is at its maximum value. Table 16-1 FACTORS THAT AFFECT Cn2 Conditions that increase C„2 Conditions that decrease C2 Strong solar heating (few clouds) Very dry ground (desert) Clear nights with very light winds Low altitudes Surface roughness Heavy overcast Wet surface with high humidity High winds (greater than 8 m/s) High altitude Table 16-2 C2 DESCRIPTORS C„2 (m “) Turbulence strength lx ICT15 or lower weak 5xl0’15to 1 ИО’14 moderate 5 * 10"14 or greater strong
с/г- i г Summer 10‘12 10'13 10‘14 10'15 10 16 10'17 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 Time of Day Spring Figure 16-2. Diurnal and seasonal variations in Cf measured at an altitude of 9 meters. Cf is proportional to /Г4/3. Therefore at one meter, Cf is about 18.7 times greater. The data was obtained at the Tularosa Basin at White Sands Missile Range, NM - a desert, (a) Spring, (b) summer, (c) fall, and (d) winter. The solid line is the mean and the dashed line represents ±u (± one standard deviation). (From reference 8). Time of Day Winter
The dependence of Ся2 on height has been investigated in many different locations. Vertical profiles have been observed to change over several hours so that several models have been suggested,9'11 Tatarski's model seems better for low altitudes12 4 с„2(й)=с>'Т (i6-i) where Сло2 is the refractive index structure parameter at one-meter altitude. With this model, Crt2 decreases to 1/10 of Cn2 at 5.6 m and 1/100 its value at 31.6 m (Figure 16-3). Figure 16-3. Tatarski's height model as a function of C2ICn2. Turbulence is the greatest within 3 meters of the ground. Cn2 is the refractive index structure parameter at one-meter altitude. 16.2. TURBULENCE MTF The turbulence MTF can be described in closed-form for four limiting conditions: near-field, far-field, long exposure, and short exposure: MTFturb “ exP (16-2) where ffp is the spatial frequency in the focal plane of the lens and has units of cycles/m. The parameter ro is Fried's coherence diameter (also called the transverse
coherence length) and a is a parameter that varies according to the limiting case. Long- and short-exposure are also called the slow- and fast-modes respectively. Table 16-3 provides the values of a recommended by Fried.5,6 Near-field occurs when D » (R and the far-field when D « (R Х)'л (Figures 16-4 and 16-5). Most infrared systems have a clear aperture of five to 20 cm. Generally, the detection range increases with increasing aperture diameter. Large aperture systems are used to detect targets at ranges more than 10 km. Therefore, the far-field approximation appears appropriate. Table 16-3 CORRECTION PARAMETER a Exposure/mode Field a Long/slow Near 0 Long/slow Far 0 Short/fast Near 1 Short/fast Far 0.5 Figure 16-4. Near- and far-field for the MWIR region (2-4 pm). The separation is7?=Z)2/ 2.
Figure 16-5. Near- and far-field for the LWIR region (2=10 pm). The separation is R=D2! Determination of long- and short-exposure times in terms of environmental observables is not well established. Since Fried's introduction of fast and slow behavior, little definitive work has surfaced. However, short- exposure is loosely defined as when /«10 ms. On a frame-by-frame basis, most imaging systems operate in the short-exposure regime. However, because of eye integration time, an observer’s eye will effectively integrate over 100 to 200 ms and therefore the observer will experience the long-exposure, far-field conditions. In the long-exposure limiting case, a=0 for both the near-field and the far-field. It is the system focal length,//, which images the atmospheric turbulence on the detector array. To convert to cycles/mrad, fx =ffp fl /1000. The far-field, long-exposure MTF is MTFturb ~ exP 1000ЯД (16-3) For spherical waves, о R V/3 T3/5 (16-4)
where R is the slant path measured from the target (i.e., the target is at R = 0). The variable ro depends upon the slant path, which has height dependence (Equation 16-1). Then ro = 0.185 Я6/5 -3/5 (16-5) сДй)</л where 0 is the viewing angle relative to the vertical axis (zenith angle). Strong turbulence (large Cf ) produces a small ro. The variable r(, will be most strongly influenced by the turbulence near the receiver optics.13 Basically, large changes in arrival angle are intercepted by the receiver when the receiver is near the turbulence. When the turbulence is far from the receiver, the turbulence refracts the radiation out of the line-of-sight. Since turbulence is the greatest near the earth's surface, a ground-to-air scenario (tank observing a helicopter) will be more strongly affected than if the situation were reversed (air-to-ground). This is sometimes called the shower curtain effect. For horizontal path lengths where Cf is considered be a constant (Figure 16-6) /, 4-3/5 Г 2 Y/5 r =0.18526/5 -ЯС* =0.185 ------------------- . (16-6) 18 ) \3RC2n) An imaging system that is diffraction-limited in the laboratory may have its field performance limited by turbulence. Normalizing the spatial frequency (u - fjfoco} provides МТРЛЙМТРШ1Ъ (Figures 16-7 and 16-8) as MTFdiffMTFturb = 2, л —1 / 3 cos {u)-u\\-u exp 3.44 5/3 (16-7) When the aperture diameter is small compared to the coherence length, turbulence will have minimal effect on the system MTF. The visible region (Figure 16-6a) is dramatically affected since the coherence diameter is relatively small during periods of high turbulence. As a rule-of-the-thumb, if the D!ro is less than 0.2 then turbulence can be neglected.
1 0.01 •100 5.006-13 100 10 1 0.1 1.006-1 100 ui о z Ul Ul x о £ a m о z Ul X ui X о 1.006-15 5.006-15 Atmospheric MTF 297 0.001 0.1 0.01 0.1 (c) PATHLENGTH (km) Figure 16-6. Coherence diameter, ro , as a function of path length, (a) Visible region (7=0.55 pm), (b) MWIR region (2 = 4 pm), and (c) LWIR region (7=10 pm). C„2 is considered a constant. As the path length increases or as C„2 increases, r0 decreases. Simultaneously, MTFturb decreases. 0.1 Л4 ЛЛ 5.00£-l4 10 (a) pathlength^) y**/ 100E 5.006-15 ooE14 д 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001 0.1 £ -ш-Х 6 Ul о z X ui X о (W pathlength ^00ЕЛ55.00б-15 E.14 10 1
MTF MTF NORMALIZED SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 16-7. Diffraction limited optical MTF and MTFturb as a function oiD/r0. The spatial frequency is normalized tofx!foco. Figure 16-8. MTFdiffMTFturb as a function of Do/ro. The spatial frequency is normalized to fx!foco. Using Shade's definition of resolution (Equation 12-6), Req_turb = \ .7WJro. For the optics, Req_optics = 1.845 2 /Do (Equation 12-7). When Req_turb is considerably less than Req.optics, turbulence does not degrade the system resolution. Equivalently, when D/ro« 1, turbulence can be neglected. This is consistent with Figure 16-8. Small aperture systems limit the amount of radiation collected and systems with small apertures may be sensitivity limited. Large aperture systems permit detection of large objects at long ranges. However, MTF^ will degrade target detail for these systems.
Fried5 defined "resolution” as a volume integral. He normalized this function to the maximum resolution that can be obtained as the aperture diameter approaches infinity: R max 1 J MTFdiff («) MTFturb (u) u du , 0 (16-8) where the MTFs are given by Equation 16-7. The ratio R/Rtnax is illustrated in Figure 16-9 as a function of D/ro. With this definition, the largest aperture selected should be about equal to the coherence length. Other measures of resolution will provide different limiting values for D !r0. Figure 16-9. Fried's resolution5 as a function of D!ro. The resolution increases until the aperture diameter approaches the coherence length. 16.3. AEROSOL MTF In Chapter 15, Atmospheric Transmittance, it was shown that scene radiation scattered out of the line-of-sight was considered as part of extinction. This rule-of-the-thumb statement refers to large angle scattering. Very small angle scattering that reaches the detector may have sufficient intensity to be detected. If the scattered target radiation is much lower than the background, its contribution to blur is minor and may be considered negligible (assumed in Chapter 15).
When the scattered intensity is significant, the atmospheric transmittance is replaced with the ’’classical” approximation14 MTFaerosol Z X 2 -kR-oR \ f aco J whenfx<faco (16-9) and MTFaeroSol = exp [- Л Л - СТ Л ] when f > f J x J aco (16-10) The aerosol cutoff, faco, is (16-11) where a is the effective aerosol radius (m). The aerosol MTF decreases from unity at zero spatial frequency to a value equal to the atmospheric transmittance at spatial frequencies above cutoff. For most systems, faco is very small. Thus in only a very small frequency range is the MTF of forward scattering dependent upon the frequency. This small range can be neglected for most applications according to the classical approximation. However, the classical approximation does not consider the imaging system's field-of-view.15 The classical approximation has been extended by Sadot and Kopeika.16 They showed that both scattering and absorption can have angular dependence. Experimental evidence4’17 suggests that the aerosol MTF is much more complex and can exist up to ffp = 500 cycles/m. When converted to the object spatial frequency, this becomes 0.5/7 cycles/mrad. Comparison of aerosol and turbulence MTFs show that the aerosol MTF may be dominant in the LWIR.16 Sadot et. al. have included18 the aerosol MTF to the range performance predictions. The range at which targets can be detected changes when the aerosol MTF is included. Under weak turbulence conditions and moderate ranges, the aerosol MTF increases the SNR compared to the 1975 NVL model prediction. For long ranges, the aerosol MTF approaches a constant attenuation and both models predict the same range. Reference 19 summarized the aerosol MTF theory. 16.4. REFERENCES 1. See W. B. Miller and J. C. Ricklin, "A Module for Imaging Through Optical Turbulence," Atmospheric Sciences Laboratory' Report ASL TR-0221-27, White Sands Missile Range, NM (1987) and R. C. Shirkey, "Determination of Atmospheric Effects Through EOSAEL," in Optical, Infrared, Millimeter Wave Propagation Engineering, N. S. Kopeika and W. B. Miller, eds., SPIE Proceedings 926, pp. 205-212(1988).
2. W. R. Watkins, D R. Billingsley, F. R. Palacios, S. B. Crow, and J. B. Jordan, "Characterization of the Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function Using the Target Contrast Characterizer," in Characterization, Propagation, and Simulation of Sources and Backgrounds, D. Clement and W. R. Watkins, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1486, pp. 17-24 (1991). 3. W. R. Watkins, "Environmental Bugs Invade EO Imaging Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing IV, G C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 42-53 (1993). 4. D. Sadot, G. Kitron, N. Kitron, and N. S. Kopeika, "Thermal Imaging Through the Atmosphere: Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function Theory and Verification," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(3), pp. 881-888(1994). 5. D. L. Fried, "Optical Resolution Though a Randomly Inhomogeneous Medium for Very Long and Very Short Exposures," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 56(10), pp. 1372-1379 (1966). 6. D. L. Fried, "Limiting Resolution Looking Down Through the Atmosphere," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 56(10), pp. 1380-1384 (1966). 7. See, for example, J. W. Goodman, Statistical Optics, pp. 402-433, Wiley-Interscience, New York (1985) or R. R. Beland, "Propagation Through Atmospheric Optical Turbulence" in Atmospheric Propagation of Radiation, F. G. Smith, ed. This is Volume 2 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). This 85-page chapter contains 94 references. 8. D. L. Walters, К. E. Kunkel, and G. В Hoidale, "Diurnal and Seasonal Variations in the Atmospheric Structure Parameter (Cn2) that Affect the Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function," in Atmospheric Transmission, R. Fenn, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 277, pp. 6-9 (1981). 9. D. L. Fried, "Statistic of a Geometric Representation of Wavefront Distortion," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 55(11), pp. 1427-1435 (1965). 10. E. Brookner, "Improved Model for the Structure Constant Variations with Altitude," Applied Optics, Vol. 10(8), pp. 1960-1962 (1971). 11. R. E. Hufnagle, "Variations of Atmospheric Turbulence," in Digest of Technical Papers, Topical Meeting on Optical Propagation Through Turbulence, Optical Society of America, Washington, D.C., pp. Wa-1 to Wa-4 (1974). 12. F. Lei and H. J. Tiziani, "Atmospheric Influence on Image Quality of Airborne Photographs," Optical Engineering, Vol. 32(9), pp. 2271-2280 (1993). 13. D. Sadot, D. Shemtov, and N. S. Kopeika, "Theoretical and Experimental Investigation of Image Quality Through an Inhomogeneous Turbulent Medium," Waves in Random Media, Vol. 14(2), pp. 177-189 (1994). 14. N. S. Kopeika, "Spatial-frequency and Wavelength Dependence Effects of Aerosols on the Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function," Journal of the Optical Society of America, Vol. 72(8), pp. 1092-1094(1982). 15. D. Sadot, A. Dvir, L. Bergel, and N. S. Kopeika, "Restoration of Thermal Images Distorted by the Atmosphere, Based on Measured and Theoretical Atmospheric Modulation Transfer Function," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(1), pp. 44-53 (1994). 16. D. Sadot and N. S. Kopeika, "Effects of Aerosol Absorption on Image Quality Through a Particulate Medium," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(3), pp. 7107-7111 (1994). 17. D. Sadot and N S. Kopeika, "Imaging Through the Atmosphere: Practical Instrumentation-based Theory and Verification of Aerosol Modulation Transfer Function," Journal of the Optical Society of America A, Vol. 10(1), pp. 172-179 (1993). 18. D. Sadot, N. S. Kopeika, and S. R. Rotman, "Incorporation of Atmospheric Blurring Effects in Target Acquisition Modeling, in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing V, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2224, pp. 95-107 (1994). 19. N. S. Kopeika, A System Engineering Approach to Imaging, pp. 487-513, SPIE Optical Engineering Press, Bellingham, WA (1998).
EXERCISES 1. An MWIR system is operating in a far-field, long-exposure environment. Let Cf be IxlO’1', IxlO '4 and IxlO’13. Assume the average wavelength is 4 pm. The target is 10 km from the sensor (horizontal path length). What is rf Plot MTFnrb. 2. Repeat Exercise 1 for the visible region (X = 0.55 im). 3. Repeat Exercise 1 for an LWIR system (X = 10 im).. 4. Discuss the how the wavelength affects MTFturb. Use the results of Exercises 1, 2, and 3. 5. A sensor is at an altitude of 1 m and the target is directly above the sensor at 100 m. What is the integrated value of rf> 6. The target is at an altitude of 1 m and the sensor is directly above the target 100 m. What is the integrated value of rf 7. Does the near field or far field turbulence region apply to visible systems?
17 TARGET SIGNATURES A target is an object that is to be detected, recognized, or identified. The background is any distribution of radiation that offsets the target. Target signatures are the spatial, spectral, and intensity features that distinguish the target from the background. Most imaging systems exploit intensity differences. The background can vary with application (Figure 17-1). The background may be a mountain, ocean, forest, jungle, plain, desert, clouds, sky, or snow. A vehicle viewed from air could have diverse backgrounds such as sand, grass, water, concrete, asphalt, or dirt. Since vegetational growth varies with season, there is also a seasonal variation in the target signature. Similarly a ship may have the sea or the sky as a background. A helicopter may have cold sky, clouds, mountains, or vegetation as a background depending upon the location of the observer with respect to the helicopter. In each case the apparent target- background signature is different even though the target has a fixed intensity. Air-to-G round (a) (a) Ground-to-G round Figure 17-1. The background can vary according to the application, (a) Air-to-ground, (b) ground-to-ground, (c) ground-to-air, and (d) air-to-air.
Because of the wide variation in target signatures, Ratches et. al. stated1 One of the main problems in performance modeling is to obtain an exact target signature. ... The problem is further complicated by the fact that one target can have many different signatures under various operational and environmental conditions..... We cannot easily describe all the complex target characteristics corresponding to the real-world IR signature..... Therefore we utilize only the overall general features of the target such as size and average temperature difference from the background. The resulting predictions then correspond to the results of a large ensemble of experiments. However, the results of any specific experiment with its unique target signature will not necessarily come close to the predictions for the general ensemble. For thermal imaging system performance predictions, it is common practice to represent the target signature with an equivalent area-weighted, target- background differential temperature (AT). An inherent weakness of a single parameter is that a target with a cold spot and hot spot could mathematically have a zero area-weighted AT. When the wavelength is less than about 3 pm, there is sufficient solar radiation available to detect reflectivity differences. That is, target signatures at these lower wavelengths typically are created by reflectivity differences. While this chapter focuses on thermal signatures, the methods to analyze data are generic to all spectral bands. With only minor modification, the equations can be used for all spectral bands. Chapters 19 through 21 further apply target characteristics to range performance metrics. 17.1. WHAT IS AT? There are numerous underlying assumptions when AT is selected as a target-background signature metric. These assumptions, listed in the previous chapters, are summarized here. The differential voltage created by a detector is A \Vsys = к \RdO)[MeO,TT)~ MeO,TBS\TopUcsa)TatmWdX. (17-1) A This is equated to the AT concept: Л2 A =k О)[ме (Л, TB + ДГ)- Me (Л, TB )Kp(to (Л)Та,т (Л)4Л. (17-2) A
Target signatures 305 Because AT is buried in the equation, it is a function of the background temperature, atmospheric transmittance, detector responsivity, and the lens transmittance. These equations can only be solved by iteration: there is no closed form solution. ) The first assumption is that a small change in a variable can be expressed as a Taylor series dMe(^TB) дТ AT. (17-3) Then ^2 J«„ (Я)[ме (Я,Тг)-Ме (Я, TB )]г„рВа (Я)Та1„ (Я)М ЛТ~------------------------------------------- А г дМАЯ,Тв) I Rd W —~ - roplics {Я)та(т (яуля J dT (17-4) The next assumption is that the atmospheric transmittance has no spectral features: T„„,,(T) = T„„ = TR„tm.mc. This simplifies the equation to л2 (Я)[ме (Я,тт)-ме(я, тв)] ?oplics (Я) ая AT ±. (17-5) Гр ГП8Д/е(АТД)г ..... I т! optics (^) J дТ А If the optics and detector responsivity are independent of wavelength, then я2 Цме(я,тг)-ме(я,тв)]м A______________________ я2 {дМе(Я,Тв) I _ аУи J дТ (17-6) Finally if the functions are constant over the spectral band,
(^ave 9 TT ) M e (^avg ? ^B ) dM e (Лаге, TB ) (17-7) dT which is the simplified equation that defines ЛТ. Because of the spectral nature of the optics, detector responsivity, and atmospheric transmittance, the apparent ЛТ is a function of all these. Each assumption modifies2 the apparent temperature differential. The error associated with each assumption increases as the spectral quantity deviates from the assumption that it is constant. The biggest influence is the atmospheric transmittance. Care must be exercised when the spectral response of the system starts to enter the region where there is significant atmospheric absorption. The error becomes a function of path length. Even with these inherent difficulties, the infrared community has selected AT as the method of describing target signatures. 17.2. AREA-WEIGHTED AT It is common practice to assume that both the target and the background can be modeled as blackbodies with an equivalent temperature. This convention ignores surface effects (i.e., covered with dirt, mud, and scratched paint) and makes the surface an ideal blackbody with unity emittance. The target’s true temperature may or may not be equal to the equivalent temperature. The conversion simply states that over the spectral region of interest, the target and background appear to be blackbodies at an equivalent temperature. The AT concept is a matter of convenience. For complete radiometric calculations, both TB and AT are used. Because of target-signature complexity, Ratches et. al. recommended3 using an area-weighted target temperature N - _ <=1 ave ~ n (17-8) where the target consists of TV subareas, A b each having a temperature of Tt (Figure 17-2). This value represents the average temperature for an ensemble of vehicles and orientations. If the background has an average temperature of TB, the average differential temperature is bT = Tme-TB. (17-9)
Figure 17-2. Area-weighted target temperature. There are virtually no standard targets except the NATO standard tank that reportedly4 has a AT of 1.25° C. Friedman et. al. state4 about vehicles: The AT associated with such a target must be obtained empirically or from an appropriate data base. Values range from 0.2 to 12 degrees depending upon vehicle type, condition, and aspect angle. The system analyst must use his judgment in selecting a value for AT. This value is based either experimentally measured result, by analogy to these results, or by prior experience. Sometimes, the customer defines the AT. Generally, the AT is considered the same in the MWIR and LWIR regions. This assumption is only valid if the emissivities (both target and background) are the same in the two spectral regions. If the emissivities are different, then the apparent ATs are different. Note also that AT can be zero even though the vehicle is discernible in the visible region (signature depends upon s- spectral reflectivity differences). Although the diurnal cycle and operating conditions affect the target signature, an area-weighted AT is selected for convenience. Common usage has shortened area-weighted AT to just AT. For different viewing angles the area- weighted AT may be different. Consider the areal relationship between a hot truck engine and its overall size. Although the engine compartment may be near 100° C, the average AT may only be a few degrees above the background.
17.3. DIURNAL VARIATIONS All materials with high absorption in the solar spectrum region will heat up. The temperature will depend upon the absorption coefficients at the solar wavelengths and the emissivity in the infrared where it re-radiates the energy. A target's current temperature is a time history of radiation exchange between it and the environment. 17.3.1. SOLAR HEATING Natural backgrounds such as trees, grass, rocks, and earth are heated passively through the absorption of solar energy. Daily heating begins at sunrise, and after midday, solar loading declines and objects begin to cool. After sunset, the background temperature approaches the air temperature. Low thermal inertia objects such as grass, leaves, and the soil surface tend to track the solar radiation. When a cloud passes, these objects cool rapidly. Large dense objects, such as rocks and tree timber, heat and cool slowly. Since all objects have different absorption coefficients5,6 at the solar wavelengths, different emissivities, and different thermal inertias, they heat up and cool at different rates. Therefore, target signatures are a function of all these parameters. The amount of solar radiation absorbed depends upon the condition of the target's surface (e.g., covered with water from recent rain, dew, dirt, or mud). The temperature of large thermal mass objects such as armored vehicles tends to lag terrain temperatures. Thus the terrain will heat or cool faster than a parked armored vehicle and both positive and negative contrasts are possible. As the sun rises, it heats that part of the target that faces east. During this time, the west side may still be cooling. Simultaneously, the grass on the eastern side will heat up. When viewing the western side in the morning, you see a cool side against a background that has heated. During the afternoon, the situation is reversed. The east side is in a shadow and may start to cool while the west side starts to heat up. Figure 17-3 illustrates the diurnal cycle for different parts of a tank. Figure 17-4 illustrates a typical diurnal cycle predicted8 by the SPACE (Sun, Precipitation, Atmosphere, Clouds, Earth) model. At thermal crossover (AT = 0), the target cannot be detected. For a fixed SNR, the range can be estimated from the back-of-the-envelope sensitivity approximation tr AT SNR * Та‘т-<™ NEDT
The range is zero at thermal crossover. Here, it is assumed that positive and negative contrast targets can be detected with equal capability (Figure 17-5). The amount of time the SNR is below a measurable value depends upon the NEDT, the atmospheric transmittance, and the AT. Figure 17-3. Representative ATs for a tank on a grassy background for a northern latitude. As the sun's angle changes, different sides are heated. (From reference 7). Figure 17-4. A typical AT diurnal cycle. The AT will vary according to season, location, and solar loading. This curve represents the area-weighted average AT for the front view of a tank during a typical European summer day. (From Reference 8).
TIME (24 hour scale) Figure 17-5. Representative performance ranges during the diurnal cycle for Tatm_ave = 0.85/km. At thermal crossover, the range approaches zero. As the NEDT or the required SNR increases, the time that the target range is near zero increases. No target is precisely at one temperature but will always exhibit some temperature variations. Different parts cool and heat up at preferential rates depending upon the sun location, heat capacity, and environmental effects. Although thermal crossover is shown as a unique event, there is usually some part of the target that exhibits a AT. Active targets generally do not exhibit thermal crossover. 17.3.2. AT CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY The effect of thermal crossover on range predictions can be understood by replotting the data in Figure 17-4 into a probability exceedance graph (Figure 17-6). Usmg the back-of-the-envelope sensitivity approximation (Equation 17-10), the probability of detection (assumed to occur when SNR = 1) is shown in Figure 17-7. For NEDT = 0.1° C and Tatm_ave = 0.85/km, the maximum range is 23.7 km. For this diurnal cycle, the detection range exceeds 20 km 72% of the time and exceeds 15 km 89% of the time. When plotted in this manner, thermal crossover is an extremely brief period compared to a 24-hour period.
DIFFERENTIAL TEMPERATURE Figure 17-6. Probability of exceedance for the data (absolute values) illustrated in Figure 17-4. Figure 17-7. Cumulative probability for detection. SNR = 1, NEDT= 0.1° C, and ratm_ave = 0.85/km. 17.3.3. ENVIRONMENTAL MODIFIERS Passing clouds modify the target signature. A heavy overcast lasting several days will nearly obliterate any signature as the earth and any target reach thermal equilibrium. When raining or snowing, solar loading is typically zero. Simultaneously, the high thermal conductivity of water aids in heat dissipation so that the scene is washed out.
For several hours after a heavy rainfall, target signatures are faint. Water and mud reduce frictional cues through cooling and insolation, respectively. Wind aids in heat transfer so that under moderate wind conditions, target temperatures will be lower than under still air conditions. 17.4. PATH RADIANCE Intuitively, it seems that any phenomena that prevent us from visually perceiving an object will affect all imagery the same way. During a hazy day, light scattered into the eye (path radiance) reduces the visual contrast. Here, objects that are far away appear as a neutral white and we are unable to distinguish any features. While the eye acts in this manner, imaging systems do not. Imaging systems simply responds to radiance differences. For thermal imaging systems, path radiance affects system noise and may modify the apparent target signature. The radiant sterance appearing to emanate from the target is LT = ^m-ave eTWLeO,O + т^,_те pr(A) Le{A,Tae) + Latm . (17-11) The first term represents the self-emission by the target and the second is the ambient radiation reflected by the target, zff) and pff) are the spectral emittance and reflectance, respectively. Tae is the average environmental temperature of the surrounding objects. It represents a mean temperature from averaging all contributing background elements. Latm is the path radiance created by the atmospheric self-emission and radiation scattered into the line-of-sight. Similarly, the radiant sterance appearing to emanate from the background is LB =r^lm_m.e (A)Le(A,TB) + pB(A)Le(A,Tae)\+ Ltttm .(17-12) If the target and background are at different ranges, the radiant sterance from each suffers different transmittance losses. Simultaneously, a different amount of path radiance is added to each. If the target and background are nearly at the same range, R^R2=R and the radiant sterance difference is д/ ~ т 2 L atm-ave к {A)Le{A,TT)-SB WLe(A,TB)\ ^-[pTW-pBW]Le^Tae}. (17-13) As long as a system is operating in the linear region, path radiance will not affect the detected AZ when Rj ~R2=R. However, real systems have automatic gain circuitry that may be activated by the path radiance signal. If so, the effect is
to reduce system gain. Now AZ may be below a measurable signal. For staring arrays, path radiance will partially fill the charge wells. The difference in sterance, AZ, can be positive, zero, or negative. It can be made vanishing small by modifying the target surface characteristics (i.e., adjust the emittance by selecting appropriate paint). This camouflage technique makes the target invisible in the thermal imaging bands.9,10 When the range to the target and background is different, the path radiance affects AZ. As the sensor spectral response enters those regions where the atmospheric transmittance is low, the path radiance becomes more noticeable. For example, some systems have a cold filter which limits the spectral response to 8 to 12 pm whereas others do not and are sensitive from 2 to 12 pm. This latter system will sense all the path radiance contributed in the water absorption band from 5 to 8 pm. Watkins11 provided some imagery that illustrates the effects of path radiance on target detectability. The eye has an internal automatic gain circuit and the eye's sensitivity depends upon the contrast &L/L. Most targets in the visible are illuminated by an ambient source12 (i.e., the target and background are not self-luminous and the sun, moon, or starlight provides the illumination). Dropping the wavelength notation for equation brevity C _ _ e aR (Pt Pb ) Le L e aR P В Le + ^atrn (17-14) where Le is the ambient illumination that irradiates the target and background and о defined by the meteorological range (Equation 15-10). The inherent contrast is _ <J>b ~ Pt} о ~ Pb (17-15) Historically, the background was always considered brighter than the target (pB > pT) and Co varied between 0 and 1. However, the target can be brighter than the background and there does not appear to be any difference between the detectability of objects which are of negative or positive contrast. The inherent contrast is now defined as о \pb Pt\ Pb (17-16) Substituting into Equation 17-14 provides the received contrast as
1 Lqtm aR Pb Le (17-17) The path radiance, L„tmi is due to light scattered into the line-of-sight and the total amount received is integrated over the path length/3 With negligible absorption (a reasonable approximation for the visible), -Tave)Lsky. The sky sterance, Lsky , is a function of the viewing direction and the location of the sun. The quantity pBLe is the background luminance. For convenience, the integrated path radiance is called the sky-to-background ratio (SGR): 1 + SGR (eaR -1) * (17-18) The SGR is approximately Q2!pB for a clear day (Lsky/Le^ 0.2) and 1/ pB for an overcast day (Lsky/£e« 1). When the SGR is one, the received contrast is simply the inherent contrast reduced by the atmospheric transmittance (see Section 15.2.2., Contrast Transmittance) Cr=Coe~aR. (17-19) The apparent target luminance is L'T ~ ^atm-ave Pt Le + (1 — ^atm-ave) Lsky •> (17-20) or LT =e~aR(pT Le - Lsky)+Lsky . (17-21) As the range increases or as the scattering increases (equivalently, reducing the meteorological range, the apparent target luminance approaches Lsky. 17.5. SKY BACKGROUND Normally, the space is very cold with an effective temperature of about 20 К. If the atmospheric transmission is high, the sky will appear cold. As the transmittance decreases, the path radiance increases and the sky appears warmer. Thus, aircraft high in the sky may be against a 20 К background. The same aircraft, when near the horizon, may be against an effective 293 К background. Extensive graphs on sky radiance can be found12 in The Infrared and Electro- Optical Systems Handbook.
17.6. ACTIVE TARGETS Active targets produce heat by fuel combustion and friction. The target signature of a vehicle depends upon its operational state: off, idle, or exercised. For passive targets (off state), the temperature will depend upon the absorption at the solar wavelengths and upon the emissivity in the infrared where it re-radiates the energy. 17.6.1. FUEL COMBUSTION Fuel related heat sources occur whenever the engine is operated and is nearly independent of vehicle motion. If the engine is water cooled, the engine compartment temperature is usually below 100° C. If heat is piped into the passenger compartment for personnel heating, then that too will appear warm. Because of heat transfer, the engine compartment does not appear as a well-defined area but as a blob with a diffuse edge as the heat dissipates. Engine mufflers and exhaust pipe temperatures run quite high. These heated areas can be seen at very long distances. However, these areas are localized and therefore may not be oriented toward the imaging system. Consider, for example, the thermal image of a car. The engine compartment and grill will be clearly visible from the front whereas the rear view may provide only a small heated exhaust pipe. 17.6.2. FRICTIONAL HEAT Frictional heat is only generated when the vehicle is in motion. The heat is less intense than that created by the engine. Wheeled vehicles generate heat in the tires, shock absorbers, drive shafts, transmissions, axles, and differentials. For armored vehicles, tracks, road wheels, drive sprockets, support rollers, and shock absorbers are the frictionally heated features. Frictionally heated cues differentiate wheeled vehicles from tracked vehicles. If the vehicle is moving rapidly or if there is a large wind, both fuel related and friction related temperature gradients may be reduced. If equipped with weapons, the gun tube can be significantly hot after firing. For high-speed aircraft, aerodynamic heating also provides a signature. 17.7. TARGET SIGNATURE MODELING The infrared signature of a target is an integral part of its environment. For an aircraft (Figure 17-8) it includes the exhaust plume, scattered and reflected radiation (earthshine, sunshine, skyshine), internal heat sources, and aerodynamic
heating. Depending upon the viewing angle and background, the wings and fuselage may appear either warmer or colder than the background. The engines, of course, are always hotter than the background. Sky Emission From Warm Spots Reflected Sky/Cloud > Radiation Reflected Sunlight -► Reflected Earthshine Earthshine Figure 17-8. The target signature cannot be separated from the environment. Earthshine, skyshine, sunshine, and cloudshine affect the apparent target temperature. Various models exist to predict target signatures such as PRISM14 (Physically Reasonable infrared Signature Model) and SPIRITS15 (Spectral Infrared Imaging of Targets and Scenes). PRISM is used for ground targets and SPIRITS is a faceted model for aircraft. These models provide detailed spectral maps of target radiance with and without atmospheric transmittance and path radiance. They have been validated, qualitatively, with actual field tests. Conant and LeCompte provide16 the overall methodology to model targets. Accetta17 describes target signatures, background and atmospheric phenomenology. With the inability to characterize complicated heat generation effects, widely varying environmental effects, and variations in target surface conditions, the assumed AT may be off by a factor of ten from the actual value (0.1 versus 1, 0.5 versus 5). The results of any range performance calculation should not be construed as absolute values. Rather, it provides range values that are appropriate for comparative analyses.
17.8. THERMAL STRUCTURE METRICS Active targets with a distribution of temperatures can be detected, recognized, and identified even if the area-weighted AT is zero. New metrics attempt to describe the eye's capability to exploit these spatial features. Each metric uniquely combines the target/background mean temperature and standard deviation and to produce a modified AT. Some metrics include the number of pixels on the target and in the immediate background. As an example ^modified = A7”?- - )2 + (<7Г - )2 (17-22) When the target and background standard deviations, <rr and trB ,are zero, the metric reduces to the area-weighted AT. When the area-weighted AT is zero, a modified AT is assigned to the thermal structure (which depends upon the standard deviations). Gerhart et. al. evaluated1* nine different modified AT formalisms. While the new metrics appear better than the area-weighted AT, they do not consistently calculate target detectibility. Gerhart et. al. stated: This analysis indicates that target/background scene descriptions using simple average parameters such as the mean and standard deviation are not sufficient for characterizing imaging sensor performance against targets 'with internal texture and contrast gradients in background clutter. The ability to detect a target decreases as the background clutter increases. The modified AT approach considers background variations only near the target. Clutter metrics have been developed when global clutter is present.19,20 Schmieder and Weathersby21 suggested changing the target discrimination criterion (discussed in Section 20.1.4. Clutter). It is up to the analyst whether to incorporate clutter as part of the target signature or to increase the difficulty of perceiving the target by increasing the observer's threshold. However, the area- weighted AT has been used since 1975 and new metrics are accepted slowly. It would appear that changing the discrimination level would be appropriate at this juncture. 17.9. REFERENCES 1. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, pg. 2, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
2. J. G. Vinson, R. G. Driggers, and R. Deep, "Techniques and Errors for Apparent Temperature Calculations," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing IX, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceeding Vol. 3377, pp. 2-10 (1998). 3. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P Obert, R J. Bergemann, T. W Cassidy, and J M. Swenson, 'Night Vision laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, pg. 3, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975). 4. M. Friedman, D. Tomkinson, L. Scott, B. O'Kane, and J. D'Agostino, "Standard Night Vision Thermal Modeling Parameters," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 204-212 (1992). 5. A. J. LaRocca, "Artificial Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed. pp. 108-127. This is Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 6. D. Kryskowski and G. H. Suits, "Natural Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed. pp. 151- 157 and 230-285. This is Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 7. F. A. Resell, "Characterization of the Thermal Scene," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F. A. Resell and G. Harvey, eds., pg. 16, NRL Report #8311, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 8. J. A. D'Agostino, "The SPACE Signature Model: Principles and Applications," in Infrared Image Processing and Enhancement, M. Weathersby, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 781, pp. 2-9 (1987). 9. R. H. Munis and S. J. Marshall, "Emittance: A Little Understood Image Deception in Thermal Imaging Applications," m Image Quality: an Overview, E. Granger, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 549, pp. 72-78 (1985). 10. B. McClean and N. Fontana, "The Effect of Coating Properties on Contrast Radiance of Camouflage and Uncamouflaged Tactical Equipment in the 8 - 12 Micron Region," in Optical, Infrared, and Millimeter Wave Propagation Engineering, N. S. Kopeika and W. В Miller, eds. SPIE Proceedings Vol. 926, pp. 122-129 (1988). 11. W. Watkins, "Environmental Bugs Invade EO Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and TestingIV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceeding Vol. 1969, pp. 42-53 (1993). 12. D. Kryskowski and G. FI. Suits, "Natural Sources," in Sources of Radiation, G. J. Zissis, ed., pp. 139-316. This is Volume 1 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 13. L. Levi, Applied Optics, pp. 118-124, Wiley and Sons (1980). 14. W. R. Reynolds, "Physically Reasonable infrared Signature Model," Keweenaw Research Center, Michigan Technological University, Houghton, MI 49931. 15. W. T. Kreiss, A. Tchoubineh, and W. A. Lanich, "Model for Infrared Sensor Performance Evaluation: Applications and Results," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11) pp. 1797-1803 (1991). 16. J. A. Conant and M. A. LeCompte, "Signature Prediction and Modeling," in Electro-Optical Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, pp. 301-342. This is Volume 4 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 17. J. S. Accetta, "Infrared Search and Track Systems," in Passive Electro-Optical Systems, S B. Campana, ed., pp. 219-290. This is Volume 5 of The Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 18 G. R. Gerhart, T. Meitzler, E. J. Sohn, and H. Choe, "The Evaluation of AT Using Statistical Characteristics of the Target and Background," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling, and Testing IV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 11-20 (1993).
19. J. D'Agostino, W. Lawson, and D. Wilson, "Concepts for Search and Detection Model Improvements," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis. Modeling, and Testing VIII, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3063, pp. 14-22 (1997). 20. S. R. Rotmanm. G. Tidhar, and M. L. Kowalczyk, "Clutter Metrics for Target Detection Systems," IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, Vol. AES-30(l), pp. 81-91 (1994). 21. D. E. Schmieder and M. R. Weathersby, "Detection Performance in Clutter with Variable Resolution," IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, Vol. AES-19(4), pp. 622-630 (1983). EXERCISES 1. For the two curves shown in Figure 17-5, what is the percentage of time that the detection range is greater than 5 km? What is the percentage of time that the detection range is greater than 10 km? 2. Estimate the average AT (absolute value) for the diurnal cycle shown in Figure 17-4? Why should you use the absolute value? 3. For a sensitivity limited system, plot detection range (SNR = 1) as a function of AT. Let Tatm.ave - 0.80/km, NEDT = 0.25° C. Assume STm(lx = 10° C. If the DAS is 0.1 mrad and the target size is 1 meter, what is the range according to the resolution back-of-the-envelope approximation? Estimate the actual system response. 4. Table 15-2 states that for a clear day, the meteorological range varies from 10 km to 20 km. Plot C,JCO (Equation 17-19) as a function of range for the two meteorological ranges. Assume the background reflectance is 50%. Does the International Visibility Code provide adequate detail to accurately calculate the received contrast? 5. Plot £?/£<, (Equation 17-15) as a function of range for a clear day for Rvis = 10 km and Rvis = 20 km. Let the target reflectance be 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, and 0.4. Estimate the ranges at which the target can be detected. 6. Discuss the merits of the modified thermal structure metric (Equation 17-22).
18 SENSITIVITY and NOISE Sensitivity suggests something about the lowest signal that can be detected. It is the input signal that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of unity. It is only one of many performance parameters used to describe system performance. Sensitivity is not related to resolution. Depending upon the application, a system may be sensitivity-limited, resolution-limited, or some intermediate combination. NEDT is the smallest measurable signal produced by a large target (extended source). NEDT is also called noise equivalent temperature (NET) and noise equivalent temperature differential (NETD). For point source detection, the lowest measurable signal is the noise equivalent irradiance (NEI) or, equivalently, the noise equivalent flux density (NEFD). These laboratory metrics are measured in rms units but the units are seldom used. Similarly, the terms difference or differential are often omitted since it is understood that the system noise is referred to a differential temperature. The NEDT and NEFD are excellent diagnostic tools for production testing to verify performance. They are poor system-to-system comparison parameters and should be used cautiously when comparing systems built to different designs. This is so because they are a function of spectral responsivity and the noise equivalent bandwidth. Historically, only photon detectors had sufficient response to be used in high-resolution, low-noise infrared imaging systems. As a result, these detectors have been analyzed in detail and most performance equations used today are based upon photon detector characteristics. Fixed pattern noise (nonuniformity) has received significant attention in recent years. Its effect on an observer's ability to perceive targets is not well understood. However, its existence cannot be ignored since it may be a dominant noise source in multi-element arrays. FPN is not caused by a single detector. It occurs when different detectors in an array have different responsivities or if the amplifiers have different gains and offsets. The magnitude of each noise must be quantified and its effect on system performance must be understood. Noise sources may be a function of the detector temperature and bias voltage. Predicted system performance may deviate significantly from actual performance if (a) a non-optimum detector temperature is used, (b) non-optimum bias, or (c) significant 1/f noise or other noise is present. There is a myriad of factors involved in system optimization. It is essential to
Sensitivity and noise 321 understand what limits the system performance so that intelligent improvements are made. Many books1'5 have been written on detector characterization and noise sources. Noise modeling6'10 for staring arrays depends upon the particular readout circuitry employed: source follower, direct injection, buffered direct injection, or capacitance transimpedance amplifier. These noise sources are of interest to the multiplexer designer and may be added to a system model as appropriate. For system analysis, it may be sufficient to treat the readout noise as a single quantity. The detector/mux manufacturer usually provides this value. The noise sources associated with detectors operating in the visible region can be found in references 6 through 8. Noise sources may be separated into three categories for modeling purposes: "Standard” noise sources These are sources that can be described mathematically in closed- form and are found in most textbooks. These include photon and Johnson noise. Quantifiable noise sources These are sources whose precise values are unknown. They include 1/f and fixed pattern noise, amplifier noise, and mux noise. The exact parameters may be obtained from the manufacturer or may be obtained experimentally. Unique noise sources These are sources that cannot be described by simple statistical equations. They include microphonics and transitory effects. Although not a noise source, it may include nonlinear digital image processing, nonlinear phase shift effects, and aliased signal. In principle, all noise sources, except random noise, can be eliminated or at least be reduced below a measurable value. When random noise is due solely to the random events associated with photon detection, the system is said to have background limited performance (BLIP). Thermal imaging systems can operate in the BLIP mode. Since essentially no background photons exist in the visible region. Visible sensors are amplifier noise or mux noise limited. This chapter discusses photon noise, Johnson noise, dark current noise, fixed pattern noise, and mux noise in infrared detectors. Other noise sources are included in the three-dimensional noise model (discussed in Section 19.1., Three- dimensional Noise Model). Quantifying these sources represents a challenge to the system analyst.
322 Electro-optical imaging system performance 18.1. SCANNING ARRAYS (ANALOG SYSTEM) The rms detector noise current per unit bandwidth is (18-1) For background limited (BLIP) operation, (iphotof) is the dominant noise source. For low background applications (e.g., space-based systems), Johnson noise may become the dominant noise source. The noise associated with the electronics, {iantf), depends upon its design. Although 1/f noise is present in scanning systems, it can be minimized with AC coupling. If appropriate, 1/f noise1,2,3 can be added. The total noise current is % = ГПК ~ amPS ’ (18-2) where Sfe is the noise equivalent bandwidth (NEBW). Since noise occurs in the electrical portion of an imaging system, the NEBW is an electrical bandwidth with units of Hertz. Although FPN is associated with staring arrays, it also occurs in scanning arrays that consists of more than one detector element in the cross scan direction. 1/f noise may appear as streaks in scanning systems.8,11 18.1.1. NOISE EQUIVALENT BANDWIDTH When modified by electronic subsystems, the total system noise power is co р(Л)|^(Л)Г#е, 0 (18-3) where Stff) is the noise power spectral density (NPSD) from all sources and H(/c) is the frequency response of the system electronics. Electronic circuitry designers use It is identical to the MTF. The noise equivalent bandwidth is that bandwidth with unity value that provides the same total noise power. Assuming the noise is white over the spectral region of interest [£(4)=^], the NEBW (FLIR92 ARG-33) is
р(Л)|я(Л)|2#е, NEBW = \fe = -5--------------. (18-4) Figure 18-1 illustrates the relationship between the actual system response and the NEBW. The area under both curves is equal. The NEBW applies only to those noise sources that are white and cannot be applied to 1/f noise. Although common usage has resulted in noise bandwidth, it is understood that it is a power equivalency. A word of caution: the frequencies present may be much higher than those suggested by the noise equivalent bandwidth (see Figure 18-1). The highest frequency present must be considered when analyzing a system. NORMALIZED ELECTRICAL FREQUENCY Figure 18-1. Noise equivalent bandwidth (NEBW). The system contains a single-pole circuit whose 3 dB frequency has been normalized to unity (f3dB= 1). The NEDT was originally a measure of detector sensitivity. To match the remaining circuitry, a single-pole circuit was added (18-5) Using Equation 18-4, the NEBW is
For common module systems, f3(Ui was matched to the detector dwell time and it was called the reference frequency, characteristic frequency, or fo (pronounced/^ naught) (18-7) As a result, the reference equivalent bandwidth was reported12,13 as ДАref 71 1 2 2^ (18-8) For sampled data systems, the noise bandwidth is the smaller of (a) the noise equivalent bandwidth of the analog signal before sampling or (b) Nyquist frequency. For staring arrays, the NEBW is ДАе = 1 ^^int (18-9) where tint is the integration time or stare time. 18.1.2. PHOTON NOISE The photocurrent is A * photon ~ А/ . A (18-10) The noise in photoconductors is caused by fluctuations in generation rate and recombination rates The rms noise current per unit bandwidth is l PC-photon 2GJ qiphoton (18-11) where G is the photoconductive gain. If a photovoltaic device is used, the noise current per unit bandwidth is l PV-photon #9 I photon (18-12)
18.1.3. JOHNSON NOISE Johnson noise is caused by the random motion of charged carriers in a resistive element. As the temperature increases, the mean kinetic energy of the carriers increases yielding an increased noise current. The noise current per unit bandwidth is I Johnson (18-13) where Reff is the resistance seen be the detector and Teff is the temperature of Reff. For two resistors in parallel at temperature 7\ and T2 lJohnson < ^2 > (18-14) 18.1.4. AMPLIFIER NOISE The value of the amplifier noise current is usually provided by the manufacturer. Since the manufacturer has no knowledge of how the device will be used, the noise current per unit bandwidth, <iam>, is provided. The total noise current is (18-15) 18.2. STARING ARRAYS For staring array analysis, it is customary to specify all noise sources as equivalent electrons at the output of the detector. Staring arrays tend to use photodiodes or photovoltaic elements. These systems typically have fixed pattern noise (FPN) and multiplexer (mux) or readout noise. For photovoltaic devices
Both photoelectrons and dark current contribute to shot noise. Due to the discrete nature of electrons, the electron noise appears to follow Poisson statistics. With Poisson statistics, the variance is equal to the mean shot / № photon j №dark ) photon + ^dark ' (18-17) 1/f and kTC noise in staring arrays can be minimized with double correlated sampling. As necessary, 1/f noise and Johnson noise can be added to Equation 18- 16. 18.2.1. PHOTON NOISE The calculation of the number of photons from the optics, cold shield, housing, and scene use the same equations as before. Recall that Rq (Я) Eq (Л, T)tint = Re (Я) Ee (Л, T). (18-18) With this substitution, Equation 18-10 provides the number of photoelectrons. 18.2.2. DARK CURRENT For photovoltaic devices, the dark current is composed of two opposing currents Q ^bias idark=Ioe kT -Io, (18-19) where Io is the reverse bias saturation current. Differentiating, setting the bias voltage to zero and defining (di/dV)'x as the dynamic impedance, Ro (pronounced R-naughf), provides Ro ьт_ qi0 (18-20) Although the dark current is composed of two opposing currents, the noise powers are additive. When referring the shot noise caused by dark current to electrons, the noise variance is .2 ; tint - ndark / ndark ‘dark ' q (7 ^bius e kT +1 о ~ л о tint q
If the voltage bias is zero, ^dark ~ ndark 2kT R0<i2 hnt • (18-22) This expression resembles a Johnson noise term. However, it is the shot noise caused by two independent current sources. The integration can be any value with a maximum value of the frame time. However, to avoid saturating the charge wells, the actual integration time may be as short as 1 ms. For Schottky barrier diodes at temperature Td, the theoretical reverse dark current (saturation current) in amperes is д&в hark = AT, Ade kr- , (18-23) where A* is the effective Richardson emission constant for holes in p-type silicon (approximately 32 A cm’2 K2) and Фв is the barrier height. Since actual performance deviates from theoretical predictions, Pellegrini suggested14 a slightly different relationship for the reverse saturation current. Under reverse bias conditions, the barrier is lowered by АФВ ^(фд-ДФд) • _ л * ПГ 2 j к T.i I dark ~ A ^d ^d^ The electron noise variance is calculated the dark current: q(Fb лфв) n2 \ = n = AT2 A p kTlt *int ^dark / 'adark d "Fl" ’ q (18-24) (18-25) 18.2.3. FIXED PATTERN NOISE Fixed pattern noise refers to any pattern that does not change signifi- cantly from frame-to-frame. There are four known sources of spatial noise: detector responsivity nonlinearities, variations in detector spectral response, detector 1/f noise, and array 1/f noise.1516 Detector responsivity and spectral response usually do not change with time and the manifestation of the variation will be a pattern that rarely changes. However, if the detector temperature changes, the responsivity also changes. 1/f noise is a low frequency phenomenon that changes slowly with time. Since each detector has different 1/f-noise characteris- tics, these low frequency components appear as different DC offsets. The different offsets appear as fixed pattern noise. Since each detector is independent, the 1/f
drift will be different and the "fixed" pattern will change with time. A completely random nonuniform spatial pattern changes slowly with time and this spatial noise increases monotonically as a function of time after normalization. Although 1/f noise is low frequency temporal noise, its appearance depends upon the system design and operation. FPN tends to be small for sensors operating in the visible. This is a direct result of a mature manufacturing technology. Variations in spectral response are very difficult to describe mathematically and any correction to this is less effective. Spectral response mismatch occurs when the cutoff wavelengths of the detectors are different. This case is not considered here. Fixed pattern noise may be additive or multiplicative. These are also called signal-independent and signal-dependent respectively. For arrays with different dark currents, the noise powers are additive. Arrays with different responsivities produce multiplicative noise. For mathematical convenience, fixed pattern noise is expressed as a fraction of the total number of charge carriers. If U is the fixed pattern ratio or nonuniformity, then {nFPNphoton . (18-26) 18.2.4. MULTIPLEXER NOISE Staring array multiplexers are complicated. The noise components may include quantization noise, kTC noise, amplifier noise, injection efficiency, and charge transfer inefficiency. Correlated double sampling techniques can minimize some noise sources. The functional form of these noise sources can be found in the literature.2'10 For system modeling purposes, the mux noise power is considered as a fixed value, {ппш}\ which is supplied by the manufacturer. {nmux) is sometimes called the noise floor. 18.3. DETECTOR RESPONSIVITY Responsivity modeling is generic to each specific type of detector. Most figures of merit (specific detectivity and NEDT) are based upon the spectral response and operation of the classical semiconductors. The novel semiconductors include the Schottky barrier diode and quantum well detector. The number of articles17'20 describing quantum well physics and noise modeling is increasing daily. These technologies are evolving and the dominant noise sources may change as the technology matures.
Sensitivity and noise 329 Advances in uncooled technology have created a large number of thermal detector systems. Pyroelectric and microbolometer detectors fall into this category. Their fundamental noise sources can be found in the literature.1*5 Rogalski21,22 presented a snapshot of infrared detector technology as of early 1994. The classical semiconductor’s responsivity, l?e(2), has units of amp/watt. In Chapter 3, Radiometry, the detector responsivity, 7?/2), was given in volts/watt. The responsivities are related by the load resistor: Л/2) = Re(X)RIoad. Since staring arrays collect electrons, it more convenient to discuss the quantum efficiency. Re(X) can be converted into electrons/photon by Rqw = nW ~ReW , e Z (18-27) where Rq(X) is simply the spectral quantum efficiency and is symbolically represented as 7/(2) in many texts. When the wavelength is measured in micrometers, z (18-28) 18.3.1. CLASSICAL SEMICONDUCTORS For ideal photon detectors the spectral responsivity (in amps/watt) is Re (л) = — Rp when 2 < 2p (л) = 0 elsewhere , (18-29) where Rp is the peak responsivity and Ap is the wavelength at which Rp occurs. However, real photon detectors do not have an abrupt transition and tend to follow Re U) = — Rn when 2 < 2„ C \ z И fs лр зГ ' 4 ~Лр (18-30) when Лp < Л< Лр +1.1547 (Лс - Лр) Re (Л) = 0 when Л>Лр +1.1547 (2С - Лр )
where Xc is the wavelength at which the responsivity drops to 50% of its maximum value and is sometimes called the cutoff wavelength. 18.3.2. NOVEL SEMICONDUCTORS While the responsivity of classical semiconductors increases with wavelength, it decreases with Schottky barrier diodes (SBDs). The responsivity in amps/watt is яг(я)=сД1-2_ 4 7 (18-31) where Cs is the Schottky emission constant in eV1, Лс = 1.24/Фв and Фв is the barrier height. For typical PtSi SBDs, Фв ~ 0.22 eV and Cs « 0.20 eV1. As a decreasing function, the quantupi efficiency is approximately 1% at 4 pm and zero at the cutoff (2C~ 5.6 pm). The responsivity of quantum well detectors can be approximated by a Gaussian distribution Re(^)=Rp exP -41n2 (18-32) where is the full width of the responsivity curve at half-maximum (FWHM). The peak wavelength ranges from 8 to 10 pm for LWIR devices. The width, , is typically 1 to 1.5 pm. The peak responsivity depends upon the device but can vary from 0.5 to 2 amps/watt. Typically, cold filters limit the spectral response from ±Л|Р to ±3 . 18.3.3. THERMAL DETECTORS Thermal detectors are broad band detectors with no spectral features. They are coated to increases the absorptance. Cold filters limit the spectral response.
18.4. SPECIFIC DETECTIVITY The specific detectivity, D* (pronounced dee-star\ is a figure-of-merit that combines responsivity with detector noise. D* applies only to detectors used for infrared imaging systems. It is normalized to unit bandwidth Dbb ~ A We NEP (18-34) where <isy> is the noise current per unit bandwidth. The units of D* are also called Jones to indicate that the meaning of D* is the same as that defined by Jones in 1953. The subscript BB indicates that it is referenced to an ideal blackbody. The noise equivalent power (NEP) depends upon the detector temperature and bias. When experimentally obtaining the responsivity, RBB , the current difference, A/syv , produced by the blackbody source and the background is measured. This results in a measured specific detectivity that should be called the incremental specific detectivity. While the specific detectivity is calculated from measured data, the following provides the theoretical equations. 18.4.1. BLIP When only {iphoto^) is used, D*BB has reached the theoretical maximum and the detector is operating in background-limited (BLIP) mode. Classical photodiodes (photovoltaic devices) The photovoltaic D* is Dpv-BLip 2 I г/ /tc^2Eq ’ (18-35) where Eq is the total integrated photon flux density incidant onto the detector. Eq = jEq(2,Te)M. A (18-36) The limits of integration depend upon the spectral response. For the detector only, = 0 and = Л •
Classical photoconductors Photoconductors have generation-recombination noise so that the D* is lower Dpc-BLIP (18-37) SPRITE A SPRITE detector is a long filament of photoconductive HgCdTe with typical dimensions of dx = 750 pm by dy = 60 pm. SPRITES inherently offer signal integration and can be equated to an equivalent number of TDI elements N(l Nd = 2sr , (18-38) where т is the holes lifetime (typically 2 ps) and 5 is the "pixel" scan velocity (number of pixels of dimension dy*dy scanned per second). typically ranges from 8 to 15. The "enhanced" D* is23,24 Dsprite-blip - \ Nd DPC - V2s т DPC , (18-39) Schottky barrier diodes SBD spectral response is quite different from the other detectors. As a result, it is not characterized by an equivalent D*. Quantum wells For quantum wells25 Dqwbup = 1.1x106 exp he (18-40) 2 I rj МсуЁ^’ This suggests that the detector temperature should be very low to maximize D*. In fact, until recently quantum wells were operated at 55K
Thermal detectors D* was originally derived for a background limited case where the noise is proportional to the detector area. While these conditions do not exist in a thermal detector, it does provide a comparison with the other devices26 ^THERMAL = 2.8xX016 (18-41) where a is the absorption coefficient. With a maximum value of a = 1, and T = 300K, D* = 1.8xlO10 Jones. 18.4.2. JOHNSON NOISE LIMITED D*blip increases as the background radiance approaches zero (low temperature background). In space or astronomical applications where the background is low, Johnson noise becomes the limit (Johnson-noise-limited operation or JOLI). Dpvjou (18-42) 2hc \ kT ’ where Ro is the diode resistance. For photoconductive devices BpC-JOLI qA/r]G 2hc ReffAd kTeff (18-43) Here, the load resistance determines the theoretical limit. 18.4.3. D*BB to D\ CONVERSION Although detectors are specified byD*BB, the spectral specific detectivity [Zf (/)] is required for the NEDT calculation. Therefore, it is worthwhile to review the measurement so that D*BB can be converted to D*(A). A chopper is placed in front of a detector that is viewing a hot blackbody. It is typically set at 500 К to insure that sufficient flux is available. The background is the temperature of the chopper (usually assumed to be 300 K). The current difference produced the blackbody and the background is measured. Using the Stefan-Boltzmann relationship, a flux difference is calculated even though the detector is band-limited. The flux difference incident onto the detector is
&Ф = кСГ? -Тв) = к (5004 -3004) , (18-44) where Ar is a proportionality constant that depends upon the experimental configuration and includes the Stefan-Boltzmann constant. RBB = А//АФ where Az is the current produced by the difference between the source and the background radiation. Experimentally, Gn , M , Ad , and A£ are measured and then D*BB is calculated.. The spectral responsivity and spectral specific detectivity have the same functional form which are represented as ReW = Rp Fdet(A) and = Dp Fdet(A) , (18-45) where D* is the peak value of Z>* which occurs at Xp. The function Fdet(X) is given by Equation 18-29 or Equation 18-30. The differential current is M = к р?е(Л)[ме(Л,Тт)- Mе(Л,Тв)]аЯ = kRBB АФ . (18-46) А Then ^>500=-----/-----Г Гл((>1)[^а,500)-Ме(Л,300)рЛ (18-47) ст(500 -3004)/ Zj or у &вв ~^5оо • (18-48) The proportionality constant, к500, is unique to the detector spectral response. 18.4.4. D*300 Occasionally, back-of-the-envelope calculations use D*M. It is impossible to use 300K as a target because there would be no temperature difference between the target and the background. So a temperature slightly higher is selected (301 K). Since D*p does not change, D* Dp 301 <т(3014 -3004) z2 jFrfrf(2)[Me(Z,301)-Me(2,300)]z/2. (18-49) A
Then ^301 ~^500 A Ггг,еДЛ)[Ме(Л,301)-Ме(Л,300)]<М. 5004-3004 л,________________________________ 3014-3004 \ I Fda W\Me U,500)- Me (Л ,300)]</A A (18-50) For small mcrements, the first term of the series expansion can be used (ГВ+ДГ)4-ТВ4«4ГВ3ДТ, (18-51) and Ме(Л,Тв + ЬТ)-Ме(Л,Тв) аме(л,тв) дТ (18-52) дг. Assuming . . 5004-3004 ” ” 4<3«0>) y.,tA'ww>^ J оТ А fFdet (Л)[^е (Л,500)-Ме (Л,300)]М (18-53) 18.5. REAL SYSTEMS Photons may originate27 from a variety of sources: background, path radiance, optics, warm filters, cold filter, and the housing (Figure 18-2). For differential signal considerations, only the background is considered. The remainder adds a veiling glare to the scene and contributes to noise. Assuming circular apertures, Let 0sys be the full planar angle subtended by the optical system and 0CS be the full planar angle subtended by the cold shield (see Appendix, f-number). The photocurrent from the background, optics, housing, and cold shield are 4-7
Figure 18-2. Representative optical layout with a cold shield that is a non-vignetting field stop. The cold shield efficiency may be less than 100%. If the cold shield is isolated from the cooler, it may be at an elevated temperature. A warm filter (not shown) can also contribute to photon noise. 2r Me(A,Toptics) Ad ionics = fow rp , (18-55) I housing sin2 cs 2 -sin2 sys 2 hou sin g ) Ad dh if ®cs > 6Sys (18-56) I housing 0 if @cs — @sys > and ^cs 1- sin2 A jj(e(A)Me(A Tcs)AddX. (18-57) МХЛТ’в) is the total exitance that appears to emanate from the background. It includes the background self-emission, reflections, and path radiance. The optics, housing, and cold shield are at temperatures Toptics, Thousins, and Tcs, respectively. The housing and cold shield are opaque objects with unity emittance. For the optics, £optics =1-Toptics. The total photocurrent is l photon background + optics housing Es ‘ (18-58)
For 100% cold shield efficiency (0sys = 0СХ), the detector cannot sense radiation from the housing. For most systems, Tcs is small and then /„can be neglected. In an isothermal environment, Toptics ~ TB and then photon I scene +‘optics = * 4F /Ц (18-59) For a detector assembly, the detector will have a cold filter that restricts the response to [Zj, z2], Clearly, as the spectral bandwidth decreases, D* increases. With all detectors D* can be further increased by reducing the solid angle subtended by the detector. The cold shield design and location define this angle. If the full planar angle is 0, then ^(0) = (18-60) D* increases with decreasing cold shield angle (usually specified as an equivalent f-number). The maximum value of the angle is л rad and the equation reduces to Equation 18-34. 18.6. SYSTEM SNR The SNR is traditionally given as SNR = = j (noise sources) (18-61) л 18.6.1 SCANNING SYSTEMS For scanning systems, the background provides a large uninformative signal. Instead the infrared community uses a differential SNR (which is erroneously called the SNR) ASNR = target - background (noise sources ) ,2
Keeping with the common parlance, the differential SNR will hereafter be simply called the SNR. To maintain dimensionality, the differential signal (see Appendix, f-number) is also measured in amperes A ^sys = \ReWWe(^n)-Me(A,TB)]Toptics(A)dA , (18-63) 4F л and the SNR is A \ JRe (Л)[Ме (A, TT)-Me(A, TB )]roptics (A) dA SNR =-----. (18-64) loo p(/e)|H(/e)|2#e> I о All the noise currents have been consolidated into an effective NPSD ;2 ’'photon + v Johnson (18-65) 18.6.2 . STARING SYSTEMS The target signal is A У n signal = j J R<1 6^-) Mq П Г optics (^) hnt • (18-66) 4F i The SNR is SNR = П signal (18-67) Many authors describe a single pixel signal-to-noise ratio (in the absence of dark current) as SNRpixei = П photon
With multiplicative FPN, the FPN will be different for the (extended) target and the background. nave is the average of the target and background number of electrons. For small ATs, na„« ntadlgralml and им„,„„» nbacksmnd. Note that the denominator is a "mixed" noise term. Each detector produces a single datum for each frame. The shot noise is created within a single pixel but the FPN is result of an ensemble of detectors. Many frames of data provide shot noise. For low photon flux, the photon noise will dominate causing the SNR to be approximately the square root of electron number. For high photon fluxes, SNRpixel rolls off with uniformity and asymptotes to MU. Figure 18-3 illustrates the (differential) SNR as a function of nonuniformity. This figure provides guidance for what the desired nonuniformity should be. With low nonuniformity, the back-of-the-envelope approximation suggests that SNR « AT/NEDT. The deviation from the true value (SNR= 25.3) and the approximation (SNR = 18,6) is caused by the nonlinear relationship between the number of photons and AT (See Section 3.2., AT Concept). Figure 18-3. Representative (differential) SNR as a function of (uncorrected) nonuniformity for a typical PtSi sensor. TB=273 K, XT= 1 К and NEDT= 0.054 K. Although the fixed noise pattern is labeled as fixed, it typically changes at a very slow rate. 1/f noise produces a slowly varying output signal that, if uncorrected, appears as additive fixed pattern noise. The amount of noise depends on the 1/f characteristics and the time the data are collected after the last correction has been made.28,29 If a system is corrected only once when it is turned on, the noise may slowly increase with time. Here, the measured noise will be a function of test time. 1/f noise may not be dominant in some arrays.
When the responsivities are nonlinear, the situation is more complicated. The amount of fixed pattern noise depends upon the amount of nonlinearity that exists between the detector responsivities. It is a mmimum at the calibration points but can increase elsewhere.30,3’ Figure 18-3 illustrates BLIP limited NEDT and the residual FPN after two-point correction. If correction were perfect for all inputs, there would be no residual FPN. This nonlinear effect is very difficult to model. Many authors present graphs stating that it represents the NEDT after nonuniformity correction. Figure 18-4 illustrates that the detector nonlinearities produce residual FPN. In addition, hardware correction circuitry limitations also contribute to residual FPN. Therefore, any calculation that assumes a nonuniformity correction should include a factor, say 1.5, above the design correction. This new number is more representative of the actual situation and, in part, includes the nonlinearity exhibited in Figure 18-4. BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE (C) Figure 18-4. Representative BLIP limited (classical) NEDT and residual FPN with U = 0.25% and two-point correction. The amount of residual FPN depends upon the nonlinearity in detector responsivities, type of correction (i.e., one-point, two- point, etc.), and desired nonuniformity. (After reference 28). 18.7. NEDT In the SNR equation, photon noise is integrated over the detector solid angle (usually 2л) whereas the signal is limited by the optical transmittance and 6sys. Noise appears in the electronics and is integrated over the electrical frequencies of interest. The NEDT is the incremental temperature above the background that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of unity. The signal is limited optically from f to 22. For extended sources, the signal is not modified by the system MTF.
18.7.1. SCANNING SYSTEMS Solving the SNR for AT and calling is the NEDT provides loo 4F2 Jp(/e)|tf(A)|2C, ДТ = NEDTsys = —-----h----------------------. (] 8-69) A t/г ,^Me(A,TB) Ad I Toptics (”) j oT 2i The NEDT can be made arbitrarily small by reducing the NEBW. This led to the concept of using a "standard” bandwidth. A single-pole low pass filter was attached to the detector. The 3dB value was matched to the detector dwell time. For scanning common module systems, the reference equivalent bandwidth (Equation 18-8) is А/.с/=л/(4тг/). Rearranging terms, using the definition of D* and NEBW, and assuming white noise, S(fc) = So , provides the classical NEDT equation HEDTdasslail =-----------------------S----. (18-70) у A([ JD (>f) optics Л. and NEDTsys NEDTclassical . (18-71) Hait and Nemirovsky27 and Lloyd31 provide a variety of forms of the classical NEDT to illustrate the dependency upon the detector-angular-subtense, detector dwell time, etc.
18.7.2. STARING SYSTEMS For staring arrays, the noise is considered white over the region of interest. If the signal and noise are specified in electrons, then л \ *svs / NEDTstarins = j Aatint K(A)-------- (18-72) Long integration times improve the SNR or, equivalently, reduce the NEDT. For staring arrays, system noise is also a function of nonuniformity (Figure 18-5). As the background flux increases, multiplicative FPN also increases. Figure 18-6 illustrates the system noise for a representative PtSi sensor. Initially, the NEDT decreases as TB increases. At higher temperatures, the FPN starts to dominate and the overall noise increases. The integration can be any value with a maximum value of the frame time. However, to avoid saturating the charge wells, the actual integration time may be as short as 1 ms. Thus, the advantage of staring systems (assumed long integration time) over scanning systems (small dwell time) may not be as great as originally anticipated. Figure 18-5. System noise as a function of nonuniformity for a representative PtSi sensor. The background temperature is 273 K. The shape of the curve depends upon the background temperature.
Figure 18-6. Representative system noise as a function of background temperature. The PtSi nonuniformity is 0.0025 (0.25%). The shape of the curve depends upon the nonuniformity selected. 18.7.3. BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE Since the thermal derivative, ёМ/'дТ, depends on the background temperature, the NEDT is also a function of background temperature (Figure 18- 7). Because the value of the thermal derivative decrease with temperature, the NEDT increases with decreasing temperature. For MWIR systems, the NEDT approximately doubles when the temperature reaches freezing. This increased NEDT has a significant impact of range performance For serial scan systems, TDI will reduce the noise by the square root of the number of detector elements contributing to TDI NEDTsys NEDT TDI (18-73) Here, it is assumed that the detector elements have identical noise characteristics and responsivities.
BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE(K) Figure 18-7. NEDT as a function of background temperature for representative MWIR (InSb and PtSi) and LWIR (HgCdTe) sensors. The functional form of NEDT versus TB depends upon the magnitude of each noise source and the spectral responsivity. For this figure, FPN is zero. 18.7.4. BOOST Boost increases the noise equivalent bandwidth and, therefore, increases the NEDT. Since the noise has increased, the SNR for large targets is reduced. However, for a specific spatial frequency the SNR is SNRIJ)^ NT MTF (J) NEDT (18-74) If the boost circuit amplifies those spatial frequencies about /, then there appears to be an improvement in the SNR. While the performance models (discussed in Chapter 19) predict an increased range for specific targets, no data exits to substantiate this improvement. Boost will cosmetically improve high contrast imagery. 18.7.5. ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE The NEDT is a laboratory measure system sensitivity. The derivation assumes that the signal is available over the entire spectral bandwidth. But this is not true. The atmospheric transmittance modifies the signal. For sensitivity- limited systems
Mtr SNR ~ * atm-ave NEDT (18-75) Generally, the NEDT is calculated over the full spectral response, but the temperature differential at the entrance aperture is reduced by the spectral atmospheric transmittance. Some researchers32 created a modified NEDT that includes the atmospheric transmittance. Elowever, this approach is inconvenient in that the NEDT is a laboratory measure and should not be a variable depending upon atmospheric conditions. 18.8. MWIR VERSUS LWIR Based upon atmospheric transmittance, it was shown in Section 15.6., {MWIR versus LWIR) that for most environments the LWIR spectral region was preferred. The MWIR region was preferred when the absolute humidity was very high (e.g., a maritime environment). It was also stated that the system sensitivity had to be sufficiently high (low NEDT) to exploit the specific spectral band. However, the relative merits are functions of background temperature. The MWIR NEDT is very sensitive to the background temperature. Another reason for choosing the LWIR spectral region is that there is a larger number of photons available. This is a mixed blessing for focal plane arrays where fixed pattern noise is proportional to the number of photoelectrons. Since nonuniformity is a multiplicative factor, FPN will be greater in the LWIR band compared to the MWIR band. Figure 18-8 compares the theoretical NEDT for a MWIR PtSi sensor to an LWIR HgCdTe sensor. LWIR systems require better uniformity correction15 than equivalent PtSi systems. For a 300-K background, there are approximately 1500 times more photoelectrons generated by an LWIR HgCdTe detector compared to an MWIR PtSi sensor with identical optical systems. This is due to the difference in the photon flux and quantum efficiency. Thus, the LWIR systems need larger charge wells or the integration time must be proportionally reduced. Although staring arrays have the potential of using a full frame time, they may, in practice, use a much shorter integration time. The stare time (integration time) depends upon the charge well capacity and the detector quantum efficiency. For low quantum efficiency detectors such as the Schottky barrier devices, the stare time may be equal to a frame time. For high quantum efficiency detectors such as InSb or HgCdTe, the stare time may only be a fraction of a frame time to
insure that the charge well does not saturate. Stare time may also be reduced to minimize smearing caused by relative motion between the sensor and target. Microscan also requires a reduced stare time. The selection of MWIR or LWIR depends upon many factors. These include background temperature, atmospheric transmittance, system spectral responsivity, and noise sources within the system. The magnitude of the noise depends upon the integration time, amount of nonuniformity, optical transmittance, and cold shield efficiency. Which band is better? As both Johnson,32 and Findlay and Cutten33 said, It depends.... Figure 18-8. Comparison of PtSi (3 to 5.5 pm) and HgCdTe (8 to 12 pm) sensors as a function of nonuniformity. Hardware constraints tend to limit correction to U = 0.0002. The shape of the curves depends upon the background temperature, spectral responsivities, and integration time. 18.9. NEI As the source area approaches zero, the source becomes an ideal point source. Geometric optics predicts that the image size also will approach zero. However, diffraction and aberrations will limit the minimum image size. The differential system output, А/лтл, depends on the relative size of the optical blur diameter to the detector size. The ratio of detector area to the blur area is called the point visibility factor (PVF), blur efficiency, or ensquared power (see Section 3.1.3., Point Source). A common starting point in system design is to match the detector size to the optical blur diameter. For a diffraction-limited optical system, the Airy disk
contains only 83.9% of the total energy. Therefore, a circular detector centered on the Airy disk has a PVF of 0.839. The PVF approaches unity as the detector size increases. However, system resolution is lost and the ability to precisely locate the point source decreases. Figure 18-9 illustrates the PVF for a square detector centered on the blur diameter. Figure 18-9. Point visibility function as a function of detector size (in units of 2f!D). A slight plateau exists when the detector size is equal to the Airy disk size (2.442//D). Aberrations may reduce the MTF. (From reference 34). The PVF is subject to phasing effects.34 It is a maximum when the image is centered on the detector and a minimum when the blur circle center is between detectors. The minimum PVF depends upon the detector center-to-center spacing and the fill factor. For nearly all systems the PVF must be included in all calculations when the target is a point source. The PVF is a two-dimensional value given by fl1 PVF =— max . Ad ^TFoptics(fx9fy)MTFdetector(fx9fy)dfx dfy (18-76) As As approaches zero, it is appropriate to represent Le(l,4T)As by the source radiant intensity 7е(2/1Т)=Ze(2,Tr) -Ze(2,T/?) with units of watts-sr'-pm1. For point sources at a distance Rx from the system beWA° Ie(^’AT) PVFropltcs(A)^tm(A)dX . (18-77) ? Ri
The NEI is the irradiance (flux density) at the system aperture that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of one р(Л)|н(Л)|2</Л, NEI = —V------------------- Ao $Re(A)PVFropacs(A)dA A (18-78) As a simplification, assume that the atmospheric transmittance has no spectral features such that it can be represented as and that AJm,e is the spectrally weighted average irradiance. Then SNR- R ave atm-ave NEI R2 (18-79) No back-of-the-envelope approximation exits for estimating the detection range to a point source. When the SNR is one, the simplest form of the range equation is NEI = у ave atm-ave R2 (18-80) and this can only be solved iteratively. 18.10. IMAGE RECONSTRUCTION In scanning systems, the system MTFs operate on a serial data stream. For these systems, the NEDT is calculated from the horizontal MTFs. But image reconstruction can modify both the signal and noise characteristics. The most prevalent image reconstruction algorithm is line-to-line interpolation. Noise reduction algorithms include recursive filters and median filters. If N frames (or pixels) are averaged NEDT^ = NEDTsys (18-81)
18.10.1. LINE-TO-LINE INTERPOLATION Line-to-line interpolation is used to scale the number of infrared lines to the monitor requirements. For example, EMUX systems employing 180 detectors with 2:1 interlace, require the conversion of 360 infrared lines to 480 monitor lines. The interpolation algorithm usually is designed with signal fidelity in mind. However, interpolation also affects the noise. Figure 18-10 illustrates a geometric scheme that expands three lines to four (equivalently 360 to 480 lines). This method does not significantly degrade image quality. However, the noise powers are modified. Let <r2, tr3, crA, (JB, <jc, and (jv be the rms noise values for the three input lines and the four output lines, respectively. The output noise variances are given in Table 18-1. With this scheme, each line will have a different noise level and modeling is difficult when the noise values vary. If the interpolation scheme averages N lines and then replicates the lines, the NEDT is l/VTV smaller. While averaging reduces noise, it also reduces the MTF and image quality suffers. The appropriate line-to- line interpolation scheme is a balance between maintaining image quality and not adversely affecting the noise characteristics. Input (360 Lines) Output (480 Lines) Line 1 Line A = Line 1 Line 2 Line В = 1/4 (Line 1)+ 3/4 (Line 2) Line C = 1/2 (Line 2)+ 1/2 (Line 3) Line 3 Line D = 3/4 (Line 3)+ 1/4 (Line 4) Line 4 Line E = Line 4 Figure 18-10. Line-to-line interpolation. Four lines are created from three using a geometric approach.
Table 18-1 OUTPUT NOISE VARIANCES OUTPUT LINE NUMBER OUTPUT NOISE VARIANCE A 2 2 В 2 12^2 (5 » — (У i 4 (У 16 16 C 2 1 2 1 2 c = 4<T2+4<73 D 2 _ 9 2,1 2 <T £) —- СТ з H <T i 16 3 16 1 18.10.2. RECURSIVE and MEDIAN FILTERS Figure 18-11 illustrates a recursive filter that can be used for noise reduction. Here, the last frame of data is added to the current frame. For one pixel, the output is y„ = (1-К)х„_,+Ку„_1 , (18-82) Figure 18-11. Recursive filter. As the feed back multiplier К increases, more frames are integrated and the noise is reduced. Increasing К adversely affects image fidelity when image motion is present. In the steady state,yn approachesyn^. Thenyn^xnA and the filter appears to have little affect on the image intensity. However, the noise sources add in quadrature. When steady state is reached <t2 =(1-X)2O-2+jK2<t2 (18-83)
or .2 У 1-Кл 1 + К y (18-84) The recursive filter simulates a filter that averages N frames where 1 + K 1-K (18-85) As К increases, the averaging effect increases. However, as К increases, the previous frame is more heavily weighted and the ability to see image motion decreases. Median filters are useful for reduction of noise spikes (also called salt and pepper noise). A median filter rank-orders the data and its output is the median value of the data set. Median filters always use an odd number of inputs. The filter preserves edges if the target is more than one-half the filter width. For example, if a median filter operates on Nmeil pixels, the target must be at least (7V„Krf+l)/2 pixels wide to preserve the image. Any target less than (Nmed+1 )/2 pixels wide will be removed by the filter. Median filters are inappropriate for point source detection or where preserving detail is important. For one-dimensional filters, the output noise power is approximated36 by 2 _ 2 _ 67 & median \ ' Wmed+2) VJy (18-86) 18.11. SAMPLING AND ALIASING After a sampling process, the noise power spectral density is modified by aliasing. The NPSD is defined only up to the Nyquist frequency. For/e < fne, $ sampled (fe ) 2 °° \Hpost{fe )| ±f<+ °8'87) n=0 where Hpre(f^ is all the electronic MTFs up to the sampler and Hpost(Q represents the electronic MTFs after the sampler. Noise above the Nyquist frequency will be aliased down to the baseband (where/e<fne).
The total noise is not affected by aliasing sys (18-88) where Hsys(ff) = Hpre(ff)Hpost(ff). However, the NPSD has changed. Some of the noise has been aliased to the base band. 18.12. REFERENCES 1. D. G. Crowe, P. R. Norton, T. Limperis, and J. Mudar, "Detectors," in Electro-Optical Components, W. D. Rogatto, pp. 175-283. This is Volume 3 oiThe Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 2. J. D. Vincent, Fundamentals of Infrared Detector Operation and Testing, John Wiley, New York (1990). 3. E. L. Dereniak and D. G. Crowe, Optical Radiation Detectors, John Wiley, New York (1984). 4. A. Rogalski, Infrared Photon Detectors, SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1995). 5. E. L. Dereniak and G. D. Boreman, Infrared Detectors and Systems, John Wiley, New York (1996). 6. J. R. Janesick, T. Elliott, S. Collins, M. M. Blouke, and J. Freeman, "Scientific Charge-coupled Devices," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(8), pp. 692-714 (1987). 7. T. W. McCumin, L. C. Schooley, and G. R. Sims, "Charge-coupled Device Signal Processing Models and Comparisons," Journal of Electronic Imaging, Vol. 2(2), pp. 100-107 (1994). 8. M. D. Nelson, J. F. Johnson, and T. S. Lomheim, "General Noise Process in Hybrid Infrared Focal Plane Arrays," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11), pp. 1682-1700 (1991). 9. J. L. Vampola, "Readout Electronics for Infrared Sensors," in Electro-Optical Components, W. D. Rogatto, pp. 285-342. This is Volume 3 of The Infrared & Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 10. N. Bluzer and A. S. Jensen, "Current Readout on Infrared Detectors," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(3), pp. 241-248(1987). 11. H. V. Kennedy, "Modeling Noise in Thermal Imaging Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing IV, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1969, pp. 66-77 (1993). 12. J. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," US Army Electronics Command Report ECOM Report 7043, pg. 11, Ft. Monmouth NJ (1975). 13. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pg. 181, Plenum Press, New York (1975). 14. P. W. Pellegrini, "Range Calculations for Staring Schottky Barrier Sensors," Optical Engineering, Vol. 28(12), pp. 1288-1293 (1989). 15. J. M. Mooney, F. D. Shepherd, W. S. Ewing, J. E. Murguia, and J. Silverman, "Responsivity Nonuniformity Limited Performance of Infrared Staring Cameras," Optical Engineering, Vol. 28(11), pp. 1151-1161 (1989). 16. J. M. Mooney, "Effect of Spatial Noise on the Minimum Resolvable Temperature of a Staring Array," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(23), pp. 3324-3332, (1991).
17. L. J. Kozlowski, G. M. Williams, G. J. Sullivan, C. W. Farley, R. J. Anderson, J. Chen, D. T. Cheung, W. E. Tennant, and R. E. DeWames, "LWIR 128 x 128 GaAs/AlGaAs Multiple Quantum Well Hybrid Focal Plane Array," IEEE Transactions on Electron Devices, Vol. ED-38(5), pp. 1124- 1130(1991). 18. A. Zussman, B. F. Levine, and J. deJong, "Extended Wavelength X = 11-15 pm GaAs/AftGa^As Quantum-well Infrared Photodetectors," Journal of Applied Physics, Vol. 70(9), pp. 5101-5107 (1991). 19. B. F. Levine, A. Zussman, S. D. Gunapala, M. T. Asom. and W. S. Hobson, "Photoexcited Escape Probability, Optical Gain, and Noise in Quantum Well Infrared Photodetectors," Journal of Applied Physics, Vol. 72(9), pp 4429-4443 (1992). 20. A. Rogalski and K. Jozwikowski, "GaAs/AlGaAs Quantum Well Infrared Photoconductors versus HgCdTe Photodiodes for Long-wavelength Infrared Applications," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(5), pp. 1477-1484 (1994). 21. A. Rogalski, "New Trends in Infrared Detector Technology," Infrared Physics and Technology, Vol. 35(1), pp 1-21 (1994). 22. A. Rogalski, "New Trends in Semiconductor Infrared Detectors," Optical Engineering, Vol. 33(5), pp. 1395-1412(1994). 23. A. Campbell, С. T. Elliot, and A. M. White, "Optimization of SPRITE Detectors in Anamorphic Imaging Systems," Infrared Physics, Vol. 27(2), pp. 125-133 (1987). 24. С. T. Elliot, D. Day, and D. J. Wilson, "An Integrating Detector for Serial Scan Thermal Imaging Systems," Infrared Physics, Vol. 22(11), pp. 31-42 (1982). 25. A. Rogalski, Infrared Photon Detectors, page 589, SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1995). 26. E. L. Dereniak and G. D. Boreman, Infrared Detectors and Systems, page 401, John Wiley, New York (1996). 27. Y. Hait and Y. Nemirovsky, "Comparison of NEDT Performance of Staring and Partial-scanning Infrared Focal Plane Arrays," Infrared Physics, Vol. 29(6). pp. 971-984 (1989). 28. D. A. Scribner, M. R. Kruer, K. Sarkady, and J. C. Gridley, "Spatial Noise in Staring IR Focal Plane Arrays," in Infrared Detector and Arrays, E. L. Dereniak, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 930, pp. 56-63 (1988). 29. D. A. Scribner, K. Sarkady, M. R Kruer, and J. C. Gridley, "Test and Evaluation of Stability in IR Staring Focal Plane Arrays After Nonuniformity Correction," in Test and Evaluation of Infrared Detectors and Arrays, F. M. Hoke, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1108, pp. 255-264 (1984). 30. D L. Perry and E. L. Dereniak, "Linear Theory of Nonuniformity Correction in Infrared Staring Sensors," Optical Engineering, Vol. 32(8), pp. 1854-1859 (1993). 31. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 168-182, Plenum Press, New York (1975). 32. R. B. Johnson, "Relative Merits of the 3 - 5 and 8 -12 pm Spectral Bands," in Recent Developments and Applications of Infrared Analytical Instrumentation, H. A. Wills, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 917, pp. 102-111 (1988). 33. G. A. Findlay and D. R. Cutten, "Comparison of Performance of 3 - 5 and 8 - 12 pm Infrared Systems," Applied Optics, Vol. 28(23), pp. 5029-5037 (1989). 34. L. M. Beyer, S. H. Cobb, and L. C. Clune, "Ensquared Power for Obscured Circular Pupils With Off-Center Imaging," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(25), pp. 3569-3574 (1991). 35. P. M. Narendra, "A Separable Median Filter for Image Noise Smoothing," IEEE Transactions on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, Vol. PAMI-3(1), pp 20-29 (1981).
EXERCISES 1. Calculate the NEBW for a second order low-pass filter (Equation 6-52). Is there a simple relationship for an nth-order low pass filter? 2. Plot Equation 18-29 and Equation 18-30 on the same graph for an LWIR system. Let2/; = 11.5 pm and2c= 12.0 pm. 3. Compare the spectral responsivities (i.e., plot on the same graph) of an InSb detector (Equation 18-29) and PtSi detector (Equation 18-31). Both detectors are sensitive from 3 to 5.5 pm. Let /?/; = 0.8 for the InSb detector. 4. For an LWIR detector sensitive from 8 pm and 12 pm, calculate A500 (Equation 18-48). 5. For an LWIR detector sensitive from 8 pm and 10 pm, calculate A500 (Equation 18-48). Compare this answer with that obtained in Exercise 5. What can be said about the sensitivity of A500 with respect to spectral responsivity. 6. Referring to Figure 18-7, if you were a seller, what temperature would you select for NEDT measurements. If you were the buyer, what temperature would select. Are these really different numbers? 7. In Figure 18-8, the integration time for both detectors is the same. However, manufacturing difficulties limit the LWIR charge well capacity to 1/10 of the MWIR system. These means that the LWIR integration time is 1/10 the MWIR integration time. How does this affect the NEDT? 8. Rewrite the NEI equation (Equation 18-78) for a detector whose performance is specified by D* (Equation 18-34). 9. An analyst recommends using a larger detector to increase the PVF (Figure 18- 9). Originally, the detector was equal to the blur diameter and now it is twice the blur diameter. What effect does this have on the NEI? Use the equation derived in Exercise 9. 10. Plot yn as a function of n (Equation 18-82) for К = 0.2, 0.4, 0.6, and 0.8. Initially the input signal is zero and then abruptly jumps to one. Is there an optimum value for KI 11. A median filter is used to reduce noise in a staring array that contains 1000x 1000 elements. The DAS is 0.1 mrad. If a target is 3 meters wide and the filter operates on 5 pixels, what is the maximum range that the target can be perceived? Do phasing effects change the answer?
19 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE MODELS CTF SNRp=k--- In the 1950s, Shade predicted the resolution of photographic film and television sensors as a function of light level. His approach is the framework of all models used today. In the 1970s, Resell and Willson applied2 Shade’s results to thermal imaging systems and low light level televisions. Since then, most modeling efforts have concentrated on infrared imaging systems. Ratches provided a historical overview of the modeling activities at NVL. The same modeling equations apply to all imaging systems. Different forms exist to accommodate the terminology associated with different technologies (scanning versus staring and visible versus thermal imaging systems). For nearly all imaging systems, square waves (bar targets) are used for system characterization. The perceived signal-to-noise ratio is AI 1 ------------------------------------------. (19-1) {eye spatial filter} {eye temporal filter) The system square wave response, the contrast transfer function, CTFsys , modifies the differential signal, AI. The input variable AZ is the intensity difference between a target and its background and Av is a system specific constant that depends upon the optical diameter, f-number, and quantum efficiency. Selecting a threshold value that is required to just perceive a target and inverting Equation 19-1 provides a minimum detectable AI (»•„) M = к SNRth—-—-—{eye spatial filter) {eye temporal filter). (19-2) CTFsys For systems operating in the visible or near infrared, the minimum level is called the minimum resolvable contrast (MRC). For systems operating in the MWIR and LWIR, the minimum value is the minimum resolvable temperature (MRT). The Air Force tri-bar target or a four-bar target is approximated by a square wave of infinite extent. If the system is band-limited, then only the fundamental of the square wave has sufficient amplitude to contribute to the response (valid for high frequencies). The amplitude of the fundamental 355
frequency is 4/л times the square wave amplitude. The eye is sensitive to the average value of the first harmonic and the average value of a half-cycle sine wave is 2/л. Therefore, the conversion from a square wave (CTFsys) to a sinusoid (MTFsys) requires a factor of 8/л2 д-2 AI = SNRth---------—— (eye spatial filter)(eye temporal filter). (19-3) 8 MTF For thermal imaging systems k{if) becomes the NEDT. The eye “filters” are also called the summary noise factors MRT = SNRth 7? NEDT 8' MTFsys (summary noise factors). (19-4) Since the MRT and MDT are proportional to the NEDT, they are affected by the same parameters that modify the NEDT. Figure 19-1 illustrates the MRT as a function of background temperature. The summary noise factors employ the noise variances described by the three-dimensional noise model. The NEDT is the random noise and it may vary spectrally. Implicit in the remaining noise components is that the noise is white with no spectral features. Non-white noise will affect the MRT and MDT in an unknown manner. Each noise element has its own noise power spectral density. BACKGROUND TEMPERATURE (K) Figure 19-1. MRT as a function of background temperature. Parameters that affect the NEDT will also affect the MRT in the same manner.
The system noise may consist of many components and the eye may integrate each component differently MRT = SNRth zr2 NEDT ~8~ MTFsys (19-5) The three-dimensional noise model quantifies each {if)Pi . The component MTFs were described in Chapters 6 though 11. The NEDT was given in Chapter 18, Sensitivity and Noise. The eye integration factors, Д, and the remaining noise components are presented in this chapter. Throughout the previous chapters, back-of-the-envelope approximations were made about sensitivity and resolution. Resolution considerations provide the target range as „ target size Range = —2--------- resolution (19-6) Using sensitivity limitations, the received signal-to-noise ratio is SNR = tr M system noise (19-7) The MRC and MRT equations combine sensitivity and resolution with the eye's response. Equation 19-6 is the resolution limit of the MRC or MRT equation. Equation 19-7 does not include the eye's filtering capability. It is not a limit of the MRT or MRC equations. Both the MRC and MRT models are so-called static models in that the target is stationary. The target is assumed to be in the center of the field-of-view and no search is required (or at least the observer knows where to look). The observer has an unlimited amount for target discrimination. As with most models, the system is assumed to be linear-shift-invariant with no image enhancement algorithms present. 19.1. THREE-DIMENSIONAL NOISE MODEL The three-dimensional noise model4 provides the basic framework for analyzing the various noise sources. The noise is divided into a set of eight components that relate temporal and spatial noise to a three-dimensional
coordinate system (Figure 19-2). This approach allows full characterization of all noise sources including random noise, fixed pattern noise, streaks, rain, 1/f noise, and any other artifact that may have been introduced. Analyzing the noise in this manner has the advantage of simplifying the understanding of a complex phenomenon by breaking it down into a manageable set of components. The method simplifies the incorporation of complex noise factors into model formulations. The three-dimensional noise model was developed to describe the noise in thermal imaging systems. The methodology can be applied to all imaging systems. Figure 19-2. Three-dimensional noise model coordinate system illustrating data set NTVH. The T-dimension is the temporal dimension representing the framing sequence. The other two dimensions provide spatial information. However, depending upon the imaging system design, the horizontal dimension may represent time for a scanning system or may represent space for a staring system. For a staring array, nt and n indicate detector locations. For parallel scanning systems, tn indicates detector locations and n is the digitized analog signal, tn is the number of raster lines and n is the digitized analog signal for serial scanning systems. Table 19-1 groups the noise components into temporal and spatial components. The subscripts describe the noise "direction." oTVH represents noise calculated from the three-dimensional data set gvh is the rms noise value after averaging in the T-direction. Its data set contains tn*n elements. And so on.
Table 19-1 THREE-DIMENSIONAL NOISE DESCRIPTORS Noise Pixel Row Column Frame Component Variations Variations Variations Variations TEMPORAL &TVH GTV GTH ffJ1 SPATIAL &VH Gy S Table 19-2 lists seven noise components and some possible contributors to the components for serial scanning, parallel scanning, and staring array imaging systems. For mathematical completeness, the noise model has eight components with the eighth being the global average value, 5. Depending upon the system design and operation, any one of these noise components could dominate. The origin of these components is significantly different and the existence and manifestation depend upon the specific design of the imaging system. Not all of the components may be present in every imaging system. Systems sensitive to visible radiation may have different components than those sensitive to infrared energy. Certain noise sources such as microphonics are more difficult to describe since they may appear in variety of forms. "Readout noise" is a catchall phrase for possible staring array artifacts. Depending upon the system design and operation, the same noise source may appear in different noise components. Assuming the noises are independent, the total system noise is & sys V 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 & TVH + & TH + & TV + & VH + & H + c (19-8) With only random noise, = (rTf/7J where cr7(7/ is the NEDT (See Equation 18- 69 or Equation 18-72). Spatial noise is incorporated though , oy, and oH. Currently, only oTVH is predicted (the NEDT) and the remaining noise components must be determined from measurements or estimates. The global average, S, is the average intensity level. crr is considered negligible compared to oTVH and therefore is also omitted from the MRT and MDT predictions. Figures 19-3 through 19-5, generated by the System Image Analyzer (SIA) software,5 illustrate some of these noise sources. Figure 19-5 illustrates how uTV or affects the visibility of horizontal bars (as measured by the vertical MRT).
360 Electro-optical imaging system performance Table 19-2 SEVEN NOISE COMPONENTS OF THE THREE-DIMENSIONAL NOISE MODEL 3-D NOISE COMPONENT DESCRIPTION SERIAL SCAN PARALLEL SCAN STARING ARRAY °TVH Random 3-D noise Random and 1/f noise Random and 1/f noise Random °VH Spatial noise that does not change from frame-to-frame - - FPN °TH Variations in column averages that change from frame-to- frame (rain) Microphonics Microphonics Readout noise °'TV Variations in row averages that change from frame-to-frame (streaking) 1/f noise Transients, flashing detectors, 1/f noise Readout noise Variations in row averages that are fixed in time (horizontal lines or bands) Line-to-line interpolation Detector gain/level variations, line-to- line interpolation Readout noise, line-to-line interpolation Variations in column averages that are fixed in time (vertical lines) Shading Shading Readout noise O' j- Frame-to-frame intensity variations (flicker) Frame processing Frame processing Frame processing
Figure 19-3. Ideal image with ctsys = 0. Created by the SIA.5 Figure 19-4. Image with noise. Both fixed pattern noise and random noise appear similar in a single frame. Random noise changes from frame-to-frame whereas fixed pattern noise does not. Both scanning systems and staring systems have random noise. Only staring systems have two-dimensional FPN.
Figure 19-5. Image with dominant horizontal banding (high vTV or high of). Scanning systems often exhibit this type of noise. 19.2. FLIR92 The 1975 NVL model was developed for predicting6 the performance of U.S. Army thermal imaging systems. It satisfied the Army's need and it adequately predicts the MRT at mid-range spatial frequencies. This corresponds to detecting modest sized targets at modest ranges. The model was essentially one-dimensional and did not incorporate sampling effects and noise sources other than random noise. To overcome these deficiencies, NVESD created FLIR90 that was subsequently updated7 to FLIR92. The 1975 NVL model did not adequately predict the laboratory measured MRT values at low or high spatial frequencies. The differences between the measured and the predicted values were attributed to tremendous variability in observers, ill-defined data analysis methodology, and inappropriate modeling of the eye. Test methodology has since been standardized and understanding observer variability is a key component of the data analysis technique.8
Part of the eye modeling difficulty has been overcome by incorporating a MTFeye of unity (Equation 6-75) in FLIR92. This eye model does not include the eye inhibitory process but partially accounts for head movement when making measurements. Although models with alternate eye MTFs predict the laboratory MRT better than the 1975 NVL model, there are still some differences. In spite of these discrepancies, the 1975 NVL and FLIR92 models are the main analytic tools for deriving system requirements and predicting performance. They are used for comparative analysis and are reportedly9 accurate to ± 20% in range predictions for recognition under favorable target and atmospheric conditions. This is rather remarkable when considering the difficulty in estimating the target area-weighted AT and the atmospheric transmittance. The 1975 NVL model was developed for serial and parallel-scan thermal imaging systems that existed in the 1970s. These systems typically had a fixed relationship between the horizontal and vertical resolution of about 2:1. As such it was adequate to specify a horizontal MRT since its relationship with the vertical MRT rarely changed. Since the 1975 NVL model did not include sampling effects, some users modified the computer code by incorporating a sample-scene phase MTF, digital filter MTFs and post-reconstruction filters. With the advent of staring arrays, the vertical to horizontal resolution changed and the model had to be updated. In FLIR92, treatment of sampling effects is limited to restricting MRT predictions to sub-Nyquist frequencies. The ability for observers to interpret information above Nyquist frequency had not been completely quantified in 1992. Since then, two new models have emerged: NVTherm and TRM3 (discussed in Sections 19.3. and 19.4., respectively). The eye/brain system is probably the most difficult system to model. Two different models exist: the matched filter and the synchronous integrator model. The 1975 NVL model uses the matched filter model where it is assumed that the eye maximizes the SNR. Here, the eye spatial frequency response has the same spatial frequency dependence as the target. This is not a filter in the usual sense since the signal and noise are not ’’filtered” by them. Rather, visual psychophysical data suggest that the eye acts as if it were a filter that can be described mathematically by a filter function. With the synchronous integrator model, the eye integrates over an angular region defined by the target edges and it is used in FLIR92.
This change in eye models is not unreasonable. Scott and D'Agostino state10 The most frequently encountered methods... describe the eye/brain spatial integration using either a matched filter or a synchronous integrator model... they yield virtually identical MRTD predictions ... any potential difference ... will be lost in the inherent error of the MRTD measurements. For these reasons, and because ... a synchronous integrator is somewhat simpler ..., FLIR92 has been written as a synchronous integrator model. The 1975 NVL model used the reference bandwidth, for both the NEDT and MRT calculations. Many users modified this calculation to include the entire noise spectrum. FLIR92 no longer relies on a reference bandwidth and calculates the full temporal noise. Both the 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 model assume that only temporal noise contributes to the NEDT. Spatial noise is incorporated into the MRT prediction via the summary noise factors. Although FLIR92 is called two-dimensional, it is a two-directional model. That is, the threshold is predicted along two orthogonal axes, taken as the vertical and horizontal directions. Resolution in any other direction (e.g., 45°) is not used. When used with the Johnson criteria, FLIR92 is probably better at predicting the range for rectangular objects whose edges are aligned with the thermal imaging system axes. The model is probably less accurate for non- rectangular objects or high aspect ratio targets (e.g., airplanes, bridges, and ships with significant superstructure). The MRT and MDT derivations can be found in the literature.9'14 MRT and MDT are not absolute values but are perceivable temperature differentials relative to a given background. Sometimes they are called the minimum resolvable temperature difference (MRTD) and minimum detectable temperature difference (MDTD). The term difference or differential are often omitted since it is understood that it is a differential measurement. 19.2.1. FLIR92 MODEL FLIR92 is built upon the framework of the 1975 NVL model. Both the three-dimensional noise model and the FLIR92 are in symmetrical formats. This provides a mathematical format that is easier to understand than the 1975 NVL model. The horizontal and vertical MRTs are CT MRTH(fx) = SNRth--------------------KH(JX) (19-9) 8 MTF„(fx) H x and
CT MRTV (fv) = SNRtl 2^ Ky (fv). y 8 MTFy(fy) v Jy (19-10) These equations are similar in form to FLIR92 ARG-44. The summary noise factors, and Kf/fy combine the three-dimensional noise model components with the eye's spatial and temporal integration capabilities, is the product of all the horizontal MTFs (previously called MTF s). Similarly MTFfff) is the product of all the vertical MTFs (previously celled MTFy). The subscripts are consistent with FLIR92 nomenclature. The temporal random noise (FLIR92 ARG-31) as aTVH = NEDTsys = NEDTclassica, -^=. ^fref (19-11) The MDT is related to the target area, AT, with MTFV(/J,) and MTFH(£) embedded in Qv and QH, respectively MDT(AT) = SNRa KmT AT QH Q, (19-12) This equation is similar to FLIR92 ARG-55. The variables Qv and QH are 00 Qh = J [mtfh (J)Hh (/)]2 df (19-13) —<x> and co Qv= J [MTFy(f)Hy)ftf df, — CO (19-14) where Ни and Hv are the Fourier transforms of the target size. If the target is a square with a side equal to w,. Hv = Hv = sinc(w /) . (19-15)
The square of the summary noise factors are Кгн = ET Ev EH + ^-Ev E„ +^P~ET EH +-^-EH (19-16) ^ТУН аТУН аТУН and _2 2 2 = ET Ev EH +-^-Ev EH + ~p^ET Ev + Ev. (19-17) аТУН аТУН аТУН Since the MDT is independent of target orientation, the square of its summary noise factor is 2 2 E'mdt - Et Ev EH + —EE— Ev EH + —~— et Eh (19-18) 2 2 2 v 7 , v t ° ТУ r F °y , 4---- ——EH 4----- ET Ly 4 - tv . СГтУН аТУН аТУН The above equations are similar to FLIR92 ARG-41, ARG-42, and ARG-43. The variables ЕТ,ЕИ, and Evrepresent the temporal, horizontal spatial and vertical spatial integration afforded by the eye/brain, respectively, when viewing standard targets. As indicated by FLIR92 ARG-36, ARG-37, and ARG- 38, they are ET - aT R^y Lf (19-19) £ (y)=^H-- (19-20) and ^(/) = av Ry Lv(f)' (19-21) where aT, aH, and av are sample correlation factors that relate the dependency of one sample on the next. Time samples are independent so aT = 1. The variables RT, RH, and Ry are the time, horizontal and vertical sampling rates respectively. The frame rate is Fr = RT (units of 1/s). The variables RH and Ry have units of samples/mrad and LT (which is the eye integration time) has units of seconds. The remaining variables, Lj/f) and Ly\f), have units of cycles/mrad.
The model assumes that the eye temporally integrates perfectly and continuously over the eye integration time. The noise is considered uncorrelated from frame-to-frame so that it adds in quadrature. When the information update rate Fr is high enough, and if there is signal correlation between adjacent frames, ET=f-T- (19-22) * r le For staring arrays, the RH and Rv are equal to the inverse of the detector center-to-center spacing in the horizontal and vertical directions: RH= 1/Cssh and Ry = 1/CSSV. For staring arrays, ay = 1 and aH = 1. For scanning arrays, the effective sampling rate depends upon the effective detector center-to-center spacing after interlace and ay = 1. In the scan direction the effective sample rate is Teff. The variable aH is arbitrarily selected to be 2 so that Equation 19-19 can be used 6Z rjr ^=2r<- KH (19-23) For a system with an ideal bandwidth, the NEBW (Equation 18-3) is defined as Sfe = 1/2 Teff. The scan velocity converts electrical frequency to spatial frequency so that ff H _ _L_ h &fe ' (19-24) A 7:1 aspect ratio bar (Taspect = 7) is used to measure the MRT. The bar is oriented vertically for horizontal measurements and horizontally for vertical measurements. Thus, the aspect ratio appears in different equations. For scanning systems, the noise is assumed to be generated within the detector and it may have some spectral features with an NPSD of S(f). The noise appears in the horizontal direction only. For staring arrays, the noise is assumed to be white [Л'(/)= 1]. The noise filters modify the noise spectrum. These are the filters occur after the insertion of noise. Since noise is assumed to originate in the detector, MTFoptics, MTFmotion, and MTFdetector are not part of noise filters. Chapters 6 through 11 provide the remaining MTFs for the components of the noise filters. and are the horizontal and vertical noise filters respectively.
For horizontal MRT, the bar is oriented vertically and the aspect ratio appears in the vertical summary noise factors. The summary noise factors for frequency /are co (19-25) and 1 Sinc1{Taspec‘ f}df. (19-26) < fs > If HFI_V is near unity over the spatial frequencies of interest [i.e., HNr_v.(f)« 1 when/ <2f!TaspeJ, then (19-27) * aspect For the vertical MRT, the aspect ratio is in the horizontal summary noise factors 00 (T = sine2 aspec‘J df (19-28) "я о V 2 and «_ ( f \ £'r-H/) = v1| \HNF-Hm\2 Sine2 f— df. Kv о V^JsJ (19-29) If is near unity over the spatial frequencies of interest [i.e., HFF_ff)« 1 when /<2/J, then (19-30) 19.2.2. SNRth and tE In the 1975 NVL model documentation it states15, .... unfortunately, universal values for these constants do not exist. The values recommended at this time are SNRth = 2.25 and te = .2. These values were "hardwired" into the computer code. These values are treated as proportionality constants that were adjusted so that laboratory data matches predicted values.
In the FLIR92 documentation, it states16 SNRth and the eye integration time, te, are most often the model parameters used to "tune” an MRTD prediction to a set of measurements. FLIR92 documentation continues The luminances associated with about a 0.1 second eye integration time agree well with the display experiments conducted in 1988 ... (darkened room and optimal viewing) .... In higher ambient light levels conditions, such as may be encountered with fielded systems, greater display luminances can be expected and thus a faster eye integration time may be appropriate ... NVESD recommends setting SNRth equal to 2.5 ... Though psychophysical data shows that SNR th is a function of target frequency, a value of 2.5 represents a reasonable average. With FLIR92, these are default values that can be changed by the user. The eye integration time is somewhat nebulous and its value depends upon the specific task on hand and depends upon the light level. FLIR92 recommends changing te according to the light level available (Figure 19-6). DISPLAY LUMINANCE (mL) Figure 19-6. Eye integration values as a function of light level. FLIR92 documentation recommends using te = 0.1 sec for laboratory MRT predictions. While many arguments exist on selecting the "correct” values, they are simply proportionality constants. Both SNRth and te have a range of acceptable values. Since the eye model changed from the 1975 NVL model to FLIR92, it is expected that these "constants" would also change. No matter the value selected for te , consistency throughout the model must be maintained. The eye integration time is also used in motional MTFs. A word of clarification. SNRth is approximately the value that the eye/brain interprets the image to be at threshold detection. It includes, in part,
both temporal and spatial integration effects. It is neither the signal-to-noise ratio of the video signal nor the SNR of the luminance on the display. Depending upon the noise characteristics and the target characteristics, the eye can detect17 signals whose video SNR is as low as 0.05. The eye/brain perceives this SNR to be about 2.25. 19.2.3. HEAD MOVEMENT By allowing the observer to adjust his viewing distance to the display, he apparently optimizes several interrelated detection criteria. These include striving for equal clarity of all four bars and maximizing the perceived signal-to- noise ratio. This results apparently in an equal detection capability for all target spatial frequencies such that MTFeye approaches18 a constant (taken as unity). FLIR92 has two eye models: the non-limiting case where MTFeye = 1 (Equation 6-75) and the traditional Komfeld-Lawson eye model (Equation 6-64). Thus, two different MRTs are possible: one with head movement and one without. The head movement case is appropriate for predicting the laboratory MRT since the observer is not usually constrained in any way. For range predictions, however, the system analyst must understand the application. For those systems mounted on aircraft, the observer (the pilot) is typically strapped in a seat with restricted head movement. The Komfeld-Lawson eye model is appropriate for many field applications. The ability to discern targets embedded in noise depends upon the visual angle subtended by the noise and target. As the noise spatial components increase in frequency, it becomes more difficult to perceive the noise since the eye MTF is decreasing. This means that as the distance to the display increases, it becomes more difficult to perceive the noise and the image will eventually appear noise-free. While small targets are not visible at these long distances, a noise-free display will appear cosmetically pleasing. The identical effect occurs as the display size decreases. Small displays create small visual angles (high spatial frequencies). The small displays on consumer camcorders present a good image even though the display resolution is poor. Here, the visual angle associated with the display resolution is below the eye’s resolution. Simply stated, small displays always appear to present excellent imagery. The MRT model was developed for a system that is noise limited and that the observer can fully discern the noise. This is only true over a limited viewing distance. At long distances, the pixel angular subtense will be less that what the eye can resolve. Therefore, at long distances, high frequency noise will not be perceived. Since the MRT is proportional to the perceived noise, the
MRT approaches zero as the distance increases.19 At long distances, the image is contrary to that required by the MRT test: detection of targets embedded in noise. 19.2.4.1975 NVL MODEL Systems with different noise sources will have different noise factors and different MRTs and different MDTs. When there is only random noise, the MRTs reduce to a form similar to the 1975 NVL model Cf l----------------- MRTH (fx ) = SNRU, — М-А-Я (19-31) H \J x * and 2 MRTV (f ) = SNRth ---- . (19-32) y 8 MTFv{fyy For MRTH, the summary noise factors are described by Equations 19-18, 19-24 and 19-26 (or 19-27). For MTFV, the summary noise factors are described by Equations 19-19, 19-28, and 19-29 (or 19-30). When using the 1975 NVL model for range predictions, only the horizontal MRT is used. 19.2.5 . SCANNING SYSTEMS (DEFAULT VALUES) For scanning systems, the most prevalent noise sources are temporal noise (vTVH\ temporal row noise (<>7r), and fixed row noise (<rK). Table 19-3 lists the FLIR92 recommended values. Common module systems are considered ’’low” noise systems in the sense that <yTV is small compared to gtvh. Scanning arrays, that use internal temperature references for gain and level balancing, are considered ’’moderate" noise systems. Although scanning arrays with TDI detectors have a lower oTVH than common module systems, the relative amount of row noise is higher. The FLIR92 documentation recommends using the "moderate" level noise case for second generation scanning systems. These are systems with TDI detectors. As of this writing, the most popular detector array consists of 480*4-TDI elements. Future systems probably will be considered "low" noise systems.
Table 19-3 FLIR92 DEFAULT VALUES FOR SCANNING SYSTEMS RELATIVE NOISE LOW NOISE MODERATE NOISE HIGH NOISE GVH^GTVH 0 0 0 GTV! 6 TVH 0.25 0.75 1.0 of oTVH 0.25 0.75 1.0 о TV! a TVH 0 0 0 Gh/OTvh 0 0 0 For "low” noise scanning systems the default MRTs are jr- 2 0- ------------ MRTH(fx) = SNRth ——П™- -^ЁтЕЕнЁн^н (19’33) 8 MTFH(fx) and MRTV = SNR,h 2 &TVH 8 MTFv(fy) (19-34) Because of the added noise, the vertical MRT will be poorer (have higher values) than the horizontal MRT (see Figure 19-5). 19.2.6 . STARING SYSTEMS (DEFAULT VALUES) For staring arrays, the next most important noise source is Оун. Table 19-4 lists the FLIR92 default value for staring arrays. The default MRTs become MRT„(fx)=SNRth 71 °~TVH 8 MTFH(fx) (19-35) and MRTv{fy)=SNRth 2 r &TVH 8 MTFyfJy)
Table 19-4 FLIR92 DEFAULT VALUES for STARING SYSTEMS RELATIVE NOISE DEFAULT VALUE (ГуН^ТУН 0.40 GTl ’/oTyH 0 О J GТУН 0 GT^GTVH 0 GWGTVH 0 19.2.7 . NONUNIFORMITY VERSUS gvh/<ttvh In Section 18.2.3., Fixed Pattern Noise, a staring array NEDT was specified as a function of the fixed pattern ratio or nonuniformity, U. To minimize hardware complexity, the highest nonuniformity should be selected that does not adversely affect the NEDT. This occurs by selecting a nonuniformity value just before the knee in the NEDT curve (Figure 18-7). Since the MRT depends upon вун/ятун, it is desirable to relate U to <WaTVH • In lhe absence of dark current and mux noise, a staring array system noise is sys ~ k(nsys ) ~ кphoton ‘n photon ) '_____________ ___________ (19-37) — p/toton у 1 + nphoton^ When only random and fixed pattern noise is present, the system noise is also & sys A Since cTVH = ktnplM„, noise component by 1 1 o'2 1сгтун+аун ~ атун J1+ 2 * (19-38) \ ^TVII the nonuniformity is related to the three-dimensional 2 ™ =nplMonU2. (19-39) &TVH
Figure 19-7 is identical with Figure 18-8 with the FLIR92 default values added (<гга/<ггия=0.4). The default value occurs at the typical design point of selecting the largest nonuniformity without adversely affecting the NEDT. Figure 19-7. Representative NEDTs as a function of nonuniformity for two different detectors. The FLIR92 default value has been added (squares). For the PtSi sensor, the default value occurs when U = 0.0003. For the HgCdTe sensor, the default value occurs when U = 7.6* 1 O'6. See Figure 18-7 for details. With a linear system model, there is no limit on the number of photoelectrons that can be collected. Real hardware performance is limited by the charge well capacity. For a worst case situation, the charge well capacity should be used for nphoton . This defines U or <7ГЯ/<77ГЯ in Equation 19-39. The FLIR92 default value Ovh^tvh = 0.4 represents an optimally designed staring array system where the FPN is sufficiently low that it does not affect the NEDT measurement. Although mathematically the NEDT has not changed, FPN can be perceived due to the eye/brain temporal integration of random noise. 19.2.8 . TWO-DIMENSIONAL MRT Taking the geometric average of the horizontal and vertical MRTs creates the two-dimensional MRT (Figure 19-8)
Each component MRT is weighted with respect to the frequency axis. In this manner, the two-dimensional MRT is forced to asymptote to the mean values of the vertical and horizontal cutoff frequencies. The two-dimensional MRT is a mathematical construct that is used for range performance predictions. It cannot be measured since f2D does not exist. Figure 19-8. The two-dimensional MRT is mathematically created from the horizontal and vertical MRTs. It is really a two-directional MRT. 19.3. NVTHERM FLIR92 only calculates the MTF and hence the MRT up to the Nyquist frequency (Figure 19-9). This limit originally appeared reasonable. Any spatial frequency above Nyquist frequency is aliased to a lower frequency. Detail (high spatial frequencies) will be distorted suggesting that precise features are no longer discernible. The Nyquist frequency limit artificially limited range performance: All systems with the same pixel-angular-subtense provided the same range performance. Sampling theory was developed for auditory communications where frequency preservation is critical. While the ear is a frequency detector, the eye relies heavily on intensity variations. High frequency signals do not disappear as suggested by Figure 19-9. They are aliased. With real targets, aliased frequencies are manifested as shifting of edges and line width variations. These shifts or variations are only one pixel wide (actually one sample wide). Recent experiments (see Section 14.5., MTF Squeeze) demonstrated that aliased signals provide useful information.
Figure 19-9. FLIR92 limits the MRT to the Nyquist frequency. Two significantly different systems can have the same resolution and range performance. This limitation is further discussed in Section 21.1.5., Sampling Effects. In 1999, NVTherm was introduced.20 This model follows the methodology used in FLIR92 with two exceptions. It includes the MTF squeeze and has a new eye model. NVTherm does not limit the MRT to the Nyquist frequency: the squeeze degrades the MTF to account for sampling artifacts. The squeeze is dependent upon the level of discrimination applied to target acquisition. The squeeze factor may be different in the horizontal and vertical directions. The one-dimensional squeeze was illustrated in Figure 14-1. For recognition, the two-dimensional squeeze is flD—recognition /(jC 0.32 SR~X )(1 - 0.32 )Р7у , (19-41) and for identification, fiD-lD=pi-2SXoM -of-band-x)(1-25Л„„, -of -band —y )fxfy (19-42) If the aliased signals are the same in both directions, then
and flD-ID 1 SR out-of-band ~f2D * (19-44) The Kornfeld-Lawson eye model is adequate over a limited range (used in FLIR92). NVTherm uses an eye model that accounts for scene brightness, pupil size, and eye tremor. (Equations 6-67 through 6-74). With the new eye model, NVTherm (without the squeeze) provides more pessimistic (higher) MRT values than FLIR92. This translates into shorter recognition and identification ranges. In FLIR92, the eye was allowed to integrate over the entire spatial extent of the target without limit. NVTherm limits the eye’s spatial resolution to 4 mrad. This follows the eye's detection mechanism where large targets are discerned by edge detection. This limitation permits better agreement between the predicted and measured MRTs at low spatial frequencies. 19.4. TRM3 The Thermal Range Model 321 (TRM3) is similar to NVTherm in that it predicts the MRT past the Nyquist frequency. It uses the Average Modulation Optimum Phase (AMOP) function that describes the modulation of a bar target when its phase has been optimized. The AMOP replaces the MRT in the MRT equations. With this replacement, the resultant is called22 the minimum temperature difference perceived (MTDP). It is conceptually the same as the squeezed MTF in NVTherm. TRM3 uses 4-bar targets to determine the AMOP and NVTherm used actual military targets to determine the squeeze factor. There is no analytical function for the AMOP. It is a function of the thermal imaging system's spatial response and is unique to each system. The AMOP is determined by TRM3 and is higher than the system MTF without sampling. This would suggest that the MTDP is significantly higher than the MRT in FLIR92 and NVTherm. This is not so. The conversion from the CTF to the MTF introduced а л/4 factor. This factor is already included within the AMOP. Therefore ______ 71____ _ NEDT ________ MTDP = — SNRth----------IEDT . (19-45) 2 AMOP The MTDP is slightly lower than the MRT and therefore provides slightly better range performance. The inhomogeneity equivalent temperature difference (IEDT) is the eye filter function. For staring arrays it is identical to FLIR92. For scanning arrays, the eye filters are somewhat different.
19.5. STADIUM FLIR FLIR92, NVTherm, and TRM3 only provide a single MTF and MRT curve for each input and one NEDT. These models do not provide any inference as to the statistical reliability of the results. It is clear that the nominal values initially selected are usually the expected average values. This means that 50% of the manufactured systems will have MTFs, NEDTs, and MRTs with lower values and 50% will have values higher. While lower values are desirable, the higher values could represent failed specifications if the nominal values were used as a specification. As a result, most specifications are some arbitrary multiple of the calculated nominal value. By tolerancing each input separately, the analyst determines which subsystem has the greatest influence on the MTF, NEDT, and MRT. The specifications of that subsystem are reviewed. If cost effective, then the specifications are tightened. Similarly, if the tolerancing on a subsystem shows little effect on the MRT, then its specifications can be loosened and this implies reduced cost. In 1995, Kennedy23 described a Monte Carlo method that allowed tolerancing of components. The method created a shell around FLIR92. Each input is described by its mean and standard deviation. The program then performed a Monte Carlo simulation by selecting random values of the data set. The program output is list of cumulative probabilities ranging from the 50% Figure 19-10. Various MRT percentiles. Thus manufacturing variations (tolerancing) lead to realistic specifications, the specification probably be greater than the +3o level.
If the standard deviation is large, the range of values may include negative quantities: a physically unrealizable situation. Kennedy simply limited these values to zero. Changes in one variable can affect others. For example, a change in the focal length affects the detector-angular-subtense. For scanning systems, a variation in the scan velocity results in a variation in the scaling of electrical frequency into object space frequency. Since the peak D* is a function of the detector size, it changes as the detector sizes changes. The difficulty with this approach is that standard deviation may not be available. For example, most detector specifications simply state that the peak D* should be greater than a particular value. The manufacturer measures the detectors and sends only selected detectors. While the lot D* may be normally distributed, the delivered detectors will have a truncated distribution that is clipped at the specification. Selecting a mean and standard deviation for D* represents a challenge to the analyst. The methods proposed by Kennedy were commercialized into STADIUM FLIR.24 As a Windows™-based program, STADIUM FLIR offers user-friendly pull-down windows to enter all the parameters required by FLIR92. It plots numerous FLIR92 outputs such as the noise summary factors, ET, Eh, and Ev (see Equations 19-19 through 19-21), and MTFPRE and MTFP0ST (see Tables 14-1 and 14-2). STADIUM FLIR is an excellent tool for system trade-off analyses. It aids in the determination of a nominal value for each FLIR92 input. For example, it can provide the MTF (at a selected spatial frequency) as a function of spectral cut-on (Figure 19-11). Recall that MTF0PTICS is a function of the average wavelength (see Equation 6-5 through 6-8). Here, the minimum and maximum values of a parameter are selected along with a step size. Selecting appropriate nominal values (Further discussed in Chapter 21., Range Predictions), maximizes detection, recognition, and identification ranges. Figure 19-11. MTF as a function of cut-on wavelength
19.6. MINIMUM RESOLVABLE CONTRAST The basic equation (Equation 19-1) can be used to calculate the minimum resolvable contrast. The image contrast, as defined in visual psychophysical literature, is IВ (19-46) Inserting the contrast into Equation 19-1 provides CTF IBC 1 SNR=k'-----------------------------------------------. (19-47) (in) (eye spatial filter) (eye temporal filter) Assuming a required threshold and solving for C provides the MRC MRC = SNRth л2 T MTFsys IB /. 2\ \ л / A + '" + T~l\^n V1 / (19-48) The average shot noise variance in a photoconductive detector per unit bandwidth is 7 2 1 PC-shot IDC • (19-49) For photoconductive devices, it is convenient to represent the DC current as an average of the currents produced by the target and the background (^PC-shot ) - q Iave &f - 4 q T — (19-50) Using the definition of contrast, 7 2 1 PC-shot \] = 2q{2 +C)lB . (19-51) Inserting the shot noise term in Equation 19-48 provides MRC = SNRth r2 -^2(2 +MRC) 8 MTF^ IB
The three-dimensional noise model can be applied to all imaging systems. However, the MRC was developed for systems that had only random noise components. Following the 1975 NVL model format (Equations 19-31 and 19- 32), MRCH(fx)=SNRth rr2 72(2 + MRC) ^ET EV H EH H 8 IB MTFH(fx) (19-53) and MRCv(Jy)=SNRth 71^ y^2 (2 + MRC) et ev-v e h-v 8 IB MTFv(fy) (19-54) The MRC is on both sides of the equation and it can only be solved iteratively. A starting point would be to select a low value such as MRC = 0.02. The MRC is a family of curves that depend upon the background intensity level (Figure 19- 12). RELATIVE SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 19-12. MRC is a function of ambient lighting level. 19.7. GENERAL COMMENTS Mathematics and computer models have no bounds. Computers can produce an output for nearly any input. The codes do not flash a message that says "ERRORS MAY EXIST - READ DOCUMENTATION." The analyst must read all the documentation to understand the limitations of the models so that he does not extend the model past its region of validity. The inability to accurately quantify the eye-brain detection process has been perhaps the major obstacle to predicting measured MRT values. The eye exhibits both excitatory and inhibitory behavior and neither the 1975 NVL model nor FLIR92 includes the inhibitory portion of the eye. This lack of
complete eye modeling accounts in part for the discrepancy between the measured MRT values and the predicted values at low spatial frequencies. Many attempts have been made to include the inhibitory response of the eye 25'27 These models were developed from first principles and the predicted MRT values were closer to the measured MRT values compared to the 1975 NVL model. But they still did not precisely predict the measured values. While alternate eye models were developed before FLIR92, NVESD continued using the Kornfeld-Lawson model. High spatial frequency laboratory MRT predictions were improved by incorporating the non-limiting eye model (MTFeye= 1). The new eye model in NVTherm accommodates changes in the MTF as a function of monitor brightness. It does not include the inhibitory response. Low frequency predictions are the same for all models. Nevertheless, this still represents a modeling dilemma. Although FLIR92 does not predict low spatial frequency response correctly, this region is of questionable value during actual system usage. Systems are typically designed to reproduce moderate detail (mid to high spatial frequencies). Furthermore, the lowest frequency that can be reasonably measured is about 0.2fo. If the spatial frequency is too low, not all four bars will be seen on the monitor. For very low frequencies, only part of a bar will be imaged. Therefore, there is no way of validating the very low frequency response. Results are only conjecture. Many authors have been too quick to attack the theory and immediately offer other eye models. While the eye model may not be perfect, other factors affect the measured values. For example, low AT MRT targets are very difficult to accurately calibrate (test equipment issues). High spatial frequency targets are more difficult to see due to monitor raster structure and phasing effects. NO generalized model exists for machine vision (automatic target recognizers, target cuers, etc.) systems. This is due, in part, to the fact many systems employ nonlinear image processing. Modeling nonlinear systems can only be done on a case-by-case basis. Furthermore, the threshold signal-to-noise required by machine vision is also system specific. The SNRth used in the MRT equation is only appropriate for describing human observer thresholds. SNRth is not the video signal SNR but what the observer perceives after eye/brain temporal and spatial integrations.
19.8. REFERENCES 1. 0. H. Shade, Sr., "Image Gradation, Graininess, and Sharpness in Television and Motion Picture Systems," published in four parts in J. SMP'IE: "Part I: Image Structure and Transfer Characteristics," Vol. 56(2), pp. 137-171 (1951); "Part II: The Grain Structure of Motion Pictures - An Analysis of Deviations and Fluctuations of the Sample Number," Vol. 58(2), pp 181-222 (1952); "Part III: The Grain Structure of Television Images," Vol. 61(2), pp. 97-164 (1953); "Part IV: Image Analysis in Photographic and Television Systems," Vol. 64(11), pp. 593-617 (1952) 2. F. A Resell and R. H. Willson, "Performance Sy nthesis of Electro-Optical Sensors," Air Force Avionics Laboratory Report AFAL-TR-72-229, Wright Patterson AFB, OH (1972). 3. J. A. Ratches, "Night Vision Modeling: Historical Perspective," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and TestingX, G C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 2-12 (1999). 4. J. D'Agostino and C. Webb, "3-D Analysis Framework and Measurement Methodology for Imaging System Noise," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing II, G C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1488, pp. 110-121 (1991). 5. System Image Analyzer (SIA) is available from JCD Publishing, Winter Park, FL 32789, Telephone 407-629-5370 6. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975). 7. FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model, User's Guide, NVESD document UG5008993, Fort Belvoir, VA (1993). 8 G. C. Holst, Testing and Evaluation of Infrared Imaging Systems, second edition, JCD Publishing, pp. 331-370, Winter Park, FL (1993). 9. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, pg. 34, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975). 10. L. Scott and J. D'Agostino, "NVEOD FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model," in Infrared Imaging Systems' Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 194-203 (1992). 11. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 182-194, Plenum Press, NY (1975). 12. F. A. Resell, "Laboratory Performance Model," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, R. Resell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report 8311, pp. 85-95, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 13. W. R. Lawson and J. A Ratches, "The Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model Based on the Matched Filter Concept," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, R. Resell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report 8311, pp. 159-179, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 14. R. L. Sendall and F. A. Resell, "Static Performance Model Based on the Perfect Synchronous Integrator Model," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, R. Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report 8311, pp 181-230, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 15. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, pg. 56, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975). 16. FLIR92 Thermal Imaging Systems Performance Model, Analyst's Reference Guide, NVESD document RG5008993, pp. ARG 12 - 13, Fort Belvoir, VA (1993). 17. F. A. Rosell, "Psychophysical Experimentation," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, R. Rosel! and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report # 8311, pg. 225, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979).
18. G. C. Holst and A. R. Taylor, "What Eye Model Should We Use for MRT Testing?" in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1309, pp. 67-75 (1990). 19. J. M. Mooney, "Effect of Spatial Noise on the Minimum Resolvable Temperature of a Staring Array," Applied Optics, Vol. 30(23), pp. 3324-3332 (1991). 20. R. G. Driggers, R. Vollmerhausen, and T. Edwards, "The Target Identification Performance of Infrared Imager Models as a Function of Blur and Sampling," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and TestingX, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 26-34 (1999). 21. W. Wittenstein, "Thermal Range Model TRM3," in Infrared Technology and Applications XXIV, B. F. Andresen and M. Strojnik, eds., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3436, pp. 413-424 (1998). 22. W. Wittenstein, "Minimum Temperature Difference Perceived - A New Approach to Assess Undersampled thermal Imagers," Optical Engineering, Vol. 38(5), pp. 773-781 (1999). 23. H. V. Kennedy, "Monte Carlo Shell for FLIR92," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing VI, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 2470, pp. 69-74 (1995). 24. STADIUM FLIR is manufactured by AET, 1900 S. Harbor City Boulevard, Suite 115, Melbourne, FL 329012. It is available from JCD Publishing, 2932 Cove Trail, Winter Park, FL 32789, Tel: 407-629-5370. 25. J. G. Vortman and A. Bar-Lev, "Improved Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference Model for Infrared Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering, Vol. 26(6), pp. 492-498 (1987). 26.1. Overington, "Image Quality and Observer Performance," in Image Quality, SPIE Proceedings Vol. 310, pp. 2-5, (1981). 27. M. A. Karim, M. L. Gao, and S. H. Zheng, "Minimum Resolvable Temperature Difference Model: A Critical Review," Optical Engineering, Vol. 30(11), pp. 1788-1796 (1991). EXERCISES 1. Referring to Table 19-2 what noise components are appropriate for systems operating in the visible spectrum? 2. In Equation 19-8, all the noise components are added in quadrature. However, the summary noise factors (Equations 19-10 and 19-17) modify the noise components before addition. Why? 3. Sketch eight images, each of which has a different noise component. Assume that each noise component is dominant (i.e., exaggerate the noise). 4. When inserted into the MRT equation, Equation 19-22 suggests that the eye reduces the temporal noise by the square root of the frame rate. Are there practical limits on this approach? What happens if the frame rate approaches infinity or zero? 5. Sketch two MRT curves: one with head movement and one without.
20 TARGET DISCRIMINATION Range performance predictions require a mathematical expression that describes the eye/brain image interpretation process. Unlike the response of an electronic circuit, the response of a human observer cannot be directly measured but only can be inferred by many visual psychological experiments. The lowest level of discrimination is a distinction between something and nothing. The final level is the precise identification and description of a particular object. Between these two extremes lay a continuum of discrimination levels. Sometimes, a level of visual discrimination can be easily defined. An aircraft may be easily detected against a cloudless sky and the meaning of detection is clear. The detection of a vehicle against a complex background such as a forest is more difficult. Here, it may be necessary to recognize the vehicle before it can be said that it is detected. Contextual clues provide additional information. A blob on a road has a reasonable probability of being a vehicle. The same blob in a field could be anything - unless it is moving. A vehicle may be recognized or even identified because of its characteristics, location, and speed even though the sensor resolution is insufficient to perform classical shape recognition. For example, a moving object on a large deep lake is probably a boat and not an aircraft or truck. Target identification is a high-order target discrimination level that is at the end of a complex process. The first task is searching the field-of-view to find the target. Search (discussed in Section 21.10., Search) may be random or systematic and it varies with observer training and background. Search was also called finding the target. DAgostino and Moulton1 introduced the minimum findable temperature difference (MFTD). This approach includes both scene clutter and search. The target may be anywhere in the field-of-view. With finding, attention is focussed on a particular area of the scene. This is more complex than the minimum detectable temperature. MDT is the ability to detect a blob embedded in noise when the target is in the center of the field-of-view (or at least, the observer knows where to look). Both MDT and MFTD are a function of the target angular subtense. After finding the target, the Johnson criterion is used. Here, target size and shape provide the cues for detection, recognition, and identification. Sensitivity, resolution, or a combination may affect the range for these levels of
target discrimination. The Johnson criterion assumes that the target is in the center of the field-of-view and search is not required to find the target. It provides the link between the MRT and field performance. The Johnson discrimination methodology is the basis for today’s standards. Johnson’s criteria assigned cycles to the minimum dimension of the target. This represents a one-dimensional view of a two-dimensional image. The historical development of the discrimination methodology can be found in the literature.2'8 Discrimination is a process in which an object is assigned to a subset of a larger set of objects based upon the amount of detail perceived by the observer. Detection, recognition, and identification are just three discrimination levels of a continuum. The definition of each level has become author dependent: each author has tried to describe his impression of discrimination. Range predictions are reasonable if the analyst exercises good judgment in selecting the discrimination criterion. In two-dimensional discrimination, the number of cycles across the critical dimension is used. The critical dimension is equal to the square root of the target area. Only if the target is square is the one-dimensional minimum dimension equal to the two-dimensional critical dimension. Target discrimination values are not specific to any particular system. Although the majority of research has been in support of thermal imaging system performance, the results apply to systems operating in the visible region of the spectrum. Indeed, the Johnson criterion was developed for image intensifiers. Much work was required to prove that Johnson's findings applied to thermal imaging systems. 20.1. ONE-DIMENSIONAL DETECTION The Johnson methodology for detection, recognition, and identification has become the basis for target discrimination. His methodology may be extended to include target classification and clutter effects. 20.1.1. JOHNSON CRITERION Johnson2 arbitrarily divided visual discrimination into four categories: detection, orientation, recognition, and identification. His approach has become known as the equivalent bar pattern approach. Johnson developed his
methodology in the laboratory using scale models of eight military vehicles and one soldier against a bland background. Observers viewed the targets through image intensifiers and were asked to detect, decide the orientation, recognize and identify the targets. Air Force tri-bar charts whose bars had the same contrast as the scaled models were also viewed and the maximum resolvable bar pattern frequency was determined. The number of bars per minimum object dimension was increased until the bars could just be individually resolved. In this way, detectability was correlated with the sensor's threshold bar pattern resolution (Table 20-1). These results became the foundation for the discrimination methodology used today. Table 20-1 JOHNSON'S RESULTS (From reference 2) DISCRIMINATION LEVEL MEANING CYCLES ACROSS MINIMUM DIMENSION Detection An object is present (object versus noise). 1.0± 0.025 Orientation The object is approximately symmetrical or unsymmetrical and its orientation may be discerned (side view versus front view). 1.4±0.35 Recognition The class to which the object belongs (e.g., tank, truck, man). 4.0±0.80 Identification The object is discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type (e.g., T-52 tank or friendly jeep). 6.4±1.50 Figure 20-1 was reproduced from Johnson's report. The number of cycles is applied across the target's minimum dimension without regard to the orientation of the minimum dimension (i.e., horizontally, vertically or at an angle). His rasterless image intensifier imagery was radially symmetrical and therefore it was reasonable for him to ignore the bar orientation. His methodology is commonly accepted as valid for raster-based television and thermal imaging systems.
Figure 20-1. The targets used by Johnson. The minimum dimension is the smallest target dimension and is independent its orientation. (From reference 2). Depending upon whether the target was viewed from the front or the side, the number of cycles per minimum dimension changes for recognition (Figure 20-2). This occurs because the detail that must be perceived for recognition changes. For example, the tank gun can be seen from the side but is difficult to discern from the front. This led to the idea that four cycles were pessimistic, three cycles optimistic and the average is 3.5 cycles. However, the industry adopted four cycles for recognition at the 50% probability level. 90° Figure 20-2. Number of cycles required as a function of viewing angle. (From reference 9).
Although Johnson used 6.4 cycles for identification, studies with thermal imaging systems at the Night Vision Laboratory suggested that 8 cycles are more appropriate for identification. Table 20-2 provides the current industry standard for one-dimensional target discrimination. Because today's standards are based upon Johnson's work, they are labeled as the Johnson criteria though they are not the precise values found by him. Table 20-2 CURRENT INDUSTRY CRITERIA (ONE-DIMENSIONAL) (Called the Johnson criterion) TASK DESCRIPTION CYCLES ACROSS MINIMUM DIMENSION Detection The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 1.0 Aim Aiming cross hairs on a target with sufficient accuracy to fire a missile. 2.5 Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 4.0 Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 8.0 20.1.2. EXTENDED DISCRIMINATION Obviously more levels of visual discrimination are desirable. In particular, the gap between recognition and identification is too large and detection appeared more complex. Howe stated:10 Discrimination is the ability to discern an object embedded in a cluttered background. Simply seeing a blob in a cluttered environment does not usually indicate the presence of a target with a high degree of confidence. For detection, the blob in question must be compared with other blobs, and features of the blob must set it apart from the others. Thus, there is a needfor resolving capability for this type of detection.
Another type of detection commonly discussed in the literature is military detection. It is the determination that an object in an image is of military interest. If the simple determination that an object is present is enough to indicate the object is of military interest, for example, seeing a point object in the sky, then pure detection is equivalent to military detection. If on the other hand, the observer has to discriminate between a particular object and other objects in the FOV to determine which is of military interest, then discrimination detection is equivalent to military detection. Resell11 proposed a detailed discrimination level breakdown that fits a wider set of field conditions (Table 20-3). Commensurate with these additional levels is a range of cycles per minimum dimension. The range of values is due to observer threshold variations, observer knowledge and recognition ability, viewing angle (front, side, oblique), and target aspect ratio. Table 20-3 AN EXPANDED SET OF DISCRIMINATION LEVELS (Estimated number of cycles per minimum dimension) (From reference 11) TASK DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE #CYCLES Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. A bright spot on the display - may be a tree, tank, or rock. 0.5 to 1.5 The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. A stationary blob on a road has a reasonable chance of being a vehicle but also could be a puddle or a tree shadow. 1.0 to 2.0 The blob has a high probability of being the object sought because of such clues as motion, location, etc. A moving blob on a road is probably a vehicle. 1.0 to 2.5 Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class can be differentiated. Differentiate between a tracked and wheeled vehicle. 2.0 to 5.0 Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. Passenger car, van, pickup, tank, armored personnel carrier. 2.0 to 10 Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. M60, T-52, particular person, etc. 4.5 to 15
Table 20-4 provides an even larger set of discrimination levels that now incorporates decisions about the target. Figure 20-3 pictorially represents these levels in a decision tree. The decision tree approach can be applied to automatic target recognizers and machine vision systems.12 ATRs probably require higher resolution than the Johnson criteria because artificial processors are less sophisticated than the human brain. Table 20-4 AN EXTENDED DISCRIMINATION LEVEL TABLE (Estimated number of cycles per minimum dimension) (Continued next page) TASK DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE # OF CYCLES Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. A bright spot on the display - may be a tree, tank, or rock. 0.5 The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. A blob on a road has a reasonable chance of being a vehicle but could be a puddle or a tree shadow. 1.0 The blob has a high probability of being the object sought because of motion and location. A moving blob on a road is probably a vehicle. 1.5 Orientation An object's rough orientation may be discerned. Horizontal rectangle. 1.75 Clutter Rejection The object is a potential target and not a clutter object. Target. 1.80 Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. Tracked or wheeled Vehicle. 2.0 Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class is differentiated. Differentiate between a tracked and wheeled vehicle. 3.0 Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class is differentiated. Passenger car, van, pickup, tank, or armored personnel carrier. 4.0
Table 20-4 (Continued) Identification friendly or foe The country of manufacture may be determined. Warsaw pact tank. 6.0 Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. M60, T-72 8.0 Target selection Real targets may be distinguished from replica decoys. Real T-72. 10.0 Operational success Ownership of object may be determined and probable hostile/non-hostile intent may be established. Iraqi T-72 (hostile). 12.0 Classical Detection Orientation Target [No Target Horizont Vertical Recognition Type Recognition Classification Tank Clutter Rejection Vehicle Tracked APC SP Gun Target Building Wheeled Clutter Operational Success Discrimination Friendly or Foe Foe Friendly Identification Hostile T62 T72 Real Decoy Non-Hostile Figure 20-3. A decision tree for target acquisition. Progressively more information is required as the discrimination level increases (moving left to right). Both target and background information is used at lower levels. Target detail is the discriminator at higher levels. The minimum dimension used is the dimension of that object that distinguishes it from all the other objects within the class. For example, if the radar dish on a ship's antenna is the only feature that distinguishes two ships, then the dish size becomes the minimum dimension. Here, the detection of the dish becomes the criterion for ship identification. No criteria have been found to hold for a wide spectrum of targets or conditions.
20.1.3. TARGET TRANSFER PROBABILITY FUNCTION The process of seeing is somewhat a learned ability. It is a perceptual one, accomplished by the brain, affected by and incorporating other sensory systems such as emotions, learning, and memory. The relationships are many and not well understood. Seeing varies among individuals and temporally within an individual. The use of any metric (such as detection, recognition, or identification) must be treated statistically rather than as an absolute value The MRT (developed in Chapter 19., System Performance Models') is the average threshold of an ensemble of observers. Threshold detection, by definition, is the 50% probability of detection. That is, 50% of the observers will see the target and 50% will not. As illustrated in Figure 20-4, the cumulative probability runs from zero (no one can see the target) to 100% (everyone can see the target). The usual MRT experiment is to select a specific spatial frequency target and vary its AT. Range performance is different. The range to the target varies. As will be shown in Section 21.1., Range Prediction Methodology, variation in range equates to a variation in spatial frequency. Thus to incorporate a probability of detection as a function of range, it is necessary to develop a probability as a function of spatial frequency that follows the MRT curve. As shown in Figure 20-5, the threshold values in MRT and range are assumed to be the same. Figure 20-4. Cumulative probability of detection for an ensemble of observers.
Figure 20-5. Variation in observer threshold as a function of ЛТ and spatial frequency (range). The results of threshold experiments, such as Johnson’s, provide an approximate measure of the 50% probability of discrimination level. Results of several field tests13 provided the cumulative probability of discrimination or target transfer probability function (TTPF) (Table 20-5). The number of cycle for discrimination and the TTPF are a result of a large number of experiments. They represent the average of an ensemble of similar sized vehicles operating under a variety of conditions. For example 80% probability of recognition simply means that approximately 80% of the population (ensemble of observers) should recognize the target. It does not mean that a specific individual will recognize a specific vehicle 80% of the time. Table 20-5 DISCRIMINATION CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY PROBABILITY of DISCRIMINATION MULTIPLIER 1.00 3.0 0.95 2.0 0.80 1.5 0.50 1.0 0.30 0.75 0.10 0.50 0.02 0.25 0 0
The TTPF can be used for all discrimination tasks by simply multiplying the 50% probability of performing the task by the TTPF multiplier. By convention, each 50% probability is labeled as 7V5O (e.g., TV50 is 1, 4, or 8 cycles for detection, recognition, or identification, respectively). For example, from Table 20-5, the probability of 95% recognition is 2 TV50 = 2(4) = 8 cycles across the target's minimum dimension. An empirical fit14 to the data provides (20-1) where (20-2) Visual psychophysical experiments suggest that the eye response follow a log- normal distribution. The probability density function appears15 to follow p№ = 1 Г log (TV) - log (TV50 ) 2 [ log (<t) (20-3) and the cumulative probability is Iog(7V) P(JV) = jp(JV)dlog(7V), 0 (20-4) where log(rr) = 0.198. While the log-normal approach is based upon a physically plausible foundation, Equations 20-1 and 20-4 provide similar numerical results. Equation 20-1 is shown in Figure 20-6 with the data points given in Table 20-5 for TV50 = 1. Figure 20-7 illustrates the full TTPF for the three levels of discrimination as identified by Johnson. Because of the variability in the population, while some people can only detect the target, others will recognize it, and a small portion will identify the target. It is this variation that leads to the wide variations seen at field tests. Table 20-6 highlights the variations. For example, with four cycles across the minimum dimension, everyone will detect the target, 50% will recognize it, and 11% will identify the target. The detection curve is very
steep so that there is minimal population variation in the ability to detect targets. However, there is a gradual change in the identification curve and this suggests a wide variation in the population when identifying targets. NUMBER OF CYCLES Figure 20-6. Target transfer probability function (TTPF). Both the data and the empirical fit are shown with TV50 = 1. NUMBER OF CYCLES Figure 20-7. Target transfer probability function for detection, recognition, and identification. Table 20-6 POPULATION PERCENTAGES (Cycles across the minimum dimension) DISCRIMINATION LEVEL 1 CYCLE 4 CYCLES 8 CYCLES Detection 50% 100% 100% Recognition 1.8% 50% 94% Identification 0.3% 11% 50%
When an analyst wishes to predict the performance of a specific task, he should make a judgment about the difficulty of the task and vary TV50 accordingly. Range predictions will hold if the analyst exercises good judgment in selecting the discrimination criterion. This value is based upon either experimentally measured results, by analogy to these results, or by prior experience. When a particular TV50 is selected, it provides a basis for system-to-system comparison. The predicted range performance based upon a particular TV50 should be considered as representative and not as an absolute value. Owen and Dawson stated16 A significant shortcoming in updating FLIR modeling is in the area of the resolution criteria, expressed as N50. . . Apparently, most have implicitly assumed that the values established in the early 1970s will suffice for present modeling requirements and that system-to-system variations in these quantities can be dismissed. 20.1.4. CLUTTER As clutter increases, the ability to discern a target decreases. To offset this reduced capability, either N50 must increase or the target signature must be redefined (see Section 17.8., Thermal Structure Metrics). Schmieder and Weathersby17 broadly categorized clutter into high, moderate and low regions. They stated, Designers would only have to estimate their background clutter conditions well enough to place their operating point in one of the three regions. Their experiments simulated a rural North American or rural European landscape. They defined the signal-to-clutter ratio as and max target value - average background SCR —--------------------------------- (20-5) & clutter (20-6) where cfx- is the rms value of the pixel values in a square cell that has side dimensions of approximately twice the target minimum dimension. The scene is composed of N adjoining cells. The use of adjoining cells introduces a spatial weighting factor that is similar to the spatial integration offered by the eye/brain process. Clutter sizes that are equal to the object size weigh more heavily in this calculation.
The results are given in Table 20-7. Field experience demonstrates that the Johnson detection criterion applies to a "general medium to low clutter" environment.18 Therefore, Schmieder and Weathersby normalized their 50% probability of detection in moderate clutter to one cycle. These experimental findings roughly follow the empirical TTPF (Equation 20-1). It is convenient to use 0.5, 1.0, and 2.5 as a multiplier to W50 for low, moderate, and high clutter environments, respectively. Clutter only affects detection (further discussed in Section 21.10., Search). N5Q for classification, recognition, and identification do not change. Table 20-7 TARGET TRANSFER PROBABILITY FUNCTION WHEN CLUTTER IS PRESENT (From reference 17) PROBABILITY OF DETECTION LOW CLUTTER SCR >10 MODERATE CLUTTER 1 < SCR < 10 HIGH CLUTTER SCR<1 1.0 1.7 2.8 ♦ ♦ 0.95 1.0 1.9 ** 0.90 0.9 1.7 7.0* 0.80 0.75 1.3 5.0 0.50 0.5 1.0 2.5 0.30 0.3 0.75 2.0 0.10 0.15 0.35 1.4 0.02 0.05 0.1 1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 * no data available estimated 20.1.5. MODERATE ASPECT RATIO TARGETS Both laboratory and field range performance data provided a large spread in values that was, in part, attributed to target aspect ratio (e.g., Table 20-3). This spread in values can be reduced by taking the target aspect ratio into account. This correction factor was not applied to the discrimination levels (TV50 values), but was applied to the MRT equation.19 The eye spatially integrates over the target area.
For MRT testing, the standard test pattern has a 7:1 aspect ratio. For most MRC testing, the tri-bar target is used (aspect ratio is 5:1). For horizontal MRTs or MRCs where the vertical noise filters can be neglected (Equation 19-26 and Equation 19-51), Еу-н(Л Ту (20-7) aspect The MRT or MRC correction assumes that the discrimination level cycles should subtend the same solid angle as the target (Figure 20-8). Bar lengths are made equal to the target maximum dimension. The effective bar width is the target minimum dimension divided by the number of cycles required for discrimination MRTtarget — к If 11 target IN W rr target (20-8) or MRTtarget = MRT del . s V IN a (20-9) Detection Recognition Identification Figure 20-8 Modification of bar aspect ratio to match the target solid angle. This approach is valid only for targets with moderate aspect ratios.
The target aspect ratio, a, is equal to the maximum dimension (assumed to be ^target) divided by the minimum dimension (assumed to be Ht(lrgef For MRT predictions, Taspect is 7. For MRC predictions, Taspect is 5. For example, for simple detection only one cycle is required (7V=7V5O = 1), then for a 2:1 aspect ratio target (« = 2): MRTtarga = Д MRT^bar . (20-10) This approach is not in the 1975 NVL model but has been incorporated in some user models. This may explain, in part, differences in range performance predicted by different organizations. The adjustment, Equation 20-9, is used only for field predictions. It is not used for predicting laboratory MRT values. MRTtarget equals MRTmotlel when 2Na = T„pec,. 20.2. TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION Johnson used the minimum dimension in his work, whereas the critical dimension is equal to the square root of the target area. The critical dimension is hc target * (20-11) The two-dimensional FLIR92 model uses the critical dimension approach in the same manner that the 1975 NVL model uses the minimum dimension. Two- dimensional discrimination may be applied to automatic target recognizers and machine vision systems. Although called two-dimensional, FLIR92 is actually a two-directional model. The two directions are horizontal and vertical. Two- dimensional discrimination follows the FLIR92 approach. 20.2.1. PIXELS on TARGET For large aspect ratio targets, rather than use the number of cycles, the number of pixels on the target was selected. A pixel is the smallest element that can be resolved by an imaging system. The conversion from pixels (picture elements) to cycles (Johnson criterion) must be performed with extreme care. O'Neill20 used television images of a ship model that was equivalent to a ship 46 feet high and 520 feet long. His data was converted into pixels (Table 20- 8). Unfortunately, the terminology used by O'Neill is not consistent with the Johnson terminology. Moser21 only used black and white silhouettes of ships. He
determined that detection required 36 pixels for broad side viewing, 100 pixels to discern the object as a ship, and 500 pixels to determine superstructure location. Table 20-8 SHIP DISCRIMINATION (From reference 20) DISCRIMINATION PIXELS REQUIRED RESOLUTION ON SHIP (FEET) Detect object 36 25.78 Recognize as vessel 100 15.47 Recognize ship structure 500 6.90 Recognize ship type 1,000 4.89 Classify king posts 2,000 3.46 Discern radar detail 4,300 2.36 Detect 40 mm gun barrel 12,000 1.41 The number of pixels in a solid rectangle is well defined. It is simply the horizontal number multiplied by the vertical number. For targets that have open structure (ships and aircraft), the number is the maximum number of horizontal pixels multiplied by the maximum number of vertical pixels. Although there is open structure (e.g., areas with no target) we shall say that this product is the number of pixels on the target. This is simply the rectangle that just encloses the ship's outline. Figure 20-9 is identical to Figure 14-5 (see Section 14.2.7., Pixels on Target). From Figure 20-9b to 20-9e, there are approximately 14, 45, 200 and 850 pixels, respectively, on a circumscribed rectangle about the ship. Ship detection takes place when the superstructure is just visible. The ship's type is discerned when there are about 850 pixels on the target. These images are consistent with Moser's and O'Neill's findings.
(a) (b) Figure 20-9. Ship silhouette that has been degraded into large pixels. The pixel intensity is averaged over the area. Only eight gray levels are shown, (a) Ship, (b) 14 pixels, (c) 45 pixels, (d) 200 pixels, and (e) 850 pixels contained in a rectangle that circumscribes the ship. The number of pixels varies with sample-scene phasing.
20.2.2. FLIR92 DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS Although pixels and half-cycles are not necessarily identical, it is convenient to use the Nyquist criterion that two pixels are required to uniquely reproduce a sinusoid. With two pixels per cycle, the number of pixels on a rectangular target of size Htarset x Wt(irget, at a distance R, is < FT V H , (20-12) I K A K ) where Nx and Ny are the number of cycles across the target in the horizontal and vertical directions, respectively and fx and fy are the spatial frequencies associated with the target. Equating the rectangular target to a square target of equal area, Neff sj N pixels x у Iw H у target target R Jf* fy (20-13) The FLIR92 methodology defines the target effective critical dimension as hc and the effective discrimination frequency as feff h Neff=^feff (20-14) The number of cycles on the target is Neff!2. For discrimination, these cycles are across the critical (fictitious) dimension hc. Then he *2D=-^flD- (20-15) For non-rectangular targets, this has been modified to where (as before) h = A у target • (20-16) (20-17) The original Johnson methodology was validated using common module thermal imaging systems. Those systems typically had a 2:1 difference in horizontal to vertical resolution. The vertical resolution was limited by the Nyquist frequency of the detector center-to-center spacing. For validation purposes,
military vehicles were used and the minimum dimension tended to be in the vertical direction although the predictions were based upon horizontal performance. Converting to a two-dimension model requires removing the directional bias imposed by the one-dimensional model. This is achieved by reducing all values by 25%, or equivalently, multiplying22 all discrimination values by 0.75 (Table 20-9). This adjustment then provides the same range performance predictions for the common module scanning systems whether predicted by the one-dimensional or two-dimensional model. Aim was replaced by classification when FLIR92 was introduced. Table 20-9 COMMON TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION LEVELS TASK DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED NUMBER OF CYCLES, N50 Detection The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 0.75 Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. 1.50 Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 3.00 Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 6.00 The values given in Table 20-10 are only guidelines. Strongly cued targets may require fewer cycles. When an analyst wishes to predict the performance of a specific task, he should make a judgment about the difficulty of the task and vary NS() accordingly. Since the U.S. Army is the proponent agency for thermal imaging systems, most of the data has centered on discriminating typical Army land-based objects: tanks, armored personnel carriers, and vehicles. Table 20-10 represents the average values used for targets with near unity aspect ratio. A man is a unique target. TV50 = 0.75 for both detection and recognition since it is nearly a simultaneous process. Identification is not defined for the man target.23
Table 20-10 EXTENDED TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION LEVELS (These descriptors can be used for machine vision systems) TASK DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED NUMBER OF CYCLES, N5() Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. 0.38 The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 0.75 The blob has a high probability of bemg the object sought because of motion, location, etc. 1.13 Orientation The object is approximately symmetric or asymmetric and its rough orientation may be discerned. 1.31 Clutter Rejection The object is a potential target and not a clutter object. 1.35 Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. 1.50 Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class can be differentiated. 2.25 Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 3.00 Identification friendly or foe The country of manufacture may be determined. 4.50 Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 6.00 Target selection Real targets may be distinguished from replica decoys. 7.50 Operational success Ownership of object may be determined and probable hostile/non-hostile intent may be established. 9.00
Table 20-10 EXTENDED TWO-DIMENSIONAL DISCRIMINATION LEVELS (These descriptors can be used for machine vision systems) TASK DESCRIPTION RECOMMENDED NUMBER OF CYCLES, N5() Detection A blob has been discerned that may or may not warrant further investigation. 0.38 The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 0.75 The blob has a high probability of bemg the object sought because of motion, location, etc. 1.13 Orientation The object is approximately symmetric or asymmetric and its rough orientation may be discerned. 1.31 Clutter Rejection The object is a potential target and not a clutter object. 1.35 Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. 1.50 Type Recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its general class can be differentiated. 2.25 Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 3.00 Identification friendly or foe The country of manufacture may be determined. 4.50 Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 6.00 Target selection Real targets may be distinguished from replica decoys. 7.50 Operational success Ownership of object may be determined and probable hostile/non-hostile intent may be established. 9.00
4. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975). 5. J. M. Lloyd, Thermal Imaging Systems, pp. 388-429, Plenum Press, New York (1975). 6. F. A. Resell, "Static Field Performance Models," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F. Resell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pp. 97-110, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 7. F. A. Resell, "Observer Resolution Requirements," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F. Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pp. 237-251, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 8. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 57-120. This is Volume 4 of the Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S Accetta and D L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). This 64-page chapter contains 121 references. 9. F. A. Rosell, "Observer Resolution Requirements," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F. Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pg. 248, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 10. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pp. 62-63. This is Volume 4 of the Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). ILF. A. Rosell, "Static Field Performance Models," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F Rosell and G. Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pg. 100, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 12. R. C. Harney, "Sensor Fusion for Target Recognition: A Review of Fundamentals and a Potential Approach to Multisensor Requirements Allocation," in Infrared Technology XX, B. F. Andresen ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 226, pp. 316-335 (1994). 13. J. A. Ratches, "Static Performance Model for Thermal Imaging Systems," Optical Engineering, 15(6), pp. 525-530(1976). 14. J. D. Howe, "Electro-Optical Imaging System Performance Prediction," in Electro-Optical Systems Design, Analysis, and Testing, M. C. Dudzik, ed., pg. 92. This is Volume 4 of the Infrared and Electro-Optical Systems Handbook, J. S. Accetta and D. L. Shumaker, eds., copublished by Environmental Research Institute of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI and SPIE Press, Bellingham, WA (1993). 15. G. C. Holst, "Applying the Log-normal Distribution to Target Detection," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 213-216(1992). 16. P. R. Owen and J. A. Dawson, "Resolving the Differences in Oversampled and Undersampled Imaging Sensors: Updated Target Acquisition Modeling Strategies for Staring and Scanning FLIR Systems," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 251-261 (1992). 17. D. E. Schmieder and M. R. Weathersby, "Detection Performance in Clutter with Variable Resolution," IEEE Transactions on Aerospace and Electronic Systems, Vol. AES-19(4), pp. 622-630 (1983). 18. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert. R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, pg. 15, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975).
19. F. A. Resell, "Static Field Performance Models," in The Fundamentals of Thermal Imaging Systems, F. Resell and G Harvey, eds., NRL Report #8311, pg. 101-102, Naval Research Laboratory, Washington, D.C. (1979). 20. G. J. O'Neill, "The Quantification of Image Detail as a Function of Irradiance by Empirical Tests," NAVAIRDEVCEN Technical Memorandum NADC-202139:GJO, Naval Air Development Center, Warminster, PA (1974). 21. P. M. Moser, "Mathematical Model of FLIR Performance," NAVAIRDEVCEN Technical Memorandum NADC-20203:PMM, Naval Air Development Center, Warminster, PA (1972). 22. L. Scott and R. Tomkinson, "An Update on the C1 2 3 4 5NVEO FLIR90 and ACQUIRE Sensor Performance Model," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing II, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1488, pp. 99-109 (1991). 23. M. Friedman, D. Tomkinson, L. Scott, В O'Kane, and J. D'Agostino, "Standard Night Vision Thermal Modeling Parameters," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing III, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 1689, pp. 204-212 (1992). 24. F. A. Resell and R. H. Wilson, "Performance Synthesis of Electro-Optical Sensors," AFAL-TR-74, Air Force Avionics Laboratory, Wright Patterson AFB, OFI (April 1974). EXERCISES 1. You are analyzing an image intensifier. What values would you use for N50 for detection, recognition, and identification? 2. Plot the TTPF for classical recognition using the range of values of N50 provided in Table 20-3. Discuss the variations. If you choose 10 cycles for classical recognition, what values would you use for detection and identification? 3. Plot the TTPF using Equation 20-1 and Equation 20-4. Let7V5O = 1. 4. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of Equation 20-1 and Equation 20-4. 5. Although not used in FLIR92, what target aspect ratio and cycle criterion should you use so that MRTtarget=MRT4.bar? Describe a scenario where these values are appropriate.
21 RANGE PREDICTIONS Optimal system performance is obtained after performing a series of tradeoff analyses as a function of a variety of variables. Typical variables include field-of-view, atmospheric transmittance, optical transmittance, target size, target intensity, and line-of-sight stabilization. That is, range is plotted as a function of, say, field-of-field. The optimum FOV might be the value that provides the maximum range. Finding the optimum design is an iterative decision process. Every step in the design process that has conflicting needs requires a tradeoff analysis. The various variables can be considered as different axes in multidimensional space. Since it is not physically possible to illustrate more than three dimensions any time, each tradeoff analysis represents only one plane through this space. Each tradeoff provides a different view of overall optimization. Target discrimination (Johnson criterion) links the system performance model with range performance. Using the MRT or MRC to predict range performance means that the target is just barely perceptible and the perceived signal-to-noise ratio is SNRth . The system analyst must know which factors modify the MRT or MRC in the desired direction. To improve range performance for a system that is resolution-limited requires changing the system's resolution. Similarly, to improve range performance for a system that is sensitivity-limited requires increasing the system's sensitivity. Those factors (Table 21-1) which increase sensitivity often reduce resolution (Figure 21-1). Table 21-1 FACTORS that AFFECT SENSITIVITY and RESOLUTION SENSITIVITY RESOLUTION Detector responsivity Optical transmittance f-number NEBW Detector area Subsystems MTFs Nyquist frequency DAS
MRT SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 21-1. Changing the focal length affects both sensitivity and resolution. An optimal system will balance sensitivity and resolution. It is commonly understood what is meant by a sensitivity-limited system. Improvements include increasing D*, aperture diameter, optical transmittance, and detector size. Resolution is not uniquely defined. The system's resolution may be limited by the optical design, DAS, Nyquist frequency or some electrical bandwidth. For example, in high speed line- scanners, the detector time constant can significantly affect the overall system MTF. The rules-of-the-thumb so often quoted are usually applicable only to detector MTF limited systems. These "rules" are not universally valid and must be considered in context with the system design and application. According to Shumaker and Wood1, a model should answer four basic questions: 1. What characteristics (specifications) must an electro-optical imaging system have to do a given task? 2. What design parameters will enable a system to satisfy given specifications? 3. What laboratory performance values will verify that a design provides desired characteristics? 4. Given an electro-optical imaging system design, how can it best be deployed and what are the expected results? Models are adequate for comparative analysis but may not predict absolute performance. If a model does not predict the situation, the following questions must be asked. Are the underlying assumptions valid? Were the
correct equations used? Were some parameters left out that should have been included? Were the correct values used (actual hardware values versus design values)? Are the test results statistically sound? Was the test procedure appropriately controlled? Range predictions and the shapes of the curves shown in this chapter can only be considered representative. The shape changes depending upon the discrimination level selected, target size, target-background differential intensity, and atmospheric transmittance. Depending upon the system design, particular performance curves may not look like those shown here. The 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 are the main analytic tools for deriving system requirements and predicting performance. They are used for comparative analysis and are reportedly accurate to ± 20% in range predictions2 for recognition under favorable target and atmospheric conditions. They were validated for modest sized targets (tanks, tanks, and jeeps) at modest ranges (5 to 10 km). The accuracy of range predictions for large aspect ratio targets is unknown. Although FLIR92 is called dimensional, it is a \wo-directional model. That is, the threshold resolution performance is predicted along two orthogonal axes, taken as the vertical and horizontal directions. Resolution in any other direction (e.g., 45°) is not used. When used with the Johnson criteria, FLIR92 is probably better at predicting the range for rectangular objects whose edges are aligned with the thermal imaging system axes. 21.1. RANGE PREDICTION METHODOLOGY The Johnson criterion provides the link between the target angular subtense and the spatial frequency scale on the MRT graph. The apparent target △T at the system's entrance aperture becomes the threshold MRT. 21.1.1. ATMOSPHERIC TRANSMITTANCE The spectrally weighted atmospheric transmittance is (Л) ториа O)Re (Я)Ме (Л, Д T) ал 1 _ A________________________________ ave ~ 2 [?враа(Л)яе(Л)ме(Л,дт)ал A (21-1)
If Tatm(A) has no spectral features over [2j , ;2], then « ratm_ave and the apparent temperature differential, &Tapp at the system's entrance aperture is provided by the back-of-the-envelope approximation д тр Д TT app ~ Tatm-ave (21-2) If either f or /2 enter an atmospheric absorption band, then &Tapp is smaller than the back-of-the-envelope approximation suggests. The 1975 NVL model and FLIR92 were validated during field tests when the atmosphere was relatively clear (ratm_ave ~ 0.90/km). Extension to other cases is hypothetical. LOWTRAN/MODTRAN is typically used to calculate ratm(E). These models are excellent predictors at short and medium ranges (up to 20 km) but may be in error at extremely long ranges such as those encountered in IRST applications (~ 100 km) due to the uncertainty in atmospheric transmittance. 21.1.2. ACQUIRE Developed by NVL, the ACQUIRE model3 4 provides range prediction methodologies for both target discrimination and hot spot detection. Since it uses target-background intensity, atmospheric transmittance, and discrimination levels (Johnson criteria) it can be used for both visible and infrared sensors. The MRT or MRC abscissa is converted into a range scale using a target discrimination value. When using the 1975 NVL model, the number of cycles that appear across the target is (21-3) where h is the minimum dimension and h/R is the target angular subtense at range R. When using the FLIR92, the critical dimension is hc = (Лг)'/2 and h *2D=-^flD. (21-4) К For example, it the target size is 3 m and 4 cycles are required across this dimension, then the conversion from spatial frequency to range is 3 3 R = —fx or R = —f2D . (21-5) 4 4 Table 21-2 provides the most common discrimination levels. Extended levels are found in Table 20-4 and Table 20-10.
Table 21-2 COMMON DISCRIMINATION LEVELS TASK DESCRIPTION l-D Nso 2-D N50 Detection The blob has a reasonable probability of being an object being sought. 1.0 0.75 Aim Aiming cross hairs on a target with sufficient accuracy to fire a missile. 2.5 - Classification The broad class of object types to which the object belongs may be determined. - 1.5 Classical recognition Object discerned with sufficient clarity that its specific class can be differentiated. 4.0 3.0 Identification Object discerned with sufficient clarity to specify the type within the class. 8.0 6.0 Based solely upon the Johnson criteria, recognition and identification ranges should be 1/4 and 1/8 of the detection range (Figure 21-2). However, the MRT and atmospheric transmittance change these range ratios. The intersection of the MRT curve and &Tapp (Equation 21-2) is the range at which the target can be discerned according to the discrimination level selected (Figure 21-3). Detection Recognition 1 Cycle 4 Cycles Identification 8 Cycles Figure 21-2. One-dimensional discrimination. Based solely upon the Johnson criteria, the target size ratios will be 1:4:8 for detection, recognition, and identification.
MRT MRT Figure 21-3. Recognition range for a typical common module system (one-dimensional), (a) MRT and (b) conversion of spatial frequency into range. A'5O = 4, h = 3 m, and AT= 2.5° C. Using Tatm_avei ETapp is a straight line when plotted in semi- logarithmic coordinates. The average atmospheric attenuation is 0.85/km. The recognition range is approximately 3.9 km. 21.1.3. RANGE PERFORMANCE PROBABILITY The target transfer probability function (TTPF) is used to predict the probability of range performance. Here, a range is selected and the kTapp is calculated. This value intersects the MRT curve at what is called the critical frequency. Multiplying the target angular subtense by the critical frequency
provides the number of cycles across the target. Referring to the TTPF, the range probability is determined for that particular range. Then a new range is selected and the process is repeated until the entire probability range is determined (Figure 21-4). SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 21-4. Methodology to determine range performance probability. 21.1.4. SAMPLING EFFECTS With staring arrays, the highest spatial frequency that can be faithfully reproduced is the Nyquist frequency. With FLIR92, the MRT is shown to approach infinity at fn. Figure 21-5 illustrates typical scanning and staring array MRTs. When the probability of range detection is calculated using the target transfer probability function, the Nyquist limit reduces the range (Figure 21-6). This range reduction is an artifact of the FLIR92 model.
NVTherm (Section 19.3) incorporates the MTF squeeze (see Section 14.5., MTF Squeeze) which overcomes the artificially imposed Nyquist frequency limit. As a result, range predictions using the MRT calculated by NVTherm do not have the "brick wall" shown in Figure 21-6. PROBABILITY MRT RELATIVE SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 21-5. Representative MRTs for a scanning system and staring system calculated by FLIR92. At Nyquist frequency, the MRT is assumed to be infinity. Figure 21-6. Range probability for a staring and an equivalent scanning system. The shapes of the curves depend upon the MRT, AT, atmospheric transmittance, andTV50. Since the MRT is forced to infinity at the Nyquist frequency, the range hits a "brick wall" at Nyquist frequency. This is an artifact created by FLIR92.
21.2. TWO FIELDS-OF-VIEW Optical zoom increases the ability to discern detail by changing the focal length of the system. If a system is detector MTF limited system, optical zoom increases range performance. Most systems have a fixed f-number. As the focal length decreases, the aperture decreases to maintain the f-number. Continuous zoom optics tend to be expensive. Instead, many imaging systems have separate (discrete) fields-of-view. A wide field-of-view (WFOV) is selected initially to provide situational awareness to the observer. After detection, he then switches to a narrow field-of-view (NFOV) for target recognition. Here it is assumed that the observer will concentrate on the target and no longer needs situational awareness for this part of the mission. The Johnson criterion has 4:1 difference in detection and recognition (TV50) values. For detector MTF limited systems, this suggests that the WFOV/NFOV ratio should be 4:1 (Figure 21-7). 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 RELATIVE SPATIAL FREQUENCY Figure 21-7. For detector MTF limited systems, the NFOV should be approximately four times smaller than the WFOV when the WFOV is used for detection and the NFOV is used for recognition.
However, due to atmospheric transmittance effects (sensitivity considerations), the ratio should be somewhat less. Depending upon the desired discrimination, the ratio may be different. For systems mounted on high speed aircraft, reaction time (time to switch FOV and reacquire the target) may dictate a different FOV ratio. That is, during the switching time, the range to the target may have decreased significantly and thereby require a different FOV. 21.3. RESOLUTION versus SENSITIVITY Too often, range performance studies have considered sensitivity issues or resolution issues only. The back-of-the-envelope sensitivity approximation, tr AT gppg — atm~ave NEDT (21-6) does not include the observer's response. The back-of-the-envelope resolution approximation is Range ------------. (21 -7) Resolution Resolution usually refers to that spatial frequency where the MRT asymptotes to infinity. Thus, the resolution range defined by Equation 21-7 can only be achieved with a target whose AT also approaches infinity. In real systems, it is sometimes difficult to specify a reasonable value for the resolution limit. The shape of the range performance curves usually indicates whether a system is operating near the resolution-limit or the sensitivity-limit. Figure 21-8 illustrates range as a function of target AT. For very low target signatures, the system is starved for signal and is sensitivity-limited. For large ATs, range is limited by the target angular subtense. Here the system is resolution-limited. When approaching the resolution-limit, the target temperature is irrelevant. The change from sensitivity-limited to resolution-limited is gradual. For sensitivity- limited systems, detection ranges approximately follow the back-of-the- envelope equation (Equation 21-6). A system can change from a resolution-limited system to a sensitivity- limited system as the focal length increases. For very long focal lengths (small field-of-view), the system may be optics limited. As the focal length decreases, the system may become limited by the detector (Figure 21-9).
20 15 b 10 5 0 resolution limited sensitivity limited 0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1 RELATIVE RANGE Figure 21-8. Representative range as a function of target AT. The ordinate is proportional to the signal reaching the detector. A similarly shaped curve is obtained when the ordinate is optical transmittance. RELATIVE RANGE (km) Figure 21-9. Representative detection range as a function of field-of-view. The maximum range occurs when resolution and sensitivity are balanced. The optimum field-of-view and the shape of the curve depend upon the discrimination task, target size, and target AT.
When a system is resolution-limited, moderate change in atmospheric transmittance produce only moderate change in range performance. On the other hand, when a system is sensitivity-limited, moderate change in atmospheric transmittance has a very large impact on range. The change from sensitivity- limited to resolution-limited as the criterion changes from detection to recognition is typical. (Figure 21-10). u. ш О о 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0 RELATIVE RANGE Figure 21-10. Representative range as a function of the atmospheric attenuation coefficient, (a) Sensitivity-limited and (b) resolution-limited systems. Note that the detection range (a) is much greater than the recognition range (b). For a given atmospheric transmittance, the ratio of ranges is not 4.
21.4. LINE-OF-SIGHT STABILIZATION Random motion (jitter) adversely affects the high spatial frequencies. For resolution-limited systems, jitter can reduce target range. Since jitter is often induced by the platform to which the imaging system is attached, line-of-sight stabilization is used to counteract the platform motion. Figure 21-11 illustrates a typical range dependence upon residual jitter. The residual jitter is the random motion that remains after stabilization has occurred. Jitter has little affect on sensitivity-limited systems. Figure 21-11. Representative range as a function of relative residual jitter (rr/DAS) after line-of-sight stabilization. For a system that is detector MTF limited, the knee in the curve occurs approximately when the rms jitter is approximately 1/10 times the DAS (see Figure 6-16). 21.5. TARGET SIZE As the target size increases, the apparent detection range appears to have no bound. This occurs because the predicted MRT approaches zero as the spatial frequency approaches zero. Large objects are treated as low spatial frequencies. The apparent detection of larger targets at long distances is a result of the Kornfeld-Lawson eye model used in both the 1975 NVL model and FLIR92. Figure 21-12 illustrates the range for three different eye models (see Section 6.7.2., Eye MTF). With the inhibitory response, the detection range actually decreases as the target size grows. Recall that the discrimination range
is that range at which the perceived signal-to-noise ratio is SNRth. The eye requires more signal to perceive large targets and this manifests itself as a decrease in range. The exceptionally large targets shown in Figure 21-12 are well past the region where the 1975 NVL model was validated. The deviation of the other eye models at 10 meters should not be interpreted to mean that they are more accurate. Rather, the analyst should interpret range predictions for large targets with extreme caution. Specifically, the range predictions for detection of very large buildings (e.g., aircraft hangars), long bridges, railroad tracks, extremely long trailers, and large ships should be approached with care. Figure 21-12. Representative range predictions as a function of target size. For very large targets, the image size presented to the eye may be in the region of the inhibitory response. Curve A is the Komfeld-Lawson eye model, Curve В is simply MRT = к NEDT/MTF, and curve C is a model that includes the eye/brain inhibitory response. The shape of the curves depends upon the discrimination level selected, atmospheric transmittance and target AT. With head movement, the inhibitory response will not be present. That is, Curve C will not exist with head movement.
21.6. ELECTRIC ZOOM Electronic zoom only replicates pixels on the monitor. It does not increase resolution. If the display is small, it provides some range performance improvement. But this improvement is misleading because it is equivalent to being physically closer to the display. If excessive zoom is used, the image becomes blocky and is often considered unacceptable. Models such as FLIR92 assume linear system theory is valid. Generalized models cannot account for nonlinear processing and sampling effects. As such, most models do not indicate when blockiness becomes apparent. 21.7. STADIUM FLIR As indicated in Section 19.3., STADIUM FLIR is a user-friendly shell4 around FLIR92 that permits numerous tradeoff analyses. Detection, recognition, and identification ranges can be plotted as a function any desired input parameter. This allows system optimization based upon specific requirements. As with all tradeoff analyses, the maximum range is a function of the specific scenario. If the atmospheric transmittance, target AT, target size, or discrimination level changes, then the “optimum” design changes. This was illustrated by the numerous examples in this text comparing sensitivity-limited and resolution-limited systems. All the tradeoff analyses illustrated in this chapter can be performed by STADIUM FLIR. 21.8. MWIR versus LWIR SYSTEMS It was shown in Section 15.6., MWIR versus LWIR, that based solely upon the atmospheric transmittance considerations the MWIR spectral region may be preferred to the LWIR spectral region in a high humidity environment. This is true if the target AT is sufficiently high and the system noise is sufficiently low such that the target can be detected at long ranges. Many arguments about the merits of one band over the other were based upon either sensitivity-limited or resolution-limited systems. Real systems are more complex and are a function of both sensitivity and resolution. Often systems are sensitivity-limited for detection criterion and resolution-limited for recognition criterion. As the discrimination task moves from one regime into the other, the selection of MWIR to LWIR may change. Range performance
depends upon the MRT and therefore depends upon all the subsystem MTFs and the NEDT. It is commonplace to assign the same AT to the target for both the MWIR and LWIR regions. This is valid if the emissivities (target and background) are the same in both spectral regions. However, if different (they are probably different), the variation in AT can significantly affect the selection of MWIR over LWIR systems. Which band is better? It depends upon the sensor type, design, and operation. InSb, HgCdTe and PtSi detectors can all be used in MWIR systems. HgCdTe, quantum well, and uncooled technology detectors can be LWIR sensors. Some are scanning systems and others are staring systems. It depends upon the system MTFs (Chapters 6 through 11), the environment (Chapters 15- 17), system noise (Chapter 18), and the required discrimination (Chapter 20). This does not include the hardware design issues, cost, availability of components, reliability, etc. So - which is better? It depends. 21.9. REAL TARGETS Contextual cues can provide more information about the target than the target itself. For example, if a blob is moving, it must be a vehicle. Contextual cues cannot be included in any model for they are too complex and this can lead to wide variations between predicted range performance and actual range performance. Signature models cannot be used without first analyzing their application. For example, a simple area-weighted AT may be adequate for predicting common module performance or when viewing the front of a tank. The use of an average AT applies to some real targets without internal structure. A target's internal structure may not be visible at long ranges and may not affect detection. However, at shorter ranges, the internal structure provides cues for recognition and identification. The precise shape of the silhouette and detailed temperature distribution may be essential to an automatic target recognizer or other machine vision systems. - The Johnson criteria applies to an ensemble of targets. Specific target features are exploited for higher discrimination levels. Table 21-3 provides some features that may be exploited to identify a tank or a truck.3 These detailed features cannot be included in any model since they can vary significantly from vehicle-to- vehicle.
Table 21-3 INFRARED IMAGERY CUES USEFUL FOR IDENTIFICATION (From reference 3) M60/MBT HMMWV/TRUCK rear engine compartment four wheel six small wheels hot front grill three rollers hot hood rear drive wheel heated fenders two exhaust panels warm tires exhausts rearward cool windows Ratches et. al. said2: One of the main problems in performance modeling is to obtain an exact target signature ... The problem is further complicated by the fact that one target can have many different signatures under various operational and environmental conditions .... we cannot easily describe all the complex target characteristics corresponding to the real-world IR signature ... Therefore we utilize only the overall general features of the target such as size and average temperature difference from the background. The resulting predictions then correspond to the results of a large ensemble of experiments, However, the results of any specific experiment with its unique target signature will not necessarily come close to the predictions for the general ensemble. Within the real world, there is a probability associated with every parameter. The target AT is not one number but a range of values that follow a diurnal cycle. The atmospheric transmittance is not fixed but can change in minutes. There appears to be an overwhelming set of combinations and permutations. Therefore, a few representative target ATs and a few representative atmospheric conditions are selected and the performance range is calculated for these conditions. 21.10. SEARCH The static performance models assumed that the target was in the center of the field-of-view or at least the observer knew where to look. This, of course, is true for laboratory measurements. However, in the field, the target can be anywhere within the field-of-view. The observer must search for the target. The probability of detecting the target becomes
where Psearch(f) represents the conditional probability of detection after searching for t seconds. Given an infinite amount of time, Psearch<fE) —>1. Pstatic is simply the probability of detection used in FLIR92 (i.e., when TV50 = 0.75, Pstatic = 0.5). is p , (t) = 1 - e‘lmT л search V ) (21-9) where r is the mean detection time for an ensemble of observers and m is the number of sensor fields-of-view within the search field-of-regard. For most systems, m = 1. Experimental data suggest5 6 that (21-10) As indicated in Section 20.1.4., Clutter, clutter increases the difficulty in finding the target. The ACQUIRE documentation3 recommends using the two- dimensional detection levels listed in Table 21-4. Note that these definitions are slightly different than those listed in Table 20-7. Clutter affects detection in two ways. It increases the mean detection time and it increases the difficulty of statically detecting the target. Table 21-4 THRESHOLD CRITERIA FOR SEARCH (From reference 3) Clutter level Example ^50 Low Few or no target-like objects in the FOV 0.75 Moderate Intermittently distributed target-like objects in the FOV 1.5 High Numerous target-like objects in the FOV 3 Perhaps one short-coming of Equation 21 -10 is that the mean detection time is independent of the field-of-view. One would think that as the field-of- view increased, r would increase. This lack of dependency may simply be a result of the validation tests: When validating the search model, all of the systems had approximately the same field-of-view.5 Figure 21-13 provides Psearch(f) for two different search times. The long search times suggest that the systems would not be useful for military applications. But these times are realistic. Consider locating a bird in a tree. Some individuals can spot it immediately and other may never see it. The lower
limit of 1.7 s may be too restrictive. For conspicuous targets, detection may occur5 within 0.2 s suggesting that т < 0.005. Figure 21-13. Search probability for 3 different detection times. 21.11. REFERENCES 1. D. L. Shumaker and J. T. Wood, "Overview of Current IR Analysis Capabilities and Problem Areas," in Infrared Systems and Components II, H. M. Liaw, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 890, pp. 74-80(1988). 2. J. A. Ratches, W. R. Lawson, L. P. Obert, R. J. Bergemann, T. W. Cassidy, and J. M. Swenson, "Night Vision Laboratory Static Performance Model for Thermal Viewing Systems," ECOM Report ECOM-7043, pg. 2, Fort Monmouth, NJ (1975). 3. ACQUIRE Range Performance model for Target Acquisition Systems, Version 1, User's Guide, US Army CECOM NVESD document, Ft. Belvoir, VA (May 1995). 4. STADIUM FLIR is manufactured by AET, 1900 S. Harbor City Boulevard, Suite 115, Melbourne, FL 329012. It is available from JCD Publishing, 2932 Cove Trail, Winter Park, FL 32789, Tel: 407-629-5370. 5. J. D'Agostino, W. Lawson, and D. Wilson, "Concepts for Search and Detection Model Improvements," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing VIII, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3063, pp. 14-22 (1997). 6. J. A. Ratches, "Night Vision Modeling: Historical Perspective," in Infrared Imaging Systems: Design, Analysis, Modeling and Testing X, G. C. Holst, ed., SPIE Proceedings Vol. 3701, pp. 2-12 (1999).
EXERCISES 1. List six parameters that affect sensitivity. 2. List six parameters that affect resolution. 3. Figure 21-1 illustrates three different MRT curves. For each MRT, estimate range versus AT. That is, plot three curves similar to Figure 21-8. 4. For xatm_ave = 0.4, 0 6, and 0.8, plot \Tapp on Figure 21-3b. Estimate the recognition range for a three-meter target. 5. A customer wants a system with three fields-of-view. What ratios would you recommend? 6. Why do curves in Figure 21-10 have those particular shapes? 7. Show how high frequency jitter affects the MRT. Using this curve, explain the shape of Figure 21-11. 8. A staring array is resolution limited by the array Nyquist frequency. How does jitter affect range performance? 9. Explain the differences between the curves obtained in Exercise 7 and Exercise 8. 10. What MRT curves would create Figure 21-12? 11. Figure 21-6 suggests that the range stops abruptly at the Nyquist frequency. How would you explain this to a customer who is not knowledgeable in sampling theory?
APPENDIX F-NUMBER The radiometric equations (Chapter 3) were derived from plane geometry and paraxial ray approximations. For paraxial rays, the principal surfaces are assumed to be planes (Figure A-l). This representation is shown in most textbooks. Figure A-l. The optical system can be considered as a single lens. P, and P2 are the principal surfaces. The effective focal length is measured from the second principal plane. The clear aperture limits the amount of light reaching the detector. Lens design theory1 assumes that the principal surfaces are spherical: Every point on the surface is exactly a focal-length distance away (Figure A-2). Figure A-2. Principal planes are typically spherical.
When using solid angles, the image incidance is proportional to svffU) where LT is the maximum angle subtended by the lens. The numerical aperture is another measure of the energy collected by the optical system. When the image is in air (refractive index of unity) the numerical aperture is NA = sint/' = — = — 2 fl 2F (A-l) Since the largest angle is л/2, the smallest theoretical value for F is lZ>. This theoretical limit on F is not obvious from the radiometric equation. Not all optical systems have spherical principal planes. Notably, the cold shield on infrared detectors is planar (Figure 18-2). Here sin2(F) = 1/(4F2 + 1). Whether 1/(4F2 + 1) or 1/4F2 is used in the radiometric equations depends upon the f-number definition. If the analyst calculates the f-number from the effective lens diameter and focal length, then 1/(4F2 +1) should be used. If the optical designer supplies the f-number, then the analyst must consult with him to insure that the appropriate factor is used. For large f-numbers, the factors are approximately equal. REFERENCE 1 W. J. Smith, Modern Optical Engineering, second edition, pp. 142-145, McGraw-Hill, New York (1990).
A/D converter, 83 Absolute humidity, 252 Absorptance, 44 Absorption, 248 Absorptivity, 44 AC coupling, 115 Achromatize, 90 ACQUIRE, 412 Active targets, 315 Aerial reconnaissance, 202 Aerodynamic heating, 315 Aerosol MTF, 299 Aerosol scattering, 255 Afocal telescope, 32 Airborne reconnaissance, 29, 173 Airy disk, 31, 91, 200, 206, 241, 346 Aliased signal, 246 Aliasing, 73, 75, 227,351 Alphanumeric, 218 AMOP, 377 Amplifier noise, 325 AN/AAD-5, 174, 181 Anamorphic optic, 188 Anamorphic optics, 146, 200 Anti-aliasing filter, 85 Aperiodic transfer function, 51 Aperture correction, 132 Area-weighted target temperature, 306 Aspect ratio, 390, 398 Astronomical telescope, 31 Asymmetric sampling, 236 ATARS, 174 ATF, 51 Atmospheric constituents, 251 Atmospheric MTF, 289 Atmospheric transmittance, 3, 44, 248, 411, 420 Attenuation coefficient, 249 Automatic target recognizer, 142, 219, 382, 391,400, 424 Average modulation optimum phase, 377 Back-end, 141 Background limited, 27, 331 Bandgap engineered photodetector, 25 Battlefield obscurants, 286 Beer-Lambert law, 248 Bessel function, 96, 103 Bilinear interpolation, 156, 194, 239 Blackbody, 42 BLIP, 27, 331 Blockiness, 141, 157 Blur diameter, 49, 97, 200 Blur efficiency, 53, 204, 346 Bolometer, 25 Bomb blasts, 286 Boost, 34, 146, 222, 246, 344 Boost amplifier, 33, 133 Boundaiy layer, 263 Bow-tie, 174 Burning materiel, 286 Calibration points, 37 Camouflage, 313 Camouflage smokes, 286 Causality, 67 Cell area, 28 Central limit theorem, 104, 126 Characteristic frequency, 324 Charge transfer efficiency, 166 Charge well, 28,313,345 Charge-coupled device, 166 Classification, 386 Closely spaced objects, 200 Clouds, 311 Clutter, 317, 386, 397, 426 Cn2, 290 Coherence diameter, 293 Cold filter, 282 Cold shield efficiency, 337 Color corrected, 90 Commercial, 11 Common module, 10, 20, 30, 48, 83, 84, 88 Component/phenomenology model, 6 Concentration-pathlength product, 286 Contextual clue, 385 Contrast, 313 Contrast threshold, 118 Contrast transfer function, 355 Contrast transmittance, 261, 314 Convolution, 66 Cooled detectors, 24 Cooler mechanical, 24 thermoelectric, 24 CosineN0, 18, 46
Critical dimension, 237, 386 Critical frequency, 414 CRT, 135, 184 Cuer, 142, 219, 382 Cutoff frequency, 97 D*, 27,331 Dark current, 326 DAS, 97, 198 Decision tree, 391 Defocusing, 85 Delta T, 55, 304 Detection, 235, 386 Detection time, 426 Detector angular subtense, 97 Detector pitch, 80 Digital filters, 150 Digital scan converter, 33, 140 Dirac delta, 65 Discrimination, 385 Dither, 168, 194 Diurnal variations, 308 Double correlated sampling, 326 DSC, 33, 140 Dwell time, 21, 107, 110 Earthshine, 315 Effective-instantaneous-field-of-view, 204 EIFOV, 204 Electronically multiplexed, 33, 140 Electro-Optical Systems Atmospheric Effects Library, 286, 289 Electro-optically multiplexed, 33, 130 Emissivity, 44 Emittance, 44 EMUX, 33, 71, 140 Engine compartment, 315 Ensquared power, 53, 204, 346 EOMUX, 33, 130, 140 EOSAEL,286, 289 Equivalent bar pattern, 386 Equivalent pass band, 209, 220 Extended source, 40 Extinction, 248 Eye Response, 421 Eye-Iimked, 222 F tan(0), 23 Faceted model, 316 False resolution, 100 Far infrared, 3 Far-field, 293 FASCODE, 262 Fast mode, 294 Field-of-view, 417 Fill factor, 28, 168 Film, 185 Filter anti-alias, 85, 140 averaging, 154, 351 boost, 184 Butterworth, 114, 161 Chebychev, 161, 239 cold, 282, 335 cosine, 153 digital, 150, 184 finite impulse response, 152 ideal, 86, 114, 160 infinite impulse response, 152 low pass, 85, 113, 140 matched, 363 median, 351 noise, 141, 367 N-pole, 114 post-reconstruction, 141, 160, 239 rank-order, 351 reconstruction, 141 recursive, 350 tolerance, 151 tuned, 134 warm, 335 Finding, 385 FIR, 3 First generation, 36 Fixed pattern noise, 28, 37, 327, 373 Fixed pattern ratio, 328, 373 Flat field, 240 Flicker, 109 FUR, 29 FLIR90, 362 FLIR92, 362 ARG-1, 90 ARG-2, 94 ARG-3, 97 ARG-4, 146 ARG-5, 142 ARG-6, 149 ARG-7, 99 ARG-8, 104 ARG-9, 102 ARG-11, 113 ARG-12, 115 ARG-13, 114 ARG-14, 133
ARG-16, 116 Humidity, 249 ARG-17, 153 ARG-18, 153 Identification, 386 ARG-21, 135 IEDT, 377 ARG-22, 166 IIRS, 202 ARG-23, 159 Image intensifier, 387 ARG-24, 123 Image quality, 6, 217, 289 ARG-25, 119 Image reconstruction, 141, 150 ARG-31,365 Image rectification, 177 ARG-33, 322 Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale, 202 ARG-36, 366 Imaging tubes, 131 ARG-37,366 Impulse response, 67 ARG-38, 366 Indentification, 245 ARG-41, 366 Indium antimonide, 26 ARG-42, 366 Infrared search and track, 11 ARG-43, 366 Inhibitory, 118, 381 ARG-44, 365 Inhomogeneity equivalent temperature ARG-55, 365 difference, 377 default noise values, 371 In-phase, 149, 194 Flood illuminated, 45 Instantaneous-field-of-view, 97 Flux density, 348 Interlace, 21, 36, 100 f-number, 27, 46, 429 Interlace ratio, 107 f0, 324 International visibility code, 259 Focal plane array, 28 Interpolation, 194 Forward looking infrared, 29 IRLS, 173 FPN, 28, 327 IRST, 53, 204, 262 residual, 340 Isoplanatic, 71 Framerate, 107 Frictional heat, 315 Jaggies, 73 FO, 23 Jitter, 99, 188,421 Johnson criterion, 386, 417 Gain/level normalization, 18, 37 Johnson noise, 325 Gamma, 35, 120, 131 Johnson noise limited, 333 Gaussian, 120 JOLI, 333 Geometric distortion, 177 Gibbs phenomenon, 69 Kell factor, 150 Glare, 335 Kennedy scanner, 176 Glints Kirchkoffs law, 44 sun, 283 Koschmieder formula, 259 Gray scale, 197 GRD, 202 Lambertian source, 41 Ground coverage, 182 Landsat, 236 Ground resolution, 202 LED, 116 Ground resolved distance, 202 Light emitting diode, 30, 116 ** Limiting resolution, 200 Half-cycle, 136,403 Line scanner, 29, 173 Halftone, 157 Linear filter theory, 65 Haze, 250 Linear motion, 99 Head movement, 123, 370 Linear phase shift, 62 HITRAN, 250, 262 Line-of-sight stabilization, 421 Hot spot detection, 406 Lines/PH, 131 Human visual system MTF, 117 Line-to-line interpolation, 33, 107, 194, 349
Long exposure, 293 Long wavelength infrared, 3 LOWTRAN, 250, 262 LWIR, 3 Machine vision, 219, 382, 391, 400, 424 Macroscale variation, 289 Magnification, 37, 45, 106, 118 Man-portable, 30 Maritime environment, 249 Mass extinction coefficient, 286 Matched filter, 363 MDT, 365 Mean detection time, 426 Measurement resolution, 201 Median filter, 351 Mercury cadmium telluride, 26 Meteorological range, 253, 259, 260 MFTD, 385 Microphonics, 321, 359 Microscan, 84, 168, 194 Mid-wavelength infrared, 3 Mie theory, 255 Military, 11 Minimum detectable temperature, 8, 365 Minimum dimension, 386 Minimum findable temperature difference, 385 Minimum resolvable contrast, 8, 355, 380 Minimum resolvable temperature, 8, 355 Minimum temperature difference perceived, 377 Minor motion, 106 MODTRAN, 250, 262 Modulation, 63 Modulation transfer function, 62 Moire pattern, 73 Monitor, 35, 135, 157 Monte Carlo, 378 Motion, 98, 141, 166, 183, 369, 421 MRC, 355, 380 MRT, 123, 355 two-dimensional, 374 MTDP, 377 MTF, 62, 63 aberrated, 94 aerosol, 299 amplifier, 113 atmospheric, 289 averaging filter, 154 bilinear interpolation, 156, 194 boost, 133 Butterworth, 114, 135, 161 central obscuration, 92 charge transfer efficiency, 166, 189 Chebychev, 161 cosine filter, 153 CRT, 184 defocus, 95, 179 detector, 77, 97, 188 diffraction, 69, 90 digital filter, 153, 189 eye, 119, 189 film, 185 Gaussian, 94, 104, 126, 132, 135 human visual system, 117 ideal, 160 ideal filter, 114 interpolation, 189 lead circuit, 134 LED, 116, 189 linear motion, 99 microscan, 168 mirror motion, 106 monitor, 135, 189 motion, 188 non-limiting, 123, 370 N-pole, 114 optics, 188 phase, 149, 188 polychromatic, 90 random motion, 104 rectangular aperture, 177 sample and hold, 159 sample-scene phase, 149 sinsoidal motion, 102 SPRITE, 146 squeeze, 243, 376 TDI, 143 time constant, 113, 183 tuned circuit, 134 turbulence, 293 vertical, 188 vidicon, 131, 189 visual optics, 116, 189 Multiplexer noise, 328 Multispectral scanner system, 236 MWIR, 3 MWIR versus LWIR, 206, 251, 255, 274, 281,283, 345, 423 N50, 395 Nadir, 175 Narrow field-of-view, 417
National Imagery Interpretability Rating Scale, 202 Near-field, 293 NEBW, 322 NEDT, 340 NEI, 346 NEP, 331 Net lead, 134 Newton's relationship, 179 NURS, 202 Noise, 321 1/f, 322, 327 additive, 328 aliased, 352 amplifier, 325 dark cunent, 326 default values, 371 fixed pattern, 325, 327, 358 Johnson, 325 kTC, 328 microphonics, 359 multiplexer, 325, 328 multiplicative, 328 noise floor, 328 photon, 324, 335 quantization, 328 random, 358 readout, 325, 359 shot, 326 signal-dependent, 328 signal-independent, 328 streaks, 358 summary noise factors, 365 three-dimensional, 357 Noise equivalent bandwidth, 27, 322 Noise equivalent flux density, 320 Noise equivalent irradiance, 320 Noise equivalent power, 331 Noise equivalent temperature, 320 Noise equivalent temperature differential, 320 Noise filter, 141, 367 Noise floor, 328 Noise power spectral density, 322, 356 Noisy images, 123 Nonuniformity, 328, 339, 373 Nonuniformity correction, 37 Normalization, 57 NPSD, 322,351 NUC, 37 Numerical aperture, 179, 430 Nutation, 170 NVL model, 362, 371 NVTherm, 375,416 Nyquist frequency, 73, 375, 416 Obscurants, 286 Obscuration, 92 Operational model, 7 Optical shape factor, 53 Optical transfer function, 62 Optical transmittance, 45, 418 Optics, 17 Optimum design, 1 Orientation, 386 OTF, 62 Out-of-phase, 149 Oversample, 73 Overscan, 190 Overscan ratio, 107 Panoramic distortion, 177 Parralel scan, 21 PAS, 203 Path radiance, 261, 286, 312, 336 Peak-up, 194 PG720, 272 Phase shift, 71 Phase shift lens, 71 Phase transfer function, 62 Photoconductive, 24 Photometry, 57 Photon detector, 329 Photon noise, 324, 335 Photovoltaic, 25 Physically Reasonable infrared Signature Model, 316 Picture height, 131 Pitch, 80 Pixel, 400 Pixel angular subtense, 203 Pixels on target, 231, 400 Planck s blackbody radiation law, 42 Platinum silicide, 26 Point source, 49 Point source detection, 204 Point spread function, 67 Point visibility factor, 53, 204, 346 Poisson statistics, 326 Post-amplifier, 30, 113 Post-filter, 141 Post-reconstruction, 35, 141 Pre-amplifier, 30, 113 Pre-ft Iter, 141
Principal plane, 429 PRISM, 316 PTF, 62 Pushbroom, 29, 173 PVF, 53 Pyroelectric, 25, 147 Quantum well, 25, 26 Quantum well detector, 330, 332 R384, 272 R400, 272 Radiant exitance, 40 Radiant flux, 40 Radiant intensity, 40 Radiant sterance, 40 Radiometry, 40 Random motion, 104 Range performance probability, 414 Range prediction, 411 Rank-order, 351 Raster, 157 Raster scan, 20 Rayleigh criterion, 200, 274 Rayleigh scattering, 255 Recognition, 233, 245, 386 Reconstruction, 35, 141, 348 Recursive filter, 350 Reference frequency, 324 Reflectance, 44 Reflectivity, 44 Refractive index structure parameter, 290 Re-imager, 106 Relative humidity, 252 Residual FPN, 340 Resolution, 8, 231, 418 grayscale, 197 spatial, 197 spectral, 197 temporal, 197 Resolution-limited, 409 Resolved source, 45 Responsivity, 46, 328, 329 Richardson emission constant, 327 Ringing, 69, 134, 154, 246 Ripple, 161 R,, 326 Rotating polygon, 111 Sagittal MTF, 90, 188 Sample correlation factor, 366 Sample per detector dimension, 229 Sample-and-hold, 159 Sampled-data system, 75, 149, 226 Samples per dwell, 228 Sample-scene phase, 149, 231 Sampling, 73 Sampling effects, 415 Sampling frequency, 149 Scan bidirectional, 71 Scan conversion, 33, 130 Scan efficiency, 107 Scan time, 20 Scan velocity, 107, 110 Scanner, 20, 175, 183 axe-head, 175 Kennedy, 176 split aperture, 175 Scattering, 248 solar, 285 Schottky barrier diode, 25, 327, 330, 332 Scintillation, 289 Search, 425 Second generation, 36 Sensitivity, 8, 320, 418 Sensitivity-limited, 409 Serial scan, 20 Serial/parallel, 36 Shade's equivalent band pass, 220 Shift invariant, 71 Short exposure, 293 Short wavelength infrared, 3 Shrinking raster, 135 SIA, 359 Signal transfer function, 55 Signal-to-clutter ratio, 397 Signal-to-noise ratio, 220, 266, 280, 338, 370 Sine wave response, 116 Sinusoidal motion, 102 SiTF, 55 Situational awareness, 417 Sky, 314 Skyshine, 315 Sky-to-background ratio, 314 Slit response function, 201 Slow mode, 294 SNRth, 369 Solar absorption, 308 Solar heating, 308 Solar scattering, 285 Soot, 286 SPACE, 308
Sparrow criterion, 200 Spatial resolution, 197 Specific detectivity, 27, 331 Spectral Infrared Imaging of Targets and Scenes, 316 SPIRITS, 316 SPRITE, 11, 20, 26, 143, 146, 188, 204, 332 Spurious resolution, 100 Spurious response, 227, 237, 243 Square wave response, 355 Square-root integral, 224 Squeeze, 243, 376 Stabilization, 421 STADIUM FLIR, 378, 423 Staggered array, 36 Staggered elements, 82 Star detection, 406 Staring array, 36, 165, 342 Static model, 357 Step-stare, 168 Stratosphere, 262 Subjective quality factor, 221 Summary noise factor, 365 Sun glints, 283 Sun, Precipitation, Atmosphere, Clouds, Earth, 308 Sunshine, 315 Superposition, 65, 68 SWIR, 3 Synchronous integrator, 363 System cutoff, 80 System engineering, 2 System Image Analyzer, 359 System performance model, 7 Systeme Modulaire Thermique, 11 Tangential MTF, 90, 188 Taps, 153 Target discrimination, 317, 385, 409 Target signature, 12, 303 Target size, 421 Target size function, 53 Target transfer probability function, 394, 414 Targets, 424 TDI, 21, 143, 343,371 Telescope afocal, 106 Cassegrainian, 92 Temperature reference, 37 Thermal crossover, 308 Thermal derivative, 56 Thermal detector, 330, 333 Thermal detectors, 25 Thermal imaging band, 3 Thermal Imaging Common Module, 11 Thermal inertia, 308 Thermal Range Model, 377 Thermal structure metrics, 317 Thermal time constant, 147 Thermoelectric cooler, 24 Three-dimensional noise, 357 Throughput, 32 TICM, 11 Time delay, 71 Time-delay and integration, 21 T-number, 47 Tolerance, 151 Tolerancing, 378 Tradeoff, 409 Tradeoff analysis, 1 Transfer efficiency, 166 Transmittance, 44 contrast, 261 Transverse coherence length, 293 TRM 3, 377 Tropical, 251 TTPF, 394, 414 Turbulence, 249, 289 TV limiting resolution, 200 TV limiting response, 135 Two point, 37 Two-dimensional MRT, 374 Two-point correction, 340 Uncooled detectors, 24 Uncooled technology, 140 Undersample, 73 V/H ratio, 174 Validation, 13 Vertical profile, 293 Very long wave infrared, 3 Video bandwidth, 135 Video timing, 133 Vidicon, 33, 130 Visibility, 258 Visible, 46 Visual angle, 118 Visual range, 260 VLWIR, 3 Warm filter, 335 Washed out, 311
Water vapor, 249, 252 Wave-front error, 94, 179 Weather conditions, 267 Weather Effects on Tactical Target Acquisition, 268 WETTA, 268 Wide field-of-view, 417 Zoom, 118, 137, 156,417, 423